To all our customers
Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as
Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp.
The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were
transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003.
These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog and discrete devices,
and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.)
Accordingly, although Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors,
and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names
have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp.
Thank you for your understanding. Except for our corporate trademark,
logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the
contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration
to the contents of the document itself.
Renesas Technology Home Page: www.renesas.com
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Dept.
April 1, 2003
Renesas Technology Corp.
Hitachi Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8/3437 Series
H8/3437
HD6473437, HD6433437
H8/3436
HD6433436
H8/3434
HD6473434, HD6433434
H8/3437W
HD6433437W
H8/3436W
HD6433436W
H8/3434W
HD6433434W
H8/3437F-ZTAT™
HD64F3437
H8/3437SF-ZTAT™
HD64F3437S
H8/3434F-ZTAT™
HD64F3434
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-077F
Rev. 7.0
3/14/02
Hitachi, Ltd.
Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi’s or any third party’s
patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in
this document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party’s
rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information
contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you
have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or
use.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability.
However, contact Hitachi’s sales office before using the product in an application that
demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly
threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear
power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for
life support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi
particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics,
installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or
damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges,
consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and
employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi
product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of
the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document
without written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi’s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi
semiconductor products.
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
they are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Preface
The H8/3437 Series is a high-performance single-chip microcomputer that integrates peripheral
functions necessary for system configuration with an H8/300 CPU featuring a 32-bit internal
architecture as its core.
On-chip peripheral functions include ROM, RAM, four kinds of timers, a serial communication
interface (SCI), host interface (HIF), keyboard controller, D/A converter, A/D converter, and I/O
ports, enabling the H8/3437 Series to be used as a microcontroller for embedding in high-speed
control systems. Flash memory (F-ZTAT™*), PROM (ZTAT®*), and mask ROM are available
as on-chip ROM, enabling users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application
specifications and the demands of the transition from initial to full-fledged volume production.
Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
ZTAT is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
Intended Readership: This manual is intended for users undertaking the design of an application
system using a H8/3437 Series microcomputer. Readers using this manual
require a basic knowledge of electrical circuits, logic circuits, and
microcomputers.
Purpose:
The purpose of this manual is to give users an understanding of the
hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8/3437 Series.
Details of execution instructions can be found in the H8/300 Series
Programming Manual, which should be read in conjunction with the present
manual.
Using this Manual:
• For an overall understanding of the H8/3437 Series’ functions
Follow the Table of Contents. This manual is broadly divided into sections on the CPU, system
control functions, peripheral functions, and electrical characteristics.
• For a detailed understanding of CPU functions
Refer to the separate publication H8/300 Series Programming Manual.
• For a detailed description of a register’s function when the register name is known.
Information on addresses, bit contents, and initialization is summarized in Appendix B,
Internal I/O Register.
Note on bit notation: Bits are shown in high-to-low order from left to right.
Related Material:
The latest information is available at our Web Site. Please make sure that you
have the most up-to-date information available.
http://www.hitachisemiconductor.com/
User's Manuals on the H8/3437 Series:
Manual Title
ADE No.
H8/3437 Series Hardware Manual
This manual
H8/300 Series Programming Manual
ADE-602-025
Users manuals for development tools:
Manual Title
ADE No.
C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimized Linkage Editor User's Manual
ADE-702-247
Simulator Debugger Users Manual
ADE-702-282
Hitachi Debugging Interface Users Manual
ADE-702-161
Hitachi Embedded Workshop Users Manual
ADE-702-201
H8S, H8/300 Series Hitachi Embedded Workshop, Hitachi Debugging
Interface Users Manual
ADE-702-231
Notes on S-Mask Model
(Single-Power-Supply Specification)
There are two versions of the H8/3437F with on-chip flash memory: a dual-power-supply version
and a single-power-supply (S-mask) version. Points to be noted when using the H8/3437F singlepower-supply S-mask model are given below.
1.
Notes on Voltage Application
12 V must not be applied to the S-mask model (single-power-supply specification), as this may
permanently damage the device.
The flash memory programming power supply for the S-mask model (single-power-supply
specification) is VCC. The programming power supply for the dual-power-supply model is the FVPP
pin (12 V), but the single-power-supply model (S-mask model) does not have an FVPP pin.
Also, in boot mode, 12 V has to be applied to the MD1 pin in the dual-power-supply model, but 12
V application is not necessary in the single-power-supply model (S-mask model).
The maximum rating of the MD1 pin is VCC +0.3 V. Applying a voltage in excess of the
maximum rating will permanently damage the device.
Do not select the HN28F101 programmer setting for the S-mask model (single-power-supply
specification). If this setting is made by mistake, 12 V will be applied to the STBY pin, possibly
causing permanent damage to the device.
When using a PROM programmer to program the on-chip flash memory in the S-mask model
(single-power-supply specification), use a PROM programmer that supports Hitachi
microcomputer devices with 64-kbyte on-chip flash memory. Also, only use the specified socket
adapter. Using the wrong PROM programmer or socket adapter may damage the device.
The following PROM programmers support the S-mask model (single-power-supply
specification).
DATA I/O: UNISITE, 2900, 3900, etc.
Minato: 1892, 1891, 1890, etc.
2.
Product Type Names and Markings
Table 1 shows examples of product type names and markings for the H8/3437F (dual-powersupply specification) and H8/3437SF (single-power-supply specification), and the differences in
flash memory programming power supply.
Table 1
Differences in H8/3437F and H8/3437F S-Mask Model Markings
Product type name
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
HD64F3437F16/TF16
HD64F3437SF16/TF16
Sample markings
H8/3437
8M3
HD
64F3437F16
JAPAN
H8/3437
8M3
HD S
64F3437F16
JAPAN
“S” is printed above the type name
Flash memory
programming power
supply
VPP power supply
VCC power supply
(12.0 V ±0.6 V)
(5.0 V ±10%)
3.
Differences in S-Mask Model
Table 2 shows the differences between the H8/3437F (dual-power-supply specification) and
H8/3437SF (single-power-supply specification).
Table 2
Differences between H8/3437F and H8/3437F S-Mask Model
Item
Program/
erase voltage
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
12 V must be applied from off-chip
12 V application not required
VPP (12.0 V ±0.6 V)
VCC single-power-supply programming
VCC (5.0 V ±10%)
FV PP (FWE)
pin function
Dual function as FV PP power supply
and STBY function
No programming control pin
Programming
modes
•
•
Writer mode
On-board
Boot mode
User programming mode
(See section 21 for the use of these
modes)
Writer mode
(See section 21 for the use of these
modes)
Operating
•
modes allowing
•
on-board
•
programming
Boot mode
User programming mode
On-board
programming
unit
1-byte-unit programming
32-byte-unit programming
Programming
with PROM
programmer
Select Hitachi stand-alone flash
memory HN28F101 setting
Special programming mode setting
required. Use of PROM programmer
that supports Hitachi microcomputer
device types with 64-kbyte on-chip flash
memory. (128-byte-unit fast page
programming)
Boot mode
setting
method
Reset release after MD 1 = FVPP /STBY =
12 V application
Pin
Setting level
MD1 MD0
0
0
P92 P91 P90
1
1
1
Reset release after above pin settings
User program
mode setting
method
FV PP = 12 V application
Control bits set by software
Item
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
Programming
mode timing
RES
RES
MD0
MD1,
MD1
tMDS
tMDS
MD1
12 V
Min 0 µs
12 V
VPP
P92,
P91,
P90
tMDS: 4tcyc (min.)
tMDS: 4tcyc (min.)
Prewrite
processing
Required before erasing
Not required
Programming
processing
Block corresponding to programming
address must be set in EBR1/EBR2
registers before programming
Settings at left not required
EBR register
configuration
EBR1, EBR2
EBR2
Memory map
(block
configuration)
SB0 (128 bytes)
EB0 (1 kbyte)
SB1 (128 bytes)
EB1 (1 kbyte)
SB2 (128 bytes)
SB3 (128 bytes)
EB2 (1 kbyte)
SB4 (512 bytes)
EB3 (1 kbyte)
SB5 (1 kbyte)
SB6 (1 kbyte)
SB7 (1 kbyte)
LB0 (4 kbytes)
60 kbytes
EB4 (24 kbytes)
60 kbytes
LB1(8 kbytes)
LB2 (8 kbytes)
LB3 (8 kbytes)
LB4 (8 kbytes)
EB5 (16 kbytes)
LB5 (8 kbytes)
EB6 (12 kbytes)
LB6 (12 kbytes)
LB7 (2 kbytes)
Reset during
operation
Drive RES pin low for at least 10
system clock cycles (10ø). (RES pulse
width tRESW = min. 10tcyc)
EB7 (2 kbytes)
Drive RES pin low for at least 20
system clock cycles (20ø). (RES pulse
width tRESW = min. 20tcyc)
Item
MDCR
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
7
—
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
2
—
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
1
0
MDS1 MDS0
7
EXPE
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
2
—
1
0
MDS1 MDS0
Bit 7: Expanded mode enable (EXPE)
WSCR
7
6
5
RAMS RAM0 CKDBL
4
—
3
2
1
0
WMS1WMS0 WC1 WC0
7
—
6
—
5
4
3
2
1
0
CKDBL FLSHE WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0
Bit 4: Flash memory control register
enable (FLSHE)
FLMCR1
7
VPP
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
EV
2
PV
1
E
0
P
7
6
FWE SWE
5
—
4
—
3
EV
2
PV
1
E
0
P
Bit 7: Flash write enable (FWE)
Bit 6: Software write enable (SWE)
FLMCR2
—
7
FLER
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
2
—
1
ESU
0
PSU
Bit 7: Flash memory error (FLER)
Bit 1: Erase setup (ESU)
Bit 0: Program setup (PSU)
EBR1
EBR2
7
LB7
6
LB6
5
LB5
4
LB4
3
LB3
2
LB2
1
LB1
0
LB0
7
SB7
6
SB6
5
SB5
4
SB4
3
SB3
2
SB2
1
SB1
0
SB0
—
This address is not used.
7
EB7
6
EB6
5
EB5
4
EB4
3
EB3
2
EB2
1
EB1
0
EB0
Erase block register (EBR2)
EB0 (1 kbyte): H'0000 to H'03FF
EB1 (1 kbyte): H'0400 to H'07FF
EB2 (1 kbyte): H'0800 to H'0BFF
EB3 (1 kbyte): H'0C00 to H'0FFF
EB4 (28 kbytes): H'1000 to H'7FFF
EB5 (16 kbytes): H'8000 to H'BFFF
EB6 (12 kbytes): H'C000 to H'EF7F
EB7 (2 kbytes): H'EF00 to H'F77F
Details
concerning
flash memory
See section 20, ROM (Dual-PowerSupply 60-Kbyte Flash Memory
Version)
See section 21, ROM (Single-PowerSupply 60-Kbyte Flash Memory
Version)
Electrical
characteristics
See section 23, Electrical
Characteristics
See section 23, Electrical
Characteristics
Registers
See Appendix B, Registers
See Appendix B, Registers
Table 3 shows differences in the development environments of the H8/3437F (dual-power-supply
specification) and H8/3437SF (single-power-supply specification).
Table 3
H8/3437F and H8/3437F S-Mask Model Development Environments
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
Item
E6000
Emulator Hitachi
emulator unit
HS3008EPI60H
User
cable
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
Hitachi
HS3008EPI60H
Hitachi
HS3437ECH61H
Hitachi
HS3437ECH61H
Programming
socket adapter
Hitachi
HS3434ESHF1H
Minato
DATA I/O
Adapter board
Hitachi
HS0008EASF1H/2H
Hitachi
HS0008EASF3H
Windows interface
software
Hitachi
HS6400FWIW2SF
Hitachi
HS6400FWIW2SF
Table 4 shows differences in the pin settings of the H8/3437F (dual-power-supply specification)
and H8/3437SF (single-power-supply specification).
Table 4
H8/3437F and H8/3437F S-Mask Model Pin Settings
Item
Dual-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F
Boot mode
Single-Power-Supply Model:
H8/3437F S-Mask Model
H8/3437SF
H8/3437F
VCC (5 V)
12 V
8
FVPP/STBY
5
MD1
VSS
(GND)
User programming
mode
H8/3437F
12 V
8
FVPP/STBY
23
24
25
P92
P91
P90
5
6
MD1
MD0
There are no state transitions due to pin
states. Transitions should be implemented
by means of register settings by software.
List of Items Revised or Added for This Version
Section
Page
Notes on S-Mask Model
(Single-Power-Supply
Specification)
1.1 Overview
3
Item
Description
(see Manual for details)
Table 1 Differences in
H8/3437F and H8/3437F SMask Model Markings
Single-Power-Supply
Model: H8/3437F Smask model sample
marking amended
Table 1.1 Features
“Other features”
specifications amended.
4
H8/3434F-ZTAT ROM
amended in “Series
Lineup” specifications.
Notes 1 and 3 deleted
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
6
6.2.2 Oscillator Circuit
(H8/3437SF)
95 to 99
12.3.2 Asynchronous
Mode
264
Section 13 I 2C Bus
Interface [Option]
283
13.4 Application Notes
311 to 315
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement
(FP-100B, TFP-100B, Top
View)
Rotated 90 degrees to
the left, so that pin 1 is at
the bottom left.
Added
Figure 12.5 Sample Flowchart Flowchart amended.
for Transmitting Serial Data
Procedure 1 description
added.
Descriptions 1 and 3
deleted
• Note on Issuance of
Retransmission Start
Condition
Added
• Note on Issuance of Stop
Condition
• Countermeasure
• Additional Note
• Precautions when Clearing
the IRIC Flag when Using
the Wait Function
15.6 Application Notes
354
Figure 15.10 Example of
Analog Input Circuit
Figure amended
18.3.2 Notes on
Programming
373
(1) description added.
19.6.1 Writer Mode
Setting
418
Description amended
Section
Page
Item
Description
(see Manual for details)
21.1.7 Flash Memory
Operating Modes
504
Figure 21.2 Flash Memory
Related State Transitions
“SWE” amended to
“FLSHE”.
505
Figure 21.3 Boot Mode
Procedure 2 amended.
506
Figure 21.4 User
Procedure 2 amended.
Programming Mode (Example)
21.2.3 Erase Block
Register 2 (EBR2)
511
Bit 7 * and Note
description added.
21.3.1 Boot Mode
516
RAM Area Allocation in Boot
Mode
Description amended.
517
Figure 21.9 RAM Areas in
Boot Mode
Amended
Notes on Use of Boot Mode
5 description amended.
21.4 to 21.4.4
520 to 524
Entire description
amended.
21.5.1 Writer Mode
Setting
528
* and Note description
added.
21.5.3 Operation in
Writer Mode
538
Figure 21.22 Status Read
Mode Timing Waveforms
Note amended
Table 21.19 Status Read
Mode Return Codes
21.6 Flash Memory
540
Programming and Erasing
Precautions
541
(1) Program with the specified Description amended.
voltage and timing
Table 21.22 Area Accessed in FLSHE = 1 mode 2
Each Mode with FLSHE = 0
amended
and FLSHE = 1
22.3.5 Application Note
23 Electrical
Characteristics
2 description deleted.
553 to 604
Heading number
amended
579
23.3 Electrical
Characteristics
(H8/3437SF Low-Voltage
Version)
B.2 Function
665
Entire description newly
added.
I 2C Bus Control Register
Bit 2 to 0: I2C Transfer Rate
Select
Table amended and note
added
Contents
Section 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Overview............................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................
Pin Assignments and Functions .........................................................................................
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement ...................................................................................................
1.3.2 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
Section 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
CPU .....................................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
2.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
2.1.2 Address Space.......................................................................................................
2.1.3 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
2.2.1 General Registers..................................................................................................
2.2.2 Control Registers ..................................................................................................
2.2.3 Initial Register Values ..........................................................................................
Data Formats......................................................................................................................
2.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers .......................................................................
2.3.2 Memory Data Formats..........................................................................................
Addressing Modes..............................................................................................................
2.4.1 Addressing Mode..................................................................................................
2.4.2 Calculation of Effective Address..........................................................................
Instruction Set ....................................................................................................................
2.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions ....................................................................................
2.5.2 Arithmetic Operations ..........................................................................................
2.5.3 Logic Operations ..................................................................................................
2.5.4 Shift Operations ....................................................................................................
2.5.5 Bit Manipulations..................................................................................................
2.5.6 Branching Instructions..........................................................................................
2.5.7 System Control Instructions..................................................................................
2.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instruction............................................................................
CPU States .........................................................................................................................
2.6.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
2.6.2 Program Execution State ......................................................................................
2.6.3 Exception-Handling State .....................................................................................
2.6.4 Power-Down State ................................................................................................
Access Timing and Bus Cycle ...........................................................................................
2.7.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM and ROM)....................................................
2.7.2 Access to On-Chip Register Field and External Devices .....................................
1
1
5
6
6
7
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
28
32
34
36
37
37
39
44
46
47
49
49
50
50
51
51
51
53
i
Section 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Overview............................................................................................................................
3.1.1 Mode Selection .....................................................................................................
3.1.2 Mode and System Control Registers ....................................................................
System Control Register (SYSCR)....................................................................................
Mode Control Register (MDCR) .......................................................................................
Address Space Map in Each Operating Mode ...................................................................
Section 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5.2
5.3
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
ii
65
65
65
65
68
68
68
70
74
74
75
80
81
82
Wait-State Controller ..................................................................................... 83
Overview............................................................................................................................
5.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
5.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
5.1.3 Input/Output Pins..................................................................................................
5.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
Register Description...........................................................................................................
5.2.1 Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)...................................................................
Wait Modes........................................................................................................................
Section 6
57
57
57
58
60
61
Exception Handling ........................................................................................ 65
Overview............................................................................................................................
Reset...................................................................................................................................
4.2.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
4.2.2 Reset Sequence .....................................................................................................
4.2.3 Disabling of Interrupts after Reset........................................................................
Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
4.3.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
4.3.2 Interrupt-Related Registers ...................................................................................
4.3.3 External Interrupts ................................................................................................
4.3.4 Internal Interrupts..................................................................................................
4.3.5 Interrupt Handling ................................................................................................
4.3.6 Interrupt Response Time.......................................................................................
4.3.7 Precaution .............................................................................................................
Note on Stack Handling .....................................................................................................
Section 5
5.1
MCU Operating Modes and Address Space ........................................... 57
Clock Pulse Generator ...................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
6.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
6.1.2 Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)...................................................................
Oscillator Circuit................................................................................................................
6.2.1 Oscillator (Generic Device)..................................................................................
6.2.2 Oscillator Circuit (H8/3437S)...............................................................................
Duty Adjustment Circuit....................................................................................................
Prescaler .............................................................................................................................
83
83
83
84
84
84
84
86
89
89
89
90
91
91
95
99
99
Section 7
7.1
7.2
I/O Ports ............................................................................................................. 101
Overview............................................................................................................................
Port 1..................................................................................................................................
7.2.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.2.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................
7.2.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
7.3 Port 2..................................................................................................................................
7.3.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.3.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................
7.3.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
7.4 Port 3..................................................................................................................................
7.4.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.4.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................
7.4.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
7.5 Port 4..................................................................................................................................
7.5.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.5.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.5.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
7.6 Port 5..................................................................................................................................
7.6.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.6.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.6.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
7.7 Port 6..................................................................................................................................
7.7.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.7.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.7.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
7.7.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
7.8 Port 7..................................................................................................................................
7.8.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.8.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.9 Port 8..................................................................................................................................
7.9.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.9.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.9.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
7.10 Port 9..................................................................................................................................
7.10.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.10.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.10.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
7.11 Port A .................................................................................................................................
7.11.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
101
104
104
105
107
109
110
110
111
113
115
116
116
117
119
120
121
121
122
124
126
126
126
128
129
129
129
132
134
135
135
135
136
136
137
139
141
141
142
144
146
146
iii
7.11.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.11.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................
7.11.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
7.12 Port B .................................................................................................................................
7.12.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
7.12.2 Register Configuration and Descriptions..............................................................
7.12.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................
7.12.4 Input Pull-Up Transistors......................................................................................
146
148
149
150
150
151
153
154
Section 8
155
155
155
156
157
158
159
159
159
160
162
164
166
168
170
173
173
175
176
176
179
179
180
181
182
183
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
16-Bit Free-Running Timer .........................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
8.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
8.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
8.1.3 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
8.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
8.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) ...............................................................................
8.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)....................................
8.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD).................................................
8.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)...............................................................
8.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................
8.2.6 Timer Control Register (TCR)..............................................................................
8.2.7 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) ...............................................
CPU Interface.....................................................................................................................
Operation............................................................................................................................
8.4.1 FRC Increment Timing .........................................................................................
8.4.2 Output Compare Timing .......................................................................................
8.4.3 FRC Clear Timing ................................................................................................
8.4.4 Input Capture Timing............................................................................................
8.4.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting .........................................................
8.4.6 Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA and OCFB) ..........................
8.4.7 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) ..................................................................
Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
Sample Application............................................................................................................
Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
Section 9
9.1
iv
8-Bit Timers...................................................................................................... 189
Overview............................................................................................................................
9.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
9.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
9.1.3 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
9.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
189
189
190
191
191
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
9.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT).........................................................................................
9.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB) ..................................
9.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)..............................................................................
9.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................
9.2.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) .................................................................
Operation............................................................................................................................
9.3.1 TCNT Increment Timing......................................................................................
9.3.2 Compare-Match Timing........................................................................................
9.3.3 External Reset of TCNT .......................................................................................
9.3.4 Setting of TCSR Overflow Flag (OVF)................................................................
Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
Sample Application............................................................................................................
Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
9.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear ........................................................
9.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.................................................
9.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ......................................
9.6.4 Contention between Compare-Match A and Compare-Match B..........................
9.6.5 Increment Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source....................................
192
192
192
193
196
198
199
199
201
203
203
204
204
205
205
206
207
208
208
Section 10 PWM Timers .................................................................................................... 211
10.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
10.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
10.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
10.1.3 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
10.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
10.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
10.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT).........................................................................................
10.2.2 Duty Register (DTR) ............................................................................................
10.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)..............................................................................
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
10.3.1 Timer Increment....................................................................................................
10.3.2 PWM Operation....................................................................................................
10.4 Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
211
211
212
212
213
213
213
214
215
217
217
218
219
Section 11 Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 221
11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
11.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
11.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
11.1.3 Output Pin .............................................................................................................
11.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
11.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
11.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT).........................................................................................
221
221
222
222
223
223
223
v
11.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................
11.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR).......................................................................
11.2.4 Register Access.....................................................................................................
11.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
11.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode .........................................................................................
11.3.2 Interval Timer Mode .............................................................................................
11.3.3 Setting the Overflow Flag.....................................................................................
11.3.4 RESO Signal Output Timing................................................................................
11.4 Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
11.4.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.................................................
11.4.2 Changing the Clock Select Bits (CKS2 to CKS0)................................................
11.4.3 Recovery from Software Standby Mode ..............................................................
11.4.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................
11.4.5 System Reset by RESO Signal .............................................................................
11.4.6 Detection of Program Runaway............................................................................
224
226
226
227
227
228
228
229
230
230
230
230
231
231
231
Section 12 Serial Communication Interface ................................................................. 233
12.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
12.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
12.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
12.1.3 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
12.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
12.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
12.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ...............................................................................
12.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)...............................................................................
12.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)..............................................................................
12.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)..............................................................................
12.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................
12.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ..............................................................................
12.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) .................................................................................
12.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) .......................................................................................
12.2.9 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR).................................................................
12.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
12.3.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
12.3.2 Asynchronous Mode .............................................................................................
12.3.3 Synchronous Mode ...............................................................................................
12.4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
12.5 Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
233
233
234
235
236
237
237
237
237
238
238
240
243
246
257
258
258
260
273
279
279
Section 13 I2 C Bus Interface [Option] ........................................................................... 283
13.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 283
13.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 283
13.1.2 Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 285
vi
13.1.3 Input/Output Pins..................................................................................................
13.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
13.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
13.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)..............................................................................
13.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)..............................................................................
13.2.3 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)............................................................................
13.2.4 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)..........................................................................
13.2.5 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ............................................................................
13.2.6 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) .................................................................
13.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
13.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format .............................................................................................
13.3.2 Master Transmit Operation ...................................................................................
13.3.3 Master Receive Operation ....................................................................................
13.3.4 Slave Transmit Operation .....................................................................................
13.3.5 Slave Receive Operation.......................................................................................
13.3.6 IRIC Set Timing and SCL Control .......................................................................
13.3.7 Noise Canceler......................................................................................................
13.3.8 Sample Flowcharts................................................................................................
13.4 Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
286
286
287
287
287
288
289
292
296
297
297
298
300
302
304
305
306
307
311
Section 14 Host Interface ................................................................................................... 317
14.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
14.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
14.1.2 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
14.1.3 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
14.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
14.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR).......................................................................
14.2.2 Host Interface Control Register (HICR) ...............................................................
14.2.3 Input Data Register 1 (IDR1)................................................................................
14.2.4 Output Data Register 1 (ODR1) ...........................................................................
14.2.5 Status Register 1 (STR1) ......................................................................................
14.2.6 Input Data Register 2 (IDR2)................................................................................
14.2.7 Output Data Register 2 (ODR2) ...........................................................................
14.2.8 Status Register 2 (STR2) ......................................................................................
14.2.9 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) .................................................................
14.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
14.3.1 Host Interface Operation.......................................................................................
14.3.2 Control States........................................................................................................
14.3.3 A20 Gate.................................................................................................................
14.4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
14.4.1 IBF1, IBF2............................................................................................................
14.4.2 HIRQ11, HIRQ1, and HIRQ12.................................................................................
14.5 Application Note................................................................................................................
317
318
319
320
321
321
321
322
323
323
324
325
325
327
328
328
328
329
332
332
332
333
vii
Section 15 A/D Converter.................................................................................................. 335
15.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
15.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
15.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
15.1.3 Input Pins ..............................................................................................................
15.1.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
15.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)..............................................
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) .............................................................................
15.3 CPU Interface.....................................................................................................................
15.4 Operation............................................................................................................................
15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) .....................................................................................
15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)........................................................................................
15.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ..........................................................
15.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing..............................................................................
15.5 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
15.6 Application Notes ..............................................................................................................
335
335
336
337
338
339
339
340
342
342
344
344
346
348
349
350
350
Section 16 D/A Converter.................................................................................................. 355
16.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
16.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................
16.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
16.1.3 Input and Output Pins ...........................................................................................
16.1.4 Register Configuration............................................................................................
16.2 Register Descriptions .........................................................................................................
16.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0, DADR1)..................................................
16.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR) .............................................................................
16.3 Operation............................................................................................................................
355
355
356
357
357
358
358
358
360
Section 17 RAM.................................................................................................................... 361
17.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
17.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
17.1.2 RAM Enable Bit (RAME) in System Control Register (SYSCR) .......................
17.2 Operation............................................................................................................................
17.2.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1 and 2) .......................................................................
17.2.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 3).................................................................................
361
361
362
362
362
362
Section 18 ROM (Mask ROM Version/ZTAT Version) .......................................... 363
18.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
18.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
18.2 Writer Mode (H8/3437, H8/3434) .....................................................................................
18.2.1 Writer Mode Setup................................................................................................
viii
363
364
364
364
18.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments and Memory Map............................................
18.3 PROM Programming .........................................................................................................
18.3.1 Programming and Verification .............................................................................
18.3.2 Notes on Programming .........................................................................................
18.3.3 Reliability of Programmed Data ...........................................................................
365
368
368
373
374
Section 19 ROM (32-kbyte Dual-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version) ......... 375
19.1 Flash Memory Overview ...................................................................................................
19.1.1 Flash Memory Operating Principle ......................................................................
19.1.2 Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space ......................................
19.1.3 Features.................................................................................................................
19.1.4 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
19.1.5 Input/Output Pins..................................................................................................
19.1.6 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
19.2 Flash Memory Register Descriptions.................................................................................
19.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR) ..........................................................
19.2.2 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................
19.2.3 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................
19.2.4 Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)...................................................................
19.3 On-Board Programming Modes.........................................................................................
19.3.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................
19.3.2 User Programming Mode......................................................................................
19.4 Programming and Erasing Flash Memory .........................................................................
19.4.1 Program Mode ......................................................................................................
19.4.2 Program-Verify Mode ..........................................................................................
19.4.3 Programming Flowchart and Sample Program.....................................................
19.4.4 Erase Mode ...........................................................................................................
19.4.5 Erase-Verify Mode................................................................................................
19.4.6 Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program ..............................................................
19.4.7 Prewrite Verify Mode ...........................................................................................
19.4.8 Protect Modes .......................................................................................................
19.4.9 Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing..................
19.5 Flash Memory Emulation by RAM ...................................................................................
19.6 Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3434F) ..........................................................................
19.6.1 Writer Mode Setting .............................................................................................
19.6.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map........................................................................
19.6.3 Operation in Writer Mode.....................................................................................
19.7 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions......................................................
375
375
376
376
377
378
378
379
379
380
381
382
385
386
392
394
394
395
396
398
398
399
412
412
413
415
418
418
418
420
428
Section 20 ROM (60-kbyte Dual-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version) ......... 437
20.1 Flash Memory Overview ................................................................................................... 437
20.1.1 Flash Memory Operating Principle ...................................................................... 437
20.1.2 Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space ...................................... 438
ix
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.1.3 Features .................................................................................................................
20.1.4 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
20.1.5 Input/Output Pins..................................................................................................
20.1.6 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
Flash Memory Register Descriptions.................................................................................
20.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR) ..........................................................
20.2.2 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................
20.2.3 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................
20.2.4 Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)...................................................................
On-Board Programming Modes.........................................................................................
20.3.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................
20.3.2 User Programming Mode......................................................................................
Programming and Erasing Flash Memory .........................................................................
20.4.1 Program Mode ......................................................................................................
20.4.2 Program-Verify Mode ..........................................................................................
20.4.3 Programming Flowchart and Sample Program.....................................................
20.4.4 Erase Mode ...........................................................................................................
20.4.5 Erase-Verify Mode................................................................................................
20.4.6 Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program ..............................................................
20.4.7 Prewrite Verify Mode ...........................................................................................
20.4.8 Protect Modes .......................................................................................................
20.4.9 Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing..................
Flash Memory Emulation by RAM ...................................................................................
Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3437F) ..........................................................................
20.6.1 Writer Mode Setting .............................................................................................
20.6.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map........................................................................
20.6.3 Operation in Writer Mode ....................................................................................
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions......................................................
438
439
440
440
441
441
442
443
444
447
448
454
456
456
457
458
460
460
461
474
474
475
477
480
480
480
482
490
Section 21 ROM (60-kbyte Single-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version)...... 499
21.1 Flash Memory Overview ...................................................................................................
21.1.1 Mode Pin Settings and ROM Space......................................................................
21.1.2 Features .................................................................................................................
21.1.3 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
21.1.4 Input/Output Pins..................................................................................................
21.1.5 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
21.1.6 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ..........................................................................
21.1.7 Flash Memory Operating Modes ..........................................................................
21.2 Flash Memory Register Descriptions.................................................................................
21.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) .....................................................
21.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) .....................................................
21.2.3 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................
21.2.4 Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)...................................................................
x
499
499
500
501
502
502
503
504
508
508
510
511
512
21.3 On-Board Programming Modes.........................................................................................
21.3.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................
21.3.2 User Programming Mode......................................................................................
21.4 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory................................................................................
21.4.1 Program Mode ......................................................................................................
21.4.2 Program-Verify Mode ..........................................................................................
21.4.3 Erase Mode ...........................................................................................................
21.4.4 Erase-Verify Mode................................................................................................
21.4.5 Protect Modes .......................................................................................................
21.4.6 Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing..................
21.5 Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3437SF) ........................................................................
21.5.1 Writer Mode Setting .............................................................................................
21.5.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map........................................................................
21.5.3 Operation in Writer Mode ....................................................................................
21.6 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions......................................................
513
513
519
520
520
521
523
523
525
527
528
528
528
529
540
Section 22 Power-Down State .......................................................................................... 543
22.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
22.1.1 System Control Register (SYSCR).......................................................................
22.2 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................
22.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode......................................................................................
22.2.2 Exit from Sleep Mode...........................................................................................
22.3 Software Standby Mode.....................................................................................................
22.3.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode..................................................................
22.3.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode .......................................................................
22.3.3 Clock Settling Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode................................
22.3.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode ..................................................
22.3.5 Application Note...................................................................................................
22.4 Hardware Standby Mode ...................................................................................................
22.4.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode.................................................................
22.4.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode .............................................................
22.4.3 Timing Relationships............................................................................................
543
544
546
546
546
547
547
547
548
549
550
551
551
551
552
Section 23 Electrical Specifications................................................................................ 553
23.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ..............................................................................................
23.2 Electrical Characteristics....................................................................................................
23.2.1 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................
23.2.2 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................
23.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics..............................................................................
23.2.4 D/A Converter Characteristics..............................................................................
23.2.5 Flash Memory Characteristics (H8/3437SF Only) ...............................................
23.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (H8/3437SF Low-Voltage Version) ....................................
23.4 Electrical Characteristics (H8/3437SF Low-Voltage Version)..........................................
553
554
554
567
575
576
577
579
580
xi
23.4.1 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................
23.4.2 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................
23.4.3 A/D Converter Characteristics..............................................................................
23.4.4 D/A Converter Characteristics..............................................................................
23.4.5 Flash Memory Characteristics ..............................................................................
23.5 MCU Operational Timing..................................................................................................
23.5.1 Bus Timing ...........................................................................................................
23.5.2 Control Signal Timing ..........................................................................................
23.5.3 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing......................................................................
23.5.4 8-Bit Timer Timing...............................................................................................
23.5.5 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing................................................................
23.5.6 Serial Communication Interface Timing ..............................................................
23.5.7 I/O Port Timing.....................................................................................................
23.5.8 Host Interface Timing ...........................................................................................
23.5.9 I2C Bus Timing (Option) ......................................................................................
23.5.10 Reset Output Timing.............................................................................................
23.5.11 External Clock Output Timing..............................................................................
580
585
591
592
593
595
595
596
598
599
600
601
602
602
603
604
604
Appendix A CPU Instruction Set.................................................................................... 605
A.1
A.2
A.3
Instruction Set List ............................................................................................................. 605
Operation Code Map.......................................................................................................... 613
Number of States Required for Execution ......................................................................... 615
Appendix B Internal I/O Register ................................................................................... 621
B.1
B.2
Addresses ........................................................................................................................... 621
Function ............................................................................................................................. 626
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams .......................................................................... 684
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
C.10
C.11
Port 1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................
Port 2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................
Port 3 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................
Port 4 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port 5 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port 6 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port 7 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port 8 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port 9 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................
Port A Block Diagram........................................................................................................
Port B Block Diagram........................................................................................................
684
685
686
687
691
694
698
699
705
711
712
Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State ..................................................... 713
xii
Appendix E
Timing of Transition to and Recovery
from Hardware Standby Mode................................................................ 715
Appendix F
Option Lists .................................................................................................. 716
Appendix G Product Code Lineup ................................................................................. 718
Appendix H Package Dimensions .................................................................................. 720
xiii
xiv
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series of single-chip microcomputers features an H8/300 CPU core and a
complement of on-chip supporting modules implementing a variety of system functions.
The H8/300 CPU is a high-speed processor with an architecture featuring powerful bitmanipulation instructions, ideally suited for realtime control applications. The on-chip supporting
modules implement peripheral functions needed in system configurations. These include ROM,
RAM, four types of timers (a 16-bit free-running timer, 8-bit timers, PWM timers, and a watchdog
timer), a serial communication interface (SCI), an I2C bus interface [option], a host interface
(HIF), an A/D converter, a D/A converter, and I/O ports.
The H8/3437 Series can operate in single-chip mode or in two expanded modes, depending on the
requirements of the application.
Besides the mask-ROM versions of the H8/3437 Series, there are ZTAT™*1 versions with on-chip
PROM, and an F-ZTAT™*2 version with on-chip flash memory. The F-ZTAT™ version can be
programmed or reprogrammed on-board in application systems.
Notes: *1 ZTAT™ (zero turn-around time) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
*2 F-ZTAT™ (flexible-ZTAT) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
The guaranteed voltage range is different for the F-ZTAT LH version.
VCC
LH Version
General Version
3.0 V to 5.5 V
2.7 V to 5.5 V
AVCC
Table 1.1 lists the features of the H8/3437 Series.
1
Table 1.1
Features
Item
Specification
CPU
Two-way general register configuration
• Eight 16-bit registers, or
• Sixteen 8-bit registers
High-speed operation
• Maximum clock rate (ø clock): 16 MHz at 5 V, 12 MHz at 4 V or 10 MHz
at 3 V
• 8- or 16-bit register-register add/subtract: 125 ns (16 MHz), 167 ns
(12 MHz), 200 ns (10 MHz)
• 8 × 8-bit multiply: 875 ns (16 MHz), 1167 ns (12 MHz), 1400 ns (10 MHz)
• 16 ÷ 8-bit divide: 875 ns (16 MHz), 1167 ns (12 MHz), 1400 ns (10 MHz)
Streamlined, concise instruction set
• Instruction length: 2 or 4 bytes
• Register-register arithmetic and logic operations
• MOV instruction for data transfer between registers and memory
Instruction set features
• Multiply instruction (8 bits × 8 bits)
• Divide instruction (16 bits ÷ 8 bits)
• Bit-accumulator instructions
• Register-indirect specification of bit positions
Memory
•
•
•
H8/3437: 60-kbyte ROM; 2-kbyte RAM
H8/3436: 48-kbyte ROM; 2-kbyte RAM
H8/3434: 32-kbyte ROM; 1-kbyte RAM
16-bit free-running
timer (1 channel)
•
•
•
One 16-bit free-running counter (can also count external events)
Two output-compare lines
Four input capture lines (can be buffered)
8-bit timer
(2 channels)
Each channel has
• One 8-bit up-counter (can also count external events)
• Two time constant registers
PWM timer
(2 channels)
•
•
Duty cycle can be set from 0 to 100%
Resolution: 1/250
Watchdog timer
(WDT) (1 channel)
•
•
Overflow can generate a reset or NMI interrupt
Also usable as interval timer
2
Item
Specification
Serial communication •
interface (SCI)
•
(2 channels)
•
Asynchronous or synchronous mode (selectable)
Full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously
On-chip baud rate generator
I 2C bus interface
(1 channel) [option]
•
•
Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface
Includes single master mode and slave mode
Host interface (HIF)
•
•
•
•
8-bit host interface port
Three host interrupt requests (HIRQ 1, HIRQ11, HIRQ12)
Regular and fast A 20 gate output
Two register sets, each with two data registers and a status register
Keyboard controller
•
Controls a matrix-scan keyboard by providing a keyboard scan function
with wake-up interrupts and sense ports
A/D converter
•
•
•
•
10-bit resolution
Eight channels: single or scan mode (selectable)
Start of A/D conversion can be externally triggered
Sample-and-hold function
D/A converter
•
•
8-bit resolution
Two channels
I/O ports
•
•
74 input/output lines (16 of which can drive LEDs)
8 input-only lines
Interrupts
•
•
Nine external interrupt lines: NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7
26 on-chip interrupt sources
Wait control
•
Three selectable wait modes
Operating modes
•
•
•
Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled (mode 1)
Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled (mode 1)
Single-chip mode (mode 3)
Power-down modes
•
•
•
Sleep mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
Other features
•
On-chip clock pulse generator
3
Item
Specification
Series lineup
Part Number
Product
Name
5-V Version (16 MHz)
4-V Version (12 MHz)
3-V Version (10 MHz)
Package
ROM
H8/3437
F-ZTAT
HD64F3437F16
HD64F3437F16
HD64F3437FLH16
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
Flash memory
HD64F3437FLH16
H8/3437
ZTAT
H8/3437
H8/3436
H8/3434
F-ZTAT
H8/3434
ZTAT
H8/3434
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
(dual-powersupply product)
HD64F3437TF16
HD64F3437TF16
HD64F3437TFLH16
HD64F3437TFLH16
HD64F3437SF16
HD64F3437SF16
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
Flash memory
(single-power-
HD64F3437STF16
HD64F3437STF16
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
supply product)
HD6473437F16
HD6473437F16
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
PROM
HD6473437TF16
HD6473437TF16
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
HD6433437F16
HD6433437F12
HD6433437VF10
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
HD6433437TF16
HD6433437TF12
HD6433437VTF10
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
HD6433436F16
HD6433436F12
HD6433436VF10
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
HD6433436TF16
HD6433436TF12
HD6433436VTF10
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
HD64F3434F16
HD64F3434F16
HD64F3434FLH16
HD64F3434FLH16
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
HD64F3434TF16
HD64F3434TF16
HD64F3434TFLH16
HD64F3434TFLH16
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
HD6473434F16
HD6473434F16
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
HD6473434TF16
HD6473434TF16
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
HD6433434F16
HD6433434F12
HD6433434VF10
100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
HD6433434TF16
HD6433434TF12
HD6433434VTF10
100-pin TQFP
(TFP-100B)
Mask ROM
Mask ROM
Flash memory
(dual-powersupply product)
PROM
Mask ROM
The I2C bus interface is an available option. Please note the following points regarding this option.
In mask ROM versions, chips featuring the I2C bus interface include a W in the part number.
Example: HD6433437WTF, HD6433434WF, etc.
4
1.2
Block Diagram
10-bit
A/D converter
(8 channels)
PWM timer
(2 channels)
8-bit
D/A converter
(2 channels)
Port 7
P30/D0/HDB0
P31/D1/HDB1
P32/D2/HDB2
P33/D3/HDB3
P34/D4/HDB4
P35/D5/HDB5
P36/D6/HDB6
P37/D7/HDB7
P80/HA0
P81/GA20
P82/CS1
P83/IOR
P84/TxD1/IRQ3/IOW
P85/RxD1/IRQ4/CS2
P86/SCK1/IRQ5/SCL
Port 5
P50/TxD0
P51/RxD0
P52/SCK0
Port 1
Port 4
Port B
8-bit timer
(2 channels)
Port 9
Serial
communication
interface (2 channels)
I2C bus interface
(1 channel) [option]
P90/ADTRG/ECS2/IRQ2
P91/IRQ1/EIOW
P92/IRQ0
P93/RD
P94/WR
P95/AS
P96/ø
P97/WAIT/SDA
Port 3
16-bit
free-running
timer
PB0/XDB0
PB1/XDB1
PB2/XDB2
PB3/XDB3
PB4/XDB4
PB5/XDB5
PB6/XDB6
PB7/XDB7
Port 8
Host
interface
Address bus
RESO
RES
STBY
NMI
MD0
MD1
VCCB
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
Data bus (high)
XTAL
EXTAL
Clock pulse
generator
Watchdog
timer
P77/AN7/DA1
P76/AN6/DA0
P75/AN5
P74/AN4
P73/AN3
P72/AN2
P71/AN1
P70/AN0
AVref
AVCC
AVSS
KEYIN0/P60/FTCI
KEYIN1/P61/FTOA
KEYIN2/P62/FTIA
KEYIN3/P63/FTIB
KEYIN4/P64/FTIC
KEYIN5/P65/FTID
KEYIN6/P66/FTOB/IRQ6
KEYIN7/P67/IRQ7
ROM
(flash memory,
RAM
PROM, or
H8/3437: 2 kbytes
mask ROM)
H8/3436:
2 kbytes
H8/3437: 60 kbytes
H8/3436: 48 kbytes H8/3434: 1 kbyte
H8/3434: 32 kbytes
Port 2
P20/A8
P21/A9
P22/A10
P23/A11
P24/A12
P25/A13
P26/A14
P27/A15
Data bus (low)
Port 6
P10/A0
P11/A1
P12/A2
P13/A3
P14/A4
P15/A5
P16/A6
P17/A7
CPU
H8/300
P40/TMCI0
P41/TMO0
P42/TMRI0
HIRQ11/P43/TMCI1
HIRQ1/P44/TMO1
HIRQ12/P45/TMRI1
P46/PW0
P47/PW1
PA0/KEYIN8
PA1/KEYIN9
PA2/KEYIN10
PA3/KEYIN11
PA4/KEYIN12
PA5/KEYIN13
PA6/KEYIN14
PA7/KEYIN15
Port A
Figure 1.1 shows a block diagram of the H8/3437 Series.
Memory Sizes
ROM
RAM
H8/3437
60 kbytes
2 kbytes
H8/3436
48 kbytes
2 kbytes
H8/3434
32 kbytes
1 kbyte
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram
5
1.3
Pin Assignments and Functions
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
76
50
77
49
78
48
79
47
80
46
81
45
82
44
83
43
84
42
85
41
86
40
87
39
FP-100B, TFP-100B
(top view)
88
89
38
37
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
P41/TMO0
P40/TMCI0
PA0/KEYIN8
PA1/KEYIN9
AVSS
P77/AN7/DA1
P76/AN6/DA0
P75/AN5
P74/AN4
P73/AN3
P72/AN2
P71/AN1
P70/AN0
AVCC
AVref
P67/KEYIN7/IRQ7
P66/KEYIN6/IRQ6/FTOB
P65/KEYIN5/FTID
P64/KEYIN4/FTIC
PA2/KEYIN10
PA3/KEYIN11
P63/KEYIN3/FTIB
P62/KEYIN2/FTIA
P61/KEYIN1/FTOA
P60/KEYIN0/FTCI
RES
XTAL
EXTAL
VCCB
MD1
MD0
NMI
FVPP*/STBY
VCC
KEYIN15/PA7
KEYIN14/PA6
SCK0/P52
RxD0/P51
TxD0/P50
VSS
SDA/WAIT/P97
ø/P96
AS/P95
WR/P94
KEYIN13/PA5
KEYIN12/PA4
RD/P93
IRQ0/P92
EIOW/IRQ1/P91
ADTRG/ECS2/IRQ2/P90
13
26
12
27
100
11
28
99
10
29
98
9
30
97
8
31
96
7
32
95
6
33
94
5
34
93
4
35
92
3
36
91
2
90
1
A3/P13
A2/P12
A1/P11
A0/P10
XDB3/PB3
XDB2/PB2
D0/HDB0/P30
D1/HDB1/P31
D2/HDB2/P32
D3/HDB3/P33
D4/HDB4/P34
D5/HDB5/P35
D6/HDB6/P36
D7/HDB7/P37
XDB1/PB1
XDB0/PB0
VSS
HA0/P80
GA20/P81
CS1/P82
IOR/P83
IOW/TxD1/IRQ3/P84
CS2/RxD1/IRQ4/P85
SCL/SCK1/IRQ5/P86
RESO
74
75
P14/A4
P15/A5
P16/A6
P17/A7
VSS
VSS
PB4/XDB4
PB5/XDB5
P20/A8
P21/A9
P22/A10
P23/A11
P24/A12
P25/A13
P26/A14
P27/A15
VCC
PB6/XDB6
PB7/XDB7
P47/PW1
P46/PW0
P45/TMRI1/HIRQ12
P44/TMO1/HIRQ1
P43/TMCI1/HIRQ11
P42/TMRI0
Figure 1.2 shows the pin arrangement of the FP-100B and TFP-100B packages.
Note: * In the S-mask model (single-power-supply model), pin 8 functions only as the STBY pin.
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement (FP-100B, TFP-100B, Top View)
6
1.3.2
Pin Functions
Pin Assignments in Each Operating Mode: Table 1.2 lists the assignments of the pins of the
FP-100B and TFP-100B packages in each operating mode.
Table 1.2
Pin Assignments in Each Operating Mode
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Mode 1
Mode 2
HIF Disabled
HIF Enabled
Flash
EPROM Memory
Writer
Writer
Mode
Mode
1
RES
RES
RES
RES
VPP
RES
2
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
NC
XTAL
3
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
NC
EXTAL
4
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
VCC
VCC
5
MD1
MD1
MD1
MD1
VSS
VSS
6
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD0
VSS
VSS
7
NMI
NMI
NMI
NMI
EA9
FA 9
8
STBY
STBY/FVPP
STBY/FVPP
STBY/FVPP
VSS
FV PP
9
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
10
PA7/KEYIN15
PA7/KEYIN15
PA7/KEYIN15
PA7/KEYIN15
NC
NC
11
PA6/KEYIN14
PA6/KEYIN14
PA6/KEYIN14
PA6/KEYIN14
NC
NC
12
P52/SCK0
P52/SCK0
P52/SCK0
P52/SCK0
NC
NC
13
P51/RxD0
P51/RxD0
P51/RxD0
P51/RxD0
NC
NC
14
P50/TxD0
P50/TxD0
P50/TxD0
P50/TxD0
NC
NC
15
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
16
P97/WAIT/SDA P97/WAIT/SDA P97/SDA
P97/SDA
NC
VCC
17
ø
ø
P96/ø
P96/ø
NC
NC
18
AS
AS
P95
P95
NC
FA 16
19
WR
WR
P94
P94
NC
FA 15
20
PA5/KEYIN13
PA5/KEYIN13
PA5/KEYIN13
PA5/KEYIN13
NC
NC
21
PA4/KEYIN12
PA4/KEYIN12
PA4/KEYIN12
PA4/KEYIN12
NC
NC
22
RD
RD
P93
P93
NC
WE
23
P92/IRQ0
P92/IRQ0
P92/IRQ0
P92/IRQ0
PGM
VSS
Pin No.
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 3
7
Pin No.
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 3
Mode 1
Mode 2
HIF Disabled
HIF Enabled
Flash
EPROM Memory
Writer
Writer
Mode
Mode
24
P91/IRQ1 when HIF is disabled or STAC bit is 0 in STCR;
EIOW/IRQ1 when HIF is enabled and STAC bit is 1 in STCR
EA15
VCC
25
P90/IRQ2/ADTRG when HIF is disabled or STAC bit is 0 in
STCR; ECS2/IRQ2 when HIF is enabled and STAC bit is 1 in
STCR
EA16
VCC
26
P60/FTCI/
KEYIN0
P60/FTCI/
KEYIN0
P60/FTCI/
KEYIN0
P60/FTCI/
KEYIN0
NC
NC
27
P61/FTOA/
KEYIN1
P61/FTOA/
KEYIN1
P61/FTOA/
KEYIN1
P61/FTOA/
KEYIN1
NC
NC
28
P62/FTIA/
KEYIN2
P62/FTIA/
KEYIN2
P62/FTIA/
KEYIN2
P62/FTIA/
KEYIN2
NC
NC
29
P63/FTIB/
KEYIN3
P63/FTIB/
KEYIN3
P63/FTIB/
KEYIN3
P63/FTIB/
KEYIN3
VCC
VCC
30
PA3/KEYIN11
PA3/KEYIN11
PA3/KEYIN11
PA3/KEYIN11
NC
NC
31
PA2/KEYIN10
PA2/KEYIN10
PA2/KEYIN10
PA2/KEYIN10
NC
NC
32
P64/FTIC/
KEYIN4
P64/FTIC/
KEYIN4
P64/FTIC/
KEYIN4
P64/FTIC/
KEYIN4
VCC
VCC
33
P65/FTID/
KEYIN5
P65/FTID/
KEYIN5
P65/FTID/
KEYIN5
P65/FTID/
KEYIN5
NC
NC
34
P66/FTOB/
IRQ6/KEYIN6
P66/FTOB/
IRQ6/KEYIN6
P66/FTOB/
IRQ6/KEYIN6
P66/FTOB/
IRQ6/KEYIN6
NC
NC
35
P67/IRQ7/
KEYIN7
P67/IRQ7/
KEYIN7
P67/IRQ7/
KEYIN7
P67/IRQ7/
KEYIN7
NC
VSS
36
AVref
AVref
AVref
AVref
VCC
VSS
37
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
VCC
VCC
38
P70/AN0
P70/AN0
P70/AN0
P70/AN0
NC
NC
39
P71/AN1
P71/AN1
P71/AN1
P71/AN1
NC
NC
40
P72/AN2
P72/AN2
P72/AN2
P72/AN2
NC
NC
41
P73/AN3
P73/AN3
P73/AN3
P73/AN3
NC
NC
42
P74/AN4
P74/AN4
P74/AN4
P74/AN4
NC
NC
43
P75/AN5
P75/AN5
P75/AN5
P75/AN5
NC
NC
44
P76/AN6/DA0
P76/AN6/DA0
P76/AN6/DA0
P76/AN6/DA0
NC
NC
8
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Mode 1
Mode 2
HIF Disabled
HIF Enabled
Flash
EPROM Memory
Writer
Writer
Mode
Mode
45
P77/AN7/DA1
P77/AN7/DA1
P77/AN7/DA1
P77/AN7/DA1
NC
NC
46
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
VSS
VSS
47
PA1/KEYIN9
PA1/KEYIN9
PA1/KEYIN9
PA1/KEYIN9
NC
NC
48
PA0/KEYIN8
PA0/KEYIN8
PA0/KEYIN8
PA0/KEYIN8
NC
NC
49
P40/TMCI0
P40/TMCI0
P40/TMCI0
P40/TMCI0
NC
NC
50
P41/TMO0
P41/TMO0
P41/TMO0
P41/TMO0
NC
NC
51
P42/TMRI0
P42/TMRI0
P42/TMRI0
P42/TMRI0
NC
NC
52
P43/TMCI1/
HIRQ11*1
P43/TMCI1/
HIRQ11*1
P43/TMCI1
HIRQ11/TMCI1
NC
NC
53
P44/TMO1/
HIRQ1*1
P44/TMO1/
HIRQ1*1
P44/TMO1
HIRQ1/TMO1
NC
NC
54
P45/TMRI1/
HIRQ12*1
P45/TMRI1/
HIRQ12*1
P45/TMRI1
HIRQ12/TMRI1
NC
NC
55
P46/PW0
P46/PW0
P46/PW0
P46/PW0
NC
NC
56
P47/PW1
Pin No.
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 3
P47/PW1
P47/PW1
P47/PW1
NC
NC
PB7/XDB7
*2
PB7
PB7
NC
NC
PB6/XDB6
*2
PB6
PB6
NC
NC
PB7/XDB7
*2
58
PB6/XDB6
*2
59
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
60
A15
P27/A 15
P27
P27
CE
CE
61
A14
P26/A 14
P26
P26
EA14
FA 14
62
A13
P25/A 13
P25
P25
EA13
FA 13
63
A12
P24/A 12
P24
P24
EA12
FA 12
64
A11
P23/A 11
P23
P23
EA11
FA 11
65
A10
P22/A 10
P22
P22
EA10
FA 10
66
A9
P21/A 9
P21
P21
OE
OE
67
A8
57
P20/A 8
PB5/XDB5
*2
69
PB4/XDB4
*2
70
VSS
68
P20
P20
EA8
FA 8
PB5/XDB5
*2
PB5
PB5
NC
NC
PB4/XDB4
*2
PB4
PB4
NC
NC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
9
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Mode 1
Mode 2
HIF Disabled
HIF Enabled
Flash
EPROM Memory
Writer
Writer
Mode
Mode
71
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
72
A7
P17/A 7
P17
P17
EA7
FA 7
73
A6
P16/A 6
P16
P16
EA6
FA 6
74
A5
P15/A 5
P15
P15
EA5
FA 5
75
A4
P14/A 4
P14
P14
EA4
FA 4
76
A3
P13/A 3
P13
P13
EA3
FA 3
77
A2
P12/A 2
P12
P12
EA2
FA 2
78
A1
P11/A 1
P11
P11
EA1
FA 1
79
A0
Pin No.
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 3
P10/A 0
P10
P10
EA0
FA 0
PB3/XDB3
*2
PB3
PB3
NC
NC
PB2/XDB2
*2
PB2
PB2
NC
NC
PB3/XDB3
*2
81
PB2/XDB2
*2
82
D0
D0
P30
HDB0
EO0
FO0
83
D1
D1
P31
HDB1
EO1
FO1
84
D2
D2
P32
HDB2
EO2
FO2
85
D3
D3
P33
HDB3
EO3
FO3
86
D4
D4
P34
HDB4
EO4
FO4
87
D5
D5
P35
HDB5
EO5
FO5
88
D6
D6
P36
HDB6
EO6
FO6
89
D7
80
D7
PB1/XDB1
*2
91
PB0/XDB0
*2
92
VSS
90
93
94
95
96
10
P80/HA0
P37
HDB7
EO7
FO7
PB1/XDB1
*2
PB1
PB1
NC
NC
PB0/XDB0
*2
PB0
PB0
NC
NC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
P80
HA 0
NC
NC
VSS
*1
P81/GA 20
P82/CS 1
*1
*1
*1
P83/IOR
P80/HA0
*1
P81/GA 20
P82/CS 1
*1
P81
P81/GA 20
NC
NC
*1
P82
CS 1
NC
NC
*1
P83
IOR
NC
NC
P83/IOR
Pin No.
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 3
Mode 1
Mode 2
HIF Disabled
HIF Enabled
Flash
EPROM Memory
Writer
Writer
Mode
Mode
97
P84/IRQ3/TxD1 when HIF is disabled or STAC bit is 1 in STCR;
IOW/IRQ3 when HIF is enabled and STAC bit is 0 in STCR
NC
NC
98
P85/IRQ4/RxD1 when HIF is disabled or STAC bit is 1 in STCR;
CS 2/IRQ4 when HIF is enabled and STAC bit is 0 in STCR
NC
NC
99
P86/SCK1/
IRQ5/SCL
P86/SCK1/
IRQ5/SCL
P86/SCK1/
IRQ5/SCL
P86/SCK1/
IRQ5/SCL
NC
NC
100
RESO
RESO
RESO
RESO
NC
NC
Note: Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
For details on writer mode, refer to 18.2, Writer Mode, 19.6, Flash Memory Writer Mode
(H8/3434F), 20.6, Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3437F) and 21.5, Flash Memory Writer
Mode (H8/3437SF).
In this chip, except for the S-mask model (single-power-supply specification), the same pin
is used for STBY and FVPP . When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware
standby mode. This occurs not only in the normal operating modes (modes 1, 2, and 3), but
also when programming flash memory with a PROM writer. When using a PROM
programmer to program dual-power-supply flash memory, therefore, the PROM
programmer specifications should provide for this pin to be held at the VCC level except
when programming (FVPP = 12 V).
*1 Differs as in mode 3, depending on whether the host interface is enabled or disabled.
*2 XDB 7 to XDB6 can only be used when the host interface is enabled.
11
Pin Functions: Table 1.3 gives a concise description of the function of each pin.
Table 1.3
Pin Functions
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
I/O
Name and Function
Power
VCC
9, 59
I
Power: Connected to the power supply.
Connect both VCC pins to the system power
supply.
VCCB
4
I
I/O buffer power supply: Power supply for
input/output buffers at pins P8 6, P97, and
PA4 to PA 7.
VSS
15, 70, 71,
92
I
Ground: Connected to ground (0 V).
Connect all V SS pins to system ground (0 V).
XTAL
2
I
Crystal: Connected to a crystal oscillator.
The crystal frequency should be the same
as the desired system clock frequency. If an
external clock is input at the EXTAL pin, a
reverse-phase clock should be input at the
XTAL pin.
EXTAL
3
I
External crystal: Connected to a crystal
oscillator or external clock. The frequency of
the external clock should be the same as
the desired system clock frequency. See
section 6.2, Oscillator Circuit, for examples
of connections to a crystal and external
clock.
ø
17
O
System clock: Supplies the system clock to
peripheral devices.
RES
1
I
Reset: A low input causes the chip to reset.
RESO
100
O
Reset output: Outputs a reset signal to
external devices.
STBY
8
I
Standby: A transition to the hardware
standby mode (a power-down state) occurs
when a low input is received at the STBY
pin.
Address bus
A15 to A 0
60 to 67,
72 to 79
O
Address bus: Address output pins.
Data bus
D7 to D0
89 to 82
I/O
Data bus: 8-bit bidirectional data bus.
Clock
System control
12
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
I/O
Name and Function
Bus control
WAIT
16
I
Wait: Requests the CPU to insert wait
states into the bus cycle when an external
address is accessed.
RD
22
O
Read: Goes low to indicate that the CPU is
reading an external address.
WR
19
O
Write: Goes low to indicate that the CPU is
writing to an external address.
AS
18
O
Address strobe: Goes low to indicate that
there is a valid address on the address bus.
NMI
7
I
Nonmaskable interrupt: Highest-priority
interrupt request. The NMIEG bit in the
system control register (SYSCR) determines
whether the interrupt is recognized at the
rising or falling edge of the NMI input.
IRQ0 to
IRQ7
23 to 25,
97 to 99,
34, 35
I
Interrupt request 0 to 7: Maskable interrupt
request pins.
MD1
MD0
5
6
I
Mode: Input pins for setting the MCU mode
operating mode according to the table
below.
Interrupt signals
Operating mode
control
MD1
MD0
Mode
Description
0
0
Mode 0
Illegal setting *
0
1
Mode 1
Expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
disabled
1
0
Mode 2
Expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
enabled
1
1
Mode 3
Single-chip mode
Note: * In the H8/3437SF (S-mask model,
single-power-supply on-chip flash
memory version), the settings MD1 =
MD0 = 0 are used when boot mode is
set. For details, see section 21.3,
On-Board Programming Modes.
Do not change the mode pin settings while
the chip is operating.
13
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
16-bit freerunning timer
(FRT)
FTOA
FTOB
I/O
Name and Function
27
34
O
FRT output compare A and B: Output pins
controlled by comparators A and B of the
free-running timer.
FTCI
26
I
FRT counter clock input: Input pin for an
external clock signal for the free-running
timer.
FTIA to
FTID
28, 29, 32,
33
I
FRT input capture A to D: Input capture
pins for the free-running timer.
TMO0
TMO1
50
53
O
8-bit timer output (channels 0 and 1):
Compare-match output pins for the 8-bit
timers.
TMCI0
TMCI1
49
52
I
8-bit timer counter clock input (channels
0 and 1): External clock input pins for the 8bit timer counters.
TMRI0
TMRI1
51
54
I
8-bit timer counter reset input (channels
0 and 1): A high input at these pins resets
the 8-bit timer counters.
PWM timer
PW0
PW1
55
56
O
PWM timer output (channels 0 and 1):
Pulse-width modulation timer output pins.
Serial communication interface
(SCI)
TxD0
TxD1
14
97
O
Transmit data (channels 0 and 1): Data
output pins for the serial communication
interface.
RxD0
RxD1
13
98
I
Receive data (channels 0 and 1): Data
input pins for the serial communication
interface.
SCK 0
SCK 1
12
99
I/O
Serial clock (channels 0 and 1):
Input/output pins for the serial clock.
HDB0 to
HDB7
82 to 89
I/O
Host interface data bus: 8-bit bidirectional
bus by which a host processor accesses the
host interface.
CS 1, CS 2
95, 98
I
Chip select 1 and 2: Input pins for selecting
host interface channels 1 and 2.
IOR
96
I
I/O read: Read strobe input pin for the host
interface.
IOW
97
I
I/O write: Write strobe input pin for the host
interface.
8-bit timer
Host interface
(HIF)
14
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
I/O
Name and Function
Host interface
(HIF)
HA 0
93
I
Command/data: Input pin indicating data
access or command access.
GA20
94
O
Gate A20 : A 20 gate control signal output pin.
53
52
54
O
Host interrupts 1, 11, and 12: Output pins
for interrupt request signals to the host
processor.
Keyboard control KEYIN0 to
KEYIN15
26 to 29,
32 to 35,
48, 47,
31, 30,
21, 20,
11, 10
I
Keyboard input: Input pins from a matrix
keyboard. (Keyboard scan signals are
normally output from P1 0 to P1 7 and P20 to
P27, allowing a maximum 16 × 16 key
matrix. The number of keys can be further
increased by use of other output ports.)
Host interface
(expanded
modes)
XDB 0 to
XDB 7
91, 90, 81,
80, 69, 68,
58, 57
I/O
Host interface data bus: 8-bit bidirectional
bus by which a host processor accesses the
host interface.
Host interface
(if enabled when
STAC bit is 1 in
STCR)
ECS 2
25
I
Host chip select 2: Input pin for selecting
host interface channel 2.
EIOW
24
I
I/O write: Write strobe input pin for the host
interface.
A/D converter
AN 7 to
AN 0
38 to 45
I
Analog input: Analog signal input pins for
the A/D converter.
ADTRG
25
I
A/D trigger: External trigger input for
starting the A/D converter.
D/A converter
DA 0
DA 1
44
45
O
Analog output: Analog signal output pins
for the D/A converter.
A/D and D/A
converters
AVCC
37
I
Analog reference voltage: Reference
voltage pin for the A/D and D/A converters.
If the A/D and D/A converters are not used,
connect AVCC to the system power supply.
AVSS
46
I
Analog ground: Ground pin for the A/D and
D/A converters. Connect to system ground
(0 V).
AVref
36
I
Analog reference voltage: Analog
reference voltage input pins for A/D and D/A
converters.
HIRQ1
HIRQ11
HIRQ12
15
Pin No.
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
I/O
Name and Function
Flash memory
FV PP
[H8/3434,
H8/3437 F-ZTAT]
8
I
Programming power supply for on-board
programming: Connect to a flash memory
programming power supply (+12 V)
I 2C bus interface
[option]
SCL
99
I/O
I 2C clock I/O: Input/output pin for I2C clock.
Power is supplied by I/O buffer power
supply V CCB. Features a bus drive function.
SDA
16
I/O
I 2C data I/O: Input/output pin for I2C data.
Power is supplied by I/O buffer power
supply V CCB. Features a bus drive function.
P17 to P1 0
72 to 79
I/O
Port 1: An 8-bit input/output port with
programmable MOS input pull-ups and LED
driving capability. The direction of each bit
can be selected in the port 1 data direction
register (P1DDR).
P27 to P2 0
60 to 67
I/O
Port 2: An 8-bit input/output port with
programmable MOS input pull-ups and LED
driving capability. The direction of each bit
can be selected in the port 2 data direction
register (P2DDR).
P37 to P3 0
89 to 82
I/O
Port 3: An 8-bit input/output port with
programmable MOS input pull-ups. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port 3 data direction register (P3DDR).
P47 to P4 0
56 to 49
I/O
Port 4: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port 4 data direction register (P4DDR).
P52 to P5 0
12 to 14
I/O
Port 5: A 3-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port 5 data direction register (P5DDR).
P67 to P6 0
35 to 32,
29 to 26
I/O
Port 6: An 8-bit input/output port with
programming MOS input pull-ups. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port 6 data direction register (P6DDR).
P77 to P7 0
45 to 38
I
Port 7: An 8-bit input port.
P86 to P8 0
99 to 93
I/O
Port 8: A 7-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port 8 data direction register (P8DDR). P86
is powered by I/O buffer power supply V CCB.
Type
I/O ports
16
Symbol
Pin No.
Type
Symbol
I/O ports
P97 to P9 0
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
I/O
Name and Function
I/O
Port 9: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit (except for P9 6) can be
selected in the port 9 data direction register
(P9DDR). P97 is powered by I/O buffer
power supply V CCB.
PA7 to PA 0 10, 11, 20,
21, 30, 31,
47, 48
I/O
Port A: An 8-bit input/output port with
programming MOS input pull-ups. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port A data direction register (PADDR). PA7
to PA4 are powered by I/O buffer power
supply V CCB. Features a bus drive function.
PB7 to PB 0 57, 58, 68,
69, 80, 81,
90, 91
I/O
Port B: An 8-bit input/output port with
programming MOS input pull-ups. The
direction of each bit can be selected in the
port B data direction register (PBDDR).
16 to 19,
22 to 25
Note: In this chip, except for the S-mask model (single-power-supply specification), the same pin
is used for STBY and FVPP . When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware
standby mode. This occurs not only in the normal operating modes (modes 1, 2, and 3), but
also when programming flash memory with a PROM writer. When using a PROM
programmer to program dual-power-supply flash memory, therefore, the PROM
programmer specifications should provide for this pin to be held at the VCC level except
when programming (FVPP = 12 V).
17
18
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Overview
The H8/300 CPU is a fast central processing unit with eight 16-bit general registers (also
configurable as 16 eight-bit registers) and a concise instruction set designed for high-speed
operation.
2.1.1
Features
The main features of the H8/300 CPU are listed below.
• Two-way register configuration
Sixteen 8-bit general registers, or
Eight 16-bit general registers
• Instruction set with 57 basic instructions, including:
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• Eight addressing modes
Register direct (Rn)
Register indirect (@Rn)
Register indirect with displacement (@(d:16, Rn))
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement (@Rn+ or @–Rn)
Absolute address (@aa:8 or @aa:16)
Immediate (#xx:8 or #xx:16)
PC-relative (@(d:8, PC))
Memory indirect (@@aa:8)
• Maximum 64-kbyte address space
• High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions are executed in two to four states
• Maximum clock rate (ø clock): 16 MHz at 5 V, 12 MHz at 4 V or 10 MHz at 3 V
8- or 16-bit register-register add or subtract: 125 ns (16 MHz), 167 ns (12 MHz), 200 ns
(10 MHz)
8 × 8-bit multiply: 875 ns (16 MHz), 1167 ns (12 MHz), 1400 ns (10 MHz)
16 ÷ 8-bit divide: 875 ns (16 MHz), 1167 ns (12 MHz), 1400 ns (10 MHz)
• Power-down mode
SLEEP instruction
19
2.1.2
Address Space
The H8/300 CPU supports an address space with a maximum size of 64 kbytes for program code
and data combined. The memory map differs depending on the mode (mode 1, 2, or 3). For details,
see section 3.4, Address Space Map in Each Operating Mode.
2.1.3
Register Configuration
Figure 2.1 shows the internal register structure of the H8/300 CPU. There are two groups of
registers: the general registers and control registers.
General registers (Rn)
7
0 7
0
R0H
R0L
R1H
R1L
R2H
R2L
R3H
R3L
R4H
R4L
R5H
R5L
R6H
R6L
R7H
(SP)
SP: Stack pointer
R7L
Control registers
15
0
PC
CCR
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I UHUNZ VC
PC: Program counter
CCR: Condition code register
Carry flag
Overflow flag
Zero flag
Negative flag
Half-carry flag
Interrupt mask bit
User bit
User bit
Figure 2.1 CPU Registers
20
2.2
Register Descriptions
2.2.1
General Registers
All the general registers can be used as both data registers and address registers. When used as
address registers, the general registers are accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7). When used as
data registers, they can be accessed as 16-bit registers, or the high and low bytes can be accessed
separately as 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L).
R7 also functions as the stack pointer, used implicitly by hardware in processing interrupts and
subroutine calls. In assembly-language coding, R7 can also be denoted by the letters SP. As
indicated in figure 2.2, R7 (SP) points to the top of the stack.
Unused area
SP (R7)
Stack area
Figure 2.2 Stack Pointer
2.2.2
Control Registers
The CPU control registers include a 16-bit program counter (PC) and an 8-bit condition code
register (CCR).
(1) Program Counter (PC): This 16-bit register indicates the address of the next instruction the
CPU will execute. Each instruction is accessed in 16 bits (1 word), so the least significant bit of
the PC is ignored (always regarded as 0).
(2) Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal status information,
including carry (C), overflow (V), zero (Z), negative (N), and half-carry (H) flags and the interrupt
mask bit (I).
Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): When this bit is set to 1, all interrupts except NMI are masked.
This bit is set to 1 automatically by a reset and at the start of interrupt handling.
Bit 6—User Bit (U): This bit can be written and read by software (using the LDC, STC, ANDC,
ORC, and XORC instructions).
21
Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): This flag is set to 1 when the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B,
NEG.B, or CMP.B instruction causes a carry or borrow out of bit 3, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.
Similarly, it is set to 1 when the ADD.W, SUB.W, or CMP.W instruction causes a carry or borrow
out of bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. It is used implicitly in the DAA and DAS instructions.
Bit 4—User Bit (U): This bit can be written and read by software (using the LDC, STC, ANDC,
ORC, and XORC instructions).
Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): This flag indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of the result of an
instruction.
Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): This flag is set to 1 to indicate a zero result and cleared to 0 to indicate a
nonzero result.
Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): This flag is set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared
to 0 at other times.
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): This flag is used by:
• Add and subtract instructions, to indicate a carry or borrow at the most significant bit of the
result
• Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the most significant or least
significant bit
• Bit manipulation and bit load instructions, as a bit accumulator
The LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions enable the CPU to load and store the CCR,
and to set or clear selected bits by logic operations. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used in
conditional branching instructions (BCC).
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see the H8/300 Series Programming Manual.
2.2.3
Initial Register Values
When the CPU is reset, the program counter (PC) is loaded from the vector table and the interrupt
mask bit (I) in the CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized.
In particular, the stack pointer (R7) is not initialized. The stack pointer and CCR should be
initialized by software, by the first instruction executed after a reset.
22
2.3
Data Formats
The H8/300 CPU can process 1-bit data, 4-bit (BCD) data, 8-bit (byte) data, and 16-bit (word)
data.
• Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data specified as bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) in a byte
operand.
• All arithmetic and logic instructions except ADDS and SUBS can operate on byte data.
• The DAA and DAS instruction perform decimal arithmetic adjustments on byte data in packed
BCD form. Each nibble of the byte is treated as a decimal digit.
• The MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits × 8 bits), and
DIVXU (16 bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions operate on word data.
23
2.3.1
Data Formats in General Registers
Data of all the sizes above can be stored in general registers as shown in figure 2.3.
Data Type
Register No.
Data Format
7
1-bit data
RnH
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Don’t care
7
1-bit data
RnL
Byte data
RnH
Byte data
RnL
Word data
Rn
Don’t care
7
0
MSB
LSB
Don’t care
RnH
6
5
2
1
0
7
0
MSB
LSB
15
0
LSB
4
3
Upper digit
0
Lower digit
Don’t care
Don’t care
RnL
4
Upper digit
Legend:
RnH: Upper digit of general register
RnL: Lower digit of general register
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.3 Register Data Formats
24
3
Don’t care
7
4-bit BCD data
4
MSB
7
4-bit BCD data
0
7
0
3
Lower digit
2.3.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.4 indicates the data formats in memory.
Word data stored in memory must always begin at an even address. In word access the least
significant bit of the address is regarded as 0. If an odd address is specified, no address error
occurs but the access is performed at the preceding even address. This rule affects MOV.W
instructions and branching instructions, and implies that only even addresses should be stored in
the vector table.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
1-bit data
Address n
7
Byte data
Address n
MSB
Even address
MSB
Word data
Odd address
Byte data (CCR) on stack
Word data on stack
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LSB
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
LSB
MSB
CCR
LSB
Odd address
MSB
CCR*
LSB
Even address
MSB
Even address
Odd address
LSB
Note: * Ignored on return
Legend:
CCR: Condition code register
Figure 2.4 Memory Data Formats
When the stack is addressed by register R7, it must always be accessed a word at a time. When the
CCR is pushed on the stack, two identical copies of the CCR are pushed to make a complete word.
When they are restored, the lower byte is ignored.
25
2.4
Addressing Modes
2.4.1
Addressing Mode
The H8/300 CPU supports eight addressing modes. Each instruction uses a subset of these
addressing modes.
Table 2.1
Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
(1)
Register direct
Rn
(2)
Register indirect
@Rn
(3)
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, Rn)
(4)
Register indirect with post-increment
@Rn+
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@–Rn
(5)
Absolute address
@aa:8 or @aa:16
(6)
Immediate
#xx:8 or #xx:16
(7)
Program-counter-relative
@(d:8, PC)
(8)
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
(1) Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies an 8- or 16-bit general
register containing the operand. In most cases the general register is accessed as an 8-bit register.
Only the MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits × 8 bits), and
DIVXU (16 bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions have 16-bit operands.
(2) Register Indirect—@Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general
register containing the address of the operand.
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, Rn): This mode, which is used only in
MOV instructions, is similar to register indirect but the instruction has a second word (bytes 3 and
4) which is added to the contents of the specified general register to obtain the operand address.
For the MOV.W instruction, the resulting address must be even.
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@Rn+ or @–Rn:
• Register indirect with Post-Increment—@Rn+
The @Rn+ mode is used with MOV instructions that load registers from memory.
It is similar to the register indirect mode, but the 16-bit general register specified in the register
field of the instruction is incremented after the operand is accessed. The size of the increment
is 1 or 2 depending on the size of the operand: 1 for MOV.B; 2 for MOV.W. For MOV.W, the
original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even.
26
• Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement—@–Rn
The @–Rn mode is used with MOV instructions that store register contents to memory.
It is similar to the register indirect mode, but the 16-bit general register specified in the register
field of the instruction is decremented before the operand is accessed. The size of the
decrement is 1 or 2 depending on the size of the operand: 1 for MOV.B; 2 for MOV.W. For
MOV.W, the original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even.
(5) Absolute Address—@aa:8 or @aa:16: The instruction specifies the absolute address of the
operand in memory. The MOV.B instruction uses an 8-bit absolute address of the form H'FFxx.
The upper 8 bits are assumed to be 1, so the possible address range is H'FF00 to H'FFFF (65280 to
65535). The MOV.B, MOV.W, JMP, and JSR instructions can use 16-bit absolute addresses.
(6) Immediate—#xx:8 or #xx:16: The instruction contains an 8-bit operand in its second byte, or
a 16-bit operand in its third and fourth bytes. Only MOV.W instructions can contain 16-bit
immediate values.
The ADDS and SUBS instructions implicitly contain the value 1 or 2 as immediate data. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data (#xx:3) in the second or fourth byte of the
instruction, specifying a bit number.
(7) Program-Counter-Relative—@(d:8, PC): This mode is used to generate branch addresses
in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit value in byte 2 of the instruction code is added as a
sign-extended value to the program counter contents. The result must be an even number. The
possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) from the current address.
(8) Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The
second byte of the instruction code specifies an 8-bit absolute address from H'0000 to H'00FF (0
to 255). The word located at this address contains the branch address. The upper 8 bits of the
absolute address are 0 (H'00), thus the branch address is limited to values from 0 to 255 (H'0000 to
H'00FF). Note that some of the addresses in this range are also used in the vector table. Refer to
section 3.4, Address Space Map in Each Operating Mode.
If an odd address is specified as a branch destination or as the operand address of a MOV.W
instruction, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing word access to be performed at the
address preceding the specified address. See section 2.3.2, Memory Data Formats, for further
information.
27
2.4.2
Calculation of Effective Address
Table 2.2 shows how the H8/300 calculates effective addresses in each addressing mode.
Arithmetic, logic, and shift instructions use register direct addressing (1). The ADD.B, ADDX.B,
SUBX.B, CMP.B, AND.B, OR.B, and XOR.B instructions can also use immediate addressing (6).
The MOV instruction uses all the addressing modes except program-counter relative (7) and
memory indirect (8).
Bit manipulation instructions use register direct (1), register indirect (2), or 8-bit absolute (5)
addressing to identify a byte operand, and 3-bit immediate addressing to identify a bit within the
byte. The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions can also use register direct addressing (1)
to identify the bit.
28
Table 2.2
Effective Address Calculation
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
1
Register direct, Rn
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address
3
0
regm
15
87
op
2
43
Operands are contained in
registers regm and regn
15
0
16-bit register contents
76
op
3
43
15
0
15
0
15
0
15
0
0
reg
Register indirect with
displacement, @(d:16, Rn)
15
0
16-bit register contents
15
0
regn
0
regm regn
Register indirect, @Rn
15
3
76
op
43
0
reg
disp
disp
4
Register indirect with
post-increment, @Rn+
15
76
op
43
15
0
16-bit register contents
0
reg
1 or 2*
Register indirect with
pre-decrement, @–Rn
15
0
16-bit register contents
15
76
op
43
0
reg
1 or 2*
Note: * 1 for a byte operand,
2 for a word operand
29
No.
5
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address
Absolute address
@aa:8
15
87
op
15
87
0
H'FF
0
abs
@aa:16
15
15
0
0
op
abs
6
Immediate
#xx:8
Operand is 1- or 2-byte
immediate data
15
87
op
0
IMM
#xx:16
15
0
op
IMM
7
15
PC-relative
@(d:8, PC)
0
PC contents
15
15
87
op
30
0
disp
Sign
extension
disp
0
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
8
Memory indirect, @@aa:8
15
87
op
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address
0
abs
15
87
0
H'00
15
0
Memory contents
(16 bits)
Legend:
reg: General register
op: Operation code
disp: Displacement
IMM: Immediate data
abs: Absolute address
31
2.5
Instruction Set
The H8/300 CPU has 57 types of instructions, which are classified by function in table 2.3.
Table 2.3
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Types
*3
*3
*1
*1
Data transfer
MOV, MOVTPE , MOVFPE , PUSH , POP
3
Arithmetic operations
ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS,
DAA, DAS, MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, NEG
14
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,
ROTXR
8
Bit manipulation
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR,
BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST
14
Branch
Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
5
System control
RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP
8
Block data transfer
EEPMOV
1
Total 57
Notes: *1 PUSH Rn is equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @–SP.
POP Rn is equivalent to MOV.W @SP+, Rn.
*2 Bcc is a conditional branch instruction in which cc represents a condition code.
*3 Not supported by the H8/3437 Series.
32
The following sections give a concise summary of the instructions in each category, and indicate
the bit patterns of their object code. The notation used is defined next.
Operation Notation
Rd
General register (destination)
Rs
General register (source)
Rn
General register
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
SP
Stack pointer
PC
Program counter
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative) flag of CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag of CCR
V
V (overflow) flag of CCR
C
C (carry) flag of CCR
#imm
Immediate data
#xx:3
3-bit immediate data
#xx:8
8-bit immediate data
#xx:16
16-bit immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
AND logical
∨
OR logical
⊕
Exclusive OR logical
→
Move
¬
Not
33
2.5.1
Data Transfer Instructions
Table 2.4 describes the data transfer instructions. Figure 2.5 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.4
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general
register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
The Rn, @Rn, @(d:16, Rn), @aa:16, #xx:8 or #xx:16, @–Rn, and
@Rn+ addressing modes are available for byte or word data. The
@aa:8 addressing mode is available for byte data only.
The @–R7 and @R7+ modes require word operands. Do not specify
byte size for these two modes.
MOVTPE
B
Not supported by the H8/3437 Series.
MOVFPE
B
Not supported by the H8/3437 Series.
PUSH
W
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a 16-bit general register onto the stack. Equivalent to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP.
POP
W
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a 16-bit general register from the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W
@SP+, Rn.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
W: Word
34
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
8
Rm→Rn
7
op
15
rn
0
rm
rn
rm
rn
@Rm←→Rn
7
op
MOV
0
@(d:16, Rm)←→Rn
disp
15
8
7
op
rm
15
8
op
0
7
rn
15
@Rm+→Rn, or
Rn→@–Rm
rn
0
abs
8
@aa:8←→Rn
7
0
op
rn
@aa:16←→Rn
abs
15
8
op
7
rn
15
0
IMM
8
#xx:8→Rn
7
0
op
rn
#xx:16→Rn
IMM
15
8
7
op
0
rn
MOVFPE, MOVTPE
abs
15
8
op
7
0
rn
POP, PUSH
Legend:
Operation field
op:
rm, rn: Register field
disp: Displacement
Absolute address
abs:
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.5 Data Transfer Instruction Codes
35
2.5.2
Arithmetic Operations
Table 2.5 describes the arithmetic instructions. See figure 2.6 in section 2.5.4, Shift Operations,
for their object codes.
Table 2.5
Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
B/W
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd + #imm → Rd
SUB
ADDX
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or
addition on immediate data and data in a general register.
Immediate data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register.
Word data can be added or subtracted only when both words are in
general registers.
B
SUBX
INC
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in
two general registers, or addition or subtraction on immediate data
and data in a general register.
B
DEC
ADDS
W
Rd ± #imm → Rd
Adds or subtracts immediate data to or from data in a general
register. The immediate data must be 1 or 2.
B
DAS
MULXU
Rd ± #1 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register.
SUBS
DAA
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #imm ± C → Rd
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts (adjusts to packed BCD) an addition or subtraction
result in a general register by referring to the CCR.
B
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs 8-bit × 8-bit unsigned multiplication on data in two general
registers, providing a 16-bit result.
DIVXU
B
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs 16-bit ÷ 8-bit unsigned division on data in two general
registers, providing an 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder.
CMP
B/W
Rd – Rs, Rd – #imm
Compares data in a general register with data in another general
register or with immediate data. Word data can be compared only
between two general registers.
NEG
B
0 – Rd → Rd
Obtains the two’s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
W: Word
36
2.5.3
Logic Operations
Table 2.6 describes the four instructions that perform logic operations. See figure 2.6 in section
2.5.4, Shift Operations, for their object codes.
Table 2.6
Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #imm → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
OR
B
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #imm → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
XOR
B
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #imm → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data.
NOT
B
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Obtains the one’s complement (logical complement) of general
register contents.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
2.5.4
Shift Operations
Table 2.7 describes the eight shift instructions. Figure 2.6 shows the object code formats of the
arithmetic, logic, and shift instructions.
Table 2.7
Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
B
Rd shift → Rd
SHAR
SHLL
Performs an arithmetic shift operation on general register contents.
B
SHLR
ROTL
Performs a logical shift operation on general register contents.
B
ROTR
ROTXL
Rd shift → Rd
Rd rotate → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
B
ROTXR
Rd rotate through carry → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the C (carry) bit.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
37
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
7
0
op
15
7
op
0
rm
8
op
rn
7
MULXU, DIVXU
0
rn
ADD, ADDX, SUBX,
CMP (#xx:8)
IMM
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
op
ADDS, SUBS, INC, DEC,
DAA, DAS, NEG, NOT
rn
8
15
ADD, SUB, CMP,
ADDX, SUBX (Rm)
rn
7
rn
15
AND, OR, XOR (Rm)
0
IMM
8
op
rn
AND, OR, XOR (#xx:8)
7
0
rn
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR,
ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR
Legend:
Operation field
op:
rm, rn: Register field
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.6 Arithmetic, Logic, and Shift Instruction Codes
38
2.5.5
Bit Manipulations
Table 2.8 describes the bit-manipulation instructions. Figure 2.7 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.8
Bit-Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit no.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory to 1. The bit is
specified by a bit number, given in 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit no.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory to 0. The bit is
specified by a bit number, given in 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register.
BNOT
B
¬ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → (<bit no.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory. The bit is
specified by a bit number, given in 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register.
BTST
B
¬ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory and sets or
clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit is specified by a bit number,
given in 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
BAND
B
C ∧ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory.
C ∧ [¬ (<bit no.> of <EAd>)] → C
BIAND
ANDs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory.
C ∨ [¬ (<bit no.> of <EAd>)] → C
BIOR
ORs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the C flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
39
Instruction
Size*
Function
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ [(<bit no.> of <EAd>)] → C
XORs the C flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
(<bit no.> of <EAd>) → C
B
Copies a specified bit in a general register or memory to the C flag.
¬ (<bit no.> of <EAd>) → C
BILD
Copies the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
to the C flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
C → (<bit no.> of <EAd>)
B
Copies the C flag to a specified bit in a general register or memory.
¬ C → (<bit no.> of <EAd>)
BIST
Copies the inverse of the C flag to a specified bit in a general
register or memory.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions: BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST are readmodify-write instructions. They read a byte of data, modify one bit in the byte, then write the byte
back. Care is required when these instructions are applied to registers with write-only bits and to
the I/O port registers.
Step
Description
1
Read
Read one data byte at the specified address
2
Modify
Modify one bit in the data byte
3
Write
Write the modified data byte back to the specified address
Example 1: BCLR is executed to clear bit 0 in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR) under
the following conditions.
P4 7:
Input pin, low
P4 6:
Input pin, high
P4 5 – P4 0: Output pins, low
The intended purpose of this BCLR instruction is to switch P40 from output to input.
40
Before Execution of BCLR Instruction
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
DDR
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
DR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Execution of BCLR Instruction
BCLR
; clear bit 0 in data direction register
#0, @P4DDR
After Execution of BCLR Instruction
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Input/output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Pin state
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
DDR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
DR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Explanation: To execute the BCLR instruction, the CPU begins by reading P4DDR. Since
P4DDR is a write-only register, it is read as H'FF, even though its true value is H'3F.
Next the CPU clears bit 0 of the read data, changing the value to H'FE.
Finally, the CPU writes this value (H'FE) back to P4DDR to complete the BCLR instruction.
As a result, P40DDR is cleared to 0, making P40 an input pin. In addition, P47DDR and P46DDR
are set to 1, making P4 7 and P46 output pins.
41
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit no.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit no.: register direct (Rm)
rn
7
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit no.:
op
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
op
rm
0
0
0
0 Bit no.:
op
op
15
8
15
8
7
0
7
abs
IMM
15
8
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
7
0 Bit no.:
immediate (#xx:3)
0
op
abs
op
register direct (Rm)
0
op
op
immediate (#xx:3)
rm
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit no.:
register direct (Rm)
BAND, BOR, BXOR, BLD, BST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
op
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit no.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit no.:
7
0
op
abs
op
IMM
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit no.:
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
abs:
Absolute address
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instruction Codes
42
immediate (#xx:3)
immediate (#xx:3)
BIAND, BIOR, BIXOR, BILD, BIST
15
8
7
op
0
IMM
15
8
7
op
op
15
8
Operand: register direct (Rn)
Bit no.: immediate (#xx:3)
rn
0
rn
0
0
0
0 Operand: register indirect (@Rn)
IMM
0
0
0
0 Bit no.:
7
0
op
abs
op
immediate (#xx:3)
IMM
0
Operand: absolute (@aa:8)
0
0
0 Bit no.:
immediate (#xx:3)
Legend:
op:
Operation field
rm, rn: Register field
abs:
Absolute address
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instruction Codes (cont)
43
2.5.6
Branching Instructions
Table 2.9 describes the branching instructions. Figure 2.8 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.9
Branching Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc
—
Branches if condition cc is true.
Mnemonic
cc field
Description
Condition
BRA (BT)
0000
Always (true)
Always
BRN (BF)
0001
Never (false)
Never
BHI
0010
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
0011
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC (BHS)
0100
Carry clear
(High or same)
C=0
BCS (BLO)
0101
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
0110
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
0111
Equal
Z=1
BVC
1000
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
1001
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
1010
Plus
N=0
BMI
1011
Minus
N=1
BGE
1100
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
1101
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
1110
Greater than
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
1111
Less or equal
Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
JSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
BSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified displacement from the
current address.
RTS
—
Returns from a subroutine.
44
15
8
op
7
0
cc
15
disp
8
7
op
0
rm
15
Bcc
8
0
0
0
7
0
JMP (@Rm)
0
op
JMP (@aa:16)
abs
15
8
7
0
op
abs
15
8
JMP (@@aa:8)
7
0
op
disp
15
8
7
op
0
rm
15
BSR
8
0
0
0
7
0
JSR (@Rm)
0
op
JSR (@aa:16)
abs
15
8
7
op
0
abs
15
8
7
op
JSR (@@aa:8)
0
RTS
Legend:
op: Operation field
cc: Condition field
rm: Register field
disp: Displacement
abs: Absolute address
Figure 2.8 Branching Instruction Codes
45
2.5.7
System Control Instructions
Table 2.10 describes the system control instructions. Figure 2.9 shows their object code formats.
Table 2.10 System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
RTE
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
SLEEP
—
Causes a transition to the power-down state.
LDC
B
Rs → CCR, #imm → CCR
Moves immediate data or general register contents to the condition
code register.
STC
CCR → Rd
B
Copies the condition code register to a specified general register.
ANDC
CCR ∧ #imm → CCR
B
Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data.
ORC
CCR ∨ #imm → CCR
B
Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data.
XORC
CCR ⊕ #imm → CCR
B
Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate
data.
NOP
PC + 2 → PC
—
Only increments the program counter.
Note: * Size: Operand size
B: Byte
15
8
7
0
op
15
8
RTE, SLEEP, NOP
7
0
op
15
rn
8
op
7
LDC, STC (Rn)
0
IMM
ANDC, ORC,
XORC, LDC (#xx:8)
Legend:
op: Operation field
rn: Register field
IMM: Immediate data
Figure 2.9 System Control Instruction Codes
46
2.5.8
Block Data Transfer Instruction
Table 2.11 describes the EEPMOV instruction. Figure 2.10 shows its object code format.
Table 2.11 Block Data Transfer Instruction/EEPROM Write Operation
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV
—
if R4L ≠ 0 then
repeat
@R5+ → @R6+
R4L – 1 → R4L
until
R4L = 0
else next;
Moves a data block according to parameters set in general registers
R4L, R5, and R6.
R4L: size of block (bytes)
R5: starting source address
R6: starting destination address
Execution of the next instruction starts as soon as the block transfer
is completed.
15
8
7
0
op
op
Legend:
op: Operation field
Figure 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instruction/EEPROM Write Operation Code
47
Notes on EEPMOV Instruction
1. The EEPMOV instruction is a block data transfer instruction. It moves the number of bytes
specified by R4L from the address specified by R5 to the address specified by R6.
R5 →
← R6
R5 + R4L →
← R6 + R4L
2. When setting R4L and R6, make sure that the final destination address (R6 + R4L) does not
exceed H'FFFF. The value in R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution of
the instruction.
R5 →
R5 + R4L →
← R6
H'FFFF
Not allowed
48
← R6 + R4L
2.6
CPU States
2.6.1
Overview
The CPU has three states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, and power-down
state. The power-down state is further divided into three modes: sleep mode, software standby
mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 2.11 summarizes these states, and figure 2.12 shows a
map of the state transitions.
State
Program execution state
The CPU executes successive program instructions.
Exception-handling state
A transient state triggered by a reset or interrupt. The CPU executes
a hardware sequence that includes loading the program counter from
the vector table.
Sleep mode
Power-down state
A state in which some or
all of the chip functions are
stopped to conserve power.
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
Figure 2.11 Operating States
49
Exception
handling
request
Program
execution state
Exception
handing
Exceptionhandling state
RES = 1
Reset state
Interrupt request
NMI, IRQ0
to IRQ2 or IRQ6
STBY = 1, RES = 0
SLEEP instruction
with SSBY bit set
SLEEP
instruction
Sleep mode
Software
standby mode
Hardware
standby mode
Power-down state
Notes: 1. A transition to the reset state occurs when RES goes low, except when the chip
is in the hardware standby mode.
2. A transition from any state to the hardware standby mode occurs when STBY
goes low.
Figure 2.12 State Transitions
2.6.2
Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions.
2.6.3
Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU is reset or interrupted
and changes its normal processing flow. In interrupt exception handling, the CPU references the
stack pointer (R7) and saves the program counter and condition code register on the stack. For
further details see section 4, Exception Handling.
50
2.6.4
Power-Down State
The power-down state includes three modes: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware
standby mode.
Sleep Mode: Is entered when a SLEEP instruction is executed. The CPU halts, but CPU register
contents remain unchanged and the on-chip supporting modules continue to function.
Software Standby Mode: Is entered if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY
(Software Standby) bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set. The CPU and all on-chip
supporting modules halt. The on-chip supporting modules are initialized, but the contents of the
on-chip RAM and CPU registers remain unchanged as long as a specified voltage is supplied. I/O
port outputs also remain unchanged.
Hardware Standby Mode: Is entered when the input at the STBY pin goes low. All chip
functions halt, including I/O port output. The on-chip supporting modules are initialized, but onchip RAM contents are held.
See section 22, Power-Down State, for further information.
2.7
Access Timing and Bus Cycle
The CPU is driven by the system clock (ø). The period from one rising edge of the system clock to
the next is referred to as a “state.” Memory access is performed in a two- or three-state bus cycle.
On-chip memory, on-chip supporting modules, and external devices are accessed in different bus
cycles as described below.
2.7.1
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM and ROM)
On-chip ROM and RAM are accessed in a cycle of two states designated T1 and T2. Either byte or
word data can be accessed, via a 16-bit data bus. Figure 2.13 shows the on-chip memory access
cycle. Figure 2.14 shows the associated pin states.
51
Bus cycle
T2 state
T1 state
ø
Address
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Read data
Internal data bus (read)
Internal write signal
Internal data bus (write)
Write data
Figure 2.13 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Bus cycle
T2 state
T1 state
ø
Address bus
Address
AS: High
RD: High
WR: High
Data bus:
high impedance state
Figure 2.14 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
52
2.7.2
Access to On-Chip Register Field and External Devices
The on-chip supporting module registers and external devices are accessed in a cycle consisting of
three states: T1, T2, and T3. Only one byte of data can be accessed per cycle, via an 8-bit data bus.
Access to word data or instruction codes requires two consecutive cycles (six states).
Figure 2.15 shows the access cycle for the on-chip register field. Figure 2.16 shows the associated
pin states. Figures 2.17 (a) and (b) show the read and write access timing for external devices.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
Internal address
bus
Address
Internal read
signal
Internal data bus
(read)
Read data
Internal write
signal
Internal data bus
(write)
Write data
Figure 2.15 On-Chip Register Field Access Cycle
53
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
Address
Address bus
AS: High
RD: High
WR: High
Data bus:
high impedance state
Figure 2.16 Pin States during On-Chip Register Field Access Cycle
Read cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
Address bus
Address
AS
RD
WR: High
Data bus
Read data
Figure 2.17 (a) External Device Access Timing (Read)
54
Write cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
Address bus
Address
AS
RD: High
WR
Data bus
Write data
Figure 2.17 (b) External Device Access Timing (Write)
55
56
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes and Address Space
3.1
Overview
3.1.1
Mode Selection
The H8/3437 Series operates in three modes numbered 1, 2, and 3. The mode is selected by the
inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD 0). See table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Operating Modes
Mode
MD1
MD0
Address Space
On-Chip ROM
On-Chip RAM
Mode 0
Low
Low
—
—
—
Mode 1
Low
High
Expanded
Disabled
Enabled*
Mode 2
High
Low
Expanded
Enabled
Enabled*
Mode 3
High
High
Single-chip
Enabled
Enabled
Note: * If the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0, off-chip memory can
be accessed instead.
Modes 1 and 2 are expanded modes that permit access to off-chip memory and peripheral devices.
The maximum address space supported by these externally expanded modes is 64 kbytes.
In mode 3 (single-chip mode), only on-chip ROM and RAM and the on-chip register field are
used. All ports are available for general-purpose input and output.
Mode 0 is inoperative in the H8/3437 Series. Avoid setting the mode pins to mode 0, and do not
change the mode pin settings while the chip is operating.
3.1.2
Mode and System Control Registers
Table 3.2 lists the registers related to the chip’s operating mode: the system control register
(SYSCR) and mode control register (MDCR). The mode control register indicates the inputs to the
mode pins MD1 and MD 0.
Table 3.2
Mode and System Control Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Address
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'FFC4
Mode control register
MDCR
R
H'FFC5
57
3.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
The system control register (SYSCR) is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the chip.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to the software standby mode. For details,
see section 22, Power-Down State.
On recovery from software standby mode by an external interrupt, the SSBY bit remains set to 1.
It can be cleared by writing 0.
Bit 7: SSBY
Description
0
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to sleep mode.
1
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode.
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the clock settling
time when the chip recovers from the software standby mode by an external interrupt. During the
selected time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules continue to stand by. These bits should be
set according to the clock frequency so that the settling time is at least 8 ms. For specific settings,
see section 22.3.3, Clock Settling Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode.
• ZTAT and Mask ROM Versions
Bit 6: STS2
Bit 5: STS1
Bit 4: STS0
Description
0
0
0
Settling time = 8,192 states
1
Settling time = 16,384 states
0
Settling time = 32,768 states
1
Settling time = 65,536 states
0
—
Settling time = 131,072 states
1
—
Unused
1
1
58
(Initial value)
• F-ZTAT Version
Bit 6: STS2
Bit 5: STS1
Bit 4: STS0
Description
0
0
0
Settling time = 8,192 states
1
Settling time = 16,384 states
0
Settling time = 32,768 states
1
Settling time = 65,536 states
0
Settling time = 131,072 states
1
Settling time = 1,024 states
—
Unused
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: When 1,024 states (STS2 to STS0 = 101) is selected, the following points should be noted.
If a period exceeding øp/1,024 (e.g. øp/2,048) is specified when selecting the 8-bit timer,
PWM timer, or watchdog timer clock, the counter in the timer will not count up normally
when 1,024 states is specified for the settling time. To avoid this problem, set the STS value
just before the transition to software standby mode (before executing the SLEEP
instruction), and re-set the value of STS2 to STS0 to a value from 000 to 100 directly after
software standby mode is cleared by an interrupt.
Bit 3—External Reset (XRST): Indicates the source of a reset. A reset can be generated by input
of an external reset signal, or by a watchdog timer overflow when the watchdog timer is used.
XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset, and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer
overflow.
Bit 3: XRST
Description
0
Reset was caused by watchdog timer overflow.
1
Reset was caused by external input.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—NMI Edge (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI input.
Bit 2: NMIEG
Description
0
An interrupt is requested on the falling edge of the NMI input.
1
An interrupt is requested on the rising edge of the NMI input.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Host Interface Enable (HIE): Enables or disables the host interface function. When
enabled, the host interface processes host-slave data transfers, operating in slave mode.
Bit 1: HIE
Description
0
The host interface is disabled.
1
The host interface is enabled (slave mode).
(Initial value)
59
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized by a reset, but is not initialized in the software standby mode.
Bit 0: RAME
Description
0
The on-chip RAM is disabled.
1
The on-chip RAM is enabled.
3.3
(Initial value)
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Bit
7
*1
EXPE
Initial value
Read/Write
—
*2
R/W
*2
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
MDS1
MDS0
*2
1
1
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
—*2
R
Notes: *1 H8/3437SF (S-mask model, single-power-supply on-chip flash memory version) only.
Otherwise, this is a reserved bit that is always read as 1.
*2 Determined by the mode pins (MD1 and MD0).
The mode control register (MDCR) is an 8-bit register that indicates the operating mode of the
chip.
Bit 7—Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Functions only in the H8/3437SF (S-mask model,
single-power-supply on-chip flash memory version). For details, see section 21.1.6, Mode Control
Register (MDCR).
In models other than the H8/3437SF, this is a reserved bit that cannot be modified and is always
read as 1.
Bits 6 and 5—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 2—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 1 and 0—Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1 and MDS0): These bits indicate the values of the
mode pins (MD1 and MD0), thereby indicating the current operating mode of the chip. MDS1
corresponds to MD1 and MDS0 to MD0. These bits can be read but not written. When the mode
control register is read, the levels at the mode pins (MD1 and MD 0) are latched in these bits.
60
3.4
Address Space Map in Each Operating Mode
Figures 3.1 and 3.2 show memory maps of the H8/3437, H8/3436, and H8/3434 in modes 1, 2,
and 3.
Mode 1
Expanded Mode without
On-Chip ROM
H'0000
Mode 2
Expanded Mode with
On-Chip ROM
H'0000
Mode 3
Single-Chip Mode
H'0000
Vector table
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
H'004B
H'004C
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
On-chip ROM
61,312 bytes
On-chip ROM
63,360 bytes
External address space
H'EF7F
H'EF80
External address space
H'F77F
H'F780
H'F77F
H'F780
On-chip RAM*,
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
H'FF7F
H'FF80
On-chip RAM*,
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
On-chip RAM,
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Note: * External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system
control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0.
Figure 3.1 H8/3437 Address Space Map
61
Mode 1
Expanded Mode without
On-Chip ROM
Mode 2
Expanded Mode with
On-Chip ROM
H'0000
H'0000
Vector table
Mode 3
Single-Chip Mode
H'0000
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
H'004B
H'004C
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
On-chip ROM
49,152 bytes
On-chip ROM
49,152 bytes
External address space
H'BFFF
H'C000
H'BFFF
H'C000
Reserved*1
Reserved*1
H'EF7F
H'EF80
External address space
H'F77F
H'F780
H'F77F
H'F780
On-chip RAM *2 ,
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
H'F77F
H'F780
On-chip RAM *2 ,
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
On-chip RAM
2,048 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Notes: *1 Do not access reserved areas.
*2 External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system
control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0.
Figure 3.2 H8/3436 Address Space Map
62
Mode 1
Expanded Mode without
On-Chip ROM
H'0000
Mode 2
Expanded Mode with
On-Chip ROM
H'0000
Vector table
Mode 3
Single-Chip Mode
H'0000
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
H'004B
H'004C
Vector table
H'004B
H'004C
On-chip ROM
32,768 bytes
On-chip ROM
32,768 bytes
External address space
H'7FFF
H'8000
H'7FFF
H'8000
Reserved*1
Reserved*1
H'EF7F
H'EF80
External address space
H'F77F
H'F780
Reserved*1, *2
H'FB7F
H'FB80
H'F77F
H'F780
H'F77F
H'F780
On-chip RAM *2 ,
1,024 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Reserved*1, *2
H'FB7F
H'FB80
On-chip RAM *2 ,
1,024 bytes
H'FF7F
H'FF80 External address space
H'FF87
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Reserved*1
H'FB80
H'FF7F
On-chip RAM
1,024 bytes
H'FF88
On-chip register field
H'FFFF
Notes: *1 Do not access reserved areas.
*2 External memory can be accessed at these addresses when the RAME bit in the system
control register (SYSCR) is cleared to 0.
Figure 3.3 H8/3434 Address Space Map
63
64
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series recognizes two kinds of exceptions: interrupts and the reset. Table 4.1
indicates their priority and the timing of their hardware exception-handling sequence.
Table 4.1
Hardware Exception-Handling Sequences and Priority
Priority
Type of
Exception
Detection
Timing
Timing of Exception-Handling Sequence
High
Reset
Synchronized
with clock
The hardware exception-handling sequence begins
as soon as RES changes from low to high.
Interrupt
End of instruction
execution*
When an interrupt is requested, the hardware
exception-handling sequence begins at the end of
the current instruction, or at the end of the current
hardware exception-handling sequence.
Low
Note: * Not detected after ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions.
4.2
Reset
4.2.1
Overview
A reset has the highest exception-handling priority. When the RES pin goes low or when there is a
watchdog timer reset (when the reset option is selected for watchdog timer overflow), all current
processing stops and the chip enters the reset state. The internal state of the CPU and the registers
of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized. The reset exception-handling sequence starts
when RES returns from low to high, or at the end of a watchdog reset pulse.
4.2.2
Reset Sequence
The reset state begins when RES goes low or a watchdog reset is generated. To ensure correct
resetting, at power-on the RES pin should be held low for at least 20 ms. In a reset during
operation, the RES pin should be held low for at least 10 system clock cycles. The watchdog reset
pulse width is always 518 system clocks. For the pin states during a reset, see appendix D, Pin
States.
65
The following sequence is carried out when reset exception handling begins.
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, and the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1.
2. The CPU loads the program counter with the first word in the vector table (stored at addresses
H'0000 and H'0001) and starts program execution.
The RES pin should be held low when power is switched off, as well as when power is switched
on.
Figure 4.1 indicates the timing of the reset sequence in modes 2 and 3. Figure 4.2 indicates the
timing in mode 1.
Vector
fetch
Internal Instruction
processing prefetch
RES/watchdog timer
reset (internal)
ø
Internal address
bus
(1)
(2)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data bus
(16 bits)
(2)
(3)
(1) Reset vector address (H'0000)
(2) Starting address of program
(3) First instruction of program
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Mode 2 or 3, Program Stored in On-Chip ROM)
66
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 1)
67
D7 to D0
(8 bits)
WR
RD
A15 to A0
ø
(1), (3)
(2), (4)
(5), (7)
(6), (8)
RES/watchdog timer
reset (internal)
(4)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(8)
(7)
Instruction prefetch
Reset vector address: (1) = H'0000, (3) = H'0001
Starting address of program (contents of reset vector): (2) = upper byte, (4) = lower byte
Starting address of program: (5) = (2) (4), (7) = (2) (4) + 1
First instruction of program: (6) = first byte, (8) = second byte
(2)
(1)
Vector fetch
Internal
processing
4.2.3
Disabling of Interrupts after Reset
After a reset, if an interrupt were to be accepted before initialization of the stack pointer (SP: R7),
the program counter and condition code register might not be saved correctly, leading to a
program crash. To prevent this, all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a
reset. The first program instruction is therefore always executed. This instruction should initialize
the stack pointer (example: MOV.W #xx:16, SP).
After reset exception handling, in order to initialize the contents of CCR, a CCR manipulation
instruction can be executed before an instruction to initialize the stack pointer. Immediately after
execution of a CCR manipulation instruction, all interrupts including NMI are disabled. Use the
next instruction to initialize the stack pointer.
4.3
Interrupts
4.3.1
Overview
The interrupt sources include nine external sources from 23 input pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7, and
KEYIN0 to KEYIN15), and 26 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Table 4.2 lists
the interrupt sources in priority order and gives their vector addresses. When two or more
interrupts are requested, the interrupt with highest priority is served first.
The features of these interrupts are:
• NMI has the highest priority and is always accepted. All internal and external interrupts except
NMI can be masked by the I bit in the CCR. When the I bit is set to 1, interrupts other than
NMI are not accepted.
• IRQ0 to IRQ7 can be sensed on the falling edge of the input signal, or level-sensed. The type of
sensing can be selected for each interrupt individually. NMI is edge-sensed, and either the
rising or falling edge can be selected.
• All interrupts are individually vectored. The software interrupt-handling routine does not have
to determine what type of interrupt has occurred.
• IRQ6 is multiplexed with 16 external sources (KEYIN0 to KEYIN15). KEYIN0 to KEYIN15 can
be masked individually by user software.
• The watchdog timer can generate either an NMI or overflow interrupt, depending on the needs
of the application. For details, see section 11, Watchdog Timer.
68
Table 4.2
Interrupts
Interrupt source
No.
Vector Table Address
Priority
NMI
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
H'0006 to H'0007
H'0008 to H'0009
H'000A to H'000B
H'000C to H'000D
H'000E to H'000F
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0016 to H'0017
High
16-bit free-running
timer
ICIA (Input capture A)
ICIB (Input capture B)
ICIC (Input capture C)
ICID (Input capture D)
OCIA (Output compare A)
OCIB (Output compare B)
FOVI (Overflow)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
H'0018 to H'0019
H'001A to H'001B
H'001C to H'001D
H'001E to H'001F
H'0020 to H'0021
H'0022 to H'0023
H'0024 to H'0025
8-bit timer 0
CMI0A (Compare-match A)
CMI0B (Compare-match B)
OVI0 (Overflow)
19
20
21
H'0026 to H'0027
H'0028 to H'0029
H'002A to H'002B
8-bit timer 1
CMI1A (Compare-match A)
CMI1B (Compare-match B)
OVI1 (Overflow)
22
23
24
H'002C to H'002D
H'002E to H'002F
H'0030 to H'0031
Host interface
IBF1 (IDR1 receive end)
IBF2 (IDR2 receive end)
25
26
H'0032 to H'0033
H'0034 to H'0035
Serial
communication
interface 0
ERI0 (Receive error)
RXI0 (Receive end)
TXI0 (TDR empty)
TEI0 (TSR empty)
27
28
29
30
H'0036 to H'0037
H'0038 to H'0039
H'003A to H'003B
H'003C to H'003D
Serial
communication
interface 1
ERI1 (Receive error)
RXI1 (Receive end)
TXI1 (TDR empty)
TEI1 (TSR empty)
31
32
33
34
H'003E to H'003F
H'0040 to H'0041
H'0042 to H'0043
H'0044 to H'0045
A/D converter
ADI (Conversion end)
35
H'0046 to H'0047
Watchdog timer
WOVF (WDT overflow)
36
H'0048 to H'0049
IICI (Transfer end)
37
H'004A to H'004B
2
I C bus interface
Low
Notes: 1. H'0000 and H'0001 contain the reset vector.
2. H'0002 to H'0005 are reserved in the H8/3437 Series and are not available to the user.
69
4.3.2
Interrupt-Related Registers
The interrupt-related registers are the system control register (SYSCR), IRQ sense control register
(ISCR), IRQ enable register (IER), and keyboard matrix interrupt mask registers (KMIMR and
KMIMRA).
Table 4.3
Registers Read by Interrupt Controller
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Address
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'FFC4
IRQ sense control register
ISCR
R/W
H'FFC6
IRQ enable register
IER
R/W
H'FFC7
Keyboard matrix interrupt mask register
KMIMR
R/W
H'FFF1
Keyboard matrix interrupt mask register A
KMIMRA
R/W
H'FFF3
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
The valid edge on the NMI line is controlled by bit 2 (NMIEG) in the system control register.
Bit 2—NMI Edge (NMIEG): Determines whether a nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the
falling or rising edge of the NMI input signal.
Bit 2: NMIEG
Description
0
An interrupt is generated on the falling edge of NMI.
1
An interrupt is generated on the rising edge of NMI.
(Initial state)
See section 3.2, System Control Register, for information on the other SYSCR bits.
IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ7SC IRQ6SC IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
70
Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 Sense Control (IRQ7SC to IRQ0SC): These bits determine whether
IRQ7 to IRQ0 are level-sensed or sensed on the falling edge.
Bits 7 to 0:
IRQ7SC to IRQ0SC
Description
0
An interrupt is generated when IRQ7 to IRQ0 inputs are low. (Initial state)
1
An interrupt is generated by the falling edge of the IRQ7 to IRQ0 inputs.
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ7E
IRQ6E
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ7E to IRQ0E): These bits enable or disable the IRQ7 to
IRQ0 interrupts individually.
Bits 7 to 0:
IRQ7E to IRQ0E
Description
0
IRQ7 to IRQ 0 interrupt requests are disabled.
1
IRQ7 to IRQ 0 interrupt requests are enabled.
(Initial state)
When edge sensing is selected (by setting bits IRQ7SC to IRQ0SC to 1), it is possible for an
interrupt-handling routine to be executed even though the corresponding enable bit (IRQ7E to
IRQ0E) is cleared to 0 and the interrupt is disabled. If an interrupt is requested while the enable bit
(IRQ7E to IRQ0E) is set to 1, the request will be held pending until served. If the enable bit is
cleared to 0 while the request is still pending, the request will remain pending, although new
requests will not be recognized. If the interrupt mask bit (I) in the CCR is cleared to 0, the
interrupt-handling routine can be executed even though the enable bit is now 0.
If execution of interrupt-handling routines under these conditions is not desired, it can be avoided
by using the following procedure to disable and clear interrupt requests.
1. Set the I bit to 1 in the CCR, masking interrupts. Note that the I bit is set to 1 automatically
when execution jumps to an interrupt vector.
2. Clear the desired bits from IRQ7E to IRQ0E to 0 to disable new interrupt requests.
3. Clear the corresponding IRQ7SC to IRQ0SC bits to 0, then set them to 1 again. Pending IRQn
interrupt requests are cleared when I = 1 in the CCR, IRQnSC = 0, and IRQnE = 0.
71
Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Register (KMIMR)
To control interrupts from a 16 × 16 matrix keyboard at key-sense input pins KEYIN0 to KEYIN15,
there are two keyboard matrix interrupt mask registers, KMIMR and KMIMRA. Bits KMIMR7 to
KMIMR0 in KMIMR correspond to key-sense inputs KEYIN7 to KEYIN0. Bits KMIMR15 to
KMIMR8 in KMIMRA correspond to key-sense inputs KEYIN15 to KEYIN8. Initially, the
KMIMR6 bit that corresponds to the IRQ6/KEYIN6 pin is in the interrupt-enabled state, and the
other interrupt mask bits are in the interrupt-disabled state.
KMIMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used in keyboard matrix scanning and sensing. This
register initializes to a state in which only the input at the IRQ6 pin is enabled. To enable keysense input interrupts from two or more pins during keyboard scanning and sensing, clear the
corresponding mask bits to 0.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KMIMR7 KMIMR6 KMIMR5 KMIMR4 KMIMR3 KMIMR2 KMIMR1 KMIMR0
Initial value
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 to 0—Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask (KMIMR7 to KMIMR0): These bits control
key-sense input interrupt requests KEYIN7 to KEYIN0.
Bits 7 to 0:
KMIMR7 to KMIMR0
Description
0
Key-sense input interrupt request is enabled.
1
Key-sense input interrupt request is disabled.
(Initial value)*
Note: * Except KMIMR6, which is initially 0.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
KMIMR15 KMIMR14 KMIMR13 KMIMR12 KMIMR11 KMIMR10
1
0
KMIMR9
KMIMR8
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 to 0—Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask (KMIMR15 to KMIMR8): These bits control
key-sense input interrupt requests KEYIN15 to KEYIN8.
Bits 7 to 0:
KMIMR15 to KMIMR8
Description
0
Key-sense input interrupt request is enabled.
1
Key-sense input interrupt request is disabled.
72
(Initial value)
Figure 4.3 shows the relationship between the IRQ6 interrupt, KMIMR, and KMIMRA.
KMIMR0 (1)
P60/KEYIN0
..
..
..
..
IRQ6 internal signal
KMIMR6 (0)
P66/KEYIN6/IRQ6
Edge/level select
and enable/
disable control
KMIMR7 (1)
P67/KEYIN7
IRQ6E
KMIMR8 (1)
PA0/KEYIN8
..
..
IRQ6
interrupt
IRQ6SC
..
..
KMIMR15 (1)
PA7/KEYIN15
Initial values are given in parentheses
Figure 4.3 KMIMR, KMIMRA, and IRQ6 Interrupt
73
4.3.3
External Interrupts
The nine external interrupts are NMI and IRQ0 to IRQ7. NMI, IRQ 0, IRQ1, IRQ2, and IRQ6 can be
used to recover from software standby mode.
NMI: A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the rising or falling edge of the NMI input signal
regardless of whether the I (interrupt mask) bit is set in the CCR. The valid edge is selected by the
NMIEG bit in the system control register. The NMI vector number is 3. In the NMI hardware
exception-handling sequence the I bit in the CCR is set to 1.
IRQ0 to IRQ7: These interrupt signals are level-sensed or sensed on the falling edge of the input,
as selected by ISCR bits IRQ0SC to IRQ7SC. These interrupts can be masked collectively by the I
bit in the CCR, and can be enabled and disabled individually by setting and clearing bits IRQ0E to
IRQ7E in the IRQ enable register.
The IRQ6 input signal can be logically ORed internally with the key sense input signals. When
KEYIN0 to KEYIN15 pins (P6 0 to P67 and PA0 to PA7) are used for key sense input, the
corresponding KMIMR bits should be cleared to 0 to enable the corresponding key sense input
interrupts. KMIMR bits corresponding to unused key sense inputs should be set to 1 to disable the
interrupts. All 16 key sense interrupts are combined into a single IRQ6 interrupt.
When one of these interrupts is accepted, the I bit is set to 1. IRQ0 to IRQ7 have interrupt vector
numbers 4 to 11. They are prioritized in order from IRQ7 (low) to IRQ0 (high). For details, see
table 4.2.
Interrupts IRQ 0 to IRQ7 do not depend on whether pins IRQ0 to IRQ7 are input or output pins.
When using external interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ7, clear the corresponding DDR bits to 0 to set these
pins to the input state, and do not use these pins as input or output pins for the timers, serial
communication interface, I2C bus interface, host interface, or A/D converter.
4.3.4
Internal Interrupts
Twenty-six internal interrupts can be requested by the on-chip supporting modules. Each interrupt
source has its own vector number, so the interrupt-handling routine does not have to determine
which interrupt has occurred. All internal interrupts are masked when the I bit in the CCR is set to
1. When one of these interrupts is accepted, the I bit is set to 1 to mask further interrupts (except
NMI). The vector numbers are 12 to 37. For the priority order, see table 4.2.
74
4.3.5
Interrupt Handling
Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller that arbitrates between simultaneous interrupt
requests, commands the CPU to start the hardware interrupt exception-handling sequence, and
furnishes the necessary vector number. Figure 4.4 shows a block diagram of the interrupt
controller.
Interrupt
controller
NMI interrupt
IRQ0 flag
IRQ0E
CPU
*
Interrupt request
IRQ0
interrupt
Priority
decision
Vector number
IRIC
IEIC
IICI
interrupt
I (CCR)
Note: * For edge-sensed interrupts, these AND gates change to the circuit shown below.
IRQ0 edge
IRQ0E
IRQ0 flag
S
Q
IRQ0 interrupt
Figure 4.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
The IRQ interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules (except for reset selected
for a watchdog timer overflow) all have corresponding enable bits. When the enable bit is cleared
to 0, the interrupt signal is not sent to the interrupt controller, so the interrupt is ignored. These
interrupts can also all be masked by setting the CPU’s interrupt mask bit (I) to 1. Accordingly,
these interrupts are accepted only when their enable bit is set to 1 and the I bit is cleared to 0.
The nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) is always accepted, except in the reset state and hardware
standby mode.
75
When an NMI or another enabled interrupt is requested, the interrupt controller transfers the
interrupt request to the CPU and indicates the corresponding vector number. (When two or more
interrupts are requested, the interrupt controller selects the vector number of the interrupt with the
highest priority.) When notified of an interrupt request, at the end of the current instruction or
current hardware exception-handling sequence, the CPU starts the hardware exception-handling
sequence for the interrupt and latches the vector number.
Figure 4.5 is a flowchart of the interrupt (and reset) operations. Figure 4.7 shows the interrupt
timing sequence for the case in which the software interrupt-handling routine is in on-chip ROM
and the stack is in on-chip RAM.
1. An interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller when an NMI interrupt occurs, and when
an interrupt occurs on an IRQ input line or in an on-chip supporting module provided the
enable bit of that interrupt is set to 1.
2. The interrupt controller checks the I bit in CCR and accepts the interrupt request if the I bit is
cleared to 0. If the I bit is set to 1 only NMI requests are accepted; other interrupt requests
remain pending.
3. Among all accepted interrupt requests, the interrupt controller selects the request with the
highest priority and passes it to the CPU. Other interrupt requests remain pending.
4. When it receives the interrupt request, the CPU waits until completion of the current
instruction or hardware exception-handling sequence, then starts the hardware exceptionhandling sequence for the interrupt and latches the interrupt vector number.
5. In the hardware exception-handling sequence, the CPU first pushes the PC and CCR onto the
stack. See figure 4.6. The stacked PC indicates the address of the first instruction that will be
executed on return from the software interrupt-handling routine.
6. Next the I bit in CCR is set to 1, masking all further interrupts except NMI.
7. The vector address corresponding to the vector number is generated, the vector table entry at
this vector address is loaded into the program counter, and execution branches to the software
interrupt-handling routine at the address indicated by that entry.
76
Program execution
Interrupt
requested?
No
Yes
Yes
NMI?
No
No
Pending
I = 0?
Yes
IRQ0?
No
Yes
IRQ1?
No
Yes
IICI?
Yes
Latch vector no.
Save PC
Save CCR
Reset
I←1
Read vector address
Branch to software
interrupt-handling
routine
Figure 4.5 Hardware Interrupt-Handling Sequence
77
SP – 4
SP(R7)
CCR
SP – 3
SP + 1
CCR*
SP – 2
SP + 2
PC (upper byte)
SP – 1
SP + 3
PC (lower byte)
SP (R7)
Stack area
Before interrupt
is accepted
SP + 4
Pushed onto stack
Even address
After interrupt
is accepted
PC: Program counter
CCR: Condition code register
SP: Stack pointer
Notes: 1. The PC contains the address of the first instruction executed after return.
2. Registers must be saved and restored by word access at an even address.
* Ignored on return.
Figure 4.6 Usage of Stack in Interrupt Handling
The CCR is comprised of one byte, but when it is saved to the stack, it is treated as one word of
data. During interrupt processing, two identical bytes of CCR data are saved to the stack to create
one word of data. When the RTE instruction is executed to restore the value from the stack, the
byte located at the even address is loaded into CCR, and the byte located at the odd address is
ignored.
78
Interrupt
accepted
Interrupt priority
decision. Wait for Instruction Internal
end of instruction. prefetch
processing
Instruction prefetch
(first instruction of
Internal interrupt-handling
process- routine)
ing
Vector
fetch
Stack
Interrupt request
signal
ø
Internal address
bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
(8)
(6)
(9)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal 16-bit
data bus
(1)
(2) (4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(2)
(4)
(1)
(7)
(9)
(10)
Instruction prefetch address (Pushed on stack. Instruction is executed on return from interrupt-handling routine.)
Instruction code (Not executed)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed)
SP–2
SP–4
CCR
Address of vector table entry
Vector table entry (address of first instruction of interrupt-handling routine)
First instruction of interrupt-handling routine
Figure 4.7 Timing of Interrupt Sequence
79
4.3.6
Interrupt Response Time
Table 4.4 indicates the number of states that elapse from an interrupt request signal until the first
instruction of the software interrupt-handling routine is executed. Since on-chip memory is
accessed 16 bits at a time, very fast interrupt service can be obtained by placing interrupt-handling
routines in on-chip ROM and the stack in on-chip RAM.
Table 4.4
Number of States before Interrupt Service
Number of States
No.
Reason for Wait
On-Chip Memory
*3
External Memory
2*3
1
Interrupt priority decision
2
2
Wait for completion of current
instruction*1
1 to 13
5 to 17 *2
3
Save PC and CCR
4
12*2
4
Fetch vector
2
6*2
5
Fetch instruction
4
12*2
6
Internal processing
4
4
Total
17 to 29
41 to 53 *2
Notes: *1 These values do not apply if the current instruction is EEPMOV.
*2 If wait states are inserted in external memory access, add the number of wait states.
*3 1 for internal interrupts.
80
4.3.7
Precaution
Note that the following type of contention can occur in interrupt handling.
When software clears the enable bit of an interrupt to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt
becomes disabled after execution of the clearing instruction. If an enable bit is cleared by a BCLR
or MOV instruction, for example, and the interrupt is requested during execution of that
instruction, at the instant when the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so after execution
of the instruction, the hardware exception-handling sequence is executed for the interrupt. If a
higher-priority interrupt is requested at the same time, however, the hardware exception-handling
sequence is executed for the higher-priority interrupt and the interrupt that was disabled is ignored.
Similar considerations apply when an interrupt request flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 4.8 shows an example in which the OCIAE bit is cleared to 0.
CPU write
cycle to TIER
OCIA interrupt handling
ø
Internal address bus
TIER address
Internal write signal
OCIAE
OCFA
OCIA interrupt signal
Figure 4.8 Contention between Interrupt and Disabling Instruction
The above contention does not occur if the enable bit or flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt
mask bit (I) is set to 1.
81
4.4
Note on Stack Handling
In word access, the least significant bit of the address is always assumed to be 0. The stack is
always accessed by word access. Care should be taken to keep an even value in the stack pointer
(general register R7). Use the PUSH and POP (or MOV.W Rn, @–SP and MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
instructions to push and pop registers on the stack.
Setting the stack pointer to an odd value can cause programs to crash. Figure 4.9 shows an
example of damage caused when the stack pointer contains an odd address.
PCH
SP
PCL
SP
R1L
H'FECC
PCL
H'FECD
H'FECF
SP
BSR instruction
H'FECF set in SP
PCH:
PCL:
R1L:
SP:
MOV.B R1L, @–R7
PC is improperly stored
beyond top of stack
PCH is lost
Upper byte of program counter
Lower byte of program counter
General register
Stack pointer
Figure 4.9 Example of Damage Caused by Setting an Odd Address in R7
82
Section 5 Wait-State Controller
5.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip wait-state controller that enables insertion of wait states into
bus cycles for interfacing to low-speed external devices.
5.1.1
Features
Features of the wait-state controller are listed below.
• Three selectable wait modes: programmable wait mode, pin auto-wait mode, and pin wait
mode
• Automatic insertion of zero to three wait states
5.1.2
Block Diagram
WAIT
Wait-state controller
(WSC)
WSCR
Internal data bus
Figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the wait-state controller.
Wait request
signal
Legend:
WSCR: Wait-state control register
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Wait-State Controller
83
5.1.3
Input/Output Pins
Table 5.1 summarizes the wait-state controller’s input pin.
Table 5.1
Wait-State Controller Pins
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Wait
WAIT
Input
Wait request signal for access to external addresses
5.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 5.2 summarizes the wait-state controller’s register.
Table 5.2
Register Configuration
Address
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
H'FFC2
Wait-state control register
WSCR
R/W
H'08
5.2
Register Description
5.2.1
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)
WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the wait mode for the wait-state controller
(WSC) and specifies the number of wait states. It also controls RAM area setting for dual-powersupply flash memory, selection/non-selection of single-power-supply flash memory control
registers, and frequency division of the clock signals supplied to the supporting modules.
Bit
7
6
*1
RAMS
5
*1
RAM0
4
CKDBL FLSHE
*2
3
2
1
0
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: *1 These bits are valid only in the H8/3437F and H8/3434F (dual-power-supply on-chip
flash memory versions).
*2 This bit is valid only in the H8/3437SF (S-mask model, single-power-supply on-chip
flash memory version).
WSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
84
Bit 7—RAM Select (RAMS)
Bit 6—RAM Area Select (RAM0)
Bits 7 and 6 select a RAM area for emulation of dual-power-supply flash memory updates. For
details, see the flash memory description in section 19, 20, ROM.
Bit 5—Clock Double (CKDBL): Controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to
supporting modules. For details, see section 6, Clock Pulse Generator.
Bit 4—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls selection/non-selection of
single-power-supply flash memory control registers. For details, see the description of flash
memory in section 21, ROM. In models other than the H8/3437SF, this bit is reserved, but it can
be written and read; its initial value is 0.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1/0): These bits select the wait mode.
Bit 3: WMS1
Bit 2: WMS0
Description
0
0
Programmable wait mode
1
No wait states inserted by wait-state controller
0
Pin wait mode
1
Pin auto-wait mode
1
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1/0): These bits select the number of wait states inserted
in access to external address areas.
Bit 1: WC1
Bit 0: WC0
Description
0
0
No wait states inserted by wait-state controller
1
1 state inserted
0
2 states inserted
1
3 states inserted
1
(Initial value)
85
5.3
Wait Modes
Programmable Wait Mode: The number of wait states (TW ) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are
inserted in all accesses to external addresses. Figure 5.2 shows the timing when the wait count is 1
(WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1).
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
Address bus
External address
AS
RD
Read
access
Read data
Data bus
WR
Write
access
Data bus
Write data
Figure 5.2 Programmable Wait Mode
86
Pin Wait Mode: In all accesses to external addresses, the number of wait states (TW) selected by
bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. If the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (ø) in the
last of these wait states, an additional wait state is inserted. If the WAIT pin remains low, wait
states continue to be inserted until the WAIT signal goes high.
Pin wait mode is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for inserting different numbers of
wait states for different external devices.
Figure 5.3 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1) and one additional wait
state is inserted by WAIT input.
T1
Inserted by
wait count
Inserted by
WAIT signal
TW
TW
T2
ø
*
T3
*
WAIT pin
Address bus
External address
AS
Read
access
RD
Read data
Data bus
WR
Write
access
Data bus
Write data
Note: * Arrows indicate time of sampling of the WAIT pin.
Figure 5.3 Pin Wait Mode
87
Pin Auto-Wait Mode: If the WAIT pin is low, the number of wait states (TW) selected by bits
WC1 and WC0 are inserted.
In pin auto-wait mode, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (ø) in the T2 state, the
number of wait states (TW ) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. No additional wait states
are inserted even if the WAIT pin remains low. Pin auto-wait mode can be used for an easy
interface to low-speed memory, simply by routing the chip select signal to the WAIT pin.
Figure 5.4 shows the timing when the wait count is 1.
T1
ø
T2
T3
T1
T2
*
TW
T3
*
WAIT
Address bus
External address
External address
AS
RD
Read
access
Read data
Read data
Data bus
WR
Write
access
Data bus
Write data
Note: * Arrows indicate time of sampling of the WAIT pin.
Figure 5.4 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
88
Write data
Section 6 Clock Pulse Generator
6.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) consisting of an oscillator circuit, a
duty adjustment circuit, and a divider and a prescaler that generates clock signals for the on-chip
supporting modules.
6.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
XTAL
EXTAL
Oscillator
circuit
Duty
adjustment
circuit
ø
(system
clock)
øP
(for supporting
modules)
Prescaler
Frequency
divider (1/2)
CKDBL
øP/2 to øP/4096
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
Input an external clock signal to the EXTAL pin, or connect a crystal resonator to the XTAL and
EXTAL pins. The system clock frequency (ø) will be the same as the input frequency. This same
system clock frequency (øP) can be supplied to timers and other supporting modules, or it can be
divided by two. The selection is made by software, by controlling the CKDBL bit.
89
6.1.2
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)
WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls frequency division of the clock signals
supplied to the supporting modules. It also controls wait state controller wait settings, RAM area
setting for dual-power-supply flash memory, and selection/non-selection of single-power-supply
flash memory control registers.
WSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
7
6
*1
RAMS
5
*1
RAM0
4
CKDBL FLSHE
*2
3
2
1
0
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: *1 These bits are valid only in the H8/3437F and H8/3434F (dual-power-supply on-chip
flash memory versions).
*2 This bit is valid only in the H8/3437SF (S-mask model, single-power-supply on-chip
flash memory version).
Bit 7—RAM Select (RAMS)
Bit 6—RAM Area Select (RAM0)
Bits 7 and 6 select a RAM area for emulation of dual-power-supply flash memory updates. For
details, see the flash memory description in section 19, 20, ROM.
Bit 5—Clock Double (CKDBL): Controls the frequency division of clock signals supplied to
supporting modules.
Bit 5: CKDBL
Description
0
The undivided system clock (ø) is supplied as the clock (ø P) for supporting
modules.
(Initial value)
1
The system clock (ø) is divided by two and supplied as the clock (ø P) for
supporting modules.
Bit 4—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls selection/non-selection of
single-power-supply flash memory control registers. For details, see the description of flash
memory in section 21, ROM. In models other than the H8/3437SF, this bit is reserved, but it can
be written and read; its initial value is 0.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1/0)
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1/0)
These bits control wait-state insertion. For details, see section 5, Wait-State Controller.
90
6.2
Oscillator Circuit
6.2.1
Oscillator (Generic Device)
If an external crystal is connected across the EXTAL and XTAL pins, the on-chip oscillator circuit
generates a system clock signal. Alternatively, an external clock signal can be applied to the
EXTAL pin.
Connecting an External Crystal
Circuit Configuration: An external crystal can be connected as in the example in figure 6.2.
Table 6.1 indicates the appropriate damping resistance Rd. An AT-cut parallel resonance crystal
should be used.
CL1
EXTAL
XTAL
Rd
CL1 = C L2 = 10 pF to 22 pF
CL2
Figure 6.2 Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example)
Table 6.1
Damping Resistance
Frequency (MHz)
2
4
8
10
12
16
Rd max (Ω)
1k
500
200
0
0
0
Crystal Oscillator: Figure 6.3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. The crystal
resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 6.2.
91
CL
L
Rs
XTAL
EXTAL
C0
AT-cut parallel resonating crystal
Figure 6.3 Equivalent Circuit of External Crystal
Table 6.2
External Crystal Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
2
4
8
10
12
16
Rs max (Ω)
500
120
80
70
60
50
C0 (pF)
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
Use a crystal with the same frequency as the desired system clock frequency (ø).
Note on Board Design: When an external crystal is connected, other signal lines should be kept
away from the crystal circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See
figure 6.4. The crystal and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL
and EXTAL pins.
Not allowed
Signal A
Signal B
CL2
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 6.4 Notes on Board Design around External Crystal
92
Input of External Clock Signal
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
6.5. In example (b) in figure 6.5, the external clock signal should be kept high during standby.
If the XTAL pin is left open, make sure the stray capacitance does not exceed 10 pF.
EXTAL
XTAL
External clock input
Open
(a) Connections with XTAL pin left open
EXTAL
External clock input
74HC04
XTAL
(b) Connections with inverted clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 6.5 External Clock Input (Example)
93
External Clock Input: The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the desired
system clock (ø). Clock timing parameters are given in table 6.3 and figure 6.6.
Table 6.3
Clock Timing
VCC = 2.7 to
5.5 V
VCC = 4.0 to
5.5 V
VCC = 5.0 V
±10%
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit Test Conditions
Low pulse
width of external
clock input
t EXL
40
—
30
—
20
—
ns
t EXH
High pulse
width of external
clock input
40
—
30
—
20
—
ns
External clock
rise time
t EXr
—
10
—
10
—
5
ns
External clock
fall time
t EXf
—
10
—
10
—
5
ns
Clock pulse
width low
t CL
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.7
t cyc
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
t cyc
ø ≥ 5 MHz Figure
ø < 5 MHz 23.7
Clock pulse
width high
t CH
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.7
0.3
0.7
t cyc
ø ≥ 5 MHz
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
t cyc
ø < 5 MHz
tEXH
Figure 6.6
tEXL
EXTAL
VCC × 0.5
tEXr
tEXt
Figure 6.6 External Clock Input Timing
Table 6.4 lists the external clock output stabilization delay time. Figure 6.7 shows the timing for
the external clock output stabilization delay time. The oscillator and duty correction circuit have
the function of regulating the waveform of the external clock input to the EXTAL pin. When the
specified clock signal is input to the EXTAL pin, internal clock signal output is confirmed after
the elapse of the external clock output stabilization delay time (t DEXT). As clock signal output is not
confirmed during the tDEXT period, the reset signal should be driven low and the reset state
maintained during this time.
94
Table 6.4
External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
External clock output stabilization
delay time
t DEXT*
500
—
µs
Figure 6.7
Note: * t DEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (t RESW).
VCC
STBY
2.7 V
VIH
EXTAL
ø (internal and
external)
RES
tDEXT*
Note: * tDEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (tRESW).
Figure 6.7 External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
6.2.2
Oscillator Circuit (H8/3437S)
If an external crystal is connected across the EXTAL and XTAL pins, the on-chip oscillator circuit
generates a system clock signal. Alternatively, an external clock signal can be applied to the
EXTAL pin.
Connecting an External Crystal
Circuit Configuration: An external crystal can be connected as in the example in figure 6.8.
Table 6.5 indicates the appropriate damping resistance Rd. An AT-cut parallel resonance crystal
should be used.
95
CL1
EXTAL
XTAL
Rd
CL1 = C L2 = 10 pF to 22 pF
CL2
Figure 6.8 Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example)
Table 6.5
Damping Resistance
Frequency (MHz)
2
4
8
10
Rd max (Ω)
1k
500
200
0
Crystal Oscillator: Figure 6.9 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. The crystal
resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 6.6.
CL
L
Rs
XTAL
EXTAL
C0
AT-cut parallel resonating crystal
Figure 6.9 Equivalent Circuit of External Crystal
Table 6.6
External Crystal Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
2
4
8
10
Rs max (Ω)
500
120
80
70
C0 (pF)
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
7 pF max
Use a crystal with the same frequency as the desired system clock frequency (ø).
Note on Board Design: When an external crystal is connected, other signal lines should be kept
away from the crystal circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See
figure 6.10. The crystal and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL
and EXTAL pins.
96
Not allowed
Signal A
Signal B
CL2
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 6.10 Notes on Board Design around External Crystal
Input of External Clock Signal
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
6.11. In example (b) in figure 6.11, the external clock signal should be kept high during standby.
If the XTAL pin is left open, make sure the stray capacitance does not exceed 10 pF.
EXTAL
XTAL
External clock input
Open
(a) Connections with XTAL pin left open
EXTAL
External clock input
74HC04
XTAL
(b) Connections with inverted clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 6.11 External Clock Input (Example)
97
External Clock Input: The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the desired
system clock (ø). Clock timing parameters are given in table 6.7 and figure 6.12.
Table 6.7
Clock Timing
VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Low pulse width of external
clock input
t EXL
40
—
ns
Figure 6.12
High pulse width of external
clock input
t EXH
40
—
ns
External clock rise time
t EXr
—
10
ns
External clock fall time
t EXf
—
10
ns
Clock pulse
width low
t CL
0.3
0.7
t cyc
ø ≥ 5 MHz
0.4
0.6
t cyc
ø < 5 MHz
Clock pulse
width high
t CH
0.3
0.7
t cyc
ø ≥ 5 MHz
0.4
0.6
t cyc
ø < 5 MHz
tEXH
Figure 23.7
tEXL
EXTAL
VCC × 0.5
tEXr
tEXt
Figure 6.12 External Clock Input Timing
Table 6.8 lists the external clock output stabilization delay time. Figure 6.13 shows the timing for
the external clock output stabilization delay time. The oscillator and duty correction circuit have
the function of regulating the waveform of the external clock input to the EXTAL pin. When the
specified clock signal is input to the EXTAL pin, internal clock signal output is confirmed after
the elapse of the external clock output stabilization delay time (t DEXT). As clock signal output is not
confirmed during the tDEXT period, the reset signal should be driven low and the reset state
maintained during this time.
98
Table 6.8
External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
External clock output stabilization
delay time
t DEXT*
500
—
µs
Figure 6.13
Note: * t DEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (t RESW).
VCC
STBY
3.0 V
VIH
EXTAL
ø (internal and
external)
RES
tDEXT*
Note: * tDEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (tRESW).
Figure 6.13 External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
6.3
Duty Adjustment Circuit
When the clock frequency is 5 MHz or above, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of
the signal from the oscillator circuit to generate the system clock (ø).
6.4
Prescaler
The clock for the on-chip supporting modules (øP) has either the same frequency as the system
clock (ø) or this frequency divided by two, depending on the CKDBL bit. The prescaler divides
the frequency of øP to generate internal clock signals with frequencies from øP/2 to øP/4096.
99
100
Section 7 I/O Ports
7.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has eight 8-bit input/output ports, one 7-bit input/output port, and one 3-bit
input/output port, and are 8-bit input port.
Table 7.1 lists the functions of each port in each operating mode. As table 7.1 indicates, the port
pins are multiplexed, and the pin functions differ depending on the operating mode.
Each port has a data direction register (DDR) that selects input or output, and a data register (DR)
that stores output data. If bit manipulation instructions will be executed on the port data direction
registers, see “Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions” in section 2.5.5, Bit Manipulations.
Ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, A, and B can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. Ports 5 and 8
can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. Ports 1 and 2 can drive LEDs (with 10-mA
current sink). Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9, A, and B can drive a darlington transistor. Ports 1 to 3, 6, A, and B
have built-in MOS pull-up transistors.
For block diagrams of the ports, see appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams.
Pins P86 in port 8, P97 in port 9, and PA4, PA5, PA6, and PA7 in port A can be driven to operate as
bus buffers. For details, see section 13, I 2C Bus Interface.
101
Table 7.1
Port Functions
Expanded
Modes
Single-Chip
Mode
Port
Description
Pins
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Port 1
• 8-bit I/O port
P17 to P10/A 7 to A0
Lower address
output (A7 to A0)
Lower address
output (A7 to A0)
or general input
General
input/output
P27 to P20/A 15 to A8
Upper address
output (A15 to A8)
Upper address
output (A15 to A8)
or general input
General
input/output
P37 to P30/
D7 to D0/
HDB7 to HDB0
Data bus
(D7 to D0)
Data bus
(D7 to D0)
HIF data bus
(HDB 7 to
HDB0) or
general input/
output
P47/PW1
PWM timer 0/1 output (PW0, PW1), or general
input/output
• Can drive LEDs
• Built-in input
pull-ups
Port 2
• 8-bit I/O port
• Can drive LEDs
• Built-in input
pull-ups
Port 3
• 8-bit I/O port
• Built-in input
pull-ups
• HIF data bus
Port 4
• 8-bit I/O port
P46/PW0
P45/TMRI1/HIRQ12
P44/TMO1/HIRQ1
P43/TMCI1/HIRQ11
P42/TMRI0
P41/TMO0
8-bit timer 1 input/output (TMCI 1, TMO1, TMRI1), host
processor interrupt request output from HIF (HIRQ11,
HIRQ1, HIRQ12), or general input/output
8-bit timer 0 input/output (TMCI 0, TMO0, TMRI0) or
general input/output
P40/TMCI0
Port 5
• 3-bit I/O port
P52/SCK 0
P51/RxD0
Serial communication interface 0 input/output (TxD 0,
RxD 0, SCK0) or general input/output
P50/TxD0
Port 6
• 8-bit I/O port
P67/KEYIN7/IRQ7
• Built-in input
pull-ups
P66/KEYIN6/FTOB/IRQ6
• Key-sense
interrupt inputs
P64/KEYIN4/FTIC
P65/KEYIN5/FTID
16-bit free-running timer input/output (FTCI, FTOA,
FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOB), key-sense interrupt
input (KEYIN7 to KEYIN0), external interrupt input (IRQ7,
IRQ6), or general input/output
P63/KEYIN3/FTIB
P62/KEYIN2/FTIA
P61/KEYIN1/FTOA
P60/KEYIN0/FTCI
Port 7
102
• 8-bit I/O port
P77/AN7/DA1
P76/AN6/DA0
Analog input to A/D converter (AN 7, AN 6), analog output
from D/A converter (DA1, DA 0), or general input
P75 to P70/
AN5 to AN0
Analog input to A/D converter (AN 5 to AN0) or general
input
Expanded
Modes
Port
Description
Pins
Mode 1
Port 8
• 7-bit I/O port
P86/IRQ5/SCK 1/SCL
• Can drive a bus
line (P86)
P85/IRQ4/RxD1/CS2
Serial communication interface 1 input/output (TxD 1,
RxD 1, SCK1), HIF control input (CS2, IOW), I2C clock
input/output (SCL), external interrupt input (IRQ5 to
IRQ3), or general input/output
P84/IRQ3/TxD1/IOW
P83/IOR
P82/CS1
Mode 2
Single-Chip
Mode
Mode 3
HIF control input/output (HA0, GA20 , CS1, IOR), or
general input/output
P81/GA20
P80/HA0
Port 9
• 8-bit I/O port
P97/WAIT/SDA
Expanded data bus control input
(WAIT), I2C data input/output (SDA),
or general input/output
I2C data
input/output
(SDA) or
general input/
output
P96/ø
System clock (ø)
output
ø output or
general input
P95/AS
Expanded data bus control output
(RD, WR, AS)
• Can drive a bus
line (P97)
P94/WR
System clock (ø)
output
General
input/output
P93/RD
P92/IRQ0
P91/IRQ1/EIOW
P90/IRQ2/ECS2/ADTRG
Port A
• 8-bit I/O port
• Built-in input
pull-ups
HIF control input (ECS2, EIOW), trigger input to A/D
converter (ADTRG), external interrupt input (IRQ2 to
IRQ0), or general input/output
PA 7 to PA0/
KEYIN15 to KEYIN8
Key-sense interrupt input (KEYIN15 to KEYIN8) or
general input/output
PB 7 to PB0/
XDB7 to XDB0
HIF data bus (XDB7 to XDB 0) or
general input/output
• Key-sense
interrupt inputs
• Can drive bus
lines (PA4, PA5,
PA 6, PA7)
Port B
• 8-bit I/O port
• HIF data bus
General
input/output
• Built-in input
pull-up MOS
103
7.2
Port 1
7.2.1
Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7.1. The pin
functions differ depending on the operating mode.
Port 1 has built-in, programmable MOS input pull-up transistors that can be used in modes 2 and
3.
Pins in port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive LEDs and
darlington transistors.
Port 1
Port 1 pins
Pin configuration
in mode 1
(expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
disabled)
Pin configuration
in mode 2
(expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
enabled)
P17/A7
A7 (output)
A7 (output)/P17 (input)
P16/A6
A6 (output)
A6 (output)/P16 (input)
P15/A5
A5 (output)
A5 (output)/P15 (input)
P14/A4
A4 (output)
A4 (output)/P14 (input)
P13/A3
A3 (output)
A3 (output)/P13 (input)
P12/A2
A2 (output)
A2 (output)/P12 (input)
P11/A1
A1 (output)
A1 (output)/P11 (input)
P10/A0
A0 (output)
A0 (output)/P10 (input)
Pin configuration in mode 3
(single-chip mode)
P17 (input/output)
P16 (input/output)
P15 (input/output)
P14 (input/output)
P13 (input/output)
P12 (input/output)
P11 (input/output)
P10 (input/output)
Figure 7.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
104
7.2.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.2 summarizes the port 1 registers.
Table 7.2
Port 1 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 1 data direction register
P1DDR
W
H'FF (mode 1)
H'FFB0
H'00 (modes 2 and 3)
Port 1 data register
P1DR
R/W
H'00
H'FFB2
Port 1 input pull-up control
register
P1PCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFAC
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Mode 1
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Modes 2 and 3
P1DDR controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 1.
Mode 1: The P1DDR values are fixed at 1. Port 1 consists of lower address output pins. P1DDR
values cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
In hardware standby mode, the address bus is in the high-impedance state.
Mode 2: A pin in port 1 is used for address output if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and
for general input if this bit is cleared to 0.
Mode 3: A pin in port 1 is used for general output if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and
for general input if this bit is cleared to 0.
In modes 2 and 3, P1DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read
1. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby
mode it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a
P1DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
105
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P1DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P17 to P10. When a P1DDR bit is set to 1, if port
1 is read, the value in P1DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state. When a P1DDR
bit is cleared to 0, if port 1 is read the pin state is obtained.
P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P1PCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P1PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 1. If
a P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating input) and the corresponding P1PCR bit is set to 1, the
input pull-up transistor is turned on.
P1PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
106
7.2.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 1 has different pin functions in different modes. A separate description for each mode is given
below.
Pin Functions in Mode 1: In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled), port 1 is
automatically used for lower address output (A7 to A0). Figure 7.2 shows the pin functions in
mode 1.
A7 (output)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
Port 1
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
Figure 7.2 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 1)
107
Mode 2: In mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled), port 1 can provide lower
address output pins and general input pins. Each pin becomes a lower address output pin if its
P1DDR bit is set to 1, and a general input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Following a reset, all pins
are input pins. To be used for address output, their P1DDR bits must be set to 1. Figure 7.3 shows
the pin functions in mode 2.
Port 1
When P1DDR = 1
When P1DDR = 0
A7 (output)
P17 (input)
A6 (output)
P16 (input)
A5 (output)
P15 (input)
A4 (output)
P14 (input)
A3 (output)
P13 (input)
A2 (output)
P12 (input)
A1 (output)
P11 (input)
A0 (output)
P10 (input)
Figure 7.3 Pin Functions in Mode 2 (Port 1)
Mode 3: In mode 3 (single-chip mode), the input or output direction of each pin can be selected
individually. A pin becomes a general input pin when its P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 and a general
output pin when this bit is set to 1. Figure 7.4 shows the pin functions in mode 3.
P17 (input/output)
P16 (input/output)
P15 (input/output)
Port 1
P14 (input/output)
P13 (input/output)
P12 (input/output)
P11 (input/output)
P10 (input/output)
Figure 7.4 Pin Functions in Mode 3 (Port 1)
108
7.2.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port 1 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in modes 2 and 3. The
pull-up for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 2 or
3, set the corresponding P1PCR bit to 1 and clear the corresponding P1DDR bit to 0. P1PCR is
cleared to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software
standby mode, the previous state is maintained.
Table 7.3 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.3
States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 1)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P1PCR = 1 and P1DDR = 0, but off otherwise.
109
7.3
Port 2
7.3.1
Overview
Port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 7.5. The pin
functions differ depending on the operating mode.
Port 2 has built-in, programmable MOS input pull-up transistors that can be used in modes 2 and
3.
Pins in port 2 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive LEDs and
darlington transistors.
Port 2
Port 2 pins
Pin configuration
in mode 1
(expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
disabled)
Pin configuration
in mode 2
(expanded mode
with on-chip ROM
enabled)
P27/A15
A15 (output)
A15 (output)/P27 (input)
P26/A14
A14 (output)
A14 (output)/P26 (input)
P25/A13
A13 (output)
A13 (output)/P25 (input)
P24/A12
A12 (output)
A12 (output)/P24 (input)
P23/A11
A11 (output)
A11 (output)/P23 (input)
P22/A10
A10 (output)
A10 (output)/P22 (input)
P21/A9
A9 (output)
A9 (output)/P21 (input)
P20/A8
A8 (output)
A8 (output)/P20 (input)
Pin configuration in mode 3
(single-chip mode)
P27 (input/output)
P26 (input/output)
P25 (input/output)
P24 (input/output)
P23 (input/output)
P22 (input/output)
P21 (input/output)
P20 (input/output)
Figure 7.5 Port 2 Pin Configuration
110
7.3.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.4 summarizes the port 2 registers.
Table 7.4
Port 2 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 2 data direction register
P2DDR
W
H'FF (mode 1)
H'FFB1
H'00 (modes 2 and 3)
Port 2 data register
P2DR
R/W
H'00
H'FFB3
Port 2 input pull-up control
register
P2PCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFAD
Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
Mode 1
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Modes 2 and 3
P2DDR controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 2.
Mode 1: The P2DDR values are fixed at 1. Port 2 consists of upper address output pins. P2DDR
values cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
In hardware standby mode, the address bus is in the high-impedance state.
Mode 2: A pin in port 2 is used for address output if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and
for general input if this bit is cleared to 0.
Mode 3: A pin in port 2 is used for general output if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and
for general input if this bit is cleared to 0.
In modes 2 and 3, P2DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read
1. P2DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby
mode it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a
P2DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
111
Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P2DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P27 to P20. When a P2DDR bit is set to 1, if port
2 is read, the value in P2DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state. When a P2DDR
bit is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the pin state is obtained.
P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P2PCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P10PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 2. If
a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating input) and the corresponding P2PCR bit is set to 1, the
input pull-up transistor is turned on.
P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
112
7.3.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 2 has different pin functions in different modes. A separate description for each mode is given
below.
Pin Functions in Mode 1: In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled), port 2 is
automatically used for upper address output (A15 to A8). Figure 7.6 shows the pin functions in
mode 1.
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
Port 2
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
Figure 7.6 Pin Functions in Mode 1 (Port 2)
113
Mode 2: In mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled), port 2 can provide upper
address output pins and general input pins. Each pin becomes an upper address output pin if its
P2DDR bit is set to 1, and a general input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Following a reset, all pins
are input pins. To be used for address output, their P2DDR bits must be set to 1. Figure 7.7 shows
the pin functions in mode 2.
Port 2
When P2DDR = 1
When P2DDR = 0
A15 (output)
P27 (input)
A14 (output)
P26 (input)
A13 (output)
P25 (input)
A12 (output)
P24 (input)
A11 (output)
P23 (input)
A10 (output)
P22 (input)
A9 (output)
P21 (input)
A8 (output)
P20 (input)
Figure 7.7 Pin Functions in Mode 2 (Port 2)
Mode 3: In mode 3 (single-chip mode), the input or output direction of each pin can be selected
individually. A pin becomes a general input pin when its P2DDR bit is cleared to 0, and a general
output pin when this bit is set to 1. Figure 7.8 shows the pin functions in mode 3.
P27 (input/output)
P26 (input/output)
P25 (input/output)
Port 2
P24 (input/output)
P23 (input/output)
P22 (input/output)
P21 (input/output)
P20 (input/output)
Figure 7.8 Pin Functions in Mode 3 (Port 2)
114
7.3.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port 2 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in modes 2 and 3. The
pull-up for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 2 or
3, set the corresponding P2PCR bit to 1 and clear the corresponding P2DDR bit to 0. P2PCR is
cleared to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software
standby mode, the previous state is maintained.
Table 7.5 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.5
States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 2)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P2PCR = 1 and P2DDR = 0, but off otherwise.
115
7.4
Port 3
7.4.1
Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with the data bus and host interface data bus.
Figure 7.9 shows the pin configuration of port 3. The pin functions differ depending on the
operating mode.
Port 3 has built-in, programmable MOS input pull-up transistors that can be used in mode 3.
Pins in port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor.
Port 3
Port 3 pins
Pin configuration in mode 1
(expanded mode with on-chip
ROM disabled) and mode 2
(expanded mode with on-chip
ROM enabled)
P37/D7/HDB7
D7 (input/output)
P36/D6/HDB6
D6 (input/output)
P35/D5/HDB5
D5 (input/output)
P34/D4/HDB4
D4 (input/output)
P33/D3/HDB3
D3 (input/output)
P32/D2/HDB2
D2 (input/output)
P31/D1/HDB1
D1 (input/output)
P30/D0/HDB0
D0 (input/output)
Pin configuration in mode 3 (single-chip mode)
Master mode
Slave mode
P37 (input/output)
HDB7 (input/output)
P36 (input/output)
HDB6 (input/output)
P35 (input/output)
HDB5 (input/output)
P34 (input/output)
HDB4 (input/output)
P33 (input/output)
HDB3 (input/output)
P32 (input/output)
HDB2 (input/output)
P31 (input/output)
HDB1 (input/output)
P30 (input/output)
HDB0 (input/output)
Figure 7.9 Port 3 Pin Configuration
116
7.4.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.6 summarizes the port 3 registers.
Table 7.6
Port 3 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 3 data direction register
P3DDR
W
H'00
H'FFB4
Port 3 data register
P3DR
R/W
H'00
H'FFB6
Port 3 input pull-up control
register
P3PCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFAE
Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P3DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 3. P3DDR is
a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
Modes 1 and 2: In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) and mode 2 (expanded
mode with on-chip ROM enabled), the input/output directions designated by P3DDR are ignored.
Port 3 automatically consists of the input/output pins of the 8-bit data bus (D7 to D0).
The data bus is in the high-impedance state during reset, and during hardware and software
standby.
Mode 3: A pin in port 3 is used for general output if the corresponding P3DDR bit is set to 1, and
for general input if this bit is cleared to 0. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware
standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software
standby mode occurs while a P3DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output
state.
117
Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P37 to P30. When a P3DDR bit is set to 1, if port
3 is read, the value in P3DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state. When a P3DDR
bit is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the pin state is obtained.
P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control Register (P3PCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 3. If
a P3DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating input) and the corresponding P3PCR bit is set to 1, the
input pull-up transistor is turned on.
P3PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
The input pull-ups cannot be used in slave mode (when the host interface is enabled).
118
7.4.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 3 has different pin functions in different modes. A separate description for each mode is given
below.
Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 2: In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) and
mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled), port 3 is automatically used for the
input/output pins of the data bus (D7 to D0). Figure 7.10 shows the pin functions in modes 1 and 2.
Modes 1 and 2
D7 (input/output)
D6 (input/output)
D5 (input/output)
Port 3
D4 (input/output)
D3 (input/output)
D2 (input/output)
D1 (input/output)
D0 (input/output)
Figure 7.10 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 2 (Port 3)
119
Mode 3: In mode 3 (single-chip mode), when the host interface enable bit (HIE) is cleared to 0 in
the system control register (SYSCR), port 3 is a general-purpose input/output port. A pin becomes
an output pin when its P3DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin when this bit is cleared to 0.
When the HIE bit is set to 1, selecting slave mode, port 3 becomes the host interface data bus
(HDB7 to HDB0). For details, see section 14, Host Interface.
Figure 7.11 shows the pin functions in mode 3.
P37 (input/output)/HDB7 (input/output)
P36 (input/output)/HDB6 (input/output)
P35 (input/output)/HDB5 (input/output)
Port 3
P34 (input/output)/HDB4 (input/output)
P33 (input/output)/HDB3 (input/output)
P32 (input/output)/HDB2 (input/output)
P31 (input/output)/HDB1 (input/output)
P30 (input/output)/HDB0 (input/output)
Figure 7.11 Pin Functions in Mode 3 (Port 3)
7.4.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port 3 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in mode 3. The pull-up
for each bit can be turned on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up in mode 3, set the
corresponding P3PCR bit to 1 and clear the corresponding P3DDR bit to 0. P3PCR is cleared to
H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software standby
mode, the previous state is maintained.
Table 7.7 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.7
States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 3)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P3PCR = 1 and P3DDR = 0, but off otherwise.
120
7.5
Port 4
7.5.1
Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with input/output pins (TMRI0, TMRI1,
TMCI0, TMCI1, TMO0, TMO1) of 8-bit timers 0 and 1 and output pins (PW0, PW1) of PWM timers
0 and 1. In slave mode, P43 to P45 output host interrupt requests. Pins not used by timers or for
host interrupt requests are available for general input/output.
Figure 7.12 shows the pin configuration of port 4.
Pins in port 4 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor.
Port 4 pins
P47/PW1
P46/PW0
P45/TMRI1/HIRQ12
Port 4
P44/TMO1/HIRQ1
P43/TMCI1/HIRQ11
P42/TMRI0
P41/TMO0
P40/TMCI0
Pin configuration in modes 1 to 3
Master mode
Slave mode
P47 (input/output)/PW1 (output)
P47 (input/output)/PW1 (output)
P46 (input/output)/PW0 (output)
P46 (input/output)/PW0 (output)
P45 (input/output)/TMRI1 (input)
HIRQ12 (output)/TMRI1 (input)
P44 (input/output)/TMO1 (output)
HIRQ1 (output)/TMO1 (output)
P43 (input/output)/TMCI1 (input)
HIRQ11 (output)/TMCI1 (input)
P42 (input/output)/TMRI0 (input)
P42 (input/output)/TMRI0 (input)
P41 (input/output)/TMO0 (output)
P41 (input/output)/TMO0 (output)
P40 (input/output)/TMCI0 (input)
P40 (input/output)/TMCI0 (input)
Figure 7.12 Port 4 Pin Configuration
121
7.5.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.8 summarizes the port 4 registers.
Table 7.8
Port 4 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 4 data direction register
P4DDR
W
H'00
H'FFB5
Port 4 data register
P4DR
R/W
H'00
H'FFB7
Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P4DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 4. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding P4DDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0.
P4DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
P4DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a P4DDR bit
is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
If a transition to software standby mode occurs while port 4 is being used by an on-chip
supporting module (for example, for 8-bit timer output), the on-chip supporting module will be
initialized, so the pin will revert to general-purpose input/output, controlled by P4DDR and P4DR.
122
Port 4 Data Register (P4DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P4DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P47 to P40. When a P4DDR bit is set to 1, if port
4 is read, the value in P4DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state. When a P4DDR
bit is cleared to 0, if port 4 is read the pin state is obtained. This also applies to pins used by onchip supporting modules.
P4DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
123
7.5.3
Pin Functions
Port 4 has different pin functions depending on whether the chip is or is not operating in slave
mode. Table 7.9 indicates the pin functions of port 4.
Table 7.9
Port 4 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P47/PW1
Bit OE in TCR of PWM timer 1 and bit P47DDR select the pin function as follows
OE
P47DDR
Pin function
P46/PW0
0
0
1
P47 input
P47 output
0
1
PW1 output
Bit OE in TCR of PWM timer 0 and bit P46DDR select the pin function as follows
OE
P46DDR
Pin function
P45/TMRI1/
HIRQ12
1
0
1
0
1
0
P46 input
P46 output
1
PW0 output
Bit P45DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
P45DDR
0
Operating mode
—
Not slave mode
Slave mode
P45 input
P45 output
HIRQ12 output
Pin function
1
TMRI1 input*
Note: * TMRI1 input is usable when bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 are both set to 1 in
TCR of 8-bit timer 1
P44/TMO1/
HIRQ1
Bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of 8-bit timer 1, bit P4 4DDR, and the operating mode
select the pin function as follows
OS3 to 0
Not all 0
P44DDR
0
Operating mode
—
Not slave
mode
Slave mode
—
P44 input
P44 output
HIRQ1 output
TMO1 output
Pin function
124
All 0
1
—
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P43/TMCI1/
HIRQ11
Bit P43DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
P43DDR
0
Operating mode
—
Not slave mode
Slave mode
P43 input
P43 output
HIRQ11 output
Pin function
1
TMCI1 input*
Note: * TMCI1 input is usable when bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR of 8-bit timer 1
select an external clock source
P42/TMRI0
P42DDR
Pin function
0
1
P42 input
P42 output
TMRI0 input*
Note: * TMRI0 input is usable when bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 are both set to 1 in
TCR of 8-bit timer 0
P41/TMO0
Bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of 8-bit timer 0 and bit P4 1DDR select the pin function
as follows
OS3 to 0
P41DDR
Pin function
All 0
Not all 0
0
1
0
P41 input
P41 output
1
TMO0 output
P40/TMCI0
P40DDR
Pin function
0
1
P40 input
P40 output
TMCI0 input*
Note: * TMCI0 input is usable when bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR of 8-bit timer 0
select an external clock source
125
7.6
Port 5
7.6.1
Overview
Port 5 is a 3-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with input/output pins (TxD 0, RxD0, SCK0) of
serial communication interface 0. The port 5 pin functions are the same in all operating modes.
Figure 7.13 shows the pin configuration of port 5.
Pins in port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor.
Port 5 pins
P52 (input/output)/SCK0 (input/output)
Port 5
P51 (input/output)/RxD0 (input)
P50 (input/output)/TxD0 (output)
Figure 7.13 Port 5 Pin Configuration
7.6.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.10 summarizes the port 5 registers.
Table 7.10 Port 5 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 5 data direction register
P5DDR
W
H'F8
H'FFB8
Port 5 data register
P5DR
R/W
H'F8
H'FFBA
126
Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
P5DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 5. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0.
P5DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
P5DDR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a P5DDR bit
is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
If a transition to software standby mode occurs while port 5 is being used by the SCI, the SCI will
be initialized, so the pin will revert to general-purpose input/output, controlled by P5DDR and
P5DR.
Port 5 Data Register (P5DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P52 to P50. Bits 7 to 3 are reserved. They cannot
be modified, and are always read as 1.
When a P5DDR bit is set to 1, if port 5 is read, the value in P5DR is obtained directly, regardless
of the actual pin state. When a P5DDR bit is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the pin state is obtained.
This also applies to pins used as SCI pins.
P5DR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
127
7.6.3
Pin Functions
Port 5 has the same pin functions in each operating mode. All pins can also be used as SCI0
input/output pins. Table 7.11 indicates the pin functions of port 5.
Table 7.11 Port 5 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P52/SCK0
Bit C/A in SMR of SCI0, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of SCI0, and bit P52DDR
select the pin function as follows
CKE1
0
C/A
0
CKE0
P52DDR
Pin function
P51/RxD0
0
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
—
P52
input
P52
output
SCK 0
output
SCK 0
output
SCK 0
input
Bit RE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P51DDR select the pin function as follows
P51DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
—
P51 input
P51 output
RxD0 input
Bit TE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P50DDR select the pin function as follows
TE
P50DDR
Pin function
128
1
0
RE
P50/TxD0
1
0
1
0
1
—
P50 input
P50 output
TxD0 output
7.7
Port 6
7.7.1
Overview
Port 6 is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with input/output pins (FTOA, FTOB, FTIA
to FTID, FTCI) of the 16-bit free-running timer (FRT), with key-sense input pins, and with IRQ6
and IRQ7 input pins. The port 6 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 7.14
shows the pin configuration of port 6.
Port 6 has built-in, programmable MOS input pull-up transistors.
Pins in port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor.
Port 6 pins
P67 (input/output)/IRQ7 (input)/KEYIN7 (input)
P66 (input/output)/FTOB (output)/IRQ6 (input)/KEYIN6 (input)
P65 (input/output)/FTID (input)/KEYIN5 (input)
Port 6
P64 (input/output)/FTIC (input)/KEYIN4 (input)
P63 (input/output)/FTIB (input)/KEYIN3 (input)
P62 (input/output)/FTIA (input)/KEYIN2 (input)
P61 (input/output)/FTOA (output)/KEYIN1 (input)
P60 (input/output)/FTCI (input)/KEYIN0 (input)
Figure 7.14 Port 6 Pin Configuration
7.7.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.12 summarizes the port 6 registers.
Table 7.12 Port 6 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 6 data direction register
P6DDR
W
H'00
H'FFB9
Port 6 data register
P6DR
R/W
H'00
H'FFBB
Port 6 input pull-up control
register
KMPCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFF2
129
Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P6DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 6. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding P6DDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0.
P6DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
P6DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a P6DDR bit
is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
If a transition to software standby mode occurs while port 6 is being used by the free-running
timer, the timer will be initialized, so the pin will revert to general-purpose input/output,
controlled by P6DDR and P6DR.
Port 6 Data Register (P6DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P6DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P67 to P60. When a P6DDR bit is set to 1, if port
6 is read, the value in P6DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state. When a P6DDR
bit is cleared to 0, if port 6 is read the pin state is obtained. This also applies to pins used as FRT
pins.
P6DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
130
Port 6 Input Pull-Up Control Register (KMPCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
KM7PCR KM6PCR KM5PCR KM4PCR KM3PCR KM2PCR KM1PCR KM0PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
KMPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the input pull-up transistors in port 6. If
a P6DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating input) and the corresponding KMPCR bit is set to 1, the
input pull-up transistor is turned on.
KMPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values.
131
7.7.3
Pin Functions
Port 6 has the same pin functions in all operating modes. The pins are multiplexed with FRT
input/output, IRQ6 and IRQ7 input, and key-sense input. Table 7.13 indicates the pin functions of
port 6.
Table 7.13 Port 6 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P67/IRQ7/
KEYIN7
P67DDR
0
Pin function
1
P67 input
P67 output
IRQ7 input* or KEYIN7 input
Note: * IRQ7 input is usable when bit IRQ7E is set to 1 in IER
P66/FTOB/
IRQ6/KEYIN6
Bit OEB in TOCR of the FRT and bit P6 6DDR select the pin function as follows
OEB
P66DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P66 input
P66 output
0
1
FTOB output
IRQ6 input* or KEYIN6 input
Note: * IRQ6 input is usable when bit IRQ6E is set to 1 in IER
P65/FTID/
KEYIN5
P65DDR
Pin function
0
1
P65 input
P65 output
FTID input or KEYIN5 input
P64/FTIC/
KEYIN4
P64DDR
Pin function
0
1
P64 input
P64 output
FTIC input or KEYIN4 input
132
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P63/FTIB/
KEYIN3
P63DDR
Pin function
0
1
P63 input
P63 output
FTIB input or KEYIN3 input
P62/FTIA/
KEYIN2
P62DDR
Pin function
0
1
P62 input
P62 output
FTIA input or KEYIN2 input
P61/FTOA/
KEYIN1
Bit OEA in TOCR of the FRT and bit P6 1DDR select the pin function as follows
OEA
P61DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
0
P61 input
P61 output
1
FTOA output
KEYIN1 input
P60/FTCI/
KEYIN0
P60DDR
Pin function
0
1
P60 input
P60 output
FTCI input* or KEYIN0 input
Note: * FTCI input is usable when bits CKS1 to CKS0 in TCR of the FRT select
an external clock source
133
7.7.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port 6 has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors. The pull-up for each bit can be turned
on and off individually. To turn on an input pull-up, set the corresponding KMPCR bit to 1 and
clear the corresponding P6DDR bit to 0. KMPCR is cleared to H'00 by a reset and in hardware
standby mode, turning all input pull-ups off. In software standby mode, the previous state is
maintained.
Table 7.14 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.14 States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port 6)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
2
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if KMPCR = 1 and P6DDR = 0, but off otherwise.
134
7.8
Port 7
7.8.1
Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit input port that also provides the analog input pins for the A/D converter and
analog output pins for the D/A converter. The pin functions are the same in all modes. Figure 7.15
shows the pin configuration of port 7.
Port 7 pins
P77 (input)/AN7 (input)/DA1 (output)
P76 (input)/AN6 (input)/DA0 (output)
P75 (input)/AN5 (input)
P74 (input)/AN4 (input)
Port 7
P73 (input)/AN3 (input)
P72 (input)/AN2 (input)
P71 (input)/AN1 (input)
P70 (input)/AN0 (input)
Figure 7.15 Port 7 Pin Configuration
7.8.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.15 summarizes the port 7 registers. Port 7 is an input port, so there is no data direction
register.
Table 7.15 Port 7 Register
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 7 input data register
P7PIN
R
Undetermined
H'FFBE
Note: The port 7 input data register (P7PIN) has the same address as the port B data direction
register (PBDDR).
135
Port 7 Input Data Register (P7PIN)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins P77 to P7 0.
When P7PIN is read, the pin states are always read. P7PIN is a read-only register and cannot be
written to. Write access results in writing to PBDDR.
7.9
Port 8
7.9.1
Overview
Port 8 is a 7-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with host interface (HIF) input pins (HA0,
GA20, CS1, IOR, IOW, CS2), with input/output pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) of serial communication
interface 1, with the I2C clock input/output pin (SCL), and with interrupt input pins (IRQ5 to
IRQ3).
Figure 7.16 shows the pin configuration of port 8. The configuration of the pin functions of pins
P8 5 and P84 will depend on the value of bit STAC in STCR. Pins P86 and P83 to P80 are unaffected
by bit STAC.
Pins in port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor. Pin P86 can be driven as a bus buffer, as shown in section 13, I2C Bus
Interface.
136
Port 8
Port 8 pins
Pin configuration in master mode,
or when STAC bit is 1
P86/SCK1/IRQ5/SCL
P86 (input/output)/IRQ5 (input)/SCK1 (input/output)/SCL (output)
P85/RxD1/IRQ4/CS2
P85 (input/output)/IRQ4 (input)/RxD1 (input)
P84/TxD1/IRQ3/IOW
P84 (input/output)/IRQ3 (input)/TxD1 (output)
P83/IOR
P83 (input/output)
P82/CS1
P82 (input/output)
P81/GA20
P81 (input/output)
P80/HA0
P80 (input/output)
Pin configuration in slave mode
When STAC bit is 0
P86 (input/output)/IRQ5 (input)/SCK1 (input/output)/SCL (input/output)
IRQ4 (input)/CS2 (input)
IRQ3 (input)/IOW (input)
IOR (input)
CS1 (input)
P81 (input/output)/GA20 (output)
HA0 (input)
Figure 7.16 Port 8 Pin Configuration
7.9.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.16 summarizes the port 8 registers.
Table 7.16 Port 8 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port 8 data direction register
P8DDR
W
H'80
H'FFBD
Port 8 data register
P8DR
R/W
H'80
H'FFBF
Note: The port 8 data direction register (P8DDR) has the same address as the port B input data
register (PBPIN).
137
Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR)
Bit
7
—
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P86DDR P85DDR P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P8DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 8. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding P8DDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0. P8DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
Bit 7 is a reserved bit that always reads 1.
P8DDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
P8DDR retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a
P8DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
Port 8 Data Register (P8DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P8DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P86 to P80. Bit 7 is a reserved bit that always
reads 1.
When a P8DDR bit is set to 1, if port 8 is read, the value in P8DR is obtained directly, regardless
of the actual pin state. When a P8DDR bit is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the pin state is obtained.
This also applies to pins used by on-chip supporting modules.
P8DR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its existing values.
138
7.9.3
Pin Functions
Pins P86 to P80 are multiplexed with HIF input/output, SCI1 input/output, I2C clock input/output,
and IRQ5 to IRQ3 input. Table 7.17 indicates the functions of pins P86 to P80.
Table 7.17 Port 8 Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P86/IRQ5/
SCK 1/SCL
Bit C/A in SMR of SCI1, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of SCI1, bit ICE in ICCR,
and bit P8 6DDR select the pin function as follows
ICE
0
CKE1
0
C/A
Pin function
1
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
—
0
CKE0
P86DDR
1
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
P86
input
P86
output
SCK 1
output
SCK 1
output
SCK 1
intput
SCL
input/
output
IRQ5 input*
Note: * IRQ5 input is usable when bit IRQ5E is set to 1 in IER
P85/IRQ4/
CS 2/RxD1
Bit RE in SCR of SCI1, bit STAC in STCR, bit P8 5DDR, and the operating mode
select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
Not slave mode
STAC
0
RE
—
P85DDR
—
0
1
—
0
1
—
CS 2
input
P85
input
P85
output
RxD1
input
P85
input
P85
output
RxD1
input
Pin function
1
0
—
1
0
1
IRQ4 input*
Note: * IRQ4 input is usable when bit IRQ4E is set to 1 in IER
139
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P84/IRQ3/
IOW/TxD1
Bit TE in SCR of SCI1, bit STAC in STCR, bit P8 4DDR, and the operating mode
select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
Not slave mode
STAC
0
TE
—
P84DDR
—
0
1
—
0
1
—
IOW
input
P84
input
P84
output
TxD1
output
P84
input
P84
output
TxD1
output
Pin function
1
0
—
1
0
1
IRQ3 input*
Note: * IRQ3 input is usable when bit IRQ3E is set to 1 in IER
P83/IOR
Bit P83DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
P83DDR
Pin function
P82/CS 1
—
0
1
IOR input
P83 input
P83 output
Bit P82DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
P82DDR
Pin function
P81/GA 20
0
1
CS 1 input
P82 input
P82 output
Bit P81DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
P81DDR
0
FGA20E
—
Pin function
1
0
1
—
P81 input
Not slave
mode
P81 output
Slave mode
GA20 output
Bit P80DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
P80DDR
Pin function
140
Not slave mode
—
Operating mode
P80/HA0
Not slave mode
Slave mode
Not slave mode
—
0
1
HA 0 input
P80 input
P80 output
7.10
Port 9
7.10.1
Overview
Port 9 is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with interrupt input pins (IRQ0 to IRQ2),
input/output pins for bus control signals (RD, WR, AS, WAIT), an input pin (ADTRG) for the
A/D converter, an output pin (ø) for the system clock, host interface (HIF) input pins (ECS2,
EIOW), and the I2C data input/output pin (SDA). Figure 7.17 shows the pin configuration of port
9. The functions of pins P91 and P90 are configured according to bit STAC in STCR. Pins P97 to
P9 2 are unaffected by bit STAC.
Pins in port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor. Pin P97 can be driven as a bus buffer, as shown in section 13, I2C Bus
Interface.
Port 9
Port 9 pins
Pin configuration in mode 1 (expanded mode
with on-chip ROM disabled) and mode 2
(expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled)
P97/WAIT/SDA
P97 (input/output)/WAIT (input)/SDA (input/output)
P96/ø
ø (output)
P95/AS
AS (output)
P94/WR
WR (output)
P93/RD
RD (output)
P92/IRQ0
P92 (input/output)/IRQ0 (input)
Pin configuration in mode 3 (single-chip mode)
P97 (input/output)/SDA (input/output)
P96 (input)/ø (output)
P95 (input/output)
P94 (input/output)
P93 (input/output)
P92 (input/output)/IRQ0 (input)
Figure 7.17 Port 9 Pin Configuration
141
Port 9
Pin configuration in master mode,
or when STAC bit is 0
P91/IRQ1/EIOW
P91 (input/output)/IRQ1 (input)
P90/IRQ2/ADTRG/ECS2
P90 (input/output)/IRQ2 (input)/ADTRG (input)
Pin configuration in slave mode
when STAC bit is 1
IRQ1 (input)/EIOW (input)
IRQ2 (input)/ECS2 (input)
Figure 7.17 Port 9 Pin Configuration (cont)
7.10.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.18 summarizes the port 9 registers.
Table 7.18 Port 9 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Port 9 data direction register
P9DDR
W
H'40 (modes 1 and 2) H'FFC0
H'00 (mode 3)
Port 9 data register
P9DR
R/W*1
Undetermined *2
Notes: *1 Bit 6 is read-only.
*2 Bit 6 is undetermined. Other bits are initially 0.
142
Address
H'FFC1
Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Modes 1 and 2
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
—
W
W
W
W
W
W
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Mode 3
P9DDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port 9. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding P9DDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0. In modes 1 and 2, P96DDR is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified.
P9DDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, all bits always read 1.
P9DDR is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The initial value is H'40 in modes
1 and 2, and H'00 in mode 3. In software standby mode P9DDR retains its existing values, so if a
transition to software standby mode occurs while a P9DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin
remains in the output state.
Port 9 Data Register (P9DR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Initial value
0
—*
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Determined by the level at pin P9 6.
P9DR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins P97 to P90. When a P9DDR bit is set to 1, if port
9 is read, the value in P9DR is obtained directly, regardless of the actual pin state, except for P96.
When a P9DDR bit is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the pin state is obtained. This also applies to
pins used by on-chip supporting modules and for bus control signals. P96 always returns the pin
state.
P9DR pins other than P96 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software
standby mode it retains its existing values.
143
7.10.3
Pin Functions
Port 9 has one set of pin functions in modes 1 and 2, and a different set of pin functions in mode 3.
The pins are multiplexed with IRQ0 to IRQ2 input, bus control signal input/output, A/D converter
input, system clock (ø) output, host interface input (ECS2, EIOW), and I 2C data input/output
(SDA). Table 7.19 indicates the pin functions of port 9.
Table 7.19 Port 9 Pin Functions
P97/WAIT/SDA
Bit ICE in ICCR, bit P97DDR, the wait mode as determined by WSCR, and the
operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Wait mode
—
0
1
—
0
1
—
WAIT
input
P97
input
P97
output
SDA
input/
output
P97
input
P97
output
SDA
input/
output
1
0
1
Bit P96DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Modes 1 and 2
Mode 3
P96DDR
Always 1
0
1
Pin function
ø output
P96 input
ø output
Bit P95DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
P95DDR
Pin function
Modes 1 and 2
Mode 3
—
0
1
AS output
P95 input
P95 output
Bit P94DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
P94DDR
Pin function
144
0
—
P97DDR
Operating mode
P94/WR
WAIT
not used
—
Operating mode
P95/AS
WAIT
used
Mode 3
ICE
Pin function
P96/ø
Modes 1 and 2
Modes 1 and 2
Mode 3
—
0
1
WR output
P94 input
P94 output
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
P93/RD
Bit P93DDR and the operating mode select the pin function as follows
Operating mode
Modes 1 and 2
P93DDR
Pin function
Mode 3
—
0
1
RD output
P93 input
P93 output
P92/IRQ0
P92DDR
Pin function
0
1
P92 input
P92 output
IRQ0 input*
Note: * IRQ0 input can be used when bit IRQ0E is set to 1 in IER
P91/IRQ1/
EIOW
Bit STAC in STCR, bit P9 1DDR, and the operating mode select the pin function
as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
STAC
P91DDR
Pin function
0
Not slave mode
1
—
0
1
—
0
1
P91 input
P91 output
EIOW
input
P91 input
P91 output
IRQ1 input*
Note: * IRQ1 input can be used when bit IRQ1E is set to 1 in IER
P90/IRQ2/
ADTRG/ECS 2
Bit STAC in STCR, bit P9 0DDR, and the operating mode select the pin function
as follows
Operating mode
Slave mode
STAC
P90DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
P90 input
Not slave mode
1
—
P90 output ECS 2 input
IRQ2 input and
ADTRG input*2
*1
IRQ2
input *1
—
0
1
P90 input
P90 output
IRQ2 input*1 and
ADTRG input*2
Notes: *1 IRQ2 input can be used when bit IRQ2E is set to 1 in IER
*2 ADTRG input can be used when bit TRGE is set to 1 in ADCR
145
7.11
Port A
7.11.1
Overview
Port A is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with key-sense input pins. The port A pin
functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 7.18 shows the pin configuration of port A.
Port A has built-in, programming MOS input pull-up transistors.
Pins in port A can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor. Pins PA4, PA5, PA6, and PA7 can be driven as bus buffers, as shown in
section 13, I2C Bus Interface.
Port A pins
PA7 (input/output)/KEYIN15 (input)
PA6 (input/output)/KEYIN14 (input)
PA5 (input/output)/KEYIN13 (input)
PA4 (input/output)/KEYIN12 (input)
Port A
PA3 (input/output)/KEYIN11 (input)
PA2 (input/output)/KEYIN10 (input)
PA1 (input/output)/KEYIN9 (input)
PA0 (input/output)/KEYIN8 (input)
Figure 7.18 Port A Pin Configuration
7.11.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.20 summarizes the port A registers.
Table 7.20 Port A Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port A data direction register
PADDR
W
H'00
H'FFAB
Port A output data register
PAODR
R/W
H'00
H'FFAA
Port A input data register
PAPIN
R
Undetermined
H'FFAB
Note: The data direction register (PADDR) and input data register (PAPIN) have the same
address.
146
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PADDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port A. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding PADDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0.
PADDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a PADDR bit
is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
Port A Output Data Register (PAODR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PAODR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins PA7 to PA 0. PAODR can always be written to
and read, regardless of the PADDR settings.
PAODR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values.
Port A Input Data Register (PAPIN)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
Initial value
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins PA 7 to PA 0.
When PAPIN is read, the pin states are always read.
147
7.11.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port A has the same pin functions in all operating modes. Table 7.21 indicates the pin functions of
port A.
Table 7.21 Port A Pin Functions
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA7/KEYIN15
PA7DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA7 input
PA7 output
KEYIN15 input
This pin is driven as a bus buffer when bit IICS is set to 1 in STCR
PA6/KEYIN14
PA6DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA6 input
PA6 output
KEYIN14 input
This pin is driven as a bus buffer when bit IICS is set to 1 in STCR
PA5/KEYIN13
PA5DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA5 input
PA5 output
KEYIN13 input
This pin is driven as a bus buffer when bit IICS is set to 1 in STCR
PA4/KEYIN12
PA4DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA4 input
PA4 output
KEYIN12 input
This pin is driven as a bus buffer when bit IICS is set to 1 in STCR
PA3/KEYIN11
PA3DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA3 input
PA3 output
KEYIN11 input
148
Pin
Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA2/KEYIN10
PA2DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA2 input
PA2 output
KEYIN10 input
PA1/KEYIN9
PA1DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA1 input
PA1 output
KEYIN9 input
PA0/KEYIN8
PA0DDR
Pin function
0
1
PA0 input
PA0 output
KEYIN8 input
7.11.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port A has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in all modes.
An input pull-up transistor is turned on if 1 is written in the corresponding PAODR bit while the
corresponding PADDR bit is cleared to 0. The input pull-ups are turned off by a reset and in
hardware standby mode.
Table 7.22 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.22 States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port A)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
2
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if PAODR = 1 and PADDR = 0, but off otherwise.
149
7.12
Port B
7.12.1
Overview
Port B is an 8-bit input/output port that is multiplexed with the host interface data bus. The pin
functions differ depending on the operating mode. Figure 7.19 shows the pin configuration of port
B.
Port B has program-controllable built-in MOS input pull-up transistors.
Pins in port B can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor.
Pin configuration in mode 1
(expanded mode with on-chip ROM
disabled) and mode 2 (expanded
mode with on-chip ROM enabled)
Port B
Port B pins
Master mode
Slave mode
PB7/XDB7
PB7 (input/output)
XDB7 (input/output)
PB6/XDB6
PB6 (input/output)
XDB6 (input/output)
PB5/XDB5
PB5 (input/output)
XDB5 (input/output)
PB4/XDB4
PB4 (input/output)
XDB4 (input/output)
PB3/XDB3
PB3 (input/output)
XDB3 (input/output)
PB2/XDB2
PB2 (input/output)
XDB2 (input/output)
PB1/XDB1
PB1 (input/output)
XDB1 (input/output)
PB0/XDB0
PB0 (input/output)
XDB0 (input/output)
Pin configuration in mode 3
(single-chip mode)
PB7 (input/output)
PB6 (input/output)
PB5 (input/output)
PB4 (input/output)
PB3 (input/output)
PB2 (input/output)
PB1 (input/output)
PB0 (input/output)
Figure 7.19 Port B Pin Configuration
150
7.12.2
Register Configuration and Descriptions
Table 7.23 summarizes the port B registers.
Table 7.23 Port B Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Port B data direction register
PBDDR
W
H'00
H'FFBE
Port B output data register
PBODR
R/W
H'00
H'FFBC
Port B input data register
PBPIN
R
Undetermind
H'FFBD
Note: The port B data direction register (PBDDR) and port 7 input data register 7 (P7PIN) have
the same address.
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
PBDDR is an 8-bit register that controls the input/output direction of each pin in port B. A pin
functions as an output pin if the corresponding PBDDR bit is set to 1, and as an input pin if this bit
is cleared to 0.
PBDDR is a write-only register. Read data is invalid. If read, the values of the port 7 data input
register (P7PIN) are returned, indicating the pin levels of port 7.
PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values, so if a transition to software standby mode occurs while a PBDDR bit
is set to 1, the corresponding pin remains in the output state.
151
Port B Output Data Register (PBODR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PBODR is an 8-bit register that stores data for pins PB7 to PB0. PBODR can always be written to
and read, regardless of the PBDDR settings.
PBODR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its existing values.
Port B Input Data Register (PBPIN)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
Initial value
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins PB 7 to PB 0.
When PBPIN is read, the pin states are always read.
152
7.12.3
Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port B has different pin functions in different modes. A separate description for each mode is
given below.
Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 2: In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) and
mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled), when the host interface enable bit (HIE) is
cleared to 0 in the system control register (SYSCR), port B is a general-purpose input/output port.
When the HIE bit is set to 1, selecting slave mode, port B becomes the host interface data bus
(XDB7 to XDB0). PBODR and PBDDR should be cleared to H'00 in slave mode. For details, see
section 14, Host Interface.
Figure 7.20 shows the pin functions in modes 1 and 2.
PB7 (input/output)/XDB7 (input/output)
PB6 (input/output)/XDB6 (input/output)
PB5 (input/output)/XDB5 (input/output)
Port B
PB4 (input/output)/XDB4 (input/output)
PB3 (input/output)/XDB3 (input/output)
PB2 (input/output)/XDB2 (input/output)
PB1 (input/output)/XDB1 (input/output)
PB0 (input/output)/XDB0 (input/output)
Figure 7.20 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 2 (Port B)
153
Pin Functions in Mode 3: In mode 3 (single-chip mode), each pin can be designated for general
input or output. A pin becomes an output pin when its PBDDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin
when this bit is cleared to 0. Figure 7.21 shows the pin functions in mode 3.
Mode 3
PB7 (input/output)
PB6 (input/output)
PB5 (input/output)
Port B
PB4 (input/output)
PB3 (input/output)
PB2 (input/output)
PB1 (input/output)
PB0 (input/output)
Figure 7.21 Pin Functions in Mode 3 (Port B)
7.12.4
Input Pull-Up Transistors
Port B has built-in programmable input pull-up transistors that are available in mode 3. The pullup for each bit can be turned on and off individually.
An input pull-up transistor is turned on in mode 3 if 1 is written in the corresponding PBODR bit
while the corresponding PBDDR bit is cleared to 0.
The input pull-ups are turned off by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby
mode, the previous state is maintained.
Table 7.24 indicates the states of the input pull-up transistors in each operating mode.
Table 7.24 States of Input Pull-Up Transistors (Port B)
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby
Software Standby
Other Operating Modes
1
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
2
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
3
Off
Off
On/off
On/off
Notes: Off:
The input pull-up transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if PBDR = 1 and PBDDR = 0, but off otherwise.
154
Section 8 16-Bit Free-Running Timer
8.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module that uses a 16-bit freerunning counter as a time base. Applications of the FRT module include rectangular-wave output
(up to two independent waveforms), input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external
clock periods.
8.1.1
Features
The features of the free-running timer module are listed below.
• Selection of four clock sources
The free-running counter can be driven by an internal clock source (øP/2, øP/8, or øP/32), or an
external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter).
• Two independent comparators
Each comparator can generate an independent waveform.
• Four input capture channels
The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal.
The four input capture registers can be used separately, or in a buffer mode.
• Counter can be cleared under program control
The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A.
• Seven independent interrupts
Compare-match A and B, input capture A to D, and overflow interrupts are requested
independently.
155
8.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the free-running timer.
Internal
clock sources
øP/2
øP/8
øP/32
External
clock source
FTCI
Clock select
Clock
OCRA (H/L)
Comparematch A
Comparator A
FTOA
Overflow
FTOB
Clear
Comparator B
OCRB (H/L)
Control
logic
Capture
FTIA
ICRA (H/L)
ICRB (H/L)
FTIB
Internal
data bus
Module data bus
Comparematch B
Bus interface
FRC (H/L)
ICRC (H/L)
FTIC
ICRD (H/L)
FTID
TCSR
TIER
TCR
TOCR
ICIA
ICIB
ICIC
ICID
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Legend:
FRC:
OCRA, B:
ICRA, B, C, D:
TCSR:
Interrupt signals
Free-running counter (16 bits)
Output compare register A, B (16 bits)
Input capture register A, B, C, D (16 bits)
Timer control/status register (8 bits)
TIER: Timer interrupt enable register (8 bits)
TCR: Timer control register (8 bits)
TOCR: Timer output compare control
register (8 bits)
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer
156
8.1.3
Input and Output Pins
Table 8.1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module.
Table 8.1
Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Counter clock input
FTCI
Input
Input of external free-running counter
clock signal
Output compare A
FTOA
Output
Output controlled by comparator A
Output compare B
FTOB
Output
Output controlled by comparator B
Input capture A
FTIA
Input
Trigger for capturing current count into
input capture register A
Input capture B
FTIB
Input
Trigger for capturing current count into
input capture register B
Input capture C
FTIC
Input
Trigger for capturing current count into
input capture register C
Input capture D
FTID
Input
Trigger for capturing current count into
input capture register D
157
8.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 8.2 lists the registers of the free-running timer module.
Table 8.2
Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Timer interrupt enable register
TIER
R/W
*1
Initial
Value
Address
H'01
H'FF90
H'00
H'FF91
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)
Free-running counter (high)
FRC (H)
R/W
H'00
H'FF92
FRC (L)
R/W
H'00
H'FF93
OCRA/B (H)
R/W
H'FF
H'FF94*2
Output compare register A/B (low)*2
OCRA/B (L)
R/W
H'FF
H'FF95*2
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
H'FF96
Timer output compare control register
TOCR
R/W
H'E0
H'FF97
Input capture register A (high)
ICRA (H)
R
H'00
H'FF98
Input capture register A (low)
ICRA (L)
R
H'00
H'FF99
Input capture register B (high)
ICRB (H)
R
H'00
H'FF9A
Input capture register B (low)
ICRB (L)
R
H'00
H'FF9B
Input capture register C (high)
ICRC (H)
R
H'00
H'FF9C
Input capture register C (low)
ICRC (L)
R
H'00
H'FF9D
Input capture register D (high)
ICRD (H)
R
H'00
H'FF9E
Input capture register D (low)
ICRD (L)
R
H'00
H'FF9F
Free-running counter (low)
Output compare register A/B (high)
*2
Notes: *1 Software can write a 0 to clear bits 7 to 1, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
*2 OCRA and OCRB share the same addresses. Access is controlled by the OCRS
bit in TOCR.
158
8.2
Register Descriptions
8.2.1
Free-Running Counter (FRC)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated from a
clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock select 1 and 0 bits (CKS1 and CKS0) of the
timer control register (TCR).
When FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer control/status
register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Because FRC is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when FRC is written or
read. See section 8.3, CPU Interface, for details.
FRC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in the standby modes.
8.2.2
Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually
compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output compare
flag (OCFA or OCFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR).
In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in the timer output compare control register
(TOCR) is set to 1, when the output compare register and FRC values match, the logic level
selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin
(FTOA or FTOB). Following a reset, the FTOA and FTOB output levels are 0 until the first
compare-match.
OCRA and OCRB share the same address. They are differentiated by the OCRS bit in TOCR. A
temporary register (TEMP) is used for write access, as explained in section 8.3, CPU Interface.
OCRA and OCRB are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in the standby modes.
159
8.2.3
Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
There are four input capture registers A to D, each of which is a 16-bit read-only register.
When the rising or falling edge of the signal at an input capture pin (FTIA to FTID) is detected,
the current FRC value is copied to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA to ICRD).* At
the same time, the corresponding input capture flag (ICFA to ICFD) in the timer control/status
register (TCSR) is set to 1. The input capture edge is selected by the input edge select bits
(IEDGA to IEDGD) in the timer control register (TCR).
Note: * The FRC contents are transferred to the input capture register regardless of the value of the
input capture flag (ICFA/B/C/D).
Input capture can be buffered by using the input capture registers in pairs. When the BUFEA bit in
TCR is set to 1, ICRC is used as a buffer register for ICRA as shown in figure 8.2. When an FTIA
input is received, the old ICRA contents are moved into ICRC, and the new FRC count is copied
into ICRA.
BUFEA
IEDGA IEDGC
FTIA
Edge detect and
capture signal
generating circuit
ICRC
BUFEA:
IEDGA:
IEDGC:
ICRC:
ICRA:
FRC:
ICRA
Buffer enable A
Input edge select A
Input edge select C
Input capture register C
Input capture register A
Free-running counter
Figure 8.2 Input Capture Buffering (Example)
160
FRC
Similarly, when the BUFEB bit in TCR is set to 1, ICRD is used as a buffer register for ICRB.
When input capture is buffered, if the two input edge bits are set to different values (IEDGA ≠
IEDGC or IEDGB ≠ IEDGD), then input capture is triggered on both the rising and falling edges
of the FTIA or FTIB input signal. If the two input edge bits are set to the same value (IEDGA =
IEDGC or IEDGB = IEDGD), then input capture is triggered on only one edge. See table 8.3.
Table 8.3
Buffered Input Capture Edge Selection (Example)
IEDGA
IEDGC
Input Capture Edge
0
0
Captured on falling edge of input capture A (FTIA)
1
Captured on both rising and falling edges of input capture A (FTIA)
1
(Initial value)
0
1
Captured on rising edge of input capture A (FTIA)
Because the input capture registers are 16-bit registers, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when
they are read. See section 8.3, CPU Interface, for details.
To ensure input capture, the width of the input capture pulse should be at least 1.5 system clock
periods (1.5·ø). When triggering is enabled on both edges, the input capture pulse width should be
at least 2.5 system clock periods.
The input capture registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in the standby modes.
161
8.2.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIAE
ICIBE
ICICE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables interrupts.
TIER is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Input Capture Interrupt A Enable (ICIAE): This bit selects whether to request input
capture interrupt A (ICIA) when input capture flag A (ICFA) in the timer status/control register
(TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7: ICIAE
Description
0
Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is disabled.
1
Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Input Capture Interrupt B Enable (ICIBE): This bit selects whether to request input
capture interrupt B (ICIB) when input capture flag B (ICFB) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 6: ICIBE
Description
0
Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is disabled.
1
Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Input Capture Interrupt C Enable (ICICE): This bit selects whether to request input
capture interrupt C (ICIC) when input capture flag C (ICFC) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 5: ICICE
Description
0
Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is disabled.
1
Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Input Capture Interrupt D Enable (ICIDE): This bit selects whether to request input
capture interrupt D (ICID) when input capture flag D (ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 4: ICIDE
Description
0
Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is disabled.
1
Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is enabled.
162
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Output Compare Interrupt A Enable (OCIAE): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 3: OCIAE
Description
0
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled.
1
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Compare Interrupt B Enable (OCIBE): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 2: OCIBE
Description
0
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled.
1
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a freerunning timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 1: OVIE
Description
0
Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled.
1
Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
163
8.2.5
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICFA
ICFB
ICFC
ICFD
OCFA
OCFB
OVF
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable register that contains the seven interrupt flags and
specifies whether to clear the counter on compare-match A (when the FRC and OCRA values
match).
TCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
Timing is described in section 8.4, Operation.
Bit 7—Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This status bit is set to 1 to flag an input capture A event.
If BUFEA = 0, ICFA indicates that the FRC value has been copied to ICRA. If BUFEA = 1, ICFA
indicates that the old ICRA value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been
copied to ICRA.
ICFA must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 7: ICFA
Description
0
To clear ICFA, the CPU must read ICFA after it has been set to 1, then write a
0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when an FTIA input signal causes the FRC value to be
copied to ICRA.
Bit 6—Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status bit is set to 1 to flag an input capture B event.
If BUFEB = 0, ICFB indicates that the FRC value has been copied to ICRB. If BUFEB = 1, ICFB
indicates that the old ICRB value has been moved into ICRD and the new FRC value has been
copied to ICRB.
ICFB must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 6: ICFB
Description
0
To clear ICFB, the CPU must read ICFB after it has been set to 1, then write a
0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when an FTIB input signal causes the FRC value to be
copied to ICRB.
164
Bit 5—Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status bit is set to 1 to flag input of a rising or falling
edge of FTIC as selected by the IEDGC bit. When BUFEA = 0, this indicates capture of the FRC
count in ICRC. When BUFEA = 1, however, the FRC count is not captured, so ICFC becomes
simply an external interrupt flag. In other words, the buffer mode frees FTIC for use as a generalpurpose interrupt signal (which can be enabled or disabled by the ICICE bit).
ICFC must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 5: ICFC
Description
0
To clear ICFC, the CPU must read ICFC after it has been set to 1, then write a
0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when an FTIC input signal is received.
Bit 4—Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status bit is set to 1 to flag input of a rising or falling
edge of FTID as selected by the IEDGD bit. When BUFEB = 0, this indicates capture of the FRC
count in ICRD. When BUFEB = 1, however, the FRC count is not captured, so ICFD becomes
simply an external interrupt flag. In other words, the buffer mode frees FTID for use as a generalpurpose interrupt signal (which can be enabled or disabled by the ICIDE bit).
ICFD must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 4: ICFD
Description
0
To clear ICFD, the CPU must read ICFD after it has been set to 1, then write a
0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when an FTID input signal is received.
Bit 3—Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag is set to 1 when the FRC value
matches the OCRA value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however,
and cannot be set by software.
Bit 3: OCFA
Description
0
To clear OCFA, the CPU must read OCFA after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRA.
165
Bit 2—Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag is set to 1 when the FRC value
matches the OCRB value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however,
and cannot be set by software.
Bit 2: OCFB
Description
0
To clear OCFB, the CPU must read OCFB after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRB.
Bit 1—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to 1 when FRC overflows (changes
from H'FFFF to H'0000). This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however,
and cannot be set by software.
Bit 1: OVF
Description
0
To clear OVF, the CPU must read OVF after it has been set to 1, then write a 0
in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
Bit 0—Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether to clear FRC at compare-match A
(when the FRC and OCRA values match).
Bit 0: CCLRA
Description
0
The FRC is not cleared.
1
The FRC is cleared at compare-match A.
8.2.6
(Initial value)
Timer Control Register (TCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IEDGA
IEDGB
IEDGC
IEDGD
BUFEA
BUFEB
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture
signals, enables the input capture buffer mode, and selects the FRC clock source.
TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
166
Bit 7—Input Edge Select A (IEDGA): This bit selects the rising or falling edge of the input
capture A signal (FTIA).
Bit 7: IEDGA
Description
0
Input capture A events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIA. (Initial value)
1
Input capture A events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIA.
Bit 6—Input Edge Select B (IEDGB): This bit selects the rising or falling edge of the input
capture B signal (FTIB).
Bit 6: IEDGB
Description
0
Input capture B events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIB. (Initial value)
1
Input capture B events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIB.
Bit 5—Input Edge Select C (IEDGC): This bit selects the rising or falling edge of the input
capture C signal (FTIC).
Bit 5: IEDGC
Description
0
Input capture C events are recognized on the falling edge of FTIC. (Initial value)
1
Input capture C events are recognized on the rising edge of FTIC.
Bit 4—Input Edge Select D (IEDGD): This bit selects the rising or falling edge of the input
capture D signal (FTID).
Bit 4: IEDGD
Description
0
Input capture D events are recognized on the falling edge of FTID. (Initial value)
1
Input capture D events are recognized on the rising edge of FTID.
Bit 3—Buffer Enable A (BUFEA): This bit selects whether to use ICRC as a buffer register for
ICRA.
Bit 3: BUFEA
Description
0
ICRC is used for input capture C.
1
ICRC is used as a buffer register for input capture A.
(Initial value)
167
Bit 2—Buffer Enable B (BUFEB): This bit selects whether to use ICRD as a buffer register for
ICRB.
Bit 2: BUFEB
Description
0
ICRD is used for input capture D.
1
ICRD is used as a buffer register for input capture B.
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select external clock input or one of
three internal clock sources for FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge of
signals input to pin FTCI.
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
øP/2 internal clock source
1
øP/8 internal clock source
0
øP/32 internal clock source
1
External clock source (rising edge)
1
8.2.7
(Initial value)
Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
OCRS
OEA
OEB
OLVLA
OLVLB
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables output from the output compare pins,
selects the output levels, and switches access between output compare registers A and B.
TOCR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in the standby modes.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 4—Output Compare Register Select (OCRS): OCRA and OCRB share the same address.
When this address is accessed, the OCRS bit selects which register is accessed. This bit does not
affect the operation of OCRA or OCRB.
Bit 4: OCRS
Description
0
OCRA is selected.
1
OCRB is selected.
168
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Output Enable A (OEA): This bit enables or disables output of the output compare A
signal (FTOA).
Bit 3: OEA
Description
0
Output compare A output is disabled.
1
Output compare A output is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Enable B (OEB): This bit enables or disables output of the output compare B
signal (FTOB).
Bit 2: OEB
Description
0
Output compare B output is disabled.
1
Output compare B output is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin
when the FRC and OCRA values match.
Bit 1: OLVLA
Description
0
A 0 logic level is output for compare-match A.
1
A 1 logic level is output for compare-match A.
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin
when the FRC and OCRB values match.
Bit 0: OLVLB
Description
0
A 0 logic level is output for compare-match B.
1
A 1 logic level is output for compare-match B.
(Initial value)
169
8.3
CPU Interface
The free-running counter (FRC), output compare registers (OCRA and OCRB), and input capture
registers (ICRA to ICRD) are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to an 8-bit data bus. When
the CPU accesses these registers, to ensure that both bytes are written or read simultaneously, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
These registers are written and read as follows:
• Register Write
When the CPU writes to the upper byte, the byte of write data is placed in TEMP. Next, when
the CPU writes to the lower byte, this byte of data is combined with the byte in TEMP and all
16 bits are written in the register simultaneously.
• Register Read
When the CPU reads the upper byte, the upper byte of data is sent to the CPU and the lower
byte is placed in TEMP. When the CPU reads the lower byte, it receives the value in TEMP.
Programs that access these registers should normally use word access. Equivalently, they may
access first the upper byte, then the lower byte by two consecutive byte accesses. Data will not be
transferred correctly if the bytes are accessed in reverse order, or if only one byte is accessed.
Figure 8.3 shows the data flow when FRC is accessed. The other registers are accessed in the same
way. As an exception, when the CPU reads OCRA or OCRB, it reads both the upper and lower
bytes directly, without using TEMP.
Coding Examples
To write the contents of general register R0 to OCRA:
To transfer the contents of ICRA to general register R0:
170
MOV.W
MOV.W
R0, @OCRA
@ICRA, R0
(1) Upper byte write
Module data bus
Bus
interface
CPU writes
data H'AA
TEMP
[H'AA]
FRCH
[
]
FRCL
[
]
(2) Lower byte write
CPU writes
data H'55
Module data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
[H'AA]
FRCH
[H'AA]
FRCL
[H'55]
Figure 8.3 (a) Write Access to FRC (when CPU Writes H'AA55)
171
(1) Upper byte read
Module data bus
Bus
interface
CPU reads
data H'AA
TEMP
[H'55]
FRCH
[H'AA]
FRCL
[H'55]
(2) Lower byte read
CPU reads
data H'55
Module data bus
Bus
interface
TEMP
[H'55]
FRCH
[
]
FRCL
[
]
Figure 8.3 (b) Read Access to FRC (when FRC Contains H'AA55)
172
8.4
Operation
8.4.1
FRC Increment Timing
FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or external)
clock source. The clock source is selected by bits CKS0 and CKS1 in TCR.
Internal Clock: The internal clock sources (øP/2, øP/8, øP/32) are created from the system clock
(ø) by a prescaler. FRC increments on a pulse generated from the falling edge of the prescaler
output. See figure 8.4.
ø
Internal
clock
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 8.4 Increment Timing for Internal Clock Source
173
External Clock: If external clock input is selected, FRC increments on the rising edge of the
FTCI clock signal. Figure 8.5 shows the increment timing.
The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clock (ø) periods. The
counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5 system clock periods.
ø
External
clock
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
Figure 8.5 Increment Timing for External Clock Source
174
8.4.2
Output Compare Timing
When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or
OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Figure 8.6 shows the
timing of this operation for compare-match A.
ø
FRC
N
N+1
OCRA
N
N
N+1
N
Internal comparematch A signal
Clear*
OLVLA
FTOA
Note: * Cleared by software
Figure 8.6 Timing of Output Compare A
175
8.4.3
FRC Clear Timing
If the CCLRA bit in TCSR is set to 1, the FRC is cleared when compare-match A occurs. Figure
8.7 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal comparematch A signal
FRC
N
H'0000
Figure 8.7 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A
8.4.4
Input Capture Timing
Input Capture Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling
edge of the signal at the input capture pin FTIx (x = A, B, C, D), as selected by the corresponding
IEDGx bit in TCR. Figure 8.8 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is
selected (IEDGx = 1).
ø
Input data
FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 8.8 Input Capture Timing (Usual Case)
If the upper byte of ICRA/B/C/D is being read when the corresponding input capture signal
arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one state. Figure 8.9 shows the timing for
this case.
176
ICR upper byte read cycle
T1
T2
T3
ø
Input at FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 8.9 Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay Due to ICRA/B/C/D Read)
Buffered Input Capture Timing: ICRC and ICRD can operate as buffers for ICRA and ICRB.
Figure 8.10 shows how input capture operates when ICRA and ICRC are used in buffer mode and
IEDGA and IEDGC are set to different values (IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1, or IEDG A = 1 and
IEDGC = 0), so that input capture is performed on both the rising and falling edges of FTIA.
ø
FTIA
Internal input
capture signal
FRC
n
ICRA
M
ICRC
m
n+1
N
N+1
n
n
N
M
M
n
Figure 8.10 Buffered Input Capture with Both Edges Selected
177
When ICRC or ICRD is used as a buffer register, its input capture flag is set by the selected
transition of its input capture signal. For example, if ICRC is used to buffer ICRA, when the edge
transition selected by the IEDGC bit occurs on the FTIC input capture line, ICFC will be set, and
if the ICIEC bit is set, an interrupt will be requested. The FRC value will not be transferred to
ICRC, however.
In buffered input capture, if the upper byte of either of the two registers to which data will be
transferred (ICRA and ICRC, or ICRB and ICRD) is being read when the input signal arrives,
input capture is delayed by one system clock (ø). Figure 8.11 shows the timing when BUFEA = 1.
Read cycle:
CPU reads upper byte of ICRA or ICRC
T1
T2
T3
ø
Input at
FTIA pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 8.11 Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay, Buffer Mode)
178
8.4.5
Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting
The input capture flag ICFx (x = A, B, C, D) is set to 1 by the internal input capture signal. Figure
8.12 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal input
capture signal
ICF
FRC
ICR
N
N
Figure 8.12 Setting of Input Capture Flag
8.4.6
Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA and OCFB)
The output compare flags are set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the
FRC value matches the OCRA or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last
state in which the two values match, just before FRC increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated
until the next period of the clock source. Figure 8.13 shows the timing of the setting of the output
compare flags.
179
ø
FRC
N
N+1
N
OCRA or OCRB
Internal comparematch signal
OCFA or OCFB
Figure 8.13 Setting of Output Compare Flags
8.4.7
Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF)
The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000).
Figure 8.14 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
FRC
H'FFFF
H'0000
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 8.14 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
180
8.5
Interrupts
The free-running timer can request seven interrupts (three types): input capture A to D (ICIA,
ICIB, ICIC, ICID), output compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each
interrupt can be enabled or disabled by an enable bit in TIER. Independent signals are sent to the
interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 8.4 lists information about these interrupts.
Table 8.4
Free-Running Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
Description
Priority
ICIA
Requested by ICFA
High
ICIB
Requested by ICFB
ICIC
Requested by ICFC
ICID
Requested by ICFD
OCIA
Requested by OCFA
OCIB
Requested by OCFB
FOVI
Requested by OVF
Low
181
8.6
Sample Application
In the example below, the free-running timer is used to generate two square-wave outputs with a
50% duty cycle and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows:
1. The CCLRA bit in TCSR is set to 1.
2. Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level
bit in TOCR (OLVLA or OLVLB).
FRC
H'FFFF
Clear counter
OCRA
OCRB
H'0000
FTOA
FTOB
Figure 8.15 Square-Wave Output (Example)
182
8.7
Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the freerunning timer.
Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of the free-running counter, the clear signal
takes priority and the write is not performed.
Figure 8.16 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle:
CPU write to lower byte of FRC
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address
bus
FRC address
Internal write
signal
FRC clear signal
FRC
N
H'0000
Figure 8.16 FRC Write-Clear Contention
183
Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during
the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of the free-running counter, the write takes priority
and FRC is not incremented.
Figure 8.17 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle:
CPU write to lower byte of FRC
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
FRC address
Internal write signal
FRC clock pulse
FRC
N
M
Write data
Figure 8.17 FRC Write-Increment Contention
184
Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the
T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of OCRA or OCRB, the write takes priority and the
compare-match signal is inhibited.
Figure 8.18 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle:
CPU write to lower byte of OCRA or OCRB
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
OCR address
Internal write signal
FRC
N
OCRA or OCRB
N
N+1
M
Write data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 8.18 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match
185
Increment Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock source is
changed, the changeover may cause FRC to increment. This depends on the time at which the
clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 8.5.
The pulse that increments FRC is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock source. If
clock sources are changed when the old source is high and the new source is low, as in case no. 3
in table 8.5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment clock pulse.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause FRC to increment.
Table 8.5
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No.
Description
1
Low → low:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are low.
Timing
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N+1
N
CKS rewrite
2
Low → high:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is low and
new clock source is high.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
186
No.
Description
3
High → low:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old clock
source is high and new
clock source is low.
Timing
Old clock
source
New clock
source
*
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
4
High → high:
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are high.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
Note: * The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments FRC.
187
188
Section 9 8-Bit Timers
9.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series includes an 8-bit timer module with two channels (numbered 0 and 1). Each
channel has an 8-bit counter (TCNT) and two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that
are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect compare-match events. One of the many
applications of the 8-bit timer module is to generate a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary
duty cycle.
9.1.1
Features
The features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below.
• Selection of seven clock sources
The counters can be driven by one of six internal clock signals or an external clock input
(enabling use as an external event counter).
• Selection of three ways to clear the counters
The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal.
• Timer output controlled by two time constants
The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent time constants,
enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle, or PWM
waveforms.
• Three independent interrupts
Compare-match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently.
189
9.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of one channel in the 8-bit timer module.
External
clock source
Internal
clock sources
Channel 0
øP/2
øP/8
øP/32
øP/64
øP/256
øP/1024
TMCI
Clock select
Clock
Channel 1
øP/2
øP/8
øP/64
øP/128
øP/1024
øP/2048
TCORA
Compare-match A
TMO
TCNT
Clear
Comparator B
Control
logic
Compare-match B
Module data bus
Overflow
TMRI
TCORB
TCSR
TCR
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Interrupt signals
TCR:
TCSR:
TCORA:
TCORB:
TCNT:
Timer control register (8 bits)
Timer control status register (8 bits)
Time constant register A (8 bits)
Time constant register B (8 bits)
Timer counter
Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (1 Channel)
190
Bus interface
Comparator A
Internal
data bus
9.1.3
Input and Output Pins
Table 9.1 lists the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer.
Table 9.1
Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer
Abbreviation*
Name
Channel 0
Channel 1
I/O
Function
Timer output
TMO0
TMO1
Output
Output controlled by compare-match
Timer clock input
TMCI0
TMCI1
Input
External clock source for the counter
Timer reset input
TMRI0
TMRI1
Input
External reset signal for the counter
Note: * In this manual, the channel subscript has been deleted, and only TMO TMCI, and TMRI are
used.
9.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 9.2 lists the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Each channel has an independent set of
registers.
Table 9.2
8-Bit Timer Registers
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
0
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFC8
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)*
H'10
H'FFC9
Time constant register A
TCORA
R/W
H'FF
H'FFCA
Time constant register B
TCORB
R/W
H'FF
H'FFCB
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFCC
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFD0
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)*
H'10
H'FFD1
Time constant register A
TCORA
R/W
H'FF
H'FFD2
Time constant register B
TCORB
R/W
H'FF
H'FFD3
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFD4
Serial/timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFC3
1
0, 1
Note: * Software can write a 0 to clear bits 7 to 5, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
191
9.2
Register Descriptions
9.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Each timer counter (TCNT) is an 8-bit up-counter that increments on a pulse generated from an
internal or external clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) of the timer
control register (TCR). The CPU can always read or write the timer counter.
The timer counter can be cleared by an external reset input or by an internal compare-match signal
generated at a compare-match event. Clock clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) of the timer
control register select the method of clearing.
When a timer counter overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1.
The timer counters are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
9.2.2
Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The timer count is continually
compared with the constants written in these registers (except during the T3 state of a write cycle
to TCORA or TCORB). When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag (CMFA
or CMFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR).
The timer output signal is controlled by these compare-match signals as specified by output select
bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) in the timer control/status register (TCSR).
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF by a reset and in the standby modes.
192
9.2.3
Timer Control Register (TCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which the
timer counter is cleared, and enables interrupts.
TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
For timing diagrams, see section 9.3, Operation.
Bit 7—Compare-match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt B (CMIB) when compare-match flag B (CMFB) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7: CMIEB
Description
0
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is disabled.
1
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Compare-match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt A (CMIA) when compare-match flag A (CMFA) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 6: CMIEA
Description
0
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is disabled.
1
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is enabled.
(Initial value)
193
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a timer
overflow interrupt (OVI) when the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1.
Bit 5: OVIE
Description
0
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is disabled.
1
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 4 and 3—Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select how the timer
counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B or by an external reset input (TMRI).
Bit 4: CCLR1
Bit 3: CCLR0
Description
0
0
Not cleared.
1
Cleared on compare-match A.
0
Cleared on compare-match B.
1
Cleared on rising edge of external reset input signal.
1
194
(Initial value)
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits and bits ICKS1 and
ICKS0 in the serial/timer control register (STCR) select the internal or external clock source for
the timer counter. Six internal clock sources, derived by prescaling the system clock, are available
for each timer channel. For internal clock sources the counter is incremented on the falling edge of
the internal clock. For an external clock source, these bits can select whether to increment the
counter on the rising or falling edge of the clock input (TMCI), or on both edges.
TCR
STCR
Channel
Bit 2: Bit 1: Bit 0:
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
Bit 1: Bit 0:
ICKS1 ICKS0 Description
0
0
—
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
No clock source (timer stopped) (Initial value)
0
øP/8 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/2 internal clock, counted on falling edge
0
øP/64 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/32 internal clock, counted on falling edge
0
øP/1024 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/256 internal clock, counted on falling edge
—
No clock source (timer stopped)
1
External clock source, counted on rising edge
0
External clock source, counted on falling edge
1
External clock source, counted on both rising
and falling edges
0
—
1
0
øP/8 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/2 internal clock, counted on falling edge
0
øP/64 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/128 internal clock, counted on falling edge
0
øP/1024 internal clock, counted on falling edge
1
øP/2048 internal clock, counted on falling edge
—
No clock source (timer stopped)
0
1
1
—
0
—
No clock source (timer stopped) (Initial value)
1
External clock source, counted on rising edge
0
External clock source, counted on falling edge
1
External clock source, counted on both rising
and falling edges
195
9.2.4
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable register that indicates compare-match and
overflow status and selects the effect of compare-match events on the timer output signal.
TCSR is initialized to H'10 by a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORB. CMFB must be cleared by software. It is set by
hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 7: CMFB
Description
0
To clear CMFB, the CPU must read CMFB after it has been set to 1 then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB.
Bit 6—Compare-Match Flag A (CMFA): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORA. CMFA must be cleared by software. It is set by
hardware, however, and cannot be set by software.
Bit 6: CMFA
Description
0
To clear CMFA, the CPU must read CMFA after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA.
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count overflows
(changes from H'FF to H'00). OVF must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however,
and cannot be set by software.
Bit 5: OVF
Description
0
To clear OVF, the CPU must read OVF after it has been set to 1, then write a 0
in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
196
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1. It cannot be written.
Bits 3 to 0—Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify the effect of TCOR–TCNT
compare-match events on the timer output signal (TMO). Bits OS3 and OS2 control the effect of
compare-match B on the output level. Bits OS1 and OS0 control the effect of compare-match A on
the output level.
If compare-match A and B occur simultaneously, any conflict is resolved according to the
following priority order: toggle > 1 output > 0 output.
When all four output select bits are cleared to 0 the timer output signal is disabled.
After a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare-match event.
Bit 3: OS3
Bit 2: OS2
Description
0
0
No change when compare-match B occurs.
1
Output changes to 0 when compare-match B occurs.
0
Output changes to 1 when compare-match B occurs.
1
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match B occurs.
Bit 1: OS1
Bit 0: OS0
Description
0
0
No change when compare-match A occurs.
1
Output changes to 0 when compare-match A occurs.
0
Output changes to 1 when compare-match A occurs.
1
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match A occurs.
1
1
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
197
9.2.5
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICS
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the I 2C bus interface and host interface,
controls the operating mode of the serial communication interface, and selects internal clock
sources for the timer counters.
STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 4—I2C Control (IICS, IICD, IICX, IICE): These bits control operation of the I2C bus
interface. For details, see section 13, I2C Bus Interface.
Bit 3—Slave Input Switch (STAC): Controls the switching of the host interface input pins. For
details, see section 14, Host Interface.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Controls the operating mode of serial communication
interfaces 0 and 1. For details, see section 12, Serial Communication Interface.
Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1 and ICKS0): These bits and bits
CKS2 to CKS0 in the TCR select clock sources for the timer counters. For details, see section
9.2.3, Timer Control Register.
198
9.3
Operation
9.3.1
TCNT Increment Timing
The timer counter increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or
external) clock source.
Internal Clock: Internal clock sources are created from the system clock by a prescaler. The
counter increments on an internal TCNT clock pulse generated from the falling edge of the
prescaler output, as shown in figure 9.2. Bits CKS2 to CKS0 of TCR and bits ICKS1 and ICKS0
of STCR can select one of the six internal clocks.
ø
Internal
clock
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 9.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input
199
External Clock: If external clock input (TMCI) is selected, the timer counter can increment on
the rising edge, the falling edge, or both edges of the external clock signal. Figure 9.3 shows
incrementation on both edges of the external clock signal.
The external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 system clock (ø) periods for incrementation on
a single edge, and at least 2.5 system clock periods for incrementation on both edges. The counter
will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than these values.
ø
External clock
source (TMCI)
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N–1
N
Figure 9.3 Count Timing for External Clock Input
200
N+1
9.3.2
Compare-Match Timing
Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA and CMFB): The compare-match flags are
set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the timer count matches the time
constant in TCORA or TCORB. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which
the match is true, just before the timer counter increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the timer count matches one of the time constants, the compare-match signal is
not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 9.4 shows the timing of the setting
of the compare-match flags.
ø
TCNT
TCOR
N
N+1
N
Internal comparematch signal
CMF
Figure 9.4 Setting of Compare-Match Flags
201
Output Timing: When a compare-match event occurs, the timer output changes as specified by
the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in the TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output can remain
the same, change to 0, change to 1, or toggle.
Figure 9.5 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare-match A.
ø
Internal comparematch A signal
Timer output
(TMO)
Figure 9.5 Timing of Timer Output
Timing of Compare-Match Clear: Depending on the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR, the timer
counter can be cleared when compare-match A or B occurs. Figure 9.6 shows the timing of this
operation.
ø
Internal comparematch signal
TCNT
N
Figure 9.6 Timing of Compare-Match Clear
202
H'00
9.3.3
External Reset of TCNT
When the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR are both set to 1, the timer counter is cleared on the
rising edge of an external reset input. Figure 9.7 shows the timing of this operation. The timer
reset pulse width must be at least 1.5 system clock (ø) periods.
ø
External reset
input (TMRI)
Internal clear
pulse
TCNT
N–1
N
H'00
Figure 9.7 Timing of External Reset
9.3.4
Setting of TCSR Overflow Flag (OVF)
The overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00).
Figure 9.8 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 9.8 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
203
9.4
Interrupts
Each channel in the 8-bit timer can generate three types of interrupts: compare-match A and B
(CMIA and CMIB), and overflow (OVI). Each interrupt can be enabled or disabled by an enable
bit in TCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 9.3
lists information about these interrupts.
Table 9.3
8-Bit Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
Description
Priority
CMIA
Requested by CMFA
High
CMIB
Requested by CMFB
OVI
Requested by OVF
9.5
Low
Sample Application
In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle.
The control bits are set as follows:
1. In TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and CCLR0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared when
its value matches the constant in TCORA.
2. In TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to 0110, causing the output to change to 1 on compare-match
A and to 0 on compare-match B.
With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with
a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required.
TCNT
H'FF
Clear counter
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
TMO pin
Figure 9.9 Example of Pulse Output
204
9.6
Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the 8-bit
timer.
9.6.1
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear
If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer
counter, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed.
Figure 9.10 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'00
Figure 9.10 TCNT Write-Clear Contention
205
9.6.2
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
If a timer counter increment pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer
counter, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented.
Figure 9.11 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
TCNT address
Internal write signal
TCNT clock pulse
TNCT
N
M
Write data
Figure 9.11 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
206
9.6.3
Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
If a compare-match occurs during the T3 state of a write cycle to TCOR, the write takes priority
and the compare-match signal is inhibited.
Figure 9.12 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCOR
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
TCOR address
Internal write signal
TCNT
N
TCOR
N
N+1
M
TCOR write data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 9.12 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
207
9.6.4
Contention between Compare-Match A and Compare-Match B
If identical time constants are written in TCORA and TCORB, causing compare-match A and B to
occur simultaneously, any conflict between the output selections for compare-match A and B is
resolved by following the priority order in table 9.4.
Table 9.4
Priority of Timer Output
Output Selection
Priority
Toggle
High
1 output
0 output
No change
9.6.5
Low
Increment Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source
When an internal clock source is changed, the changeover may cause the timer counter to
increment. This depends on the time at which the clock select bits (CKS1, CKS0) are rewritten, as
shown in table 9.5.
The pulse that increments the timer counter is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock
source signal. If clock sources are changed when the old source is high and the new source is low,
as in case no. 3 in table 9.5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the TCNT clock
pulse and increments the timer counter.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the timer counter to
increment.
208
Table 9.5
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No.
Description
1
Low → low
Timing
*1
Old clock
source
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N+1
N
CKS rewrite
2
Low → high *2
Old clock
source
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
209
No.
Description
3
High → low
Timing
*3
Old clock
source
New clock
source
*4
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
4
High → high
Old clock
source
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS rewrite
Notes: *1 Including a transition from low to the stopped state (CKS1 = 0, CKS0 = 0), or a
transition from the stopped state to low.
*2 Including a transition from the stopped state to high.
*3 Including a transition from high to the stopped state.
*4 The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge, and therefore a TCNT
clock pulse is generated and TCNT is incremented.
210
Section 10 PWM Timers
10.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip pulse-width modulation (PWM) timer module with two
independent channels (PWM0 and PWM1). Both channels are functionally identical. Each PWM
channel generates a rectangular output pulse with a duty cycle of 0 to 100%. The duty cycle is
specified in an 8-bit duty register (DTR).
10.1.1
Features
The PWM timer module has the following features:
• Selection of eight clock sources
• Duty cycles from 0 to 100% with 1/250 resolution
• Output with positive or negative logic and software enable/disable control
211
10.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of one PWM timer channel.
Compare-match
Comparator
TCNT
Bus interface
Output
control
Pulse
Module data bus
DTR
Internal
data bus
TCR
Clock
Clock
select
Timer control register (8 bits)
TCR:
Duty register (8 bits)
DTR:
TCNT: Timer counter (8 bits)
øP/2
øP/8
øP/32
øP/128
øP/256
øP/1024
øP/2048
øP/4096
Internal clock sources
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer
10.1.3
Input and Output Pins
Table 10.1 lists the output pins of the PWM timer module. There are no input pins.
Table 10.1 Output Pins of PWM Timer Module
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
PWM0 output
PW0
Output
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 0.
PWM1 output
PW1
Output
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 1.
212
10.1.4
Register Configuration
The PWM timer module has three registers for each channel as listed in table 10.2.
Table 10.2 PWM Timer Registers
Address
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Timer control register
TCR
R/W
H'38
H'FFA0
H'FFA4
Duty register
DTR
R/W
H'FF
H'FFA1
H'FFA5
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFA2
H'FFA6
10.2
Register Descriptions
10.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
PWM0
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When the output enable bit (OE) is set to 1 in
TCR, TCNT starts counting pulses of an internal clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0
(CKS2 to CKS0). After counting from H'00 to H'F9, the count repeats from H'00. When TCNT
changes from H'00 to to H'01, the PWM output is placed in the 1 state, unless the DTR value is
H'00, in which case the duty cycle is 0% and the PWM output remains in the 0 state.
TCNT is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes, and when the OE bit is cleared to
0.
213
10.2.2
Duty Register (DTR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the duty cycle of the output pulse. Any
duty cycle from 0% to 100% can be output by setting the corresponding value in DTR. The
resolution is 1/250. Writing 0 (H'00) in DTR gives a 0% duty cycle. Writing 125 (H'7D) gives a
50% duty cycle. Writing 250 (H'FA) gives a 100% duty cycle.
The DTR and TCNT values are always compared. When the values match, the PWM output is
placed in the 0 state.
DTR is double-buffered. A new value written in DTR does not become valid until after the timer
count changes from H'F9 to H'00. While the OE bit is cleared to 0 in TCR, however, new values
written in DTR become valid immediately. When DTR is read, the value read is the currently valid
value.
DTR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in the standby modes.
214
10.2.3
Timer Control Register (TCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock input to TCNT and controls PWM
output.
TCR is initialized to H'38 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Output Enable (OE): This bit enables the timer counter and the PWM output.
Bit 7: OE
Description
0
PWM output is disabled. TCNT is cleared to H'00 and stopped.
1
PWM output is enabled. TCNT runs.
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Output Select (OS): This bit selects positive or negative logic for the PWM output.
Bit 6: OS
Description
0
Positive logic; positive-going PWM pulse, 1 = high
1
Negative logic; negative-going PWM pulse, 1 = low
(Initial value)
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
215
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select one of eight internal
clock sources obtained by dividing the supporting-module clock (øP).
Bit 2: CKS2
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
0
øP/2
1
øP/8
0
øP/32
1
øP/128
0
øP/256
1
øP/1024
0
øP/2048
1
øP/4096
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
From the clock source frequency, the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output can be
calculated as follows.
Resolution = 1/clock source frequency
PWM period = resolution × 250
PWM frequency = 1/PWM period
If the øP clock frequency is 10 MHz, then the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output
for each clock source are as shown in table 10.3.
Table 10.3 PWM Timer Parameters for 10 MHz System Clock
Internal Clock Frequency
Resolution
PWM Period
PWM Frequency
øP/2
200 ns
50 µs
20 kHz
øP/8
800 ns
200 µs
5 kHz
øP/32
3.2 µs
800 µs
1.25 kHz
øP/128
12.8 µs
3.2 ms
312.5 Hz
øP/256
25.6 µs
6.4 ms
156.3 Hz
øP/1024
102.4 µs
25.6 ms
39.1 Hz
øP/2048
204.8 µs
51.2 ms
19.5 Hz
øP/4096
409.6 µs
102.4 ms
9.8 Hz
216
10.3
Operation
10.3.1
Timer Increment
The PWM clock source is created by dividing the system clock (ø). The timer counter increments
on a TCNT clock pulse generated from the falling edge of the prescaler output as shown in figure
10.2.
ø
Prescaler
output
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 10.2 TCNT Increment Timing
217
218
Figure 10.3 PWM Timing
(e)*
(a)*
N written in DTR
H'FF
(a) H'00
(b)
(b) H'01
N
(c)
N
(c)
PWM 1 cycle
M written in DTR
H'02
N–1
H'F9
N+1
Note: * Used for port 4 input/output: state depends on values in data register and data direction register.
(OS = 1)
PWM output
(OS = 0)
DTR
TCNT
OE
TCNT clock
pulses
ø
(d) M
(d) H'00
H'01
10.3.2
PWM Operation
Figure 10.3 is a timing chart of the PWM operation.
Positive Logic (OS = 0):
1. When (OE = 0)—(a) in Figure 10.3
The timer count is held at H'00 and PWM output is inhibited. [Pin 46 (for PW0) or pin 47 (for
PW1) is used for port 4 input/output, and its state depends on the corresponding port 4 data
register and data direction register.] Any value (such as N in figure 10.3) written in the DTR
becomes valid immediately.
2. When (OE = 1)
a. The timer counter begins incrementing. The PWM output goes high when TCNT changes
from H'00 to H'01, unless DTR = H'00. [(b) in figure 10.3]
b. When the count passes the DTR value, the PWM output goes low. [(c) in figure 10.3]
c. If the DTR value is changed (by writing the data “M” in figure 10.3), the new value
becomes valid after the timer count changes from H'F9 to H'00. [(d) in figure 10.3]
Negative Logic (OS = 1)—(e) in Figure 10.3: The operation is the same except that high and low
are reversed in the PWM output. [(e) in figure 10.3]
10.4
Application Notes
Some notes on the use of the PWM timer module are given below.
1. Any necessary changes to the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) and output select bit (OS)
should be made before the output enable bit (OE) is set to 1.
2. If the DTR value is H'00, the duty cycle is 0% and PWM output remains constant at 0.
If the DTR value is H'FA to H'FF, the duty cycle is 100% and PWM output remains constant at
1.
(For positive logic, 0 is low and 1 is high. For negative logic, 0 is high and 1 is low.)
219
220
Section 11 Watchdog Timer
11.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT) that can monitor system operation by
resetting the CPU or generating a nonmaskable interrupt if a system crash allows the timer count
to overflow.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the watchdog timer module can be used as an interval
timer. In interval timer mode, it requests an WOVF interrupt at each counter overflow.
11.1.1
Features
WDT features are shown below.
• Selection of eight counter input clocks
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
• Timer counter overflow generates an internal reset or internal interrupt:
Selection of internal reset or internal interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode
WOVF interrupt request in interval timer mode
• RESO output in watchdog timer mode
Low-level signal output from RESO pin when counter overflows in watchdog timer mode
(when internal reset is selected)
221
11.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 11.1 is a block diagram of the watchdog timer.
Internal reset or NMI
(watchdog timer mode)
WOVF interrupt
request signal
(interval timer mode)
System
interrupt
control
Overflow
Internal
data bus
TCNT
Read/write
control
TCSR
RESO pin
Internal clock source
Clock
Clock
select
TCNT: Timer counter
TCSR: Timer control/status register
øP/2
øP/32
øP/64
øP/128
øP/256
øP/512
øP/2048
øP/4096
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
11.1.3
Output Pin
Table 11.1 Output Pin of Watchdog Timer
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Reset out output pin
RESO
Output
Counter overflow signal output in
watchdog timer mode
222
11.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 11.2 lists information on the watchdog timer registers.
Table 11.2 Register Configuration
Addresses
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Timer control/status register
TCSR
R/(W)*
H'10
H'FFA8
H'FFA8
Timer counter
TCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFA8
H'FFA9
Write
Read
Note: * Software can write a 0 to clear the status flag bits, but cannot write 1.
11.2
Register Descriptions
11.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When the timer enable bit (TME) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1, the timer counter starts counting pulses of an internal
clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) in TCSR. When the count
overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), an overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1.
TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0.
Note: TCNT is more difficult to write to than other registers. See Section 11.2.4, Register
Access, for details.
223
11.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
RST/NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot write a 1 in this bit.
TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer mode and clock source and
performs other functions. (TCSR is write-protected by a password. See section 11.2.3, Register
Access, for details.)
Bits 7 to 5 and bit 3 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in the standby modes. Bits 2 to 0 are
initialized to 0 by a reset, but retain their values in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): Indicates that the watchdog timer count has overflowed.
Bit 7: OVF
Description
0
To clear OVF, the CPU must read OVF after it has been set to 1, then write a 0
in this bit
(Initial value)
1
Set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether to operate in watchdog timer mode or
interval timer mode. When TCNT overflows, an WOVF interrupt request is sent to the CPU in
interval timer mode. For watchdog timer mode, a reset or NMI interrupt is requested.
Bit 6: WT/IT
Description
0
Interval timer mode (WOVF request)
1
Watchdog timer mode (reset or NMI request)
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Enables or disables the timer.
Bit 5: TME
Description
0
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and stopped
1
TCNT runs and requests a reset or an interrupt when it overflows
224
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 3: Reset or NMI Select (RST/NMI): Selects either an internal reset or the NMI function at
watchdog timer overflow.
Bit 3: RST/NMI
Description
0
NMI function enabled
1
Reset function enabled
(Initial value)
Bits 2–0—Clock Select (CKS2–CKS0): These bits select one of eight clock sources obtained by
dividing the system clock (ø).
The overflow interval is the time from when the watchdog timer counter begins counting from
H'00 until an overflow occurs. In interval timer mode, OVF interrupts are requested at this
interval.
Bit 2:
CKS2
Bit 1:
CKS1
Bit 0:
CKS0
Clock Source
Overflow Interval (øP = 10 MHz)
0
0
0
øP/2
51.2 µs
1
øP/32
819.2 µs
0
øP/64
1.6 ms
1
øP/128
3.3 ms
0
øP/256
6.6 ms
1
øP/512
13.1 ms
0
øP/2048
52.4 ms
1
øP/4096
104.9 ms
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
225
11.2.3
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only bit 3 is described here. For details of other bits, see section 3.2., System Control Register
(SYSCR), and descriptions of the relevant modules.
Bit 3—External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a
reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input.
XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by an internal reset due
to watchdog timer overflow when the RST/NMI bit is 1.
Bit 3: XRST
Description
0
A reset is generated by an internal reset due to watchdog timer overflow
1
A reset is generated by external reset input
11.2.4
(Initial value)
Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT and TCSR registers are more difficult to write to than other registers.
The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below.
Writing to TCNT and TCSR: Word access is required. Byte data transfer instructions cannot be
used for write access.
The TCNT and TCSR registers have the same write address. The write data must be contained in
the lower byte of a word written at this address. The upper byte must contain H'5A (password for
TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). See figure 11.2. The result of the access depicted in figure
11.2 is to transfer the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR.
15
Writing to TCNT
H'FFA8
8 7
H'5A
15
Writing to TCSR
H'FFA8
0
Write data
8 7
H'A5
0
Write data
Figure 11.2 Writing to TCNT and TCSR
226
Reading TCNT and TCSR: The read addresses are H'FFA8 for TCSR and H'FFA9 for TCNT, as
indicated in table 11.3.
These two registers are read like other registers. Byte access instructions can be used.
Table 11.3 Read Addresses of TCNT and TCSR
Read Address
Register
H'FFA8
TCSR
H'FFA9
TCNT
11.3
Operation
11.3.1
Watchdog Timer Mode
The watchdog timer function begins operating when software sets the WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in
TCSR. Thereafter, software should periodically rewrite the contents of the timer counter (normally
by writing H'00) to prevent the count from overflowing. If a program crash allows the timer count
to overflow, the entire chip is reset for 518 system clocks (518 ø), or an NMI interrupt is
requested. Figure 11.3 shows the operation.
NMI requests from the watchdog timer have the same vector as NMI requests from the NMI pin.
Avoid simultaneous handling of watchdog timer NMI requests and NMI requests from pin NMI.
A reset from the watchdog timer has the same vector as an external reset from the RES pin. The
reset source can be determined by the XRST bit in SYSCR.
WDT overflow
H'FF
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
TCNT count
Time t
H'00
OVF = 1
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
H'00 written
to TCNT
Reset
518 ø
H'00 written
to TCNT
Figure 11.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
227
11.3.2
Interval Timer Mode
Interval timer operation begins when the WT/IT bit is cleared to 0 and the TME bit is set to 1.
In interval timer mode, an WOVF request is generated each time the timer count overflows. This
function can be used to generate WOVF requests at regular intervals. See figure 11.4.
H'FF
TCNT count
Time t
H'00
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
OVF
request
OVF
request
OVF
request
OVF
request
OVF
request
Figure 11.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
11.3.3
Setting the Overflow Flag
The WOVF bit is set to 1 when the timer count overflows. Simultaneously, the WDT module
requests an internal reset, NMI, or OVF interrupt. The timing is shown in figure 11.5.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 11.5 Setting the OVF Bit
228
11.3.4
RESO Signal Output Timing
When TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. If the RST/NMI
bit is 1 at this time, an internal reset signal is generated for the entire chip. At the same time a lowlevel signal is output from the RESO pin. The timing is shown in figure 11.6.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
RESO signal
Internal reset
signal
132 states
518 states
Figure 11.6 RESO Signal Output Timing
229
11.4
Application Notes
11.4.1
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter,
the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. See figure 11.7.
Write cycle (CPU writes to TCNT)
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
TCNT address
Internal write signal
TCNT clock pulse
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 11.7 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
11.4.2
Changing the Clock Select Bits (CKS2 to CKS0)
Software should stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value
of the clock select bits. If the clock select bits are modified while the watchdog timer is running,
the timer count may be incremented incorrectly.
11.4.3
Recovery from Software Standby Mode
TCSR bits, except bits 0–2, and the TCNT counter are reset when the chip recovers from software
standby mode. Re-initialize the watchdog timer as necessary to resume normal operation.
230
11.4.4
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If a switch is made between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode while the WDT is
operating, correct operation may not be performed. The WDT must be stopped (by clearing the
TME bit to 0) before changing the timer mode.
11.4.5
System Reset by RESO Signal
If the RESO output signal is input to the chip’s RES pin, the chip will not be initialized correctly.
Ensure that the RESO signal is not logically input to the chip’s RES pin. When resetting the entire
system with the RESO signal, use a circuit such as that shown in figure 11.8.
H8/3437 Series chip
Reset input
Reset signal to entire chip
RES
RESO
Figure 11.8 Sample Circuit for System Reset by RESO Signal
11.4.6
Detection of Program Runaway
The following points should be noted when using the microcomputer’s on-chip watchdog timer to
detect program runaway.
During program runaway, instructions other than the usual instructions may be executed. If an
instruction reserved for system use is executed as a result of runaway, the watchdog timer may
sometimes stop, preventing detection of the runaway.
This problem can be avoided by making the following settings in the program.
1. Set code H'0004 in ROM address H'0002.
2. Set code H'56F0 in ROM address H'0004.
As system reserved addresses may be used by an emulator, the above settings should only be made
for the actual chip.
231
232
Section 12 Serial Communication Interface
12.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series includes two serial communication interface channels (SCI0 and SCI1) for
transferring serial data to and from other chips. Either synchronous or asynchronous
communication can be selected.
12.1.1
Features
The features of the on-chip serial communication interface are:
• Asynchronous mode
The H8/3437 Series can communicate with a UART (Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter), ACIA (Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter), or other chip
that employs standard asynchronous serial communication. It also has a multiprocessor
communication function for communication with other processors. Twelve data formats are
available.
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0
Error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
•
•
•
•
Break detection: When a framing error occurs, the break condition can be detected by
reading the level of the RxD line directly.
Synchronous mode
The SCI can communicate with chips able to perform clocked synchronous data transfer.
Data length: 8 bits
Error detection: Overrun errors
Full duplex communication
The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so each channel can transmit and
receive simultaneously. Both the transmit and receive sections use double buffering, so
continuous data transfer is possible in either direction.
Built-in baud rate generator
Any specified bit rate can be generated.
Internal or external clock source
The SCI can operate on an internal clock signal from the baud rate generator, or an external
clock signal input at the SCK0 or SCK1 pin.
233
• Four interrupts
TDR-empty, TSR-empty, receive-end, and receive-error interrupts are requested
independently.
12.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of one serial communication interface channel.
Module data bus
RDR
TDR
SSR
BRR
SCR
SMR
RxD
TxD
RSR
TSR
Communication
control
Parity
generate
Internal
data bus
Internal
clock
ø
øP/4
øP/16
øP/64
Baud rate
generator
Clock
Parity check
External clock source
SCK
RSR:
RDR:
TSR:
TDR:
SMR:
SCR:
SSR:
BRR:
Receive shift register (8 bits)
Receive data register (8 bits)
Transmit shift register (8 bits)
Transmit data register (8 bits)
Serial mode register (8 bits)
Serial control register (8 bits)
Serial status register (8 bits)
Bit rate register (8 bits)
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Interrupt signals
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface
234
12.1.3
Input and Output Pins
Table 12.1 lists the input and output pins used by the SCI module.
Table 12.1
SCI Input/Output Pins
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
0
Serial clock input/output
SCK0
Input/output
SCI0 clock input and output
Receive data input
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data output
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
Serial clock input/output
SCK1
Input/output
SCI1 clock input and output
Receive data input
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
Transmit data output
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
1
Note: In this manual, the channel subscript has been deleted, and only SCK, RxD, and TxD are
used.
235
12.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 12.2 lists the SCI registers. These registers specify the operating mode (synchronous or
asynchronous), data format and bit rate, and control the transmit and receive sections.
Table 12.2 SCI Registers
Channel
0
Name
RSR
—
Receive data register
RDR
R
Transmit shift register
TSR
Transmit data register
TDR
Serial mode register
SMR
Serial control register
SCR
Bit rate register
0 and 1
*1
*1
—*1
H'00
H'FFDD
—*1
R/W
H'FF
H'FFDB
R/W
H'00
H'FFD8
H'00
H'FFDA
H'84
H'FFDC
H'FF
H'FFD9
R/(W)
*3
Address
—
*1
R/W
SSR
BRR
*1
—
—
*3
Initial
Value
R/W
Receive shift register
Serial status register
1
Abbreviation
*2
R/W
Receive shift register
RSR
—
Receive data register
RDR
R
*1
*1
—*1
H'00
H'FF8D
—
—*1
R/W
H'FF
H'FF8B
SMR
R/W
H'00
H'FF88
SCR
R/W
H'00
H'FF8A
H'84
H'FF8C
Transmit shift register
TSR
—
Transmit data register
TDR
Serial mode register
Serial control register
*1
—
*1
*2
Serial status register
SSR
R/(W)
Bit rate register
BRR
R/W
H'FF
H'FF89
Serial/timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFC3
Notes: *1 Cannot be read or written to.
*2 Software can write a 0 to clear the flags in bits 7 to 3, but cannot write 1 in these bits.
*3 SMR and BRR have the same addresses as I 2C bus interface registers ICCR and
ICSR. For the access switching method and other details, see section 13, I2C Bus
Interface.
236
12.2
Register Descriptions
12.2.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RSR is a shift register that converts incoming serial data to parallel data. When one data character
has been received, it is transferred to the receive data register (RDR).
The CPU cannot read or write RSR directly.
12.2.2
Receive Data Register (RDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
RDR stores received data. As each character is received, it is transferred from RSR to RDR,
enabling RSR to receive the next character. This double-buffering allows the SCI to receive data
continuously.
RDR is a read-only register. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
12.2.3
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TSR is a shift register that converts parallel data to serial transmit data. When transmission of one
character is completed, the next character is moved from the transmit data register (TDR) to TSR
and transmission of that character begins. If the TDRE bit is still set to 1, however, nothing is
transferred to TSR.
The CPU cannot read or write TSR directly.
237
12.2.4
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that holds the next data to be transmitted. When TSR
becomes empty, the data written in TDR is transferred to TSR. Continuous data transmission is
possible by writing the next data in TDR while the current data is being transmitted from TSR.
TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in the standby modes.
12.2.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the communication format and selects the
clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the
standby modes. For further information on the SMR settings and communication formats, see
tables 12.7 and 12.9 in section 12.3, Operation.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): This bit selects asynchronous or synchronous
communication mode.
Bit 7: C/A
Description
0
Asynchronous communication
1
Synchronous communication
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): This bit selects the character length in asynchronous mode.
It is ignored in synchronous mode.
Bit 6: CHR
Description
0
8 bits per character
1
7 bits per character (Bits 0 to 6 of TDR and RDR are used for transmitting and
receiving, respectively.)
238
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): This bit selects whether to add a parity bit in asynchronous mode.
It is ignored in synchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is used.
Bit 5: PE
Description
0
Transmit: No parity bit is added.
(Initial value)
Receive: Parity is not checked.
1
Transmit: A parity bit is added.
Receive: Parity is checked.
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E ): In asynchronous mode, when parity is enabled (PE = 1), this bit
selects even or odd parity.
Even parity means that a parity bit is added to the data bits for each character to make the total
number of 1’s even. Odd parity means that the total number of 1’s is made odd.
This bit is ignored when PE = 0, or when a multiprocessor format is used. It is also ignored in
synchronous mode.
Bit 4: O/E
Description
0
Even parity
1
Odd parity
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): This bit selects the number of stop bits. It is ignored in
synchronous mode.
Bit 3: STOP
Description
0
One stop bit
(Initial value)
Transmit: One stop bit is added.
Receive: One stop bit is checked to detect framing errors.
1
Two stop bits
Transmit: Two stop bits are added.
Receive: The first stop bit is checked to detect framing errors. If the second
stop bit is a space (0), it is regarded as the next start bit.
239
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): This bit selects the multiprocessor format in asynchronous
communication. When multiprocessor format is selected, the parity settings of the parity enable bit
(PE) and parity mode bit (O/E) are ignored. The MP bit is ignored in synchronous communication.
The MP bit is valid only when the MPE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR) is set to 1.
When the MPE bit is cleared to 0, the multiprocessor communication function is disabled
regardless of the setting of the MP bit.
Bit 2: MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor communication function is disabled.
1
Multiprocessor communication function is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select the clock source of the
on-chip baud rate generator.
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
ø clock
1
øP/4 clock
0
øP/16 clock
1
øP/64 clock
1
12.2.6
(Initial value)
Serial Control Register (SCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables various SCI functions.
It is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): This bit enables or disables the TDR-empty interrupt
(TXI) requested when the transmit data register empty (TDRE) bit in the serial status register
(SSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7: TIE
Description
0
The TDR-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled.
1
The TDR-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled.
240
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): This bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt
(RXI) requested when the receive data register full (RDRF) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is
set to 1, and the receive error interrupt (ERI) requested when the overrun error (ORER), framing
error (FER), or parity error (PER) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is set to 1.
Bit 6: RIE
Description
0
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) requests are disabled.
(Initial value)
1
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) requests are enabled.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): This bit enables or disables the transmit function. When the
transmit function is enabled, the TxD pin is automatically used for output. When the transmit
function is disabled, the TxD pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 5: TE
Description
0
The transmit function is disabled.
(Initial value)
The TxD pin can be used for general-purpose I/O.
1
The transmit function is enabled. The TxD pin is used for output.
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): This bit enables or disables the receive function. When the receive
function is enabled, the RxD pin is automatically used for input. When the receive function is
disabled, the RxD pin is available as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 4: RE
Description
0
The receive function is disabled. The RxD pin can be used for general-purpose
I/O.
(Initial value)
1
The receive function is enabled. The RxD pin is used for input.
Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): When serial data is received in a
multiprocessor format, this bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receiveerror interrupt (ERI) until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. It also enables or
disables the transfer of received data from RSR to RDR, and enables or disables setting of the
RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER bits in the serial status register (SSR).
The MPIE bit is ignored when the MP bit is cleared to 0, and in synchronous mode.
Clearing the MPIE bit to 0 disables the multiprocessor receive interrupt function. In this condition
data is received regardless of the value of the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.
241
Setting the MPIE bit to 1 enables the multiprocessor receive interrupt function. In this condition, if
the multiprocessor bit in the receive data is 0, the receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error
interrupt (ERI) are disabled, the receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and the RDRF,
FER, PER, and ORER bits in the serial status register (SSR) are not set. If the multiprocessor bit is
1, however, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0, the receive data is
transferred from RSR to RDR, the FER, PER, and ORER bits can be set, and the receive-end and
receive-error interrupts are enabled.
Bit 3: MPIE
Description
0
The multiprocessor receive interrupt function is disabled.
(Normal receive operation)
1
The multiprocessor receive interrupt function is enabled. During the interval
before data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received, the receive interrupt
request (RXI) and receive-error interrupt request (ERI) are disabled, the RDRF,
FER, PER, and ORER bits are not set in the serial status register (SSR), and
no data is transferred from the RSR to the RDR. The MPIE bit is cleared at the
following times:
(Initial value)
1. When 0 is written in MPIE.
2. When data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
Bit 2—Transmit-End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): This bit enables or disables the TSR-empty
interrupt (TEI) requested when the transmit-end bit (TEND) in the serial status register (SSR) is
set to 1.
Bit 2: TEIE
Description
0
The TSR-empty interrupt request (TEI) is disabled.
1
The TSR-empty interrupt request (TEI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Clock Enable 1 (CKE1): This bit selects the internal or external clock source for the baud
rate generator. When the external clock source is selected, the SCK pin is automatically used for
input of the external clock signal.
Bit 1: CKE1
Description
0
Internal clock source
When C/A = 1, the serial clock signal is output at the SCK pin.
When C/A = 0, output depends on the CKE0 bit.
1
242
External clock source. The SCK pin is used for input.
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Clock Enable 0 (CKE0): When an internal clock source is used in asynchronous mode,
this bit enables or disables serial clock output at the SCK pin.
This bit is ignored when the external clock is selected, or when synchronous mode is selected.
For further information on the communication format and clock source selection, see table 12.8 in
section 12.3, Operation.
Bit 0: CKE0
Description
0
The SCK pin is not used by the SCI (and is available as a general-purpose I/O
port).
(Initial value)
1
The SCK pin is used for serial clock output.
12.2.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * Software can write a 0 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
SSR is an 8-bit register that indicates transmit and receive status. It is initialized to H'84 by a reset
and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): This bit indicates when transmit data can safely
be written in TDR.
Bit 7: TDRE
Description
0
To clear TDRE, the CPU must read TDRE after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
1
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
(Initial value)
1. When TDR contents are transferred to TSR.
2. When the TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
243
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): This bit indicates when one character has been
received and transferred to RDR.
Bit 6: RDRF
Description
0
To clear RDRF, the CPU must read RDRF after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when one character is received without error and transferred
from RSR to RDR.
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): This bit indicates an overrun error during reception.
Bit 5: ORER
Description
0
To clear ORER, the CPU must read ORER after it has been set to 1, then write
a 0 in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 if reception of the next character ends while the receive data
register is still full (RDRF = 1).
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): This bit indicates a framing error during data reception in
asynchronous mode. It has no meaning in synchronous mode.
Bit 4: FER
Description
0
To clear FER, the CPU must read FER after it has been set to 1, then write a 0
in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 if a framing error occurs (stop bit = 0).
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): This bit indicates a parity error during data reception in the
asynchronous mode, when a communication format with parity bits is used.
This bit has no meaning in the synchronous mode, or when a communication format without
parity bits is used.
Bit 3: PER
Description
0
To clear PER, the CPU must read PER after it has been set to 1, then write a 0
in this bit.
(Initial value)
1
This bit is set to 1 when a parity error occurs (the parity of the received data
does not match the parity selected by the O/E bit in SMR).
244
Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): This bit indicates that the serial communication interface has
stopped transmitting because there was no valid data in TDR when the last bit of the current
character was transmitted. The TEND bit is also set to 1 when the TE bit in the serial control
register (SCR) is cleared to 0.
The TEND bit is a read-only bit and cannot be modified directly. To use the TEI interrupt, first
start transmitting data, which clears TEND to 0, then set TEIE to 1.
Bit 2: TEND
Description
0
To clear TEND, the CPU must read TDRE after TDRE has been set to 1, then
write a 0 in TDRE
1
This bit is set to 1 when:
(Initial value)
1. TE = 0
2. TDRE = 1 at the end of transmission of a character
Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in data received in a
multiprocessor format in asynchronous communication mode. This bit retains its previous value in
synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not used, or when the RE bit is cleared to 0
even if a multiprocessor format is used.
MPB can be read but not written.
Bit 1: MPB
Description
0
Multiprocessor bit = 0 in receive data.
1
Multiprocessor bit = 1 in receive data.
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit inserted
in transmit data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous communication mode. The
MPBT bit is double-buffered in the same way as TSR and TDR. The MPBT bit has no effect in
synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is not used.
Bit 0: MPBT
Description
0
Multiprocessor bit = 0 in transmit data.
(Initial value)
Multiprocessor bit = 1 in transmit data.
245
12.2.8
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in SMR, determines the bit
rate output by the baud rate generator.
BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in the standby modes.
Tables 12.3 to 12.6 show examples of BRR settings.
246
Table 12.3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (When øP = ø)
ø (MHz)
2
2.097152
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
141
+0.03
1
148
–0.04
150
1
103
+0.16
1
108
+0.21
300
0
207
+0.16
0
217
+0.21
600
0
103
+0.16
0
108
+0.21
1200
0
51
+0.16
0
54
–0.70
2400
0
25
+0.16
0
26
+1.14
4800
0
12
+0.16
0
13
–2.48
9600
—
—
—
0
6
–2.48
19200
—
—
—
—
—
—
31250
0
1
0
—
—
—
38400
—
—
—
—
—
—
ø (MHz)
2.4576
3
3.6864
4
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
174
–0.26
2
52
+0.50
2
64
+0.70
2
70
+0.03
150
1
127
0
1
155
+0.16
1
191
0
1
207
+0.16
300
0
255
0
1
77
+0.16
1
95
0
1
103
+0.16
600
0
127
0
0
155
+0.16
0
191
0
0
207
+0.16
1200
0
63
0
0
77
+0.16
0
95
0
0
103
+0.16
2400
0
31
0
0
38
+0.16
0
47
0
0
51
+0.16
4800
0
15
0
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0
0
25
+0.16
9600
0
7
0
0
9
–2.34
0
11
0
0
12
+0.16
19200
0
3
0
0
4
–2.34
0
5
0
—
—
—
31250
—
—
—
0
2
0
—
—
—
0
3
0
38400
0
1
0
—
—
—
0
2
0
—
—
—
Note: If possible, the error should be within 1%.
247
ø (MHz)
4.9152
5
6
6.144
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
86
+0.31
2
88
–0.25
2
106
–0.44
2
108
+0.08
150
1
255
0
2
64
+0.16
2
77
0
2
79
0
300
1
127
0
1
129
+0.16
1
155
0
1
159
0
600
0
255
0
1
64
+0.16
1
77
0
1
79
0
1200
0
127
0
0
129
+0.16
0
155
+0.16
0
159
0
2400
0
63
0
0
64
+0.16
0
77
+0.16
0
79
0
4800
0
31
0
0
32
–1.36
0
38
+0.16
0
39
0
9600
0
15
0
0
15
+1.73
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0
19200
0
7
0
0
7
+1.73
0
9
–2.34
0
4
0
31250
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
5
+2.40
38400
0
3
0
0
3
+1.73
0
4
–2.34
0
4
0
ø (MHz)
7.3728
8
9.8304
10
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
130
–0.07
2
141
+0.03
2
174
–0.26
3
43
+0.88
150
2
95
0
2
103
+0.16
2
127
0
2
129
+0.16
300
1
191
0
1
207
+0.16
1
255
0
2
64
+0.16
600
1
95
0
1
103
+0.16
1
127
0
1
129
+0.16
1200
0
191
0
0
207
+0.16
0
255
0
1
64
+0.16
2400
0
95
0
0
103
+0.16
0
127
0
0
129
+0.16
4800
0
47
0
0
51
+0.16
0
63
0
0
64
+0.16
9600
0
23
0
0
25
+0.16
0
31
0
0
32
–1.36
19200
0
11
0
0
12
+0.16
0
15
0
0
15
+1.73
31250
—
—
—
0
7
0
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0
38400
0
5
0
—
—
—
0
7
0
0
7
+1.73
Note: If possible, the error should be within 1%.
248
ø (MHz)
12
12.288
14.7456
16
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
212
+0.03
2
217
+0.08
3
64
+0.76
3
70
+0.03
150
2
155
+0.16
2
159
0
2
191
0
2
207
+0.16
300
2
77
+0.16
2
79
0
2
95
0
2
103
+0.16
600
1
155
+0.16
1
159
0
1
191
0
1
207
+0.16
1200
1
77
+0.16
1
79
0
1
95
0
1
103
+0.16
2400
0
155
+0.16
0
159
0
0
191
0
0
207
+0.16
4800
0
77
+0.16
0
79
0
0
95
0
0
103
+0.16
9600
0
38
+0.16
0
39
0
0
47
0
0
51
+0.16
19200
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0
0
23
0
0
25
+0.16
31250
0
11
0
0
11
+2.4
0
14
–1.7
0
15
0
38400
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0
0
11
0
0
12
+0.16
Note: If possible, the error should be within 1%.
249
Table 12.4 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (When øP = ø/2)
ø (MHz)
2
2.097152
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
70
0.03
1
73
0.64
150
1
51
0.16
1
54
–0.70
300
0
207
0.16
0
217
0.21
600
0
103
0.16
0
108
0.21
1200
0
51
0.16
0
54
–0.70
2400
0
25
0.16
0
26
1.14
4800
0
12
0.16
0
13
–2.48
9600
—
—
—
0
6
–2.48
19200
—
—
—
—
—
—
31250
0
1
0
—
—
—
38400
—
—
—
—
—
—
ø (MHz)
2.4576
3
3.6864
4
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
86
0.31
1
106
–0.44
1
130
–0.07
1
141
0.03
150
1
63
0
1
77
0.16
1
95
0
1
103
0.16
300
0
255
0
1
38
0.16
1
47
0
1
51
0.16
600
0
127
0
0
155
0.16
0
191
0
0
207
0.16
1200
0
63
0
0
77
0.16
0
95
0
0
103
0.16
2400
0
31
0
0
38
0.16
0
47
0
0
51
0.16
4800
0
15
0
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0
0
25
0.16
9600
0
7
0
0
9
–2.34
0
11
0
0
12
0.16
19200
0
3
0
0
4
–2.34
0
5
0
—
—
—
31250
—
—
—
0
2
0
—
—
—
0
3
0
38400
0
1
0
—
—
—
0
2
0
0
2
8.51
250
ø (MHz)
4.9152
5
6
6.144
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
174
–0.26
1
177
–0.25
1
212
0.03
1
217
0.08
150
1
127
0
1
129
0.16
1
155
0.16
1
159
0
300
1
63
0
1
64
0.16
1
77
0.16
1
79
0
600
0
255
0
1
32
1.36
1
38
0.16
1
39
0
1200
0
127
0
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
0
159
0
2400
0
63
0
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
0
79
0
4800
0
31
0
0
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
0
39
0
9600
0
15
0
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0
19200
0
7
0
0
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0
31250
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
5
2.40
38400
0
3
0
0
3
1.73
0
4
–2.34
0
4
0
ø (MHz)
7.3728
8
9.8304
10
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
64
0.70
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
88
–0.25
150
1
191
0
1
207
0.16
1
255
0
2
64
0.16
300
1
95
0
1
103
0.16
1
127
0
1
129
0.16
600
1
47
0
1
51
0.16
1
63
0
1
64
0.16
1200
0
191
0
0
207
0.16
0
255
0
1
32
1.36
2400
0
95
0
0
103
0.16
0
127
0
0
129
0.16
4800
0
47
0
0
51
0.16
0
63
0
0
64
0.16
9600
0
23
0
0
25
0.16
0
31
0
0
32
–1.36
19200
0
11
0
0
12
0.16
0
15
0
0
15
1.73
31250
—
—
—
0
7
0
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0
38400
0
5
0
—
—
—
0
7
0
0
7
1.73
251
ø (MHz)
12
12.288
14.7456
16
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
106
–0.44
2
108
0.08
2
130
–0.07
2
141
0.03
150
2
77
0.16
2
79
0
2
95
0
2
103
0.16
300
1
155
0.16
1
159
0
1
191
0
1
207
0.16
600
1
77
0.16
1
79
0
1
95
0
1
103
0.16
1200
1
38
0.16
1
39
0
1
47
0
1
51
0.16
2400
0
155
0.16
0
159
0
0
191
0
0
207
0.16
4800
0
77
0.16
0
79
0
0
95
0
0
103
0.16
9600
0
38
0.16
0
39
0
0
47
0
0
51
0.16
19200
0
19
–2.34
0
19
0
0
23
0
0
25
0.16
31250
0
11
0
0
11
2.40
0
14
–1.70
0
15
0
38400
0
9
–2.34
0
9
0
0
11
0
0
12
0.16
Legend:
Blank: No setting is available
—:
A setting is available, but error occurs.
252
Note: If possible, the error should be within 1%.
B=
B:
N:
F:
n:
F
64 ×
22n–1
× 106
× (N + 1)
N=
F
64 ×
22n–1
×B
× 106 – 1
Bit rate (bits/second)
Baud rate generator BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
øP (MHz) when n ≠ 0, or ø (MHz) when n = 0
Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0, 1, 2, 3)
The meaning of n is given below.
SMR
WSCR
n
CKS1
CKS0
CKDBL
Clock
0
0
0
0
ø
1
0
1
0
ø/4
2
1
0
0
ø/16
3
1
1
0
ø/64
0
0
0
1
ø
1
0
1
1
ø/8
2
1
0
1
ø/32
3
1
1
1
ø/128
The bit rate error can be calculated with the formula below.
Error (%) =
F × 106
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 22n–1
– 1 × 100
253
Table 12.5 Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode (When øP = ø)
ø (MHz)
2
4
5
8
10
16
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
250
2
124
2
249
—
—
3
124
—
—
3
249
500
1
249
2
124
—
—
2
249
—
—
3
124
1k
1
124
1
249
—
—
2
124
—
—
2
249
2.5 k
0
199
1
99
1
124
1
199
1
249
2
99
5k
0
99
0
199
0
249
1
99
1
124
1
199
10 k
0
49
0
99
0
124
0
199
0
249
1
99
25 k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
0
159
50 k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
0
79
100 k
0
4
0
9
—
—
0
19
0
24
0
39
250 k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
0
15
500 k
0
0*
0
1
—
—
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
0*
—
—
0
1
—
—
0
3
0
0*
—
—
0
0*
1M
2.5 M
4M
Legend:
Blank: No setting is available
—:
A setting is available, but error occurs.
*:
Continuous transfer is not possible
254
Table 12.6 Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode (When øP = ø/2)
ø (MHz)
2
4
5
8
10
16
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
250
1
249
2
124
—
—
2
249
—
—
3
124
500
1
124
1
249
—
—
2
124
—
—
2
249
1k
—
—
1
124
—
—
1
249
—
—
2
124
2.5 k
0
199
1
49
—
—
1
99
1
124
1
199
5k
0
99
0
199
0
249
1
49
—
—
1
99
10 k
0
49
0
99
0
124
0
199
0
249
1
49
25 k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
0
159
50 k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
0
79
100 k
0
4
0
9
—
—
0
19
0
24
0
39
250 k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
0
15
500 k
0
0*
0
1
—
—
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
0*
—
—
0
1
—
—
0
3
—
—
0
0*
—
—
—
—
0
0*
1M
2.5 M
4M
Legend:
Blank: No setting is available
—:
A setting is available, but error occurs.
*:
Continuous transfer is not possible
255
B=
B:
N:
F:
n:
F
× 106
8 × 22n–1 × (N + 1)
F
8 × 22n–1 × B
Bit rate (bits/second)
Baud rate generator BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
øP (MHz) when n ≠ 0, or ø (MHz) when n = 0
Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0, 1, 2, 3)
The meaning of n is given below.
SMR
256
N=
WSCR
n
CKS1
CKS0
CKDBL
Clock
0
0
0
0
ø
1
0
1
0
ø/4
2
1
0
0
ø/16
3
1
1
0
ø/64
0
0
0
1
ø
1
0
1
1
ø/8
2
1
0
1
ø/32
3
1
1
1
ø/128
× 106 – 1
12.2.9
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICS
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the SCI operating mode and selects the
TCNT clock source in the 8-bit timers. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 4—I2C Control (IICS, IICD, IICX, IICE): These bits control operation of the I2C bus
interface. For details, refer to section 13, I2C Bus Interface.
Bit 3—Slave Input Switch (STAC): Controls the input pin of the host interface. For details,
section 14, Host Interface.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Enables or disables the multiprocessor communication
function on channels SCI0 and SCI1.
Bit 2: MPE
Description
0
The multiprocessor communication function is disabled, regardless of the
setting of the MP bit in SMR.
(Initial value)
1
The multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The multi-processor
format can be selected by setting the MP bit in SMR to 1.
Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits select the
clock input to the timer counters (TCNT) in the 8-bit timers. For details, see section 9, 8-Bit
Timers.
257
12.3
Operation
12.3.1
Overview
The SCI supports serial data transfer in two modes. In asynchronous mode each character is
synchronized individually. In synchronous mode communication is synchronized with a clock
signal.
The selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the communication format depend on
SMR settings as indicated in table 12.7. The clock source depends on the settings of the C/A bit in
the SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR as indicated in table 12.8.
Asynchronous Mode
• Data length: 7 or 8 bits can be selected.
• A parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added, and stop bit lengths of 1 or 2 bits can be
selected. (These selections determine the communication format and character length.)
• Framing errors (FER), parity errors (PER), and overrun errors (ORER) can be detected in
receive data, and the line-break condition can be detected.
• SCI clock source: An internal or external clock source can be selected.
• Internal clock: The SCI is clocked by the on-chip baud rate generator and can output a clock
signal at the bit-rate frequency.
• External clock: The external clock frequency must be 16 times the bit rate. (The on-chip baud
rate generator is not used.)
Synchronous Mode
•
•
•
•
Communication format: The data length is 8 bits.
Overrun errors (ORER) can be detected in receive data.
SCI clock source: An internal or external clock source can be selected.
Internal clock: The SCI is clocked by the on-chip baud rate generator and outputs a serial clock
signal to external devices.
• External clock: The on-chip baud rate generator is not used. The SCI operates on the input
serial clock.
258
Table 12.7 Communication Formats Used by SCI
SMR Settings
Communication Format
Bit 7:
C/A
Bit 6:
CHR
Bit 2:
MP
Bit 5:
PE
Bit 3:
STOP
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Mode
Asynchronous
mode
Multiprocessor Parity
Data
Bit
Length Bit
Stop
Bit
Length
8 bits
1 bit
None
None
2 bits
0
Present 1 bit
1
1
0
2 bits
0
7 bits
None
1
1
2 bits
0
Present 1 bit
1
0
1
—
0
1
1
0
2 bits
Asynchronous
8 bits
mode (multiprocessor format)
7 bits
Present
None
—
—
—
—
1 bit
2 bits
1 bit
1
1
1 bit
2 bits
Synchronous
mode
8 bits
None
None
Table 12.8 SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
SCR
Serial Transmit/Receive Clock
Bit 7:
C/A
Bit 1:
CKE1
Bit 0:
CKE0
Mode
Clock Source
SCK Pin Function
0
0
0
Async
Internal
Input/output port (not used by SCI)
1
1
Serial clock output at bit rate
0
External
Serial clock input at 16 × bit rate
Internal
Serial clock output
External
Serial clock input
1
1
0
0
Sync
1
1
0
1
259
12.3.2
Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, each transmitted or received character is individually synchronized by
framing it with a start bit and stop bit.
Full duplex data transfer is possible because the SCI has independent transmit and receive
sections. Double buffering in both sections enables the SCI to be programmed for continuous data
transfer.
Figure 12.2 shows the general format of one character sent or received in asynchronous mode. The
communication channel is normally held in the mark state (high). Character transmission or
reception starts with a transition to the space state (low).
The first bit transmitted or received is the start bit (low). It is followed by the data bits, in which
the least significant bit (LSB) comes first. The data bits are followed by the parity or
multiprocessor bit, if present, then the stop bit or bits (high) confirming the end of the frame.
In receiving, the SCI synchronizes on the falling edge of the start bit, and samples each bit at the
center of the bit (at the 8th cycle of the internal serial clock, which runs at 16 times the bit rate).
Start bit
1 bit
D0
D1
Dn
7 or 8 bits
Parity or
multiprocessor bit
Stop bit
0 or 1 bit
1 or 2 bits
One unit of data (one character or frame)
Figure 12.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Mode
260
Idle state
(mark)
Data Format
Table 12.9 lists the data formats that can be sent and received in asynchronous mode. Twelve
formats can be selected by bits in the serial mode register (SMR).
Table 12.9 Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode
SMR Bits
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P
STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P
STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
—
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
—
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
—
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
—
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
Notes: SMR:
S:
STOP:
P:
MPB:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Serial mode register
Start bit
Stop bit
Parity bit
Multiprocessor bit
261
Clock
In asynchronous mode it is possible to select either an internal clock created by the on-chip baud
rate generator, or an external clock input at the SCK pin. The selection is made by the C/A bit in
the serial mode register (SMR) and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in the serial control register (SCR).
Refer to table 12.8.
If an external clock is input at the SCK pin, its frequency should be 16 times the desired bit rate.
If the internal clock provided by the on-chip baud rate generator is selected and the SCK pin is
used for clock output, the output clock frequency is equal to the bit rate, and the clock pulse rises
at the center of the transmit data bits. Figure 12.3 shows the phase relationship between the output
clock and transmit data.
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
One frame
Figure 12.3 Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data
(Asynchronous Mode)
Transmitting and Receiving Data
SCI Initialization: Before transmitting or receiving, software must clear the TE and RE bits to 0
in the serial control register (SCR), then initialize the SCI following the procedure in figure 12.4.
Note: When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0
before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets TDRE to 1 and
initializes the transmit shift register (TSR). Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize
the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags and receive data register (RDR), which retain their
previous contents.
When an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or
subsequent operation. SCI operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped.
262
Initialization
1.
Select interrupts and the clock source in the
serial control register (SCR). Leave TE and RE
cleared to 0. If clock output is selected, in
asynchronous mode, clock output starts
immediately after the setting is made in SCR.
Clear TE and RE bits to
0 in SCR
2.
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in
SCR (leaving TE and RE
cleared to 0)
Select the communication format in the serial
mode register (SMR).
3.
Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in
the bit rate register (BRR). This step is not
necessary when an external clock is used.
2
Select communication
format in SMR
4.
3
Set value in BRR
Wait for at least the interval required to transmit
or receive one bit, then set TE or RE in the serial
control register (SCR). Setting TE or RE enables
the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as
necessary to enable interrupts. The initial states
are the mark transmit state, and the idle receive
state (waiting for a start bit).
1
1 bit interval
elapsed?
No
Yes
4
Set TE or RE to 1 in SCR,
and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE as necessary
Start transmitting or receiving
Figure 12.4 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization
263
Transmitting Serial Data: Follow the procedure in figure 12.5 for transmitting serial data.
1
Initialize
1.
SCI initialization: the transmit data output function
of the TxD pin is selected automatically.
After the TE bit is set to 1, one frame of 1s is output,
then transmission is possible.
2.
SCI status check and transmit data write: read
the serial status register (SSR), check that the
TDRE bit is 1, then write transmit data in the
transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to 0.
If a multiprocessor format is selected, after
writing the transmit data write 0 or 1 in the
multiprocessor bit transfer (MPBT) in SSR.
Transition of the TDRE bit from 0 to 1 can be
reported by an interrupt.
Start transmitting
2
Read TDRE bit in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR
If using multiprocessor format,
select MPBT value in SSR
Clear TDRE bit to 0
Serial transmission
3
End of
transmission?
No
Yes
3. (a) To continue transmitting serial data: read the
TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write; if
TDRE = 1, write data in TDR, then clear TDRE
to 0.
(b) To end serial transmission: end of transmission
can be confirmed by checking transition of the
TEND bit from 0 to 1. This can be reported by
a TEI interrupt.
4.
To output a break signal at the end of serial
transmission: set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the
DR bit to 0 (DDR and DR are I/O port registers),
then clear TE to 0 in SCR.
Read TEND bit in SSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
4
Output break
signal?
No
Yes
Set DR = 0, DDR = 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 12.5 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data
264
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in SSR. When TDRE is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes that
the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into the
transmit shift register (TSR).
2. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the TIE bit (TDR-empty interrupt enable) is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a
TXI interrupt (TDR-empty interrupt) at this time.
Serial transmit data are transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin:
a. Start bit: One 0 bit is output.
b. Transmit data: Seven or eight bits are output, LSB first.
c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor
bit is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can
also be selected.
d. Stop bit: One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output.
e. Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data.
3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the stop bit. If TDRE is 0, after loading new data
from TDR into TSR and transmitting the stop bit, the SCI begins serial transmission of the next
frame. If TDRE is 1, after setting the TEND bit to 1 in SSR and transmitting the stop bit, the
SCI continues 1-level output in the mark state, and if the TEIE bit (TSR-empty interrupt
enable) in SCR is set to 1, the SCI generates a TEI interrupt request (TSR-empty interrupt).
Figure 12.6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in asynchronous mode.
265
1
Start
bit
0
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
0
Parity Stop
bit
bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
1
Idle state
(mark)
TDRE
TEND
TXI
TXI interrupt handler
TXI
request writes data in TDR and request
clears TDRE to 0
1 frame
Figure 12.6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation
(8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit)
266
TEI request
Receiving Serial Data: Follow the procedure in figure 12.7 for receiving serial data.
1
Initialize
1. SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD
pin is selected automatically.
Start receiving
2
2. To continue receiving serial data: read RDR and
clear RDRF to 0 before the stop bit of the current
frame is received.
Read ORER, PER, and
FER in SSR
PER ∨ RER ∨
ORER = 1?
Yes
No
3
4
Read RDRF bit in SSR
RDRF = 1?
3. SCI status check and receive data read: read the
serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF is set
to 1, then read receive data from the receive data
register (RDR) and clear RDRF to 0. Transition of
the RDRF bit from 0 to 1 can be reported by an RXI
interrupt.
Error handling
No
Yes
Read receive data from RDR,
and clear RDRF bit to 0
in SSR
Finished
receiving?
4. Receive error handling and break detection: if a
receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and
FER bits in SSR to identify the error. After executing
the necessary error handling, clear ORER, PER, and
FER all to 0. Transmitting and receiving cannot
resume if ORER, PER, or FER remains set to 1.
When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be
read to detect the break state.
No
Yes
Clear RE to 0 in SCR
End
Start error handling
FER = 1?
No
Discriminate and
process error, and
clear flags
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Clear RE to 0
in SCR
End
Return
Figure 12.7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data
267
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows.
1. The SCI monitors the receive data line and synchronizes internally when it detects a start bit.
2. Receive data is shifted into RSR in order from LSB to MSB.
3. The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving these bits, the SCI makes the following checks:
a. Parity check: The number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity
setting of the O/E bit in SMR.
b. Stop bit check: The stop bit value must be 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first stop bit
is checked.
c. Status check: RDRF must be 0 so that receive data can be loaded from RSR into RDR.
If these checks all pass, the SCI sets RDRF to 1 and stores the received data in RDR. If one of
the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 12.10.
Note: When a receive error flag is set, further receiving is disabled. The RDRF bit is not set to 1.
Be sure to clear the error flags.
4. After setting RDRF to 1, if the RIE bit (receive-end interrupt enable) is set to 1 in SCR, the
SCI requests an RXI (receive-end) interrupt. If one of the error flags (ORER, PER, or FER) is
set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1, the SCI requests an ERI (receive-error)
interrupt.
Table 12.10 Receive Error Conditions and SCI Operation
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Condition
Data Transfer
Overrun error
ORER
Receiving of next data ends
while RDRF is still set to 1
in SSR
Receive data not loaded from
RSR into RDR
Framing error
FER
Stop bit is 0
Receive data loaded from
RSR into RDR
Parity error
PER
Parity of receive data differs
from even/odd parity setting
in SMR
Receive data loaded from
RSR into RDR
268
Figure 12.8 shows an example of SCI receive operation in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
0
Parity Stop
bit
bit
Data
D0
D1
D7
0/1
0
1
Idle state
(mark)
RDRF
FER
RXI
request
1 frame
RXI interrupt handler
reads data in RDR and
clears RDRF to 0
Framing error,
ERI request
Figure 12.8 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit)
Multiprocessor Communication
The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial
communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an
additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format).
In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID.
A serial communication cycle consists of two cycles: an ID-sending cycle that identifies the
receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending
cycles from data-sending cycles.
The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants
to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor sends
transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0.
Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to
1.
After receiving data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, the receiving processor with an ID
matching the received data continues to receive further incoming data. Multiple processors can
send and receive data in this way.
Four formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is
selected. For details see table 12.9.
269
Transmitting
processor
Serial communication line
Receiving
processor A
Receiving
processor B
Receiving
processor C
Receiving
processor D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial data
H'01
(MPB = 1)
ID-sending cycle:
receiving processor address
H'AA
(MPB = 0)
Data-sending cycle:
data sent to receiving
processor specified by ID
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 12.9 Example of Communication among Processors using Multiprocessor Format
(Sending Data H'AA to Receiving Processor A)
270
Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: See figures 12.5 and 12.6.
Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Follow the procedure in figure 12.10 for receiving
multiprocessor serial data.
1
2
Initialize
1.
SCI initialization: the receive data function of the RxD pin is
selected automatically.
Start receiving
2.
ID receive cycle: Set the MPIE bit in the serial control register
(SCR) to 1.
3.
SCI status check and ID check: read the serial status register
(SSR), check that RDRF is set to 1, then read receive data
from the receive data register (RDR) and compare with the
processor’s own ID. Transition of the RDRF bit from 0 to
1 can be reported by an RXI interrupt. If the ID does not match
the receive data, set MPIE to 1 again and clear RDRF to 0.
If the ID matches the receive data, clear RDRF to 0.
4.
SCI status check and data receiving: read SSR, check that
RDRF is set to 1, then read data from the receive data register
(RDR) and write 0 in the RDRF bit. Transition of the RDRF bit
from 0 to 1 can be reported by an RXI interrupt.
5.
Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error
occurs, read the ORER and FER bits in SSR to identify the error.
After executing the necessary error handling, clear both ORER
and FER to 0. Receiving cannot resume while ORER or FER
remains set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin
can be read to detect the break state.
Set MPIE bit to 1 in SCR
Read ORER and FER
bits in SSR
FER ∨
ORER = 1?
Yes
No
3
Read RDRF bit in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read receive data from RDR
Own ID?
No
Yes
Read ORER and FER
bits in SSR
FER +
ORER = 1?
Yes
No
4
Read RDRF bit in SSR
RDRF = 1?
No
Start error handling
Yes
Read receive data from RDR
5
Error handling
Finished
receiving?
No
FER = 1?
No
Clear RE to 0 in SCR
Discriminate and
process error, and
clear flags
End
Return
Yes
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Clear RE bit to
0 in SCR
End
Figure 12.10 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data
271
Figure 12.11 shows an example of an SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format (8-bit
data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit).
1
Start
bit
0
Stop Start
MPB bit bit
Data (ID1)
D0
D1
D7
1
1
0
Data (Data1)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1
Idle state
(mark)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value
ID1
MPB detection
MPIE = 0
RXI request
RXI handler reads
RDR data and clears
RDRF to 0
Not own ID, so
MPIE is set to
1 again
No RXI request,
RDR not updated
(Multiprocessor interrupt)
(a) Own ID does not match data
1
Start
bit
0
Stop Start
MPB bit bit
Data (ID2)
D0
D1
D7
1
1
0
Data (Data2)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1
Idle state
(mark)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value
ID2
MPB detection
MPIE = 0
RXI request
RXI handler reads
Own ID, so receiving
RDR data and clears continues, with data
RDRF to 0
received at each RXI
(Multiprocessor interrupt)
(b) Own ID matches data
Figure 12.11 Example of SCI Receive Operation
(8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit)
272
Data 2
MPIE set to
1 again
12.3.3
Synchronous Mode
Overview
In synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses.
This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication.
The SCI transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full
duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so
continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or
receiving is in progress.
Figure 12.12 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication.
One unit (character or frame) of serial data
*
*
Serial clock
LSB
Serial data
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t care
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transmitting or receiving
Figure 12.12 Data Format in Synchronous Communication
In synchronous serial communication, each data bit is sent on the communication line from one
falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is received in synchronization with the rising edge
of the serial clock.
In each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from LSB (first) to MSB (last). After
output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the MSB.
Communication Format: The data length is fixed at eight bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit
can be added.
Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input
from the SCK pin can be selected by clearing or setting the CKE1 bit in the serial control register
(SCR). See table 12.8.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the SCK pin. Eight clock
pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not transmitting or
receiving, the clock signal remains at the high level.
273
Transmitting and Receiving Data
SCI Initialization: The SCI must be initialized in the same way as in asynchronous mode. See
figure 12.4. When switching from asynchronous mode to synchronous mode, check that the
ORER, FER, and PER bits are cleared to 0. Transmitting and receiving cannot begin if ORER,
FER, or PER is set to 1.
Transmitting Serial Data: Follow the procedure in figure 12.13 for transmitting serial data.
1
Initialize
Start transmitting
2
Read TDRE bit in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data in
TDR and clear TDRE bit to
0 in SSR
1.
SCI initialization: the transmit data output function
of the TxD pin is selected automatically.
2.
SCI status check and transmit data write: read
the serial status register (SSR), check that the
TDRE bit is 1, then write transmit data in the
transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to 0.
Transition of the TDRE bit from 0 to 1 can be
reported by a TXI interrupt.
3. (a) To continue transmitting serial data: read the
TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write; if
TDRE = 1, write data in TDR, then clear TDRE
to 0.
(b) To end serial transmission: end of transmission
can be confirmed by checking transition of the
TEND bit from 0 to 1. This can be reported by
a TEI interrupt.
Serial transmission
3
End of
transmission?
No
Yes
Read TEND bit in SSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR
End
Figure 12.13 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting
274
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in SSR. When TDRE is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes that
the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into the
transmit shift register (TSR).
2. After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the TIE bit (TDR-empty interrupt enable) in SCR is set to 1, the SCI requests a
TXI interrupt (TDR-empty interrupt) at this time.
If clock output is selected the SCI outputs eight serial clock pulses, triggered by the clearing of
the TDRE bit to 0. If an external clock source is selected, the SCI outputs data in
synchronization with the input clock.
Data is output from the TxD pin in order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7).
3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If TDRE is 0, the SCI loads
data from TDR into TSR, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If TDRE is 1, the
SCI sets the TEND bit in SSR to 1, transmits the MSB, then holds the output in the MSB state.
If the TEIE bit (transmit-end interrupt enable) in SCR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt (TSR-empty
interrupt) is requested at this time.
4. After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held at the high level.
Figure 12.14 shows an example of SCI transmit operation.
Serial clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TXI
request
TXI interrupt
TXI
handler writes request
data in TDR and
clears TDRE to 0
TEI
request
1 frame
Figure 12.14 Example of SCI Transmit Operation
275
Receiving Serial Data: Follow the procedure in figure 12.15 for receiving serial data. When
switching from asynchronous mode to synchronous mode, be sure to check that PER and FER are
cleared to 0. If PER or FER is set to 1 the RDRF bit will not be set and both transmitting and
receiving will be disabled.
1
Initialize
1.
SCI initialization: the receive data function of the
RxD pin is selected automatically.
Start receiving
2.
Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs,
read the ORER bit in SSR then, after executing
the necessary error handling, clear ORER to 0.
Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume
while ORER remains set to 1. When clock
output mode is selected, receiving can be halted
temporarily by receiving one dummy byte and
causing an overrun error. When preparations
to receive the next data are completed, clear
the ORER bit to 0. This causes receiving to
resume, so return to the step marked 2 in the
flowchart.
Read ORER bit in SSR
Yes
ORER = 1?
No
3
2
Error handling
Read RDRF in SSR
RDRF = 1?
3.
SCI status check and receive data read: read
the serial status register (SSR), check that
RDRF is set to 1, then read receive data from
the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF
to 0. Transition of the RDRF bit from 0 to 1
can be reported by an RXI interrupt.
4.
To continue receiving serial data: read RDR and
clear RDRF to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is received.
No
Yes
4
Read receive data
from RDR, and clear
RDRF bit to 0 in SSR
Finished
receiving?
No
Yes
Clear RE to 0 in SCR
End
Start error handling
Overrun error handling
Clear ORER to 0 in SSR
Return
Figure 12.15 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving
276
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows.
1. If an external clock is selected, data is input in synchronization with the input clock. If clock
output is selected, as soon as the RE bit is set to 1 the SCI begins outputting the serial clock
and inputting data. If clock output is stopped because the ORER bit is set to 1, output of the
serial clock and input of data resume as soon as the ORER bit is cleared to 0.
2. Receive data is shifted into RSR in order from LSB to MSB.
After receiving the data, the SCI checks that RDRF is 0 so that receive data can be loaded from
RSR into RDR. If this check passes, the SCI sets RDRF to 1 and stores the received data in
RDR. If the check does not pass (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in
table 12.10.
Note: Both transmitting and receiving are disabled while a receive error flag is set. The RDRF
bit is not set to 1. Be sure to clear the error flag.
3. After setting RDRF to 1, if the RIE bit (receive-end interrupt enable) is set to 1 in SCR, the
SCI requests an RXI (receive-end) interrupt. If the ORER bit is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR
is set to 1, the SCI requests an ERI (receive-error) interrupt.
When clock output mode is selected, clock output stops when the RE bit is cleared to 0 or the
ORER bit is set to 1. To prevent clock count errors, it is safest to receive one dummy byte and
generate an overrun error.
Figure 12.16 shows an example of SCI receive operation.
Serial clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RXI
request
RXI interrupt
handler reads
data in RDR and
clears RDRF to 0
RXI
request
Overrun error,
ERI request
1 frame
Figure 12.16 Example of SCI Receive Operation
277
Transmitting and Receiving Serial Data Simultaneously: Follow the procedure in figure 12.17
for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously. If clock output mode is selected, output
of the serial clock begins simultaneously with serial transmission.
1.
SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of
the TxD pin and receive data input function of the
RxD pin are selected, enabling simultaneous
transmitting and receiving.
2.
SCI status check and transmit data write: read the
serial status register (SSR), check that the TDRE bit
is 1, then write transmit data in the transmit data
register (TDR) and clear TDRE to 0. Transition of the
TDRE bit from 0 to 1 can be reported by a TXI interrupt.
3.
SCI status check and receive data read: read the
serial status register (SSR), check that the RDRF
bit is 1, then read receive data from the receive data
register (RDR) and clear RDRF to 0. Transition of
the RDRF bit from 0 to 1 can be reported by an RXI
interrupt.
4.
Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read
the ORER bit in SSR then, after executing the
necessary error handling, clear ORER to 0. Neither
transmitting nor receiving can resume while ORER
remains set to 1.
Initialize
1
Start
2
Read TDRE bit in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
3
Write transmit data
in TDR and clear TDRE
bit to 0 in SSR
Read ORER bit in SSR
ORER = 1?
Yes
No
4
Error handling
Read RDRF bit in SSR
No
5.
RDRF = 1?
Yes
5
Read receive data
from RDR and clear
RDRF bit to 0 in SSR
End of
transmitting and
receiving?
To continue transmitting and receiving serial data:
read RDR and clear RDRF to 0 before the MSB
(bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also read the
TDRE bit and check that it is set to 1, indicating that
it is safe to write; then write data in TDR and clear
TDRE to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame
is transmitted.
No
Yes
Clear TE and RE bits
to 0 in SCR
End
Note: In switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, clear both
TE and RE to 0, then set TE and RE to 1 simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a
BEST instruction for this purpose.
Figure 12.17 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting and Receiving
278
12.4
Interrupts
The SCI can request four types of interrupts: ERI, RXI, TXI, and TEI. Table 12.11 indicates the
source and priority of these interrupts. The interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled by the
TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in the SCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for
each interrupt source, except that the receive-error interrupt (ERI) is the logical OR of three
sources: overrun error, framing error, and parity error.
The TXI interrupt indicates that the next transmit data can be written. The TEI interrupt indicates
that the SCI has stopped transmitting data.
Table 12.11 SCI Interrupt Sources
Interrupt
Description
Priority
ERI
Receive-error interrupt (ORER, FER, or PER)
High
RXI
Receive-end interrupt (RDRF)
TXI
TDR-empty interrupt (TDRE)
TEI
TSR-empty interrupt (TEND)
12.5
Low
Application Notes
Application programmers should note the following features of the SCI.
TDR Write: The TDRE bit in SSR is simply a flag that indicates that the TDR contents have been
transferred to TSR. The TDR contents can be rewritten regardless of the TDRE value. If a new
byte is written in TDR while the TDRE bit is 0, before the old TDR contents have been moved
into TSR, the old byte will be lost. Software should check that the TDRE bit is set to 1 before
writing to TDR.
Multiple Receive Errors: Table 12.12 lists the values of flag bits in the SSR when multiple
receive errors occur, and indicates whether the RSR contents are transferred to RDR.
279
Table 12.12 SSR Bit States and Data Transfer when Multiple Receive Errors Occur
SSR Bits
Receive Error
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
RSR →
RDR*2
Overrun error
1*1
1
0
0
No
Framing error
0
0
1
0
Yes
Parity error
0
0
0
1
Yes
1
*1
1
1
0
No
Overrun and parity errors
1
*1
1
0
1
No
Framing and parity errors
0
0
1
1
Yes
1
1
1
No
Overrun and framing errors
Overrun, framing, and parity errors
1
*1
Notes: *1 Set to 1 before the overrun error occurs.
*2 Yes: The RSR contents are transferred to RDR.
No: The RSR contents are not transferred to RDR.
Line Break Detection: When the RxD pin receives a continuous stream of 0’s in asynchronous
mode (line-break state), a framing error occurs because the SCI detects a 0 stop bit. The value
H'00 is transferred from RSR to RDR. Software can detect the line-break state as a framing error
accompanied by H'00 data in RDR.
The SCI continues to receive data, so if the FER bit is cleared to 0 another framing error will
occur.
Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Asynchronous Mode: The serial clock used by the
SCI in asynchronous mode runs at 16 times the bit rate. The falling edge of the start bit is detected
by sampling the RxD input on the falling edge of this clock. After the start bit is detected, each bit
of receive data in the frame (including the start bit, parity bit, and stop bit or bits) is sampled on
the rising edge of the serial clock pulse at the center of the bit. See figure 12.18.
It follows that the receive margin can be calculated as in equation (1).
When the absolute frequency deviation of the clock signal is 0 and the clock duty cycle is 0.5, data
can theoretically be received with distortion up to the margin given by equation (2). This is a
theoretical limit, however. In practice, system designers should allow a margin of 20% to 30%.
280
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5
Basic
clock
–7.5 pulses
Receive
data
Start bit
+7.5 pulses
D0
D1
Sync
sampling
Data
sampling
Figure 12.18 Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode)
M = {(0.5 – 1/2N) – (D – 0.5)/N – (L – 0.5)F} × 100 [%]
M:
N:
D:
L:
F:
................................... (1)
Receive margin
Ratio of basic clock to bit rate (N=16)
Duty factor of clock—ratio of high pulse width to low width (0.5 to 1.0)
Frame length (9 to 12)
Absolute clock frequency deviation
When D = 0.5 and F = 0
M = (0.5 –1/2 × 16) × 100 [%] = 46.875%
........................................................ (2)
281
282
Section 13 I2C Bus Interface [Option]
An I2C bus interface is available as an option. Observe the following notes when using this option.
For mask-ROM versions, products that use this option have a “W” added to the product number.
Examples: HD6433437WTF, HD6433434WF
13.1
Overview
The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC bus)
interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the
Philips configuration, however.
The I2C bus interface uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer data, so it
can save board and connector space. Figure 13.1 shows typical I2C bus interface connections.
13.1.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface
Start and stop conditions generated automatically
Selectable acknowledge output level when receiving
Auto-loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting
Selection of eight internal clocks (in master mode)
Selection of acknowledgement mode, or serial mode without acknowledge bit
Wait function: A wait can be inserted in acknowledgement mode by holding the SCL pin low
after a data transfer, before acknowledgement of the transfer.
Three interrupt sources
Data transfer end
In slave receive mode: slave address matched, or general call address received
In master transmit mode: bus arbitration lost
Direct bus drive (pins SCL and SDA)
In addition to pins SCL and SCA, four general port pins (PA4 to PA 7) can also drive the bus
Pins P86/SCK1/SCL, P97/WAIT/SDA, and PA4/KEYIN12 to PA 7/KEYIN15 (total of 6 pins) are
all powered by bus power supply VCCB, separate from VCC. When the bus drive function is
selected, all output is NMOS output.
283
VCCB
VCC
VCC
VCCB
SCL
SCL
SDA
SDA
SCL in
SDA out
(Master)
SCL in
H8/3437
SCL out
SCL out
SDA in
SDA in
SDA out
SDA out
(Slave 1)
SCL in
SCL
SDA
SDA in
SCL
SDA
SCL out
(Slave 2)
Figure 13.1 I2C Bus Interface Connection Example
(When the H8/3437 is the Master Chip)
284
13.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 13.2 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface.
STCR
øP
PS
ICCR
SCL
Clock
control
Noise
canceler
Bus state
decision
circuit
ICSR
Arbitration
decision
circuit
Output data
control
circuit
SDA
Noise
canceler
Internal data bus
ICMR
ICDR
Address
comparator
Legend:
ICCR: I2C bus control register
ICMR: I2C bus mode register
ICSR: I2C bus status register
ICDR: I2C bus data register
SAR: Slave address register
Prescaler
PS:
STCR: Serial timer control register
SAR
Interrupt
generator
Interrupt
request
Figure 13.2 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface
285
13.1.3
Input/Output Pins
Table 13.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface.
Table 13.1 Wait-State Controller Pins
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Serial clock
SCL
Input/output
Serial clock input/output
Serial data
SDA
Input/output
Serial data input/output
13.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 13.2 summarizes the registers of the I2C bus interface.
Table 13.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address*2
I 2C bus control register
ICCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFD8
2
ICSR
R/W
H'30
H'FFD9
2
ICDR
R/W
—
H'FFDE
2
I C bus mode register
ICMR
R/W
H'38
H'FFDF*1
Slave address register
SAR
R/W
H'00
H'FFDF*1
Serial timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFC3
I C bus status register
I C bus data register
Notes: *1 The register that can be written or read depends on the ICE bit in the I 2C bus control
register. The slave address register can be accessed when ICE = 0. The I2C bus mode
register can be accessed when ICE = 1.
*2 The addresses assigned to the I2C bus interface registers are also assigned to other
registers. The accessible registers are selected with bit IICE in the serial/timer control
register (STCR).
286
13.2
Register Descriptions
13.2.1
I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICDR7
ICDR6
ICDR5
ICDR4
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
ICDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when
transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. Transmitting is started by writing data in
ICDR. Receiving is started by reading data from ICDR.
ICDR is also used as a shift register, so it must not be written or read until data has been
completely transmitted or received. Read or write access while data is being transmitted or
received may result in incorrect data.
The ICDR value following a reset and in hardware standby mode is undetermined.
13.2.2
Slave Address Register (SAR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if
the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first byte received after a start condition, the
chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same
address as ICMR. SAR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1—Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0,
differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
287
Bit 0—Format Select (FS): Selects whether to use the addressing format or non-addressing
format in slave mode. The addressing format is used to recognize slave addresses.
Bit 0: FS
Description
0
Addressing format, slave addresses recognized
1
Non-addressing format
13.2.3
(Initial value)
I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MLS
WAIT
—
—
—
BC2
BC1
BC0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred
first, performs wait control, and selects the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same
address as SAR. ICMR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
ICMR is initialized to H'38 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or
LSB-first.
Bit 7: MLS
Description
0
MSB-first
1
LSB-first
(Initial value)
Bit 6—Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data
and the acknowledge bit, in acknowledgement mode. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the
clock for the final data bit, a wait state begins (with SCL staying at the low level). When bit IRIC
is cleared in ICSR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0,
data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted.
Bit 6: WAIT
Description
0
Data and acknowledge transferred consecutively
1
Wait inserted between data and acknowledge
288
(Initial value)
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0—Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be transferred
next. When the ACK bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR (acknowledgement mode), the data is transferred
with one additional acknowledge bit. BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval
between transfer frames. If BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be
made while the SCL line is low.
The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value
returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge.
Bits/Frame
Bit 2:
BC2
Bit 1:
BC1
Bit 0:
BC0
Serial Mode
Acknowledgement Mode
0
0
0
8
9
1
1
2
0
2
3
1
3
4
0
4
5
1
5
6
0
6
7
1
7
8
1
1
0
1
13.2.4
(Initial value)
I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICE
IEIC
MST
TRS
ACK
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I2C bus interface, enables or
disables interrupts, and selects master or slave mode, transmit or receive, acknowledgement or
serial mode, and the clock frequency.
ICCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—I2C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not to use the I2C bus interface.
When ICE is set to 1, the SCL and SDA signals are assigned to input/output pins and transfer
operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, the interface module is disabled.
289
The SAR register can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR register can be accessed when ICE is
1.
Bit 7: ICE
Description
0
Interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signals in high-impedance state
(Initial value)
1
Interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SDA are
driving the bus*)
Note: * Pin SDA is multiplexed with the WAIT input pin. In expanded mode, WAIT input has priority
for this pin.
Bit 6—I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I2C
bus interface to the CPU.
Bit 6: IEIC
Description
0
Interrupts disabled
1
Interrupts enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Master/Slave Select (MST)
Bit 4—Transmit/Receive Select (TRS)
MST selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode.
TRS selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode.
In master mode, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a
transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing format (FS = 0),
hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to the R/W bit in the first byte
after a start condition.
MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows.
Bit 5: MST
Bit 4: TRS
Operating Mode
0
0
Slave receive mode
1
Slave transmit mode
0
Master receive mode
1
Master transmit mode
1
290
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Acknowledgement Mode Select (ACK): Selects acknowledgement mode or serial mode.
In acknowledgement mode (ACK = 0), data is transferred in frames consisting of the number of
data bits selected by BC2 to BC0 in ICMR, plus an extra acknowledge bit. In serial mode (ACK =
1), the number of data bits selected by BC2 to BC0 in ICMR is transferred as one frame.
Bit 3: ACK
Description
0
Acknowledgement mode
1
Serial mode
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Serial Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the ICCX bit in the
STCR register, select the serial clock frequency in master mode. They should be set according to
the required transfer rate.
Transfer Rate*
(STCR) Bit 2:
IICX
CKS2
Bit 1:
CKS1
Bit 0:
CKS0
Clock
øP = 5 MHz
øP = 8 MHz
øP = 10 MHz øP = 16 MHz
0
0
0
øP/28
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
571 kHz
1
øP/40
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
400 kHz
0
øP/48
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
333 kHz
1
øP/64
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
156 kHz
250 kHz
0
øP/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
1
øP/100
50.0 kHz
80.0 kHz
100 kHz
160 kHz
0
øP/112
44.6 kHz
71.4 kHz
89.3 kHz
143 kHz
1
øP/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
0
øP/56
89.3 kHz
143 kHz
179 kHz
286 kHz
1
øP/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
0
øP/96
52.1 kHz
83.3 kHz
104 kHz
167 kHz
1
øP/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
0
øP/160
31.3 kHz
50.0 kHz
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
1
øP/200
25.0 kHz
40.0 kHz
50.0 kHz
80.0 kHz
0
øP/224
22.3 kHz
35.7 kHz
44.6 kHz
71.4 kHz
1
øP/256
19.5 kHz
31.3 kHz
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note: * øP = ø.
The shaded setting exceeds the maximum transfer rate in the standard I2C bus
specifications.
291
13.2.5
I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BBSY
IRIC
SCP
—
AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB
Initial value
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/(W)*
W
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register with flags that indicate the status of the I2C bus
interface. It is also used for issuing start and stop conditions, and recognizing and controlling
acknowledge data.
ICSR is initialized to H'30 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit 7—Bus Busy (BBSY): This bit can be read to check whether the I2C bus (SCL and SDA) is
busy or free. In master mode this bit is also used in issuing start and stop conditions.
A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting
BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition,
clearing BBSY to 0.
To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit
start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to
write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode.
Bit 7: BBSY
Description
0
Bus is free
This bit is cleared when a stop condition is detected.
1
Bus is busy
This bit is set when a start condition is detected.
292
(Initial value)
Bit 6—I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I2C bus interface
has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a
slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, and when bus arbitration is
lost in master transmit mode. IRIC is set at different timings depending on the ACK bit in ICCR
and WAIT bit in ICMR. See the item on IRIC Set Timing and SCL Control in section 13.3.6
IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC.
Bit 6: IRIC
Description
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
(Initial value)
To clear this bit, the CPU must read IRIC when IRIC = 1, then write 0 in IRIC
1
Interrupt requested
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
Master mode
• End of data transfer
• When bus arbitration is lost
Slave mode (when FS = 0)
• When the slave address is matched, and whenever a data transfer ends at
the timing of a retransmit start condition after address matching or a stop
condition is detected
• When a general call address is detected, and whenever a data transfer
ends at the timing of a retransmit start condition after address detection or a
stop condition is detected
Slave mode (when FS = 1)
• End of data transfer
Bit 5—Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop
conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A start
condition for retransmit is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and
0 in SCP. This bit always reads 1. Written data is not stored.
Bit 5: SCP
Description
0
Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with BBSY
1
Reading always results in 1
(Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
293
Bit 3—Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The
I2C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at
nearly the same time, if the I2C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL
to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. At the same time, it sets the IRIC bit
in ICSR to generate an interrupt request.
AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is
reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 3: AL
Description
0
Bus arbitration won
(Initial value)
This bit is cleared to 0 at the following times:
• When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
• When AL is read while AL = 1, then 0 is written in AL
1
Arbitration lost
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
• If the internal SDA signal and bus line disagree at the rise of SCL in master
transmit mode
• If the internal SCL is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Bit 2—Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): When the addressing format is selected (FS = 0)
in slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first byte following a start condition matches bits
SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected.
AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 2: AAS
Description
0
Slave address or general call address not recognized
(Initial value)
This bit is cleared to 0 at the following times:
• When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
• When AAS is read while AAS = 1, then 0 is written in AAS
1
Slave address or general call address recognized
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
• When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive
mode
294
Bit 1—General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): When the addressing format is selected
(FS = 0) in slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first byte following a start condition is the
general call address (H'00).
ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 1: ADZ
Description
0
General call address not recognized
(Initial value)
This bit is cleared to 0 at the following times:
• When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
• When ADZ is read while ADZ = 1, then 0 is written in ADZ
1
General call address recognized
This bit is set to 1 when the general call address is detected in slave receive
mode
Bit 0—Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data in acknowledgement mode. In
transmit mode, after the receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data
is loaded into ACKB. In receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in
this bit is sent to the transmitting device.
When this bit is read, if TRS = 1, the value loaded from the bus line is read. If TRS = 0, the value
set by internal software is read.
Bit 0: ACKB
Description
0
Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing
(Initial value)
Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data
1
Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the
data
295
13.2.6
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICS
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the SCI operating mode and selects the
TCNT clock source in the 8-bit timers. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware
standby mode.
Bit 7—I2C Extra Buffer Select (IICS): Makes bits 7 to 4 of port A into output buffers similar to
SCL and SDA. Used when an I2C bus interface is implemented by software alone.
Bit 7: IICS
Description
0
PA7 to PA 4 are normal input/output pins
1
PA7 to PA 4 are input/output pins that can drive the bus
(Initial value)
Bit 6—I2C Extra Buffer Reserve (IICD): This bit is reserved, but it can be written and read. Its
initial value is 0.
Bit 5—I2C Transfer Rate Select (IICX): This bit, in combination with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in
ICCR, selects the transfer rate in master mode. For details regarding the transfer rate, refer to
section 13.2.4, I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR).
Bit 4—I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the data and control registers (ICCR,
ICSR, ICDR, ICMR/SAR) of the I 2C bus interface.
Bit 4: IICE
Description
0
CPU access to I 2C bus interface data and control registers is disabled
(Initial value)
1
CPU access to I 2C bus interface data and control registers is enabled
Bit 3—Slave Input Switch (STAC): Switches host interface input pins. For details, see section
14, Host Interface.
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Enables or disables the multiprocessor communication
function on channels SCI0 and SCI1. For details, see section 12, Serial Communication Interface.
Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICSK0): These bits select the
clock input to the timer counters (TCNT) in the 8-bit timers. For details, see section 9, 8-Bit
Timers.
296
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
I2C Bus Data Format
The I2C bus interface has three data formats: two addressing formats, shown as (a) and (b) in
figure 13.3, and a non-addressing format, shown as (c) in figure 13.4. The first byte following a
start condition always consists of 8 bits. Figure 13.5 shows the I2C bus timing.
(a) Addressing format (FS = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
7
1
1
A
DATA
n
1
A
A/A
P
1
1
1
n: Bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: Frame count
(m ≥ 1)
m
1
(b) Addressing format (retransmit start condition, FS = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
A
1
1
7
1
DATA
n1
A/A
S
1
1
SLA
7
m1
1
R/W
A
1
1
DATA
n2
A/A
P
1
1
m2
1
n1 and n2: Bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8)
m1 and m2: Frame count (m1 and m2 ≥ 1)
Figure 13.3 I2C Bus Data Formats (Addressing Formats)
(c) Non-addressing format (FS = 1)
S
1
DATA
A
8
1
1
DATA
n
A
A/A
P
1
1
1
m
n: Bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: Frame count
(m ≥ 1)
Figure 13.4 I2C Bus Data Format (Non-Addressing Format)
Legend:
S:
Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high.
SLA:
Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device.
R/W:
Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when
R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0.
297
A:
Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the master in
master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer. If transfers need not be
acknowledged, set the ACK bit to 1 in ICCR to keep the interface from generating the
acknowledge signal and its clock pulse.
DATA: Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first or
LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR.
P:
Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high.
SDA
SCL
S
1-7
8
9
SLA
R/W
A
1-7
DATA
8
9
A
1-7
DATA
8
9
A/A
P
Figure 13.5 I2C Bus Timing
13.3.2
Master Transmit Operation
In master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The transmit procedure and operations in master
transmit mode are described below.
1. Set bits MLS and WAIT in ICMR and bits ACK and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICCR according to the
operating mode. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1.
2. Read BBSY in ICSR, check that the bus is free, then set MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select
master transmit mode. After that, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This generates a start
condition by causing a high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high.
3. Write data in ICDR. The master device outputs the written data together with a sequence of
transmit clock pulses at the timing shown in figure 13.6. If FS is 0 in SAR, the first byte
following the start condition contains a 7-bit slave address and indicates the transmit/receive
direction. The selected slave device (the device with the matching slave address) drives SDA
low at the ninth transmit clock pulse to acknowledge the data.
4. When one byte of data has been transmitted, IRIC is set to 1 in ICSR at the rise of the ninth
transmit clock pulse. If IEIC is set to 1 in ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. After one frame
has been transferred, SCL is automatically brought to the low level in synchronization with the
internal clock and held low.
298
5. Software clears IRIC to 0 in ICSR.
6. To continue transmitting, write the next transmit data in ICDR. Transmission of the next byte
will begin in synchronization with the internal clock.
Steps 4 to 6 can be repeated to transmit data continuously. To end the transmission, write 0 in
BBSY and 0 in SCP in ICSR. This generates a stop condition by causing a low-to-high transition
of SDA while SCL is high.
SCL
SDA (master
output)
1
2
3
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
4
5
Bit 4 Bit 3
6
Bit 2 Bit 1
SDA (slave
output)
8
9
Bit 0
1
Bit 7
A
Interrupt
request
IRIC
User
processing
7
2. Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0
3. Write to ICDR
5. Clear IRIC
6. Write to ICDR
Figure 13.6 Timing in Master Transmit Mode
(MLS = WAIT = ACK = 0)
299
13.3.3
Master Receive Operation
In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an
acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits the data. The receive procedure and operations in
master receive mode are described below. See also figure 13.7.
1. Clear TRS to 0 in ICCR to switch from transmit mode to receive mode.
2. Read ICDR to start receiving. When ICDR is read, a receive clock is output in synchronization
with the internal clock, and data is received. At the ninth clock pulse the master device drives
SDA low to acknowledge the data.
3. When one byte of data has been received, IRIC is set to 1 in ICSR at the rise of the ninth
receive clock pulse. If IEIC is set to 1 in ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. After one frame
has been transferred, SCL is automatically brought to the low level in synchronization with the
internal clock and held low.
4. Software clears IRIC to 0 in ICSR.
5. When ICDR is read, receiving of the next data starts in synchronization with the internal clock.
Steps 3 to 5 can be repeated to receive data continuously. To stop receiving, set TRS to 1, read
ICDR, then write write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP in ICSR. This generates a stop condition by
causing a low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high. If it is not necessary to acknowledge
each byte of data, set ACKB to 1 in ICSR before receiving starts.
300
Master
transmit
mode
SCL
SDA (slave
output)
Master receive mode
9
1
A
Bit 7
2
3
Bit 6 Bit 5
4
5
Bit 4 Bit 3
6
7
Bit 2 Bit 1
8
1
Bit 0
SDA (master
output)
IRIC
9
A
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
request
User processing
2. Read ICDR
4. Clear IRIC
5. Read ICDR
Figure 13.7 Timing in Master Receive Mode
(MLS = WAIT = ACK = ACKB = 0)
301
13.3.4
Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, and the master device outputs
the transmit clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmit procedure and operations in
slave transmit mode are described below.
1. Set bits MLS and WAIT in ICMR and bits MST, TRS, ACK, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICCR
according to the operating mode. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1, establishing slave receive mode.
2. After the slave device detects a start condition, if the first byte matches its slave address, at the
ninth clock pulse the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the same
time, IRIC is set to 1 in ICSR, generating an interrupt. If the eighth data bit (R/W) is 1, the
TRS bit is set to 1 in ICCR, automatically causing a transition to slave transmit mode. The
slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR.
3. Software clears IRIC to 0 in ICSR.
4. Write data in ICDR. The slave device outputs the written data serially in step with the clock
output by the master device, with the timing shown in figure 13.8.
5. When one byte of data has been transmitted, at the rise of the ninth transmit clock pulse IRIC
is set to 1 in ICSR. If IEIC is set to 1 in ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. The slave device
holds SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR. The master
device drives SDA low at the ninth clock pulse to acknowledge the data. The acknowledge
signal is stored in ACKB in ICSR, and can be used to check whether the transfer was carried
out normally.
6. Software clears IRIC to 0 in ICSR.
7. To continue transmitting, write the next transmit data in ICDR.
Steps 5 to 7 can be repeated to transmit continuously. To end the transmission, write H'FF in
ICDR. When a stop condition is detected (a low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high),
BBSY will be cleared to 0 in ICSR.
302
Slave receive
mode
SCL (master
output)
8
Slave transmit mode
9
1
A
Bit 7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
1
SCL (slave
output)
SDA (slave
output)
SDA (master
R/W
output)
IRIC
User processing
Bit 7
A
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
request
3. Clear IRIC
4. Write to ICDR
6. Clear IRIC
7. Write to ICDR
Figure 13.8 Timing in Slave Transmit Mode
(MLS = WAIT = ACK = 0)
303
13.3.5
Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The receive procedure and operations in slave receive
mode are described below. See also figure 13.9.
1. Set bits MLS and WAIT in ICMR and bits MST, TRS, and ACK in ICCR according to the
operating mode. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1, establishing slave receive mode.
2. A start condition output by the master device sets BBSY to 1 in ICSR.
3. After the slave device detects the start condition, if the first byte matches its slave address, at
the ninth clock pulse the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the
same time, IRIC is set to 1 in ICSR. If IEIC is 1 in ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. The
slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until it has read the data in
ICDR.
4. Software clears IRIC to 0 in ICSR.
5. When ICDR is read, receiving of the next data starts.
Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated to receive data continuously. When a stop condition is detected (a
low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high), BBSY is cleared to 0 in ICSR.
Start condition
SCL (master
output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
SCL (slave
output)
SDA (master
output
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Bit 1 Bit 0
Bit 7
SDA (slave
output)
A
Interrupt
request
IRIC
User processing
4. Clear IRIC
Figure 13.9 Timing in Slave Receive Mode
(MLS = WAIT = ACK = ACKB = 0)
304
5. Read ICDR
13.3.6
IRIC Set Timing and SCL Control
The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR and
ACK bit in ICCR. SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing
is synchronized with the internal clock. Figure 13.10 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control.
(a) When WAIT = 0 and ACK = 0
SCL
SDA
7
8
A
1
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
(b) When WAIT = 1 and ACK = 0
SCL
SDA
7
8
A
1
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
Note: The ICDR write (transmit) or read (receive) following the clearing of IRIC
should be executed after the rise of SCL (ninth clock pulse).
(c) When ACK = 1
SCL
SDA
7
1
8
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
Figure 13.10 IRIC Set Timing and SCL Control
305
13.3.7
Noise Canceler
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched
internally. Figure 13.11 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler.
The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the
outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
Sampling clock
C
C
SCL or
SDA input
signal
D
Q
Latch
D
Q
Latch
Match
detector
t
Sampling
clock
t: System clock
Figure 13.11 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler
306
Internal
SCL or
SDA
signal
13.3.8
Sample Flowcharts
Figures 13.12 to 13.15 show typical flowcharts for using the I2C bus interface in each mode.
Start
Initialize
Read BBSY in ICSR
No
1
BBSY = 0?
Yes
Set MST = 1 and
TRS = 1 in ICCR
2
Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0 in ICSR
3
4
Write transmit data in ICDR
1.
Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.
2.
Select master transmit mode.
3.
Generate a start condition.
4.
Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W).
5.
Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
6.
Test for acknowledgement by the designated slave device.
7.
Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes.
8.
Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
9.
Test for end of transfer.
10. Generate a stop condition.
Read IRIC in ICSR
5
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read ACKB in ICSR
ACKB = 0?
6
No
Yes
Transmit mode?
No
Master receive mode
Yes
Write transmit data in ICDR
Read IRIC in ICSR
No
7
8
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read ACKB in ICSR
9
No
End of transmission
(ACKB = 1)?
Yes
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICSR
10
End
Figure 13.12 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example)
307
Master receive mode
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
1
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
2
1. Select receive mode.
2. Set acknowledgement data.
3. Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read.
Last receive?
4. Wait for 1 byte to be received.
Yes
5. Set acknowledgement data for the last receive.
No
Read ICDR
Read IRIC in ICSR
No
6. Start the last receive.
3
7. Wait for 1 byte to be received.
8. Select transmit mode.
4
IRIC = 1?
Yes
9. Read the last receive data (if ICDR is read
without selecting transmit mode, receive
operations will resume).
10. Generate a stop condition.
Clear IRIC in ICSR
No
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
5
Read ICDR
6
Read IRIC in ICSR
7
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Set TRS = 1 in ICCR
8
Read ICDR
9
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICSR
10
End
Figure 13.13 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example)
308
Slave transmit mode
Write transmit data in ICDR
1
2. Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
Read IRIC in ICSR
No
1. Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
2
3. Test for end of transfer.
4. Select slave receive mode.
IRIC = 1?
5. Dummy read (to release the SCL line).
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read ACKB in ICSR
No
End
of transmission
(ACKB = 1?)
3
Yes
Write TRS = 0 in ICCR
4
Read ICDR
5
End
Figure 13.14 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example)
309
Start
Initialize
Set MST = 0
and TRS = 0 in ICCR
1
Write ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read IRIC in ICSR
2
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read AAS and ADZ in ICSR
AAS = 1
and ADZ = 0?
No
General call address processing
* Description omitted
Yes
Read TRS in ICCR
No
TRS = 0?
Slave transmit mode
Yes
Last receive?
No
Read ICDR
Yes
3
Read IRIC in ICSR
No
4
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
No
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
5
Read ICDR
6
Read IRIC in ICSR
7
1.
Select slave receive mode.
2.
Wait for the first byte to be received.
3.
Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read.
4.
Wait for the transfer to end.
5.
Set acknowledgement data for the last receive.
6.
Start the last receive.
7.
Wait for the transfer to end.
8.
Read the last receive data.
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read ICDR
8
End
Figure 13.15 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example)
310
13.4
Application Notes
• In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an
instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output
consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start
condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the
instruction that generates the stop condition.
• Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these
conditions when reading or writing to ICDR.
Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1
Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0
• The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for highspeed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes
one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds
the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is
extended. SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of the
SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance and
load capacitance so that the SCL rise time falls below the values given in the table below.
CKDBL
IICX
tcyc
Display
0
0
7.5tcyc
0
1
1
0
1
1
17.5tcyc
37.5tcyc
Time Display
ø = 5 MHz
ø = 8 MHz
ø = 10 MHz ø = 16 MHz
Normal
mode
1000 ns
937 ns
750 ns
486 ns
High-speed
mode
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
Normal
mode
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
High-speed
mode
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
Normal
mode
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
1000 ns
High-speed
mode
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
300 ns
• Note on Issuance of Retransmission Start Condition
When issuing a retransmission start condition, the condition must be issued after the SCL clock
falls during the acknowledge bit reception period. After the end of the acknowledge bit, the
next data should be written to ICDR after SCL goes high. Figure 13.16 shows the
recommended program flow for issuing a retransmission start condition. A timing chart for the
flowchart in figure 13.16 is shown in figure 13.17.
311
Read IRIC in ICSR
(1) Confirm completion of 1byte transmission
IRIC = 1?
(2) Confirm that SCL is low
Clear IRIC in ICSR
(3) Issue retransmission
start condition
No
Retransmission?
Other operation
(5) Write transmit data
Yes
Note: “Read SCL” means
reading DR for the
SCL pin.
Read SCL
No
(4) Confirm that SCL is high
SCL = 0?
Yes
Write 1 to BBSY and
0 to SCP in ICSR
Read SCL
No
SCL = 1?
Yes
Write data to ICDR
Figure 13.16 Recommended Program Flow for Retransmission Start Condition Issuance
SCL
9
SDA
ACK
Bit 7
IRIC
(1) IRIC check
(2) SCL low level
determination
(4) SCL high level
determination
(5) Transmit data setting
(3) Retransmission start
condition issuance
Figure 13.17 Timing Chart for Retransmission Start Condition Issuance
312
• Note on Issuance of Stop Condition
If the rise of SCL is weakened by external pull-up resistance R and bus load capacitance C in
master mode, or if SCL is pulled to the low level by a slave device, the timing at which SCL is
lowered by the internal bit synchronization circuit may be delayed by 1t SCL. If, in this case,
SCL is identified as being low at the bit synchronization circuit sampling timing, and a stop
condition issuing instruction is executed before the reference SCL clock next falls, as in figure
13.18, SDA will change from high to low to high while SCL remains high. As a result, a stop
condition will be issued before the end of the 9th clock.
Bit synchronization circuit sampling timing
Reference clock
SCL output
9
High interval secured
Stop condition
Normal
operation
SDA output
SCL output
9
9th clock not ended
Stop condition
Erroneous
operation
SDA output
VIH
SCL identified as low
SCL
Bus line
VIH
SDA
IRIC
Stop condition issuing instruction
execution timing
Erroneous
operation
Normal operation
Figure 13.18 Stop Condition Erroneous Operation Timing
313
• Countermeasure
Figure 13.19 shows the recommended program flow.
Read IRIC in ICSR
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Write data to ICDR
Read ACKB in ICSR
Yes
Transmit
data present?
No
ACKB = 1?
Yes
No
Read SCL
No
SCL = 0?
Yes
Write 0 to BBSY and
0 to SCP in ICSR
Figure 13.19 Recommended Program Flow
• Additional Note
When switching from master receive mode to master transmit mode, ensure that TRS is set to 1
before the last receive data is latched by reading ICDR.
• Precautions when Clearing the IRIC Flag when Using the Wait Function
If the SCL rise time exceeds the specified duration when using the wait function in the I2C bus
interface’s master mode, or if there is a slave device that keeps SCL low and applies a wait
state, read SCL and clear the IRIC flag only after determining that SCL has gone low, as
shown below.
If the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 when WAIT is set to 1 and while the SCL high level duration is
being extended, the SDA value may change before SCL falls, erroneously resulting in a start or
stop condition.
314
SCL
VIH
SCL high level duration maintained
SCL low level detected
SDA
IRIC
SCL determined to be low level
IRIC cleared
Figure 13.20 IRIC Flag Clear Timing when WAIT = 1
Note that the clock may not be output properly during the next master send if receive data
(ICDR data) is read during the time between when the instruction to issue a stop condition is
executed (writing 0 to BBSY and SCP in ISSR) and when the stop condition is actually
generated.
In addition, overwriting of IIC control bits in order to change the send or receive operation
mode or to change settings, such as for example clearing the MST bit after completion of
master send or receive, should always be performed during the period indicated as (a) in Figure
13.21 below (after confirming that the BBSY bit in the ICCR register has been cleared to 0).
Stop condition
Start condition
(a)
SDA
Bit 0
A
SCL
8
9
Internal clock
BBSY bit
Master receive mode
ICDR read F
prohibited duration
Execution of issue
Stop condition generated
stop condition instruction
(BBSY = 0 read)
(BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 written)
Start condition issued
Figure 13.21 Precautions when Reading Master Receive Data
315
316
Section 14 Host Interface
14.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip host interface (HIF) that provides a dual-channel parallel
interface between the on-chip CPU and a host processor. The host interface is available only when
the HIE bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. This mode is called slave mode, because it is designed for a
master-slave communication system in which the H8/3437-Series chip is slaved to a host
processor.
The host interface consists of four 1-byte data registers, two 1-byte status registers, a 1-byte
control register, fast A20 gate logic, and a host interrupt request circuit. Communication is carried
out via five control signals from the host processor (CS1, CS2 or ECS2, HA0, IOR, and IOW or
EIOW), four output signals to the host processor (GA 20, HIRQ1, HIRQ11, and HIRQ12), and an 8bit bidirectional command/data bus (HDB7 to HDB0, or XDB7 to XDB0). The CS1 and CS2 (or
ECS2) signals select one of the two interface channels.
Note: If one of the two interface channels will not be used, tie the unused CS pin to VCC. For
example, if interface channel 1 (IDR1, ODR1, STR1) is not used, tie CS1 to VCC.
317
14.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 14.1 is a block diagram of the host interface.
(Internal interrupt signals)
IBF2
CS1
ECS2/CS2
IOR
EIOW/IOW
HA0
HDB7–HDB0/
XDB7–XDB0
Control
logic
IDR1
IDR2
ODR2
STR2
HICR
Port 4
Port 8
Internal data bus
Legend:
IDR1: Input data register 1
IDR2: Input data register 2
ODR1: Output data register 1
ODR2: Output data register 2
STR1: Status register 1
STR2: Status register 2
HICR: Host interface control register
Figure 14.1 Host Interface Block Diagram
318
STR1
Bus
interface
Module data bus
Fast
A20
gate
control
Host data bus
ODR1
Host
interrupt
request
HIRQ1
HIRQ11
HIRQ12
GA20
IBF1
14.1.2
Input and Output Pins
Table 14.1 lists the input and output pins of the host interface module.
Table 14.1 H/F Input/Output Pins
Name
Abbreviation
Port
I/O
Function
I/O read
IOR
P83
Input
Host interface read signal
I/O write*
IOW
P84
Input
Host interface write signal
EIOW
P91
Chip select 1
CS 1
P82
Input
Host interface chip select signal for
IDR1, ODR1, STR1
Chip select 2*
CS 2
P85
Input
ECS 2
P90
Host interface chip select signal for
IDR2, ODR2, STR2
HA 0
P80
Input
Host interface address select signal
Command/data
In host read access, this signal
selects the status registers (STR1,
STR2) or data registers (ODR1,
ODR2). In host write access to the
data registers (IDR1, IDR2), this
signal indicates whether the host is
writing a command or data.
Data bus
HDB7–HDB0
P37–P30
I/O
Host interface data bus (single-chip
mode)
XDB 7–XDB 0
PB7–PB0
I/O
Host interface data bus (expanded
modes)
Host interrupt 1
HIRQ1
P44
Output
Interrupt output 1 to host
Host interrupt 11
HIRQ11
P43
Output
Interrupt output 11 to host
Host interrupt 12
HIRQ12
P45
Output
Interrupt output 12 to host
Gate A20
GA20
P81
Output
A20 gate control signal output
Note: * Selection between IOW and EIOW, and between CS 2 and ECS 2, is by the STAC bit in
STCR. IOW and CS 2 are used when STAC is 0. EIOW and ECS 2 are used when STAC is 1.
In this manual, both are referred to as IOW and CS2.
319
14.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 14.2 lists the host interface registers.
Table 14.2 HIF Registers
Host
Initial
Value
Master Address *4
Slave
Address*3 CS 1 CS 2 HA0
—
H'09
H'FFC4
—
—
—
R/W
Name
Abbreviation
Slave
*1
System control
register
SYSCR
R/W
Host interface control
register
HICR
R/W
—
H'F8
H'FFF0
—
—
—
Input data register 1
IDR1
R
W
—
H'FFF4
0
1
0/1 *5
Output data register 1
ODR1
R/W
R
—
H'FFF5
0
1
0
R
H'00
H'FFF6
0
1
1
W
—
H'FFFC
1
0
0/1 *5
R
—
H'FFFD
1
0
0
R
H'00
H'FFFE
1
0
1
—
H'00
H'FFC3
—
—
—
Status register 1
STR1
R/(W)
Input data register 2
IDR2
R
Output data register 2
ODR2
R/W
Status register 2
STR2
R/(W)
Serial/timer control
register
STCR
R/W
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
*5
320
*2
*2
Bit 3 is a read-only bit.
The user-defined bits (bits 7 to 4) are read/write accessible from the slave processor.
Address when accessed from the slave processor.
Pin inputs used in access from the host processor.
The HA 0 input discriminates between writing of commands and data.
14.2
Register Descriptions
14.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
SYSCR is an 8-bit read/write register which controls chip operations. Host interface functions are
enabled or disabled by the HIE bit of SYSCR. See section 3.2, System Control Register, for
information on other SYSCR bits. SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by an external reset and in
hardware standby mode.
Bit 1—Host Interface Enable (HIE): Enables or disables the host interface. When enabled, the
host interface handles host-slave data transfers, operating in slave mode.
Bit 1: HIE
Description
0
The host interface is disabled
1
The host interface is enabled (slave mode)
14.2.2
(Initial value)
Host Interface Control Register (HICR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
IBFIE2
IBFIE1
FGA20E
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Slave Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Host Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
HICR is an 8-bit read/write register which controls host interface interrupts and the fast A20 gate
function. HICR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
321
Bit 2—Input Buffer Full Interrupt Enable 2 (IBFIE2): Enables or disables the IBF2 interrupt
to the slave CPU.
Bit 2: IBFIE2
Description
0
IDR2 input buffer full interrupt is disabled
1
IDR2 input buffer full interrupt is enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 1— Input Buffer Full Interrupt Enable 1 (IBFIE1): Enables or disables the IBF1 interrupt
to the slave CPU.
Bit 1: IBFIE1
Description
0
IDR1 input buffer full interrupt is disabled
1
IDR1 input buffer full interrupt is enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Fast Gate A20 Enable (FGA20E): Enables or disables the fast A20 gate function. When the
fast A20 gate is disabled, a regular-speed A20 gate signal can be implemented by using software to
manipulate the P81 output.
Bit 0: FGA20E
Description
0
Disables fast A20 gate function
1
Enables fast A20 gate function
14.2.3
(Initial value)
Input Data Register 1 (IDR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slave Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Host Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
IDR1 is an 8-bit read-only register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit write-only register to the
host processor. When CS1 is low, information on the host data bus is written into IDR1 at the
rising edge of IOW. The HA0 state is also latched into the C/D bit in STR1 to indicate whether the
written information is a command or data.
The initial values of IDR1 after a reset or standby are undetermined.
322
14.2.4
Output Data Register 1 (ODR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value
ODR1 is an 8-bit read/write register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit read-only register to the
host processor. The ODR1 contents are output on the host data bus when HA0 is low, CS1 is low,
and IOR is low.
The initial values of ODR1 after a reset or standby are undetermined.
14.2.5
Status Register 1 (STR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value
STR1 is an 8-bit register that indicates status information during host interface processing. Bits 3,
1, and 0 are read-only bits to both the host and slave processors.
STR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4 and Bit 2—Defined by User (DBU): The user can use these bits as necessary.
Bit 3—Command/Data (C/D): Receives the HA0 input when the host processor writes to IDR1,
and indicates whether IDR1 contains data or a command.
Bit 3: C/D
Description
0
Contents of IDR1 are data
1
Contents of IDR1 are a command
(Initial value)
323
Bit 1—Input Buffer Full (IBF): Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR1. This bit is an
internal interrupt source to the slave processor. IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads
IDR1.
Bit 1: IBF
Description
0
This bit is cleared when the slave processor reads IDR1
1
This bit is set when the host processor writes to IDR1
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Output Buffer Full (OBF): Set to 1 when the slave processor writes to ODR1. Cleared to
0 when the host processor reads ODR1.
Bit 0: OBF
Description
0
This bit is cleared when the host processor reads ODR1
1
This bit is set when the slave processor writes to ODR1
(Initial value)
Table 14.3 shows the conditions for setting and clearing the STR1 flags.
Table 14.3 Set/Clear Timing for STR1 Flags
Flag
Setting Condition
Clearing Condition
C/D
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when HA 0 is high
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when HA 0 is low
IBF
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when writing to IDR1
Falling edge of slave’s internal read signal
(RD) when reading IDR1
OBF
Falling edge of slave’s internal write
signal (WR) when writing to ODR1
Rising edge of host’s read signal (IOR)
when reading ODR1
14.2.6
Input Data Register 2 (IDR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slave Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Host Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
IDR2 is an 8-bit read-only register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit write-only register to the
host processor. When CS2 is low, information on the host data bus is written into IDR2 at the
rising edge of IOW. The HA0 state is also latched into the C/D bit in STR2 to indicate whether the
written information is a command or data.
The initial values of IDR2 after a reset or standby are undetermined.
324
14.2.7
Output Data Register 2 (ODR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value
ODR2 is an 8-bit read/write register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit read-only register to the
host processor. The ODR2 contents are output on the host data bus when HA0 is low, CS2 is low,
and IOR is low.
The initial values of ODR2 after a reset or standby are undetermined.
14.2.8
Status Register 2 (STR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value
STR2 is an 8-bit register that indicates status information during host interface processing. Bits 3,
1, and 0 are read-only bits to both the host and slave processors.
STR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4 and Bit 2—Defined by User (DBU): The user can use these bits as necessary.
Bit 3—Command/Data (C/D): Receives the HA0 input when the host processor writes to IDR2,
and indicates whether IDR2 contains data or a command.
Bit 3: C/D
Description
0
Contents of IDR2 are data
1
Contents of IDR2 are a command
(Initial value)
325
Bit 1—Input Buffer Full (IBF): Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR2. This bit is an
internal interrupt source to the slave processor. IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads
IDR2.
Bit 1: IBF
Description
0
This bit is cleared when the slave processor reads IDR2
1
This bit is set when the host processor writes to IDR2
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Output Buffer Full (OBF): Set to 1 when the slave processor writes to ODR2. Cleared to
0 when the host processor reads ODR2.
Bit 0: OBF
Description
0
This bit is cleared when the host processor reads ODR2
1
This bit is set when the slave processor writes to ODR2
(Initial value)
Table 14.4 shows the conditions for setting and clearing the STR2 flags.
Table 14.4 Set/Clear Timing for STR2 Flags
Flag
Setting Condition
Clearing Condition
C/D
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when HA 0 is high
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when HA 0 is low
IBF
Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW)
when writing to IDR2
Falling edge of slave’s internal read signal
(RD) when reading IDR2
OBF
Falling edge of slave’s internal write
signal (WR) when writing to ODR2
Rising edge of host’s read signal (IOR)
when reading ODR2
326
14.2.9
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICS
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the I 2C bus interface and host interface,
controls the SCI operating mode, and selects the TCNT clock source in the 8-bit timers. STCR is
initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—I2C Control (IICS, IICD, IICX, IICE): These bits are used to control the I2C bus
interface. For details, see section 13, I2C Bus Interface.
Bit 3—Slave Input Switch (STAC): Controls switching of host interface input pins. Settings of
this bit are valid only when the host interface is enabled (slave mode).
Bit 3: STAC
Description
0
In port 8, P85 switches over to CS 2, and P8 4 to IOW
1
In port 9, P91 switches over to EIOW, and P9 0 to ECS 2
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Enable (MPE): Controls the operating mode of SCI0 and SCI1. For
details, see section 12, Serial Communication Interface.
Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICSK0): Together with bits CKS2
to CKS0 in TCR, these bits select timer counter clock inputs. For details, see section 9, 8-Bit
Timers.
327
14.3
Operation
14.3.1
Host Interface Operation
The host interface is activated by setting the HIE bit (bit 1) to 1 in SYSCR, establishing slave
mode. Activation of the host interface (entry to slave mode) appropriates the related I/O lines in
port 3 or B (data), port 8 or 9 (control) and port 4 (host interrupt requests) for interface use.
For host interface read/write timing diagrams, see section 23.3.8, Host Interface Timing.
14.3.2
Control States
Table 14.5 indicates the slave operations carried out in response to host interface signals from the
host processor.
Table 14.5 Host Interface Operation
CS 2
CS 1
IOR
IOW
HA0
Slave Operation
1
0
0
0
0
Prohibited
1
Prohibited
0
Data read from output data register 1 (ODR1)
1
Status read from status register 1 (STR1)
0
Data write to input data register 1 (IDR1)
1
Command write to input data register 1 (IDR1)
0
Idle state
1
Idle state
0
Prohibited
1
Prohibited
0
Data read from output data register 2 (ODR2)
1
Status read from status register 2 (STR2)
0
Data write to input data register 2 (IDR2)
1
Command write to input data register 2 (IDR2)
0
Idle state
1
Idle state
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
328
14.3.3
A20 Gate
The A20 gate signal can mask address A20 to emulate an addressing mode used by personal
computers with an 8086*-family CPU. In slave mode, a regular-speed A20 gate signal can be
output under software control, or a fast A20 gate signal can be output under hardware control. Fast
A20 gate output is enabled by setting the FGA20E bit (bit 0) to 1 in HICR (H'FFF0).
Note: * Intel microprocessor.
Regular A20 Gate Operation: Output of the A20 gate signal can be controlled by an H'D1
command followed by data. When the slave processor receives data, it normally uses an interrupt
routine activated by the IBF1 interrupt to read IDR1. If the data follows an H'D1 command,
software copies bit 1 of the data and outputs it at the gate A20 pin (P8 1/GA20).
Fast A20 Gate Operation: When the FGA20E bit is set to 1, P81/GA20 is used for output of a fast
A20 gate signal. Bit P81DDR must be set to 1 to assign this pin for output. The initial output from
this pin will be a logic 1, which is the initial DR value. Afterward, the host processor can
manipulate the output from this pin by sending commands and data. This function is available
only when register IDR1 is accessed using CS1. Slave logic decodes the commands input from the
host processor. When an H'D1 host command is detected, bit 1 of the data following the host
command is output from the GA20 output pin. This operation does not depend on software or
interrupts, and is faster than the regular processing using interrupts. Table 14.6 lists the conditions
that set and clear GA20 (P81). Figure 14.2 describes the GA20 output in flowchart form. Table 14.7
indicates the GA20 output signal values.
Table 14.6 GA20 (P81) Set/Clear Timing
Pin Name
Setting Condition
Clearing Condition
GA20 (P8 1)
Rising edge of the host’s write signal
(IOW) when bit 1 of the written data
is 1 and the data follows an H'D1
host command
Rising edge of the host’s write signal
(IOW) when bit 1 of the written data is 0
and the data follows an H'D1 host
command
329
Start
Host write
No
H'D1 command
received?
Yes
Wait for next byte
Host write
No
Data byte?
Yes
Write bit 1 of data byte
to DR bit of P81/GA20
Figure 14.2 GA20 Output
330
Table 14.7 Fast A20 Gate Output Signal
HA0
Data/Command
Internal CPU
Interrupt Flag
GA20
(PB1)
Remarks
Turn-on sequence
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
0
“1” data*1
0
1
1
H'FF command
0
Q (1)
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
0
0
*2
0
“0” data
1
H'FF command
0
Q (0)
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
0
“1” data*1
0
1
1/0
Command other than H'FF
and H'D1
1
Q (1)
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
*2
0
“0” data
0
0
1/0
Command other than H'FF
and H'D1
1
Q (0)
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
1
Command other than H'D1
1
Q
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
1
H'D1 command
0
Q
0
Any data
0
1/0
1
H'D1 command
0
Q (1/0)
Turn-off sequence
Short turn-on sequence
Short turn-off sequence
Cancelled sequence
Retriggered sequence
Consecutively executed
sequences
Notes: *1 Arbitrary data with bit 1 set to 1.
*2 Arbitrary data with bit 1 cleared to 0.
331
14.4
Interrupts
14.4.1
IBF1, IBF2
The host interface can request two interrupts to the slave CPU: IBF1 and IBF2. They are input
buffer full interrupts for input data registers IDR1 and IDR2 respectively. Each interrupt is
enabled when the corresponding enable bit is set (table 14.8).
Table 14.8 Input Buffer Full Interrupts
Interrupt
Description
IBF1
Requested when IBFIE1 is set to 1 and IDR1 is full
IBF2
Requested when IBFIE2 is set to 1 and IDR2 is full
14.4.2
HIRQ 11, HIRQ 1, and HIRQ12
In slave mode (when HIE = 1 in SYSCR), three bits in the port 4 data register (P4DR) can be used
as host interrupt request latches.
These three P4DR bits are cleared to 0 by the host processor’s read signal (IOR). If CS1 and HA0
are low, when IOR goes low and the host reads ODR1, HIRQ1 and HIRQ12 are cleared to 0. If CS2
and HA0 are low, when IOR goes low and the host reads ODR2, HIRQ11 is cleared to 0. To
generate a host interrupt request, normally on-chip software writes 1 to the corresponding bit. In
processing the interrupt, the host’s interrupt-handling routine reads the output data register (ODR1
or ODR2), and this clears the host interrupt latch to 0.
Table 14.9 indicates how these bits are set and cleared. Figure 14.3 shows the processing in
flowchart form.
Table 14.9 Host Interrupt Set/Clear Conditions
Host Interrupt
Signal
Setting Condition
Clearing Condition
HIRQ11 (P4 3)
Slave CPU reads 0 from P4DR bit 3,
then writes 1
Slave CPU writes 0 in P4DR bit 3, or
host reads output data register 2
HIRQ1 (P4 4)
Slave CPU reads 0 from P4DR bit 4,
then writes 1
Slave CPU writes 0 in P4DR bit 4, or
host reads output data register 1
HIRQ12 (P4 5)
Slave CPU reads 0 from P4DR bit 5,
then writes 1
Slave CPU writes 0 in P4DR bit 5, or
host reads output data register 1
332
Slave CPU
Master CPU
Write to ODR
Write 1 to P4DR
No
HIRQ output high
Interrupt initiation
HIRQ output low
ODR read
P4DR = 0?
Yes
No
All bytes
transferred?
Yes
Hardware operations
Software operations
Figure 14.3 HIRQ Output Flowchart
14.5
Application Note
The host interface provides buffering of asynchronous data from the host and slave processors, but
an interface protocol must be followed to implement necessary functions and avoid data
contention. For example, if the host and slave processors try to access the same input or output
data register simultaneously, the data will be corrupted. Interrupts can be used to design a simple
and effective protocol.
333
334
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series includes a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter with a selection of
up to eight analog input channels.
15.1.1
Features
A/D converter features are listed below.
• 10-bit resolution
• Eight input channels
• Selectable analog conversion voltage range
The analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference
voltage at the AVref pin.
• High-speed conversion
Conversion time: minimum 8.4 µs per channel (with 16-MHz system clock)
• Two conversion modes
Single mode: A/D conversion of one channel
Scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels
• Four 16-bit data registers
A/D conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the
channels.
• Sample-and-hold function
• A/D conversion can be externally triggered
• A/D interrupt requested at end of conversion
At the end of A/D conversion, an A/D end interrupt (ADI) can be requested.
335
15.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
Internal
data bus
AVSS
AN 0
AN 5
ADCR
ADCSR
ADDRD
–
AN 2
AN 4
ADDRC
+
AN 1
AN 3
ADDRB
10-bit D/A
ADDRA
AVref
Successiveapproximations register
AVCC
Bus interface
Module data bus
Analog
multiplexer
øP/8
Comparator
Control circuit
Sample-andhold circuit
øP/16
AN 6
AN 7
ADI
interrupt
signal
ADTRG
Legend:
ADCR:
ADCSR:
ADDRA:
ADDRB:
ADDRC:
ADDRD:
A/D control register
A/D control/status register
A/D data register A
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
Figure 15.1 A/D Converter Block Diagram
336
15.1.3
Input Pins
Table 15.1 lists the A/D converter’s input pins. The eight analog input pins are divided into two
groups: group 0 (AN 0 to AN3), and group 1 (AN4 to AN7). AVCC and AVSS are the power supply
for the analog circuits in the A/D converter. AVref is the A/D conversion reference voltage.
Table 15.1 A/D Converter Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVCC
Input
Analog power supply
Analog ground pin
AVSS
Input
Analog ground and reference voltage
Reference voltage pin
AVref
Input
Analog reference voltage
Analog input pin 0
AN 0
Input
Group 0 analog inputs
Analog input pin 1
AN 1
Input
Analog input pin 2
AN 2
Input
Analog input pin 3
AN 3
Input
Analog input pin 4
AN 4
Input
Analog input pin 5
AN 5
Input
Analog input pin 6
AN 6
Input
Analog input pin 7
AN 7
Input
A/D external trigger input pin
ADTRG
Input
Group 1 analog inputs
External trigger input for starting A/D
conversion
337
15.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 15.2 summarizes the A/D converter’s registers.
Table 15.2 A/D Converter Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
A/D data register A (high)
ADDRAH
R
H'00
H'FFE0
A/D data register A (low)
ADDRAL
R
H'00
H'FFE1
A/D data register B (high)
ADDRBH
R
H'00
H'FFE2
A/D data register B (low)
ADDRBL
R
H'00
H'FFE3
A/D data register C (high)
ADDRCH
R
H'00
H'FFE4
A/D data register C (low)
ADDRCL
R
H'00
H'FFE5
A/D data register D (high)
ADDRDH
R
H'00
H'FFE6
A/D data register D (low)
ADDRDL
R
H'00
H'FFE7
A/D control/status register
ADCSR
R/(W)*
H'00
H'FFE8
A/D control register
ADCR
R/W
H'7F
H'FFE9
Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
338
15.2
Register Descriptions
15.2.1
A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
Bit
15
ADDRn
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bits 15 to 6—A/D Conversion Data (AD9 to AD0): 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result.
Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the
results of A/D conversion.
An A/D conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the A/D data
register corresponding to the selected channel. The upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the upper
byte of the A/D data register. The lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. Bits 5 to 0 of an A/D
data register are reserved bits that always read 0. Table 15.3 indicates the pairings of analog input
channels and A/D data registers.
The CPU can always read the A/D data registers. The upper byte can be read directly, but the
lower byte is read through a temporary register (TEMP). For details see section 15.3, CPU
Interface.
The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode.
Table 15.3 Analog Input Channels and A/D Data Registers
Analog Input Channel
Group 0
Group 1
A/D Data Register
AN 0
AN 4
ADDRA
AN 1
AN 5
ADDRB
AN 2
AN 6
ADDRC
AN 3
AN 7
ADDRD
339
15.2.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the A/D converter.
ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7: ADF
Description
0
Clearing condition:
Cleared by reading ADF while ADF = 1, then writing 0 in ADF
1
Setting conditions:
1. Single mode: A/D conversion ends
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels
(Initial value)
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables the interrupt (ADI) requested at the
end of A/D conversion.
Bit 6: ADIE
Description
0
A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is disabled
1
A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is enabled
(Initial value)
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Starts or stops A/D conversion. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during
A/D conversion. It can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the ADTRG pin.
Bit 5: ADST
Description
0
A/D conversion is stopped
1
1. Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0
when conversion ends
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the
selected channels, until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by
a transition to standby mode
340
(Initial value)
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode. For further information on
operation in these modes, see section 15.4, Operation. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching
the conversion mode.
Bit 4: SCAN
Description
0
Single mode
1
Scan mode
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): Selects the A/D conversion time. When øP = ø/2, the conversion time
doubles. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion time.
Bit 3: CKS
Description
0
Conversion time = 266 states (maximum) (when øP = ø)
1
Conversion time = 134 states (maximum) (when øP = ø)
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit select the analog
input channels. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before changing the channel selection.
Group Selection
Channel Selection
Description
CH2
CH1
CH0
Single Mode
Scan Mode
0
0
0
AN 0 (initial value)
AN 0
1
AN 1
AN 0, AN 1
0
AN 2
AN 0 to AN2
1
AN 3
AN 0 to AN3
0
AN 4
AN 4
1
AN 5
AN 4, AN 5
0
AN 6
AN 4 to AN6
1
AN 7
AN 4 to AN7
1
1
0
1
341
15.2.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D
conversion. ADCR is initialized to H'7F by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Trigger Enable (TRGE): Enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion.
Bit 7: TRGE
Description
0
A/D conversion cannot be externally triggered
1
Enables start of A/D conversion by the external trigger input (ADTRG).
(A/D conversion can be started either by an external trigger or by software.)
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified, and are always read as 1.
15.3
CPU Interface
ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the CPU by an 8-bit data bus.
Therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the CPU, the lower byte is read
through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
An A/D data register is read as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is
transferred directly to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred into TEMP. Next, when the
lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading an A/D data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible
to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 15.2 shows the data flow for access to an A/D data register.
342
Upper-byte read
Module data bus
CPU
(H'AA)
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Lower-byte read
CPU
(H'40)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
Figure 15.2 A/D Data Register Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
343
15.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes: single mode and scan mode.
15.4.1
Single Mode (SCAN = 0)
Single mode should be selected when only one A/D conversion on one channel is required. A/D
conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The
ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when
conversion ends.
When conversion ends the ADF bit is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is also set to 1, an ADI interrupt is
requested at this time. To clear the ADF flag to 0, first read ADCSR, then write 0 in ADF.
When the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent
incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making
the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be
set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed.
Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure
15.3 shows a timing diagram for this example.
1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH2 = CH1 = 0, CH0 =
1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1).
2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRB. At the same time
the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle.
3. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested.
4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
5. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 in the ADF flag.
6. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB).
7. Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends.
After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated.
344
Figure 15.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected)
345
Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
A/D conversion result (2)
A/D conversion result (1)
Idle
Clear *
Read conversion result
A/D conversion (2)
Set *
Read conversion result
Idle
State of channel 3
(AN 3)
ADDRA
Idle
State of channel 2
(AN 2)
Idle
Clear *
State of channel 1
(AN 1)
A/D conversion (1)
Set *
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion
starts
State of channel 0
(AN 0)
ADF
ADST
ADIE
Set *
15.4.2
Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)
Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the
ADST bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first
channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0, AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are
selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or
AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the
ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the A/D data
registers corresponding to the channels.
When the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1. A/D conversion will start again from the
first channel in the group. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel
selection is changed.
Typical operations when three channels in group 0 (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are
described next. Figure 15.4 shows a timing diagram for this example.
1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels
AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1).
2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred into
ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN 1) starts automatically.
3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2).
4. When conversion of all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1
and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an ADI
interrupt is requested at this time.
5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is
cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion
starts again from the first channel (AN0).
346
Figure 15.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2
Selected)
347
Idle
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion (1)
Transfer
Idle
A/D conversion (3)
Idle
Idle
Clear*1
Idle
A/D conversion result (3)
A/D conversion result (2)
A/D conversion result (4)
Idle
A/D conversion (5) *2
A/D conversion time
A/D conversion (4)
A/D conversion result (1)
A/D conversion (2)
Idle
Notes: *1 Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
*2 Data currently being converted is ignored.
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
State of channel 3
(AN 3)
State of channel 2
(AN 2)
State of channel 1
(AN 1)
State of channel 0
(AN 0)
ADF
ADST
Set *1
Continuous A/D conversion
Clear* 1
15.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 15.5 shows the A/D
conversion timing. Table 15.4 indicates the A/D conversion time.
As indicated in figure 15.5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The
length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15.4.
In scan mode, the values given in table 15.4 apply to the first conversion. In the second and
subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when CKS = 0 or 128 states
when CKS = 1 (when øP = ø).
(1)
ø
Address bus
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
t SPL
tD
t CONV
Legend:
(1):
ADCSR write cycle
(2):
ADCSR address
tD :
Synchronization delay
t SPL : Input sampling time
t CONV : A/D conversion time
Figure 15.5 A/D Conversion Timing
348
Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS = 0
CKS = 1
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
Synchronization delay
tD
10
—
17
6
—
9
Input sampling time*
t SPL
—
80
—
—
40
—
A/D conversion time*
t CONV
259
—
266
131
—
134
Note: Values in the table are numbers of states.
* Values for when ø P = ø. When øP = ø/2, values are double those given in the table.
15.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGE bit is set to 1 in ADCR, external
trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A high-to-low transition at the ADTRG pin sets the
ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan
modes, are the same as if the ADST bit had been set to 1 by software. Figure 15.6 shows the
timing.
ø
ADTRG
Internal trigger
signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 15.6 External Trigger Input Timing
349
15.5
Interrupts
The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt
request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR.
15.6
Application Notes
When using the A/D converter, note the following points.
Setting Ranges of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins:
1. Analog Input Voltage Range
During A/D conversion, the voltages input to the analog input pins ANn should be in the range
AVSS ≤ ANn ≤ AVref . (n = 0 to 7)
2. AVCC and AVSS Input Voltages
AVSS should be equal to VSS. If the A/D converter is not used, the values should be AVCC = VCC
and AVSS = VSS
3. AVref Input Range
The analog reference voltage input at the AVref pin should be in the range AVref ≤ AVCC. If the
A/D converter is not used, the value should be AVref = VCC.
Notes on Board Design: In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as
mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit
signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so
may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D
conversion values.
Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN7), analog
reference voltage (AVref), and analog power supply (AVCC) by the analog ground (AVSS ). The
analog ground (AVSS ) should be connected to a stable digital ground (VSS) at one point on the
board.
Notes on Noise Countermeasures: A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an
abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) or analog
reference power supply pin (AVref) should be connected between AVCC and AVSS as shown in
figure 15.7.
Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVCC, AVref and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to
AN7 must be connected to AVSS.
If a filter capacitor is connected as shown in figure 15.7, the input currents at the analog input pins
(AN0 to AN7) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed
frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the
sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance
350
(Rin ), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required
when deciding the circuit constants.
AVCC
AVref
100 Ω
Rin* 2
*1
AN0 to AN7
*1
0.1 µF
Notes:
AVSS
Figures are reference values.
*1
10 µF
0.01 µF
*2 Rin: Input impedance
Figure 15.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit
A/D Conversion Precision Definitions: The H8/3437 Series A/D conversion precision definitions
are given below.
• Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
• Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to
B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 15.9).
• Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see
figure 15.9).
351
• Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 15.8).
• Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and
the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.
• Absolute precision
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error,
full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Digital output
H'3FF
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
H'3FE
H'3FD
H'004
H'003
H'002
Quantization error
H'001
H'000
2
1
1024 1024
1022 1023 FS
1024 1024
Analog
input voltage
Figure 15.8 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1)
352
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
FS
Offset error
Analog
input voltage
Figure 15.9 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2)
353
Permissible Signal Source Impedance: H8S/2148 Series and H8S/2144 Series analog input is
designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source
impedance is 10 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter’s sampleand-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output
impedance exceeds 10 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee
the A/D conversion precision.
However, if a large capacitance is provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise
only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored.
But since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog
signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µsec or greater).
When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
Influences on Absolute Precision: Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and
therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to
an electrically stable GND such as AVSS .
Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the
mounting board, so acting as antennas.
H8/3437 Series
chip
Sensor output
impedance,
up to 10 kΩ
A/D converter
equivalent circuit
10 kΩ
Sensor input
Low-pass
filter C,
up to 0.1 µF
Cin =
15 pF
Note: Figures are reference values.
Figure 15.10 Example of Analog Input Circuit
354
20 pF
Section 16 D/A Converter
16.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has an on-chip D/A converter module with two channels.
16.1.1
Features
Features of the D/A converter module are listed below.
•
•
•
•
Eight-bit resolution
Two-channel output
Maximum conversion time: 10 µs (with 20-pF load capacitance)
Output voltage: 0 V to AVref
355
16.1.2
Block Diagram
Module data bus
AVref
DACR
8-bit D/A
DADR1
DA0
DADR0
AVCC
DA1
AVSS
Control
circuit
DACR: D/A control register
DADR0: D/A data register 0
DADR1: D/A data register 1
Figure 16.1 D/A Converter Block Diagram
356
Bus interface
Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the D/A converter.
Internal data bus
16.1.3
Input and Output Pins
Table 16.1 lists the input and output pins used by the D/A converter module.
Table 16.1 Input and Output Pins of D/A Converter Module
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Reference voltage pin
AVref
Input
Reference voltage for analog circuits
Analog supply voltage
AVCC
Input
Power supply for analog circuits
Analog ground
AVSS
Input
Ground and reference voltage for analog
circuits
Analog output 0
DA 0
Output
Analog output channel 0
Analog output 1
DA 1
Output
Analog output channel 1
16.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 16.2 lists the three registers of the D/A converter module.
Table 16.2 D/A Converter Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
D/A data register 0
DADR0
R/W
H'00
H'FFF8
D/A data register 1
DADR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFF9
D/A control register
DACR
R/W
H'1F
H'FFFA
357
16.2
Register Descriptions
16.2.1
D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0, DADR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
D/A data registers 0 and 1 (DADR0 and DADR1) are 8-bit readable and writable registers that
store data to be converted. When analog output is enabled, the value in the D/A data register is
converted and output continuously at the analog output pin.
The D/A data registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in the standby modes.
16.2.2
D/A Control Register (DACR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DAOE1
DAOE0
DAE
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
DACR is an 8-bit readable and writable register that controls the operation of the D/A converter
module.
DACR is initialized to H'1F by a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—D/A Output Enable 1 (DAOE1): Controls analog output from the D/A converter.
Bit 7: DAOE1
Description
0
Analog output at DA 1 is disabled.
1
D/A conversion is enabled on channel 1. Analog output is enabled at DA 1.
358
Bit 6—D/A Output Enable 0 (DAOE0): Controls analog output from the D/A converter.
Bit 6: DAOE0
Description
0
Analog output at DA 0 is disabled.
1
D/A conversion is enabled on channel 0. Analog output is enabled at DA 0.
Bit 5—D/A Enable (DAE): Controls D/A conversion, in combination with bits DAOE0 and
DAOE1. D/A conversion is controlled independently on channels 0 and 1 when DAE = 0.
Channels 0 and 1 are controlled together when DAE = 1.
The decision to output the converted results is always controlled independently by DAOE0 and
DAOE1.
Bit 7: DAOE1
Bit 6: DAOE0
Bit 5: DAE
D/A Conversion
0
0
—
Disabled on channels 0 and 1.
1
0
Enabled on channel 0.
Disabled on channel 1.
1
0
1
Enabled on channels 0 and 1.
0
Disabled on channel 0.
Enabled on channel 1.
1
1
Enabled on channels 0 and 1.
—
Enabled on channels 0 and 1.
When the DAE bit is set to 1, analog power supply current drain is the same as during A/D and
D/A conversion, even if the DAOE0 and DAOE1 bits in DACR and the ADST bit in ADSCR are
cleared to 0.
Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
359
16.3
Operation
The D/A converter module has two built-in D/A converter circuits that can operate independently.
D/A conversion is performed continuously whenever enabled by the D/A control register. When a
new value is written in DADR0 or DADR1, conversion of the new value begins immediately. The
converted result is output by setting the DAOE0 or DAOE1 bit to 1.
An example of conversion on channel 0 is given next. Figure 16.2 shows the timing.
1. Software writes the data to be converted in DADR0.
2. D/A conversion begins when the DAOE0 bit in DACR is set to 1. After a conversion delay,
analog output appears at the DA0 pin. The output value is AVref × (DADR0 value)/256.
This output continues until a new value is written in DADR0 or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0.
3. If a new value is written in DADR0, conversion begins immediately. Output of the converted
result begins after the conversion delay time.
4. When the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, DA0 becomes an input pin.
DADR0
write cycle
DACR
write cycle
DADR0
write cycle
DACR
write cycle
ø
Address
Conversion data (1)
DADR0
Conversion data (2)
DAOE0
Conversion result (2)
Conversion result (1)
DA0
High-impedance state
t DCONV
t DCONV
tDCONV: D/A conversion time
Figure 16.2 D/A Conversion (Example)
360
Section 17 RAM
17.1
Overview
The H8/3437 and H8/3436 have 2 kbytes of on-chip static RAM. The H8/3434 has 1 kbyte. The
RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. Both byte and word access to the on-chip
RAM are performed in two states, enabling rapid data transfer and instruction execution.
The on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'F780 to H'FF7F in the address space of the H8/3437
and H8/3436, and addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the address space of the H8/3434. The RAME
bit in the system control register (SYSCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM.
17.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 17.1 is a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'F780
H'F781
H'F782
H'F783
On-chip RAM
H'FF7E
Even address
H'FF7F
Odd address
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM (H8/3437)
361
17.1.2
RAM Enable Bit (RAME) in System Control Register (SYSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. See section 3.2, System
Control Register (SYSCR), for the other SYSCR bits.
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): This bit enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized to 1 on the rising edge of the RES signal. The RAME bit is not initialized in software
standby mode.
Bit 0: RAME
Description
0
On-chip RAM is disabled.
1
On-chip RAM is enabled.
17.2
Operation
17.2.1
Expanded Modes (Modes 1 and 2)
(Initial value)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'F780 to H'FF7F in the H8/3437 and H8/3436
and addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the H8/3434 are directed to the on-chip RAM. If the RAME
bit is cleared to 0, accesses to these addresses are directed to the external data bus.
17.2.2
Single-Chip Mode (Mode 3)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'F780 to H'FF7F in the H8/3437 and H8/3436
and addresses H'FB80 to H'FF7F in the H8/3434 are directed to the on-chip RAM.
If the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM data cannot be accessed. Attempted write access
has no effect. Attempted read access always results in H'FF data being read.
Notes: 1. When V CC ≥ VRAM , on-chip RAM values can be retained by using the specified method.
See section 21.4.1 and Appendix E for details.
2. On-chip RAM values are not guaranteed if power is turned off, then on again, in any
state.
3. When specific bits in RAM are used as control bits, initial values must be set after
powering on.
362
Section 18 ROM (Mask ROM Version/ZTAT Version)
18.1
Overview
The size of the on-chip ROM is 60 kbytes in the H8/3437, 48 kbytes in the H8/3436, and 32
kbytes in the H8/3434. The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus. Both byte
data and word data are accessed in two states, enabling rapid data transfer.
The on-chip ROM is enabled or disabled depending on the inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and
MD0). See table 18.1.
Table 18.1 On-Chip ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode
Mode Pins
Mode
MD1
MD0
On-Chip ROM
Mode 1 (expanded mode)
0
1
Disabled (external addresses)
Mode 2 (expanded mode)
1
0
Enabled
Mode 3 (single-chip mode)
1
1
Enabled
The PROM versions (H8/3437 ZTAT and H8/3434 ZTAT) and flash-memory version (H8/3437
F-ZTAT and H8/3434 F-ZTAT ) can be set to writer mode and programmed with a generalpurpose PROM programmer. In the H8/3437, the accessible ROM addresses are H'0000 to
H'EF7F (61,312 bytes) in mode 2, and H'0000 to H'F77F (63,360 bytes) in mode 3. For details, see
section 3, MCU Operating Modes and Address Space.
363
18.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 18.1 is a block diagram of the on-chip ROM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
On-chip ROM
H'F77E
Even address
H'F77F
Odd address
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM (H8/3437 Single-Chip Mode)
18.2
Writer Mode (H8/3437, H8/3434)
18.2.1
Writer Mode Setup
In writer mode the PROM versions of the H8/3437 and H8/3434 suspend the usual microcomputer
functions to allow the on-chip PROM to be programmed. The programming method is the same as
for the HN27C101.
To select writer mode, apply the signal inputs listed in table 18.2.
Table 18.2 Selection of Writer Mode
Pin
Input
Mode pin MD1
Low
Mode pin MD 0
Low
STBY pin
Low
Pins P63 and P64
High
364
18.2.2
Socket Adapter Pin Assignments and Memory Map
The H8/3437 and H8/3434 can be programmed with a general-purpose PROM programmer by
using a socket adapter to change the pin-out to 32 pins. See table 18.3. The same socket adapter
can be used for both the H8/3437 and H8/3434. Figure 18.2 shows the socket adapter pin
assignments.
Table 18.3 Socket Adapter
Package
Socket Adapter
100-pin QFP
HS3437ESHS1H
100-pin TQFP
HS3437ESNS1H
The PROM size is 60 kbytes for the H8/3437 and 32 kbytes for the H8/3434. Figures 18.3 and
18.4 show memory maps of the H8/3437 and H8/3434 in writer mode. H'FF data should be
specified for unused address areas in the on-chip PROM.
When programming with a PROM programmer, limit the program address range to H'0000 to
H'F77F for the H8/3437 and H'0000 to H'7FFF for the H8/3434. Specify H'FF data for addresses
H'F780 and above (H8/3437) or H'8000 and above (H8/3434). If these addresses are programmed
by mistake, it may become impossible to program or verify the PROM data. The same problem
may occur if an attempt is made to program the chip in page programming mode. Note that the
PROM versions are one-time programmable (OTP) microcomputers, packaged in plastic
packages, and cannot be reprogrammed.
365
H8/3437, H8/3434
EPROM Socket
FP-100B,
TFP-100B
Pin
Pin
HN27C101
(32 pins)
1
RES
V PP
1
7
NMI
EA 9
26
82
P3 0
EO 0
13
83
P3 1
EO 1
14
84
P3 2
EO 2
15
85
P3 3
EO 3
17
86
P3 4
EO 4
18
87
P3 5
EO 5
19
88
P3 6
EO 6
20
89
P3 7
EO 7
21
79
P1 0
EA 0
12
78
P1 1
EA 1
11
77
P1 2
EA 2
10
76
P1 3
EA 3
9
75
P1 4
EA 4
8
74
P1 5
EA 5
7
73
P1 6
EA 6
6
72
P1 7
EA 7
5
67
P2 0
EA 8
27
66
P2 1
OE
24
65
P2 2
EA 10
23
64
P2 3
EA 11
25
63
P2 4
EA 12
4
62
P2 5
EA 13
28
61
P2 6
EA 14
29
60
P2 7
CE
22
25
P9 0
EA 16
2
24
P9 1
EA 15
3
23
P9 2
PGM
31
29
P6 3
VCC
32
32
P6 4
37
AV CC
36
AVref
4
VCCB
9
VCC
VSS
16
59
VCC
6
MD0
5
MD1
8
STBY
46
AV SS
15
VSS
70
VSS
71
VSS
92
VSS
Legend:
VPP:
EO7 to EO0:
EA16 to EA0:
OE:
CE:
PGM:
Programming power supply (12.5 V)
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Program enable
Note: All pins not listed in this figure should be left open.
Figure 18.2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments
366
Address in MCU mode
Address in writer mode
H'0000
H'0000
On-chip
PROM
H'F77F
H'F77F
Undetermined
value output*
H'1FFFF
Note: * If this address area is read in writer mode, the output data is not guaranteed.
Figure 18.3 H8/3437 Memory Map in Writer Mode
Address in MCU mode
Address in writer mode
H'0000
H'0000
On-chip
PROM
H'7FFF
H'7FFF
Undetermined
value output*
H'1FFFF
Note: * If this address area is read in writer mode, the output data is not guaranteed.
Figure 18.4 H8/3434 Memory Map in Writer Mode
367
18.3
PROM Programming
The write, verify, and other sub-modes of the writer mode are selected as shown in table 18.4.
Table 18.4 Selection of Sub-Modes in Writer Mode
Sub-Mode
CE
OE
PGM
VPP
VCC
EO7 to EO0
EA 16 to EA0
Write
Low
High
Low
VPP
VCC
Data input
Address input
Verify
Low
Low
High
VPP
VCC
Data output
Address input
Programming
inhibited
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
VPP
VCC
High impedance
Address input
The H8/3437 and H8/3434 PROM have the same standard read/write specifications as the
HN27C101 EPROM. Page programming is not supported, however, so do not select page
programming mode. PROM programmers that provide only page programming cannot be used.
When selecting a PROM programmer, check that it supports a byte-at-a-time high-speed
programming mode. Be sure to set the address range to H'0000 to H'F77F for the H8/3437, and to
H'0000 to H'7FFF for the H8/3434.
18.3.1
Programming and Verification
An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to program and verify PROM data.
This procedure programs data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress and without
sacrificing data reliability. It leaves the data H'FF in unused addresses.
Figure 18.5 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart.
Tables 18.5 and 18.6 list the electrical characteristics of the chip in writer mode. Figure 18.6
shows a program/verify timing chart.
368
Start
Set program/verify mode
VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V,
VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V
Address = 0
n=0
n + 1→ n
Program tPW = 0.2 ms ±5%
No
Yes
n < 25?
No
Address + 1 → address
Verify OK?
Yes
Program tOPW = 0.2n ms
Last address?
No
Yes
Set read mode
VCC = 5.0 V ±0.25 V,
VPP = VCC
Error
No go
Read all
addresses
Go
End
Figure 18.5 High-Speed Programming Flowchart
369
Table 18.5 DC Characteristics
(when VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Input high
voltage
EO7–EO0,
EA16 –EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
VIH
2.4
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Input low
voltage
EO7 – EO0,
EA16 – EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
VIL
–0.3
—
0.8
V
Output high
voltage
EO7–EO0
VOH
2.4
—
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
Output low
voltage
EO7–EO0
VOL
—
—
0.45
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
Input leakage EO7 – EO0,
current
EA16 – EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
|ILI|
—
—
2
µA
Vin = 5.25 V/0.5 V
VCC current
I CC
—
—
40
mA
VPP current
I PP
—
—
40
mA
370
Table 18.6 AC Characteristics
(when VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Address setup time
t AS
2
—
—
µs
See figure 18.6*
OE setup time
t OES
2
—
—
µs
Data setup time
t DS
2
—
—
µs
Address hold time
t AH
0
—
—
µs
Data hold time
t DH
2
—
—
µs
Data output disable time
t DF
—
—
130
ns
VPP setup time
t VPS
2
—
—
µs
Program pulse width
t PW
0.19
0.20
0.21
ms
OE pulse width for
overwrite-programming
t OPW
0.19
—
5.25
ms
VCC setup time
t VCS
2
—
—
µs
CE setup time
t CES
2
—
—
µs
Data output delay time
t OE
0
—
150
ns
Note: * Input pulse level: 0.8 V to 2.2 V
Input rise/fall time ≤ 20 ns
Timing reference levels: input—1.0 V, 2.0 V; output—0.8 V, 2.0 V
371
Write
Verify
Address
tAH
tAS
Data
Input data
tDS
VPP
VCC
Output data
tDH
tDF
VPP
VCC
tVPS
VCC + 1
VCC
tVCS
CE
tCES
PGM
tPW
OE
tOES
tOE
tOPW
Figure 18.6 PROM Program/Verify Timing
372
18.3.2
Notes on Programming
(1) A PROM programmer that does not allow start address setting cannot be used. If such a
PROM programmer is used, it will not be possible to perform verification at addresses H'10002,
H'10003, H'10004, and so on. Therefore a PROM programmer that allows address setting must be
used.
(2) Program with the specified voltages and timing. The programming voltage (VPP) is
12.5 V.
Caution: Applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy the chip. Be
particularly careful about the PROM programmer’s overshoot characteristics.
If the PROM programmer is set to HN27C101 specifications, VPP will be 12.5 V.
(3) Before writing data, check that the socket adapter and chip are correctly mounted in the
PROM writer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM
programmer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(4) Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while writing. Touching either of these can cause
contact faults and write errors.
(5) Page programming is not supported. Do not select page programming mode.
(6) The H8/3437 PROM size is 60 kbytes. The H8/3434 PROM size is 32 kbytes. Set the
address range to H'0000 to H'F77F for the H8/3437, and to H'0000 to H'7FFF for the H8/3434.
When programming, specify H'FF data for unused address areas (H'F780 to H'1FFFF in the
H8/3437, H'8000 to H'1FFFF in the H8/3434).
373
18.3.3
Reliability of Programmed Data
An effective way to assure the data holding characteristics of the programmed chips is to bake
them at 150˚C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with
PROM memory cells prone to early failure.
Figure 18.7 shows the recommended screening procedure.
Write and verify program
Bake with power off
125° to 150°C, 24 to 48Hr
Read and check program
Mount
Figure 18.7 Recommended Screening Procedure
If a series of write errors occurs while the same PROM programmer is in use, stop programming
and check the PROM programmer and socket adapter for defects.
Please inform Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during programming or in screening of
program data after high-temperature baking.
374
Section 19 ROM
(32-kbyte Dual-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version)
19.1
Flash Memory Overview
19.1.1
Flash Memory Operating Principle
Table 19.1 illustrates the principle of operation of the H8/3434F’s on-chip flash memory.
Like EPROM, flash memory is programmed by applying a high gate-to-drain voltage that draws
hot electrons generated in the vicinity of the drain into a floating gate. The threshold voltage of a
programmed memory cell is therefore higher than that of an erased cell. Cells are erased by
grounding the gate and applying a high voltage to the source, causing the electrons stored in the
floating gate to tunnel out. After erasure, the threshold voltage drops. A memory cell is read like
an EPROM cell, by driving the gate to the high level and detecting the drain current, which
depends on the threshold voltage. Erasing must be done carefully, because if a memory cell is
overerased, its threshold voltage may become negative, causing the cell to operate incorrectly.
Section 19.4.6 shows an optimal erase control flowchart and sample program.
Table 19.1 Principle of Memory Cell Operation
Program
Memory
cell
Memory
array
Erase
Vg = VPP
Vs = VPP
Vd
Vd
Read
0V
Open
Vg
Open
Vd
Open
Vd
0V
VPP
0V
VCC
0V
VPP
0V
0V
0V
0V
375
19.1.2
Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space
As its on-chip ROM, the H8/3434F has 32 kbytes of flash memory. The flash memory is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two
states.
The H8/3434F’s flash memory is assigned to addresses H'0000 to H'7FFF. The mode pins enable
either on-chip flash memory or external memory to be selected for this area. Table 19.2
summarizes the mode pin settings and usage of the memory area.
Table 19.2 Mode Pin Settings and Flash Memory Area
Mode Pin Setting
Mode
MD1
MD0
Memory Area Usage
Mode 0
0
0
Illegal setting
Mode 1
0
1
External memory area
Mode 2
1
0
On-chip flash memory area
Mode 3
1
1
On-chip flash memory area
19.1.3
Features
Features of the flash memory are listed below.
• Five flash memory operating modes
The flash memory has five operating modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase
mode, erase-verify mode, and prewrite-verify mode.
• Block erase designation
Blocks to be erased in the flash memory address space can be selected by bit settings. The
address space includes a large-block area (four blocks with sizes from 4 kbytes to 8 kbytes)
and a small-block area (eight blocks with sizes from 128 bytes to 1 kbyte).
• Program and erase time
Programming one byte of flash memory typically takes 50 µs. Erasing all blocks (32 kbytes)
typically takes 1 s.
• Erase-program cycles
Flash memory contents can be erased and reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
These modes can be used to program, erase, and verify flash memory contents. There are two
modes: boot mode and user programming mode.
376
• Automatic bit-rate alignment
In boot-mode data transfer, the H8/3434F aligns its bit rate automatically to the host bit rate
(maximum 9600 bps).
• Flash memory emulation by RAM
Part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates
in real time.
• Writer mode
As an alternative to on-board programming, the flash memory can be programmed and erased
in writer mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer. Program, erase, verify, and other
specifications are the same as for HN28F101 standard flash memory.
19.1.4
Block Diagram
Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory.
8
Internal data bus (upper)
8
Internal data bus (lower)
FLMCR
Bus interface and control section
EBR1
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
On-chip flash memory
(32 kbytes)
H'7FFC
H'7FFD
H'7FFE
H'7FFF
EBR2
Upper byte
(even address)
Operating
mode
MD1
MD0
Lower byte
(odd address)
Legend:
FLMCR: Flash memory control register
EBR1: Erase block register 1
EBR2: Erase block register 2
Figure 19.1 Flash Memory Block Diagram
377
19.1.5
Input/Output Pins
Flash memory is controlled by the pins listed in table 19.3.
Table 19.3 Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
Input/Output
Function
Programming power
FV PP
Power supply
Apply 12.0 V
Mode 1
MD1
Input
H8/3434F operating mode setting
Mode 0
MD0
Input
H8/3434F operating mode setting
Transmit data
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Receive data
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
The transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode.
19.1.6
Register Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by the registers listed in table 19.4.
Table 19.4 Flash Memory Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Flash memory control register
Erase block register 1
Wait-state control register
*1
Initial Value
R/W
*2
R/W
*2
EBR2
R/W
*2
WSCR
R/W
FLMCR
EBR1
Erase block register 2
R/W
H'00
H'FF80
*2
H'FF82
*2
H'FF83
H'F0
H'00
H'08
Address
*2
H'FFC2
Notes: *1 The wait-state control register controls the insertion of wait states by the wait-state
controller, frequency division of clock signals for the on-chip supporting modules by the
clock pulse generator, and emulation of flash-memory updates by RAM in on-board
programming mode.
*2 In modes 2 and 3 (on-chip flash memory enabled), the initial value is H'00 for FLMCR
and EBR2, and H'F0 for EBR1. In mode 1 (on-chip flash memory disabled), these
registers cannot be modified and always read H'FF.
Registers FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are only valid when writing to or erasing flash memory, and
can only be accessed while 12 V is being applied to the FV PP pin.
When 12 V is not applied to the FVPP pin, in mode 2 addresses H'FF80 to H'FF83 are external
address space, and in mode 3 these addresses cannot be modified and always read H'FF.
378
19.2
Flash Memory Register Descriptions
19.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR)
FLMCR is an 8-bit register that controls the flash memory operating modes. Transitions to
program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode are made by setting bits
in this register. FLMCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is
not applied to FVPP. When 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin, a reset or entry to a standby mode
initializes FLMCR to H'80.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VPP
—
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Initial value*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
—
—
—
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * The initial value is H'00 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In mode 1 (onchip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. For
information on accessing this register, refer to in section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming
and Erasing Precautions (11).
Bit 7—Programming Power (VPP): This status flag indicates that 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin.
Refer to section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions (5), for details on use.
Bit 7: VPP
Description
0
Cleared when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
1
Set when 12 V is applied to FVPP
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0.
Bit 3—Erase-Verify Mode (EV): *1 Selects transition to or exit from erase-verify mode.
Bit 3: EV
Description
0
Exit from erase-verify mode
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Program-Verify Mode (PV):*1 Selects transition to or exit from program-verify mode.
Bit 2: PV
Description
0
Exit from program-verify mode
1
Transition to program-verify mode
(Initial value)
379
Bit 1—Erase Mode (E):*1, *2 Selects transition to or exit from erase mode.
Bit 1: E
Description
0
Exit from erase mode
1
Transition to erase mode
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Program Mode (P):*1, *2 Selects transition to or exit from program mode.
Bit 0: P
Description
0
Exit from program mode
1
Transition to program mode
(Initial value)
Notes: *1 Do not set two or more of these bits simultaneously. Do not release or shut off the VCC
or VPP power supply when these bits are set.
*2 Set the P or E bit according to the instructions given in section 19.4, Programming and
Erasing Flash Memory.
Set the watchdog timer beforehand to make sure that these bits do not remain set for
longer than the specified times.
For notes on use, see section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
Precautions.
19.2.2
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 is an 8-bit register that designates large flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure.
EBR1 is initialized to H'F0 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
pin. When a bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed
and erased. Figure 19.2 and table 19.6 show details of a block map.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
Initial value*
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * The initial value is H'F0 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip ROM enabled). In mode 1 (on-chip ROM
disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. For information on
accessing this register, refer to in section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
Precautions (11).
380
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified, and are always read as 1.
Bits 3 to 0—Large Block 3 to 0 (LB3 to LB0): These bits select large blocks (LB3 to LB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 3 to 0:
LB3 to LB0
Description
0
Block (LB3 to LB0) is not selected
1
Block (LB3 to LB0) is selected
19.2.3
(Initial value)
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that designates small flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure.
EBR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
pin. When a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed
and erased. Figure 19.2 and table 19.6 show a block map.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SB7
SB6
SB5
SB4
SB3
SB2
SB1
SB0
Initial value*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * The initial value is H'00 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip ROM enabled). In mode 1 (on-chip ROM
disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. For information on
accessing this register, refer to in section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
Precautions (11).
Bits 7 to 0—Small Block 7 to 0 (SB7 to SB0): These bits select small blocks (SB7 to SB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 7 to 0:
SB7 to SB0
Description
0
Block (SB7 to SB0) is not selected
1
Block (SB7 to SB0) is selected
(Initial value)
381
19.2.4
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)
WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables flash-memory updates to be emulated in
RAM. It also controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to the on-chip supporting
modules and insertion of wait states by the wait-state controller.
WSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAMS
RAM0
CKDBL
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—RAM Select and RAM0 (RAMS and RAM0): These bits are used to reassign an
area to RAM (see table 19.5). These bits are write-enabled and their initial value is 0. They are
initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby
mode.
If only one of bits 7 and 6 is set, part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto the small-block
flash memory area. In that case, access is to RAM, not flash memory, and all flash memory blocks
are write/erase-protected (emulation protect*1). In this state, the mode cannot be changed to
program or erase mode, even if the P bit or E bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) is
set (although verify mode can be selected). Therefore, clear both of bits 7 and 6 before
programming or erasing the flash memory area.
If both of bits 7 and 6 are set, part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto the small-block flash
memory area, but this overlapping begins only when an interrupt signal is input while 12 V is
being applied to the FVPP pin. Up until that point, flash memory is accessed. Use this setting for
interrupt handling while flash memory is being programmed or erased.*2
Table 19.5 RAM Area Reassignment*3
Bit 7: RAMS
Bit 6: RAM0
RAM Area
ROM Area
0
0
None
—
1
H'FC80 to H'FCFF
H'0080 to H'00FF
0
H'FC80 to H'FD7F
H'0080 to H'017F
1
H'FC00 to H'FC7F
H'0000 to H'007F
1
382
Bit 5—Clock Double (CKDBL): Controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to the onchip supporting modules. For details, see section 6, Clock Pulse Generator.
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit is reserved, but it can be written and read. Its initial value is 0.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1, WMS0)
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1, WC0)
These bits control insertion of wait states by the wait-state controller. For details, see section 5,
Wait-State Controller.
Notes: *1 For details on emulation protect, see section 19.4.8, Protect Modes.
*2 For details on interrupt handling during programming and erasing of flash memory, see
section 19.4.9, Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing.
*3 RAM area that overlaps flash memory.
383
Small block
area
(4 kbytes)
Large block
area
(28 kbytes)
H'0000
H'0000
SB7 to SB0
4 kbytes
H'0FFF
H'1000
SB0 128 bytes
SB1 128 bytes
SB2 128 bytes
H'01FF SB3 128 bytes
H'0200
SB4
512 bytes
LB0
4 kbytes
H'03FF
H'0400
H'1FFF
H'2000
LB1
8 kbytes
SB5
1 kbyte
H'07FF
H'0800
H'3FFF
H'4000
LB2
8 kbytes
SB6
1 kbyte
H'0BFF
H'0C00
H'5FFF
H'6000
SB7
1 kbyte
LB3
8 kbytes
H'7FFF
Figure 19.2 Erase Block Map
384
H'0FFF
Table 19.6 Erase Blocks and Corresponding Bits
Register
Bit
Block
Address
Size
EBR1
0
LB0
H'1000 to H'1FFF
4 kbytes
1
LB1
H'2000 to H'3FFF
8 kbytes
2
LB2
H'4000 to H'5FFF
8 kbytes
3
LB3
H'6000 to H'7FFF
8 kbytes
0
SB0
H'0000 to H'007F
128 bytes
1
SB1
H'0080 to H'00FF
128 bytes
2
SB2
H'0100 to H'017F
128 bytes
3
SB3
H'0180 to H'01FF
128 bytes
4
SB4
H'0200 to H'03FF
512 bytes
5
SB5
H'0400 to H'07FF
1 kbyte
6
SB6
H'0800 to H'0BFF
1 kbyte
7
SB7
H'0C00 to H'0FFF
1 kbyte
EBR2
19.3
On-Board Programming Modes
When an on-board programming mode is selected, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed,
erased, and verified. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode, and user
programming mode. These modes are selected by inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD 0) and
FVPP pin. Table 19.7 indicates how to select the on-board programming modes. For details on
applying voltage V PP , refer to section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
(5).
Table 19.7 On-Board Programming Mode Selection
Mode Selections
Boot mode
User programming
mode
FV PP
MD1
MD0
Notes
12 V*
12 V*
0
0: VIL
Mode 3
12 V*
1
1: VIH
Mode 2
1
0
Mode 3
1
1
Mode 2
Note: * For details on the timing of 12 V application, see notes 6 to 8 in the Notes on Use of Boot
Mode at the end of this section.
In boot mode, the mode control register (MDCR) can be used to monitor the mode (mode 2
or 3) in the same way as in normal mode.
Example: Set the mode pins for mode 2 boot mode (MD 1 = 12 V, MD0 = 0 V).
If the mode select bits of MDCR are now read, they will indicate mode 2 (MDS1 = 1,
MDS0 = 0).
385
19.3.1
Boot Mode
To use boot mode, a user program for programming and erasing the flash memory must be
provided in advance on the host machine (which may be a personal computer). Serial
communication interface channel 1 is used in asynchronous mode. If the H8/3434F is placed in
boot mode, after it comes out of reset, a built-in boot program is activated. This program starts by
measuring the low period of data transmitted from the host and setting the bit rate register (BRR)
accordingly. The H8/3434F’s built-in serial communication interface (SCI) can then be used to
download the user program from the host machine. The user program is stored in on-chip RAM.
After the program has been stored, execution branches to address H'FBE0 in the on-chip RAM,
and the program stored on RAM is executed to program and erase the flash memory.
H8/3434F
Receive data to be programmed
HOST
Transmit verification data
RxD1
SCI
TxD1
Figure 19.3 Boot-Mode System Configuration
386
Boot-Mode Execution Procedure: Figure 19.4 shows the boot-mode execution procedure.
Start
1. Program the H8/3434F pins for boot mode, and start the
H8/3434F from a reset.
1
Program H8/3434F pins for boot mode,
and reset
2. Set the host’s data format to 8 bits + 1 stop bit, select the
desired bit rate (2400, 4800, or 9600 bps), and transmit
H'00 data continuously.
2
Host transmits H'00 data continuously
at desired bit rate
3
H8/3434F measures low period
of H'00 data transmitted from host
H8/3434F computes bit rate and
sets bit rate register
4
After completing bit-rate alignment, H8/3434F
sends one H'00 data byte to host to indicate
that alignment is completed
5
Host checks that this byte, indicating
completion of bit-rate alignment, is received
normally, then transmits one H'55 byte
6
After receiving H'55, H8/3434F sends part of
the boot program to RAM
H8/3434F branches to the RAM boot
area (H'FC00 to H'FF2F), then checks the
data in the user area of flash memory
7
No
All data = H'FF?
Yes
Erase all flash
memory blocks*3
After checking that all data in flash memory is H'FF,
H8/3434F transmits one H'AA data byte to host
8
H8/3434F receives two bytes indicating byte
length (N) of program to be downloaded
to on-chip RAM*1
H8/3434F transfers one user program
byte to RAM*2
9
H8/3434F calculates number of bytes left
to be transferred (N = N – 1)
All bytes transferred?
(N = 0?)
No
Yes
After transferring the user program to RAM,
H8/3434F transmits one H'AA data byte to host
10
H8/3434F branches to H'FBE0 in RAM area and
executes user program downloaded into RAM
3. The H8/3434F repeatedly measures the low period of the
RxD1 pin and calculates the host’s asynchronouscommunication bit rate.
4. When SCI bit-rate alignment is completed, the H8/3434F
transmits one H'00 data byte to indicate completion of
alignment.
5. The host should receive the byte transmitted from the
H8/3434F to indicate that bit-rate alignment is completed,
check that this byte is received normally, then transmit one
H'55 byte.
6. After receiving H'55, H8/3434F sends part of the boot
program to H'FB80 to H'FBDF and H'FC00 to H'FF2F of
RAM.
7. After branching to the boot program area (H'FC00 to
H'FF2F) in RAM, the H8/3434F checks whether the flash
memory already contains any programmed data. If so, all
blocks are erased.
8. After the H8/3434F transmits one H'AA data byte, the host
transmits the byte length of the user program to be
transferred to the H8/3434F. The byte length must be sent
as two-byte data, upper byte first and lower byte second.
After that, the host proceeds to transmit the user program.
As verification, the H8/3434F echoes each byte of the
received byte-length data and user program back to the
host.
9. The H8/3434F stores the received user program in on-chip
RAM in a 910-byte area from H'FBE0 to H'FF6D.
10. After transmitting one H'AA data byte, the H8/3434F
branches to address H'FBE0 in on-chip RAM and executes
the user program stored in the area from H'FBE0 to
H'FF6D.
Notes: *1 The user can use 910 bytes of RAM. The number
of bytes transferred must not exceed 910 bytes. Be
sure to transmit the byte length in two bytes, upper
byte first and lower byte second. For example, if the
byte length of the program to be transferred is 256
bytes (H'0100), transmit H'01 as the upper byte,
followed by H'00 as the lower byte.
*2 The part of the user program that controls the flash
memory should be coded according to the flash
memory program/erase algorithms given later.
*3 If a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be
erased, the H8/3434F transmits one H'FF byte to
report an erase error, halts erasing, and halts
further operations.
Figure 19.4 Boot Mode Flowchart
387
Automatic Alignment of SCI Bit Rate
Start
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop
bit
This low period (9 bits) is measured (H'00 data)
High for at
least 1 bit
Figure 19.5 Measurement of Low Period in Data Transmitted from Host
When started in boot mode, the H8/3434F measures the low period in asynchronous SCI data
transmitted from the host (figure 19.5). The data format is eight data bits, one stop bit, and no
parity bit. From the measured low period (9 bits), the H8/3434F computes the host’s bit rate. After
aligning its own bit rate, the H8/3434F sends the host 1 byte of H'00 data to indicate that bit-rate
alignment is completed. The host should check that this alignment-completed indication is
received normally and send one byte of H'55 back to the H8/3434F. If the alignment-completed
indication is not received normally, the H8/3434F should be reset, then restarted in boot mode to
measure the low period again. There may be some alignment error between the host’s and
H8/3434F’s bit rates, depending on the host’s bit rate and the H8/3434F’s system clock frequency.
To have the SCI operate normally, set the host’s bit rate to 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps *1. Table 19.8
lists typical host bit rates and indicates the clock-frequency ranges over which the H8/3434F can
align its bit rate automatically. Boot mode should be used within these frequency ranges*2.
Table 19.8 System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment by
H8/3434F
Host Bit Rate*1
System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment
by H8/3434F
9600 bps
8 MHz to 16 MHz
4800 bps
4 MHz to 16 MHz
2400 bps
2 MHz to 16 MHz
Notes: *1 Use a host bit rate setting of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps only. No other setting should be
used.
*2 Although the H8/3434F may also perform automatic bit-rate alignment with bit rate and
system clock combinations other than those shown in table 19.8, there will be a slight
difference between the bit rates of the host and the H8/3434F, and subsequent transfer
will not be performed normally. Therefore, only a combination of bit rate and system
clock frequency within one of the ranges shown in table 19.8 can be used for boot
mode execution.
388
RAM Area Allocation in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 96 bytes from H'FB80 to H'FBDF and
the 18 bytes from H'FF6E to H'FF7F are reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure
19.6. The user program is transferred into the area from H'FBE0 to H'FF6D (910 bytes). The boot
program area can be used after the transition to execution of the user program transferred into
RAM. If a stack area is needed, set it within the user program.
H'FB80
Boot program
area*
(96 bytes)
H'FBE0
User program
transfer area
(910 bytes)
H'FF6E
H'FF7F
Boot program
area* (18 bytes)
Note: * This area cannot be used until the H8/3434F starts to execute the user program
transferred to RAM (until it has branched to H'FBE0 in RAM). Note that even after the
branch to the user program, the boot program area (H'FB80 to H'FBDF, H'FF6E to
H'FF7F) still contains the boot program.
Note also that 16 bytes (H'FB80 to H'FB8F) of this area cannot be used if an interrupt
handling routine is executed within the boot program. For details see section 19.4.9,
Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing.
Figure 19.6 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
389
Notes on Use of Boot Mode
1. When the H8/3434F comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at
the SCI’s RxD1 pin. The reset should end with RxD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about
100 states for the H8/3434F to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD1 input.
2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not H'FF),
all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user programming mode is
unavailable, e.g. the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the update program
activated in user programming mode is accidentally erased.
3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
4. The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on-board.
5. Before branching to the user program (at address H'FBE0 in the RAM area), the H8/3434F
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (by clearing the RE and TE bits
of the serial control register to 0 in channel 1), but the auto-aligned bit rate remains set in bit
rate register BRR. The transmit data output pin (TxD1) is in the high output state (in port 8, the
bits P8 4 DDR of the port 8 data direction register and P84 DR of the port 8 data register are set
to 1).
At this time, the values of general registers in the CPU are undetermined. Thus these registers
should be initialized immediately after branching to the user program. Especially in the case of
the stack pointer, which is used implicitly in subroutine calls, the stack area used by the user
program should be specified.
There are no other changes to the initialized values of other registers.
6. Boot mode can be entered by starting from a reset after 12 V is applied to the MD1 and FVPP
pins according to the mode setting conditions listed in table 19.7. Note the following points
when turning the VPP power on.
When reset is released (at the rise from low to high), the H8/3434F checks for 12-V input at
the MD1 and FVPP pins. If it detects that these pins are programmed for boot mode, it saves that
status internally. The threshold point of this voltage-level check is in the range from
approximately VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V, so boot mode will be entered even if the applied voltage is
insufficient for programming or erasure (11.4 V to 12.6 V). When the boot program is
executed, the VPP power supply must therefore be stabilized within the range of 11.4 V to
12.6 V before the branch to the RAM area occurs. See figure 19.20.
Make sure that the programming voltage VPP does not exceed 12.6 V during the transition to
boot mode (at the reset release timing) and does not go outside the range of 12 V ± 0.6 V while
in boot mode. Boot mode will not be executed correctly if these limits are exceeded. In
390
addition, make sure that VPP is not released or shut off while the boot program is executing or
the flash memory is being programmed or erased.*1
Boot mode can be released by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least ten system clock
cycles, then releasing the application of 12 V to the MD1 and FVPP pins and releasing the reset.
The settings of external pins must not change during operation in boot mode.
During boot mode, if input of 12 V to the MD1 pin stops but no reset input occurs at the RES
pin, the boot mode state is maintained within the chip and boot mode continues (but do not
stop applying 12 V to the FV PP pin during boot mode*1).
If a watchdog timer reset occurs during boot mode, this does not release the internal mode
state, but the internal boot program is restarted.
Therefore, to change from boot mode to another mode, the boot-mode state within the chip
must be released by a reset input at the RES pin before the mode transition can take place.
7. If the input level of the MD 1 pin is changed during a reset (e.g., from 0 V to 5 V then to 12 V
while the input to the RES pin is low), the resultant switch in the microcontroller’s operating
mode will affect the bus control output signals (AS, RD, and WR) and the status of ports that
can be used for address output*2.
Therefore, either set these pins so that they do not output signals during the reset, or make sure
that their output signals do not collide with other signals outside the microcontroller.
8. When applying 12 V to the MD1 and FVPP pins, make sure that peak overshoot does not exceed
the rated limit of 13 V.
Also, be sure to connect a decoupling capacitor to the FVPP and MD 1 pins.
Notes: *1 For details on applying, releasing, and shutting off V PP , see note (5) in section 19.7,
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
*2 These ports output low-level address signals if the mode pins are set to mode 1 during
the reset. In all other modes, these ports are in the high-impedance state. The bus
control output signals are high if the mode pins are set for mode 1 or 2 during the reset.
In mode 3, they are at high impedance.
391
19.3.2
User Programming Mode
When set to user programming mode, the H8/3434F can erase and program its flash memory by
executing a user program. On-board updates of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by
providing on-board circuits for supplying VPP and data, and storing an update program in part of
the program area.
To select user programming mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip ROM (mode 2 or 3) and
apply 12 V to the FVPP pin, either during a reset, or after the reset has ended (been released) but
while flash memory is not being accessed. In user programming mode, the on-chip supporting
modules operate as they normally would in mode 2 or 3, except for the flash memory. However,
hardware standby mode cannot be set while 12 V is applied to the FV PP pin.
The flash memory cannot be read while it is being programmed or erased, so the update program
must either be stored in external memory, or transferred temporarily to the RAM area and
executed in RAM.
392
User Programming Mode Execution Procedure (Example)*: Figure 19.7 shows the execution
procedure for user programming mode when the on-board update routine is executed in RAM.
Note: * Do not apply 12 V to the FVPP pin during normal operation. To prevent flash memory
from being accidentally programmed or erased due to program runaway etc., apply 12 V
to FVPP only when programming or erasing flash memory. Overprogramming or
overerasing due to program runaway can cause memory cells to malfunction. While 12 V
is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program
execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing. For
details on applying, releasing, and shutting off VPP, see section 19.7, Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing Precautions (5).
1
Set MD1 and MD0 to 10 or 11
(apply VIH to VCC to MD1)
Start from reset
2
Branch to flash memory
on-board update program
3
Transfer on-board update routine
into RAM
4
Branch to flash memory on-board
update routine in RAM
5
FVPP = 12 V
(user programming mode)
6
Execute flash memory
on-board update routine in RAM
(update flash memory)
7
Release FVPP
(exit user programming mode)
8
Branch to application program
in flash memory*
Procedure
The flash memory on-board update
program is written in flash memory ahead
of time by the user.
1. Set MD1 and MD0 of the H8/3434F to
10 or 11, and start from a reset.
2. Branch to the flash memory on-board
update program in flash memory.
3. Transfer the on-board update routine
into RAM.
4. Branch to the on-board update routine
that was transferred into RAM.
5. Apply 12 V to the FVPP pin, to enter
user programming mode.
6. Execute the flash memory on-board
update routine in RAM, to perform an
on-board update of the flash memory.
7. Change the voltage at the FVPP pin
from 12 V to VCC, to exit user
programming mode.
8. After the on-board update of flash
memory ends, execution branches to
an application program in flash
memory.
Note: * After the update is finished, when input of 12 V to the FVPP pin is released, the flash
memory read setup time (tFRS) must elapse before any program in flash memory is
executed. This is the required setup time from when the FVPP pin reaches the (VCC +
2 V) level after 12 V is released until flash memory can be read.
Figure 19.7 User Programming Mode Operation (Example)
393
19.4
Programming and Erasing Flash Memory
The H8/3434F’s on-chip flash memory is programmed and erased by software, using the CPU.
The flash memory can operate in program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, erase-verify
mode, or prewrite-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the P, E, PV,
and EV bits in the flash memory control register (FLMCR).
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. The program that controls
the programming and erasing of the flash memory must be stored and executed in on-chip RAM or
in external memory. A description of each mode is given below, with recommended flowcharts
and sample programs for programming and erasing.
For details on programming and erasing, refer to section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and
Erasing Precautions.
19.4.1
Program Mode
To write data into the flash memory, follow the programming algorithm shown in figure 19.8. This
programming algorithm can write data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing
the reliability of programmed data.
To program data, first specify the area to be written in flash memory with erase block registers
EBR1 and EBR2, then write the data to the address to be programmed, as in writing to RAM. The
flash memory latches the address and data in an address latch and data latch. Next set the P bit in
FLMCR, selecting program mode. The programming duration is the time during which the P bit is
set. A software timer should be used to provide a programming duration of about 10 to 20 µs. The
value of N, the number of attempts, should be set so that the total programming time does not
exceed 1 ms. Programming for too long a time, due to program runaway for example, can cause
device damage. Before selecting program mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to prevent
overprogramming.
394
19.4.2
Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, after data has been programmed in program mode, the data is read to
check that it has been programmed correctly.
After the programming time has elapsed, exit programming mode (clear the P bit to 0) and select
program-verify mode (set the PV bit to 1). In program-verify mode, a program-verify voltage is
applied to the memory cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the
data at the latched address will be read. After selecting program-verify mode, wait 4 µs or more
before reading, then compare the programmed data with the verify data. If they agree, exit
program-verify mode and program the next address. If they do not agree, select program mode
again and repeat the same program and program-verify sequence. Do not repeat the program and
program-verify sequence more than 50 times* for the same bit.
Note: * Keep the total programming time under 1 ms for each bit.
395
19.4.3
Programming Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Programming One Byte
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be programmed to 1)
Write data to flash memory (flash
memory latches write
address and data)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select program mode
(P bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Notes: *1 Write the data to be programmed
with a byte transfer instruction.
*2 Set the timer overflow interval to the
shortest value (CKS2, CKS1, CKS0
all cleared to 0).
*3 Read the memory data to be verified
with a byte transfer instruction.
10 to 20 µs
*4 x:
tVS1: 4 µs or more
N:
50 (set N so that total
programming time does not
exceed 1 ms)
Wait (x) µs*4
Clear P bit
End of programming
Disable watchdog timer
Select program-verify mode
(PV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tVS1) µs*4
No go
Verify*3 (read memory)
OK
Clear PV bit
Clear PV bit
End of verification
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of programmed block to 0)
End (1-byte data programmed)
n ≥ N?*4
No
Yes
Programming error
Figure 19.8 Programming Flowchart
396
n+1→n
Sample Program for Programming One Byte: This program uses the following registers.
R0H:
R1H:
R1L:
R3:
R4:
Specifies blocks to be erased.
Stores data to be programmed.
Stores data to be read.
Stores address to be programmed. Valid addresses are H'0000 to H'7FFF.
Sets program and program-verify timing loop counters, and also stores register setting
value.
R5: Sets program timing loop counter.
R6L: Used for program-verify fail count.
Arbitrary data can be programmed at an arbitrary address by setting the address in R3 and the data
in R1H.
The setting of #a and #b values depends on the clock frequency. Set #a and #b values according to
tables 19.9 (1) and (2).
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
PRGM:
.ALIGN
MOV.B
MOV.B
2
#H'**,
R0H,
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.B
INC
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
BCLR
PRGMS:
LOOP1:
LOOP2:
R0H
@EBR*:8
;
; Set EBR *
#H'00,
#H'a,
R1H,
R6L
#H'A578,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOP1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R6L
R5
@R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Program-verify fail counter
Set program loop counter
Dummy write
Program-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
#H'b ,
#2,
R4H
LOOP2
@R3,
R1H,
PVOK
#2,
R4H
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set program-verify loop counter
Set PV bit
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
R1L
R1L
@FLMCR:8
Start watchdog timer
Set program loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
Wait loop
Read programmed address
Compare programmed data with read data
Program-verify decision
Clear PV bit
397
PVOK:
CMP.B
BEQ
BRA
#H'32,
NGEND
PRGMS
BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
#2,
#H'00,
R6L,
R6L
@FLMCR:8
R6L
@EBR*:8
; Program-verify executed 50 times?
; If program-verify executed 50 times, branch to NGEND
; Program again
; Clear PV bit
;
; Clear EBR*
One byte programmed
NGEND:
19.4.4
Programming error
Erase Mode
To erase the flash memory, follow the erasing flowchart shown in figure 19.9. This erasing flow
can erase data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing the reliability of
programmed data.
To erase flash memory, before starting to erase, first place all memory data in all blocks to be
erased in the programmed state (program all memory data to H'00). If all memory data is not in the
programmed state, follow the sequence described later (figure 19.10) to program the memory data
to zero. Select the flash memory areas to be erased with erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and
EBR2). Next set the E bit in FLMCR, selecting erase mode. The erase time is the time during
which the E bit is set. To prevent overerasing, use a software timer to divide the erase time into
repeated 10 ms intervals, and perform erase operations a maximum of 3000 times so that the total
erase time does not exceed 30 seconds. Overerasing, due to program runaway for example, can
give memory cells a negative threshold voltage and cause them to operate incorrectly. Before
selecting erase mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to prevent overerasing.
19.4.5
Erase-Verify Mode
In erase-verify mode, after data has been erased, it is read to check that it has been erased
correctly. After the erase time has elapsed, exit erase mode (clear the E bit to 0) and select eraseverify mode (set the EV bit to 1). Before reading data in erase-verify mode, write H'FF dummy
data to the address to be read. This dummy write applies an erase-verify voltage to the memory
cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the latched address
will be read. After the dummy write, wait 2 µs or more before reading. When performing the
initial dummy write, wait 4 µs or more after selecting erase-verify mode. If the read data has been
successfully erased, perform an erase-verify (dummy write, wait 2 µs or more, then read) for the
next address. If the read data has not been erased, select erase mode again and repeat the same
erase and erase-verify sequence through the last address, until all memory data has been erased to
1. Do not repeat the erase and erase-verify sequence more than 3000 times, however.
398
19.4.6
Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Erasing One Block
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be erased to 1)
Write 0 data in all addresses
to be erased (prewrite)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select erase mode
(E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) ms*5
Clear E bit
Disable watchdog timer
Set top address in block
as verify address
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tVS1) µs*5
Notes: *1 Program all addresses to be
erased by following the prewrite
flowchart.
*2 Set the watchdog timer overflow
interval to the value indicated in
table 19.10.
*3 For the erase-verify dummy write,
Erasing ends
write H'FF with a byte transfer
instruction.
*4 Read the data to be verified with
a byte transfer instruction. When
erasing two or more blocks, clear
the bits of erased blocks in the
erase block registers, so that only
unerased blocks will be erased
again.
*5 x:
10 ms
tVS1: 4 µs or more
tVS2: 2 µs or more
N:
3000
Dummy write to verify address*3
(flash memory latches address)
Wait (tVS2) µs*5
Verify*4 (read data H'FF?)
OK
No
Address + 1 → address
No go
Clear EV bit
Last address?
Yes
n ≥ N?*5
Clear EV bit
Yes
Erase-verify ends
No
n+1→n
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of erased block to 0)
End of block erase
Erase error
Figure 19.9 Erasing Flowchart
399
Prewrite Flowchart
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be programmed to 1)
Set start address*5
n=1
Write H'00 to flash memory
(Flash memory latches
write address and write data)*1
Address + 1 → address
Notes: *1 Use a byte transfer instruction.
*2 Set the timer overflow interval to the
shortest value (CKS2, CKS1, CKS0
all cleared to 0).
*3 In prewrite-verify mode P, E, PV,
and EV are all cleared to 0 and 12 V
is applied to FVPP. Read the data
with a byte transfer instruction.
10 to 20 µs
*4 x:
End of programming
tVS1: 4 µs or more
N:
50 (set N so that total
programming time does not
exceed 1 ms)
*5 Start and last addresses shall be top
and last addresses of the block to be
erased.
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select program mode
( P bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) µs*4
Clear P bit
Disable watchdog timer
Wait (tVS1) µs*4
Prewrite verify*3
(read data = H'00?)
No go
OK
n ≥ N?*4
No
Yes
n+1→n
Programming error
No
Last address?*5
Yes
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of programmed block to 0)
End of prewrite
Figure 19.10 Prewrite Flowchart
400
Sample Block-Erase Program: This program uses the following registers.
R0:
R1H:
R2:
R3:
R4:
Specifies block to be erased, and also stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
Stores data to be read, and also used for dummy write.
Stores last address of block to be erased.
Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
Sets timing loop counters for prewrite, prewrite-verify, erase, and erase-verify, and also
stores register setting value.
R5: Sets prewrite and erase timing loop counters.
R6L: Used for prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail count.
The setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the program depends on the clock frequency. Set #a,
#b, #c, #d, and #e values according tables 19.9 (1) and (2), and 19.10. Erase block registers (EBR1
and EBR2) should be set according to sections 19.2.2 and 19.2.3. #BLKSTR and #BLKEND are
the top and last addresses of the block to be erased. Set #BLKSTR and #BLKEND according to
figure 19.2.
401
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
.ALIGN
MOV.B
MOV.B
2
#H'**,
ROH,
ROH
@EBR*:8
;
; Set EBR*
; #BLKSTR is top address of block to be erased.
; #BLKEND is last address of block to be erased.
#BLKSTR,
#BLKEND,
#1,
R0
R2
R2
; Top address of block to be erased
; Last address of block to be erased
; Last address of block to be erased + 1 → R2
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.W
INC
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
R0,
#H'00,
#H'a,
R6L
#H'00
R1H,
#H'A578,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOPR1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R3
R6L
R5
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Top address of block to be erased
Prewrite-verify fail counter
Set prewrite loop counter
Prewrite-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BEQ
BRA
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPR2
@R3,
PWVFOK
#H'32,
ABEND1
PREWRS
R4H
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set prewrite-verify loop counter
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADDS
; Execute prewrite
PREWRT:
PREWRS:
LOOPR1:
LOOPR2:
ABEND1:
Programming error
PWVFOK:
ADDS
CMP.W
BNE
402
#1,
R2,
PREWRT
R1H
@R3
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
R1H
R6L
R3
R3
Write H'00
Start watchdog timer
Set prewrite loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
Wait loop
Read data = H'00?
If read data = H'00 branch to PWVFOK
Prewrite-verify executed 50 times?
If prewrite-verify executed 50 times, branch to ABEND1
Prewrite again
; Address + 1 → R3
; Last address?
; If not last address, prewrite next address
;Execute erase
ERASES: MOV.W
MOV.W
ERASE:
ADDS
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
LOOPE:
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
#H'0000,
#H'd,
#1,
#H'e,
R4,
R5,
#1,
R6
R5
R6
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
#1,
R4,
LOOPE
#1,
#H'A500,
R4,
R4
R4
;
;
; Wait loop
; Clear E bit
;
; Stop watchdog timer
MOV.W
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BNE
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
R0,
#H'b,
#3,
R4H
LOOPEV
#H'FF,
R1H,
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPDW
@R3+,
#H'FF,
RERASE
R2,
EVR2
OKEND
R3
R4H
@FLMCR:8
RERASE:
BCLR
SUBS
BRER:
OKEND:
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
Erase-verify fail counter
Set erase loop count
Erase-verify fail counter + 1 → R6
Start watchdog timer
Set erase loop counter
Set E bit
; Execute erase-verify
LOOPEV:
EVR2:
LOOPDW:
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
#3,
#1,
@FLMCR:8
R3
; Clear EV bit
; Erase-verify address – 1 → R3
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
#H'0BB8,
R4,
ERASE
ABEND2
R4
R6
;
; Erase-verify executed 3000 times?
; If erase-verify not executed 3000 times, erase again
; If erase-verify executed 3000 times, branch to ABEND2
BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
#3,
#H'00,
R6L,
@FLMCR:8
R6L
@EBR*:8
; Clear EV bit
;
; Clear EBR*
R1H
@R3
R4H
R1H
R1H
Top address of block to be erased
Set erase-verify loop counter
Set EV bit
Wait loop
Dummy write
Set erase-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read
Read data = H'FF?
If read data ≠ H'FF, branch to RERASE
Last address of block?
One block erased
ABEND2:
Erase error
403
Flowchart for Erasing Multiple Blocks
Start
Notes: *1 Program all addresses to be
erased by following the prewrite
flowchart.
*2 Set the watchdog timer
overflow interval to the value
indicated in table 19.10.
*3 For the erase-verify dummy
write, write H'FF with a byte
transfer instruction.
*4 Read the data to be verified
with a byte transfer instruction.
When erasing two or more
blocks, clear the bits of erased
blocks in the erase block
register, so that only unerased
blocks will be erased again.
*5 X:
10 ms
tVS1: 4 µs or more
tVS2: 2 µs or more
N:
3000
Set erase block registers
(set bits of blocks to be erased to 1)
Write 0 data to all addresses to be
erased (prewrite)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select erase mode (E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (X) ms*5
Erasing
ends
Clear E bit
Disable watchdog timer
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tVS1) µs*5
Set top address of block as
verify address
Dummy write to verify address*3
(flash memory latches address)
Erase-verify
next block
Wait (tVS2) µs*5
Verify*4
(read data H'FF?)
Erase-verify next block
No go
OK
No
Address + 1 → address
Last address
in block?
Yes
All erased blocks
verified?
No
Yes
Clear EBR bit of erased block
No
All erased blocks
verified?
Yes
Clear EV bit
All blocks erased?
(EBR1 = EBR2 = 0?)
Yes
End of erase
No
n ≥ N?*5
Yes
Erase error
Figure 19.11 Multiple-Block Erase Flowchart
404
No
n+1→n
Sample Multiple-Block Erase Program: This program uses the following registers.
R0:
Specifies blocks to be erased (set as explained below), and also stores address used in
prewrite and erase-verify.
R1H: Used to test bits 8 to 11 of R0 stores register read data, and also used for dummy write.
R1L: Used to test bits 0 to 11 of R0.
R2: Specifies address where address used in prewrite and erase-verify is stored.
R3: Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
R4: Stores last address of block to be erased.
R5: Sets prewrite and erase timing loop counters.
R6L: Used for prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail count.
Arbitrary blocks can be erased by setting bits in R0. Write R0 with a word transfer instruction.
A bit map of R0 and a sample setting for erasing specific blocks are shown next.
Bit
15
14
13
12
R0
—
—
—
—
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
Corresponds to EBR1
Corresponds to EBR2
Note: Clear bits 15, 14, 13, and 12 to 0.
Example: to erase blocks LB2, SB7, and SB0
Bit
15
14
13
12
R0
—
—
—
—
11
10
9
8
7
6
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
Corresponds to EBR1
Setting
5
0
0
1
Corresponds to EBR2
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R0 is set as follows:
MOV.W
MOV.W
#H'0481,R0
R0,
@EBR1
The setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the program depends on the clock frequency. Set #a,
#b, #c, #d, and #e values according to tables 19.9 (1), (2), and 19.10.
405
Notes: 1. In this sample program, the stack pointer (SP) is set at address H'FF80. As the stack
area, on-chip RAM addresses H'FF7E and H'FF7F are used. Therefore, when executing
this sample program, addresses H'FF7E and H'FF7F should not be used. In addition,
the on-chip RAM should not be disabled.
2. In this sample program, the program written in a ROM area (including external space)
is transferred into the RAM area and executed in the RAM to which the program is
transferred. #RAMSTR in the program is the starting destination address in RAM to
which the program is transferred. #RAMSTR must be set to an even number.
3. When executing this sample program in the on-chip ROM area or external space,
#RAMSTR should be set to #START.
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
STACK:
.RQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
H'FF80
.ALIGN
MOV.W
2
#STACK,
SP
; Set stack pointer
; Set the bits in R0 following the description on the previous page. This program is a sample program to erase
; all blocks.
MOV.W
#H'0FFF, R0
; Select blocks to be erased (R0: EBR1/EBR2)
MOV.W
R0,
@EBR1
; Set EBR1/EBR2
START:
; #RAMSTR is starting destination address to which program is transferred in RAM.
; Set #RAMSTR to even number.
MOV.W
#RAMSTR, R2
; Starting transfer destination address (RAM)
MOV.W
#ERVADR, R3
;
ADD.W
R3,
R2
; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR → R2
MOV.W
#START,
R3
;
SUB.W
R3,
R2
; Address of data area used in RAM
PRETST:
EBR2PW:
PWADD1:
406
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BTST
BNE
BRA
BTST
BNE
INC
MOV.W
BRA
#H'00,
#H'0C,
ERASES
#H'08,
EBR2PW
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
PREWRT
PWADD1
R1L,
PREWRT
R1L
@R2+,
PRETST
R1L
R1L
R1L
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
R3
:
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Used to test R1L bit in R0
R1L = H'0C?
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to ERASES
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Test R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 1, branch to PREWRT
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 0, branch to PWADD1
Test R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
If R1L bit in EBR2 (R0H) is 1, branch to PREWRT
R1L + 1 → R1L
Dummy-increment R2
; Execute prewrite
PREWRT:
PREW:
PREWRS:
LOOPR1:
LOOPR2:
@R2+,
#H'00,
#H'a,
R6L
#H'00
R1H,
#H'A578,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOPR1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R3
R6L
R5
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BEQ
BRA
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPR2
@R3,
PWVFOK
#H'32,
ABEND1
PREWRS
R4H
ABEND1:
Programming error
PWVFOK:
ADDS
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
INC
BRA
PWADD2:
;
;
;
;
R1H
;
@R3
;
R4
;
@TCSR
;
R4
;
@FLMCR:8 ;
R4
;
R4
;
;
@FLMCR:8 ;
R4
;
@TCSR
;
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.W
INC
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
R1H
R6L
Prewrite starting address
Prewrite-verify fail counter
Prewrite-verify loop counter
Prewrite-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
Write H'00
Start watchdog timer
Set prewrite loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set prewrite-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read data = H'00?
If read data = H'00 branch to PWVFOK
Prewrite-verify executed 50 times?
If prewrite-verify executed 50 times, branch to ABEND1
Prewrite again
#1,
@R2,
R4,
PREW
R1L
PRETST
R3
R4
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
Address + 1 → R3
Top address of next block
Last address?
If not last address, prewrite next address
Used to test R1L+1 bit in R0
Branch to PRETST
#H'0000,
#H'd,
#1,
#H'e,
R4,
R5,
#1,
R6
R5
R6
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Erase-verify fail counter
Set erase loop count
Erase-verify fail counter + 1 → R6
#1,
R4,
LOOPE
#1,
#H'A500,
R4,
R4
R4
; Execute erase
ERASES:
ERASE:
LOOPE:
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADDS
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
Start watchdog timer
Set erase loop counter
Set E bit
;
;
; Wait loop
@FLMCR:8 ; Clear E bit
R4
;
@TCSR
; Stop watchdog timer
407
; Execute erase-verify
EVR:
; Starting transfer destination address (RAM)
;
; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR → R2
;
; Address of data area used in RAM
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADD.W
MOV.W
SUB.W
#RAMSTR,
#ERVADR,
R3,
#START,
R3,
R2
R3
R2
R3
R2
MOV.B
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
CMP.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BTST
BNE
BRA
BTST
BNE
INC
MOV.W
BRA
#H'00,
#H'b,
#3,
R4H
LOOPEV
#H'0C,
HANTEI
#H'08,
EBR2EV
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
ERSEVF
ADD01
R1L,
ERSEVF
R1L
@R2+,
EBRTST
R1L
; Used to test R1L bit in R0
R4H
; Set erase-verify loop counter
@FLMCR:8 ; Set EV bit
ERASE1:
BRA
ERASE
ERSEVF:
EVR2:
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BNE
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
@R2+,
#H'FF,
R1H,
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPEP
@R3+,
#H'FF,
BLKAD
@R2,
R4,
EVR2
R3
R1H
@R3
R4H
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BCLR
BRA
BCLR
INC
BRA
#H'08,
SBCLR
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
BLKAD
R1L,
R1L
EBRTST
R1L
BCLR
MOV.W
BEQ
#3,
R0,
EOWARI
@FLMCR:8 ; Clear EV bit
@EBR1
;
LOOPEV:
EBRTST:
EBR2EV:
ADD01:
LOOPEP:
SBCLR:
BLKAD:
HANTEI:
408
R1L
R1L
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Wait loop
R1L = H'0C?
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to HANTEI
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Test R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 1, branch to ERSEVF
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 0, branch to ADD01
Test R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
If R1L bit in EBR2 (R0H) is 1, branch to ERSEVF
R1L + 1 → R1L
Dummy-increment R2
; Branch to ERASE via Erase 1
R1H
R1H
R4
R3
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Top address of block to be erase-verified
Dummy write
Set erase-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read
Read data = H'FF?
If read data ≠ H'FF branch to BLKAD
Top address of next block
Last address of block?
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Clear R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
Clear R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
R1L + 1 →R1L
; If EBR1/EBR2 is all 0, erasing ended normally
BRER:
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
#H'0BB8,
R4,
ERASE1
ABEND2
R4
R6
;
; Erase-verify executed 3000 times?
; If erase-verify not executed 3000 times, erase again
; If erase-verify executed 3000 times, branch to ABEND2
;———< Block address table used in erase-verify> ———
ERVADR:
EOWARI:
ABEND2:
.ALIGN
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
2
H'0000
H'0080
H'0100
H'0180
H'0200
H'0400
H'0800
H'0C00
H'1000
H'2000
H'4000
H'6000
H'8000
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
SB0
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
SB5
SB6
SB7
LB0
LB1
LB2
LB3
FLASH END
Erase end
Erase error
Loop Counter Values in Programs and Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings: The
setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the programs depends on the clock frequency. Tables
19.9 (1) and (2) indicate sample loop counter settings for typical clock frequencies. However, #e is
set according to table 19.10.
As a software loop is used, calculated values including percent errors may not be the same as
actual values. Therefore, the values are set so that the total programming time and total erase time
do not exceed 1 ms and 30 s, respectively.
The maximum number of writes in the program, N, is set to 50.
Programming and erasing in accordance with the flowcharts is achieved by setting #a, #b, #c, and
#d in the programs as shown in tables 19.9 (1) and (2). #e should be set as shown in table 19.10.
Wait state insertion is inhibited in these programs. If wait states are to be used, the setting should
be made after the program ends. The setting value for the watchdog timer (WDT) overflow time is
calculated based on the number of instructions between starting and stopping of the WDT,
including the write time and erase time. Therefore, no other instructions should be added between
starting and stopping of the WDT in this program example.
409
Table 19.9 (1) #a, #b, #c, and #d Setting Values for Typical Clock Frequencies with
Program Running in the On-Chip Memory (RAM)
Clock Frequency
f = 16 MHz
f = 10 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 2 MHz
Variable
Time
Setting
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value
a(f)
Programming time
20 µs
H'0028
H'0019
H'0014
H'0005
b(f)
tvs1
4 µs
H'0B
H'07
H'06
H'02
c (f)
tvs2
2 µs
H'06
H'04
H'03
H'01
d(f)
Erase time
10 ms
H'2710
H'186A
H'1388
H'04E2
Table 19.9 (2) #a, #b, #c, and #d Setting Values for Typical Clock Frequencies with
Program Running in the External Device
Clock Frequency
f = 16 MHz
f = 10 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 2 MHz
Variable
Time
Setting
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value
a(f)
Programming time
20 µs
H'000D
H'0008
H'0006
H'0001
b(f)
tvs1
4 µs
H'04
H'03
H'02
H'01
c (f)
tvs2
2 µs
H'02
H'02
H'01
H'01
d(f)
Erase time
10 ms
H'0D05
H'0823
H'0682
H'01A0
410
Formula: When using a clock frequency not shown in tables 19.9 (1) and (2), follow the formula
below. The calculation is based on a clock frequency of 10 MHz.
After calculating a(f) and d(f) in the decimal system, omit the first decimal figures, and convert
them to the hexadecimal system, so that a(f) and d(f) are set to 20 µs or less and 10 ms or less,
respectively.
After calculating b(f) and c(f) in the decimal system, raise the first decimal figures, and convert
them to the hexadecimal system, so that b(f) and c(f) are set to 4 µs or more and 2 µs or more,
respectively.
a (f) to d (f) =
Clock frequency f [MHz]
10
× a (f = 10) to d (f = 10)
Examples for a program running in on-chip memory (RAM) at a clock frequency of 12 MHz:
a (f) =
12
10
×
25
=
≈
30
= H'001E
b (f) =
12
10
×
7
= 8.4 ≈
9
= H'09
c (f) =
12
10
×
4
= 4.8 ≈
5
= H'05
d (f) =
12
10
× 6250 = 7500 ≈ 7500 = H'1D4C
Table 19.10
30
Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings (#e Setting Value According to
Clock Frequency)
Variable
Clock Frequency [MHz]
e (f)
10 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 16 MHz
H'A57F
2 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
H'A57E
411
19.4.7
Prewrite Verify Mode
Prewrite-verify mode is a verify mode used when programming all bits to equalize their threshold
voltages before erasing them.
Program all flash memory to H'00 by writing H'00 using the prewrite algorithm shown in figure
19.10. H'00 should also be written when using RAM for flash memory emulation (when
prewriting a RAM area). (This also applies when using RAM to emulate flash memory erasing
with an emulator or other support tool.) After the necessary programming time has elapsed, exit
program mode (by clearing the P bit to 0) and select prewrite-verify mode (leave the P, E, PV, and
EV bits all cleared to 0). In prewrite-verify mode, a prewrite-verify voltage is applied to the
memory cells at the read address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the read
address will be read. After selecting prewrite-verify mode, wait 4 µs or more before reading.
Note: For a sample prewriting program, see the prewrite subroutine in the sample erasing
program.
19.4.8
Protect Modes
Flash memory can be protected from programming and erasing by software or hardware methods.
These two protection modes are described below.
Software Protection: Prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode even if the P or E bit
is set in the flash memory control register (FLMCR). Details are as follows.
Function
Protection
Description
Program
Erase
Verify*1
Block
protect
Individual blocks can be protected from erasing
and programming by the erase block registers
(EBR1 and EBR2). If H'F0 is set in EBR1 and
H'00 in EBR2, all blocks are protected from
erasing and programming.
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Emulation
protect *2
When the RAMS or RAM0 bit, but not both, is
set in the wait-state control register (WSCR),
all blocks are protected from programming and
erasing.
Disabled
Disabled*3 Enabled
Notes: *1 Three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify.
*2 Except in RAM areas overlapped onto flash memory.
*3 All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
412
Hardware Protection: Suspends or disables the programming and erasing of flash memory, and
resets the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2).
Details of hardware protection are as follows.
Function
Verify*1
Protection
Description
Program
Erase
Programing
voltage (V PP )
protect
When 12 V is not applied to the FVPP pin,
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized,
disabling programming and erasing. To obtain
this protection, VPP should not exceed VCC.*3
Disabled
Disabled*2 Disabled
Reset and
standby
protect
Disabled
When a reset occurs (including a watchdog
timer reset) or standby mode is entered,
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized,
disabling programming and erasing. Note that
RES input does not ensure a reset unless the
RES pin is held low for at least 20 ms at powerup (to enable the oscillator to settle), or at least
ten system clock cycles (10ø) during operation.
Disabled*2 Disabled
Interrupt
protect
To prevent damage to the flash memory, if
interrupt input occurs while flash memory is
being programmed or erased, programming or
erasing is aborted immediately. The settings in
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are retained. This
type of protection can be cleared only by a
reset.
Disabled
Disabled*2 Enabled
Notes: *1 Three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify.
*2 All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
*3 For details, see section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
19.4.9
Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
If an interrupt occurs*1 while flash memory is being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit of
FLMCR is set), the following operating states can occur.
• If an interrupt is generated during programming or erasing, programming or erasing is aborted
to protect the flash memory. Since memory cell values after a forced interrupt are
indeterminate, the system will not operate correctly after such an interrupt.
• Program runaway may result because the vector table could not be read correctly in interrupt
exception handling during programming or erasure*2.
413
For NMI interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased, these malfunction and
runaway problems can be prevented by using the RAM overlap function with the settings
described below.
1. Do not store the NMI interrupt-handling routine*3 in the flash memory area (H'0000 to
H'7FFF). Store it elsewhere (in RAM, for example).
2. Set the NMI interrupt vector in address H'FC06 in RAM (corresponding to H'0006 in flash
memory).
3. After the above settings, set both the RAMS and RAM0 bits to 1 in WSCR. *4
Due to the setting of step 3, if an interrupt signal is input while 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin, the
RAM overlap function is enabled and part of the RAM (H'FC00 to H'FC7F) is overlapped onto the
small-block area of flash memory (H'0000 to H'007F). As a result, when an interrupt is input, the
vector is read from RAM, not flash memory, so the interrupt is handled normally even if flash
memory is being programmed or erased. This can prevent malfunction and runaway.
Notes: *1 When the interrupt mask bit (I) of the condition control register (CCR) is set to 1, all
interrupts except NMI are masked. For details see (2) in section 2.2.2, Control
Registers.
*2 The vector table might not be read correctly for one of the following reasons:
• If flash memory is read while it is being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit
of FLMCR is set), the correct value cannot be read.
• If no value has been written for the NMI entry in the vector table yet, NMI
exception handling will not be executed correctly.
*3 This routine should be programmed so as to prevent microcontroller runaway.
*4 For details on WSCR settings, see section 19.2.4, Wait-State Control Register.
Notes on Interrupt Handling in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the settings described above
concerning NMI interrupts are carried out, and NMI interrupt handling (but not other interrupt
handling) is enabled while the boot program is executing. Note the following points concerning
the user program.
• If interrupt handling is required
Load the NMI vector (H'FB80) into address H'FC06 in RAM (the 38th byte of the
transferred user program should be H'FB80).
The interrupt handling routine used by the boot program is stored in addresses H'FB80 to
H'FB8F in RAM. Make sure that the user program does not overwrite this area.
• If interrupt handling is not required
Since the RAMS and RAM0 bits remain set to 1 in WSCR, make sure that the user program
disables the RAM overlap by clearing the RAMS and RAM0 bits both to 0.
414
19.5
Flash Memory Emulation by RAM
Erasing and programming flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters
and other data in real time. If necessary, real-time updates of flash memory can be emulated by
overlapping the small-block flash-memory area with part of the RAM (H'FC00 to H'FD7F). This
RAM reassignment is performed using bits 7 and 6 of the wait-state control register (WSCR).
After a flash memory area has been overlapped by RAM, the RAM area can be accessed from two
address areas: the overlapped flash memory area, and the original RAM area (H'FC00 to H'FD7F).
Table 19.11 indicates how to reassign RAM.
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)*2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
*1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAMS
RAM0
CKDBL
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: *1 WSCR is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
*2 For details of WSCR settings, see section 19.2.4, Wait-State Control Register (WSCR).
Table 19.11
RAM Area Selection
Bit 7: RAMS
Bit 6: RAMO
RAM Area
ROM Area
0
0
None
—
1
H'FC80 to H'FCFF
H'0080 to H'00FF
0
H'FC80 to H'FD7F
H'0080 to H'017F
1
H'FC00 to H'FC7F
H'0000 to H'007F
1
415
Example of Emulation of Real-Time Flash-Memory Update
H'0000
Small-block
area (SB1)
Overlapped RAM
H'007F
H'0080
H'00FF
H'0100
Flash memory
address space
H'7FFF
H'FB80
Overlapped
RAM
H'FC80
H'FCFF
On-chip
RAM area
H'FF7F
Procedure
1. Overlap part of RAM (H'FC80 to H'FCFF) onto the area requiring real-time update (SB1).
(Set WSCR bits 7 and 6 to 01.)
2. Perform real-time updates in the overlapping RAM.
3. After finalization of the update data, clear the RAM overlap (by clearing the RAMS and
RAM0 bits).
4. Read the data written in RAM addresses H'FC80 to H'FCFF out externally, then program
the flash memory area, using this data as part of the program data.
Figure 19.12 Example of RAM Overlap
416
Notes on Use of RAM Emulation Function
• Notes on Applying, Releasing, and Shutting Off the Programming Voltage (VPP)
Care is necessary to avoid errors in programming and erasing when applying, releasing, and
shutting off VPP, just as in the on-board programming modes. In particular, even if the
emulation function is being used, make sure that the watchdog timer is set when the P or E bit
of the flash memory control register (FLMCR) has been set, to prevent errors in programming
and erasing due to program runaway while VPP is applied.
For details see section 19.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions (5).
417
19.6
Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3434F)
19.6.1
Writer Mode Setting
The on-chip flash memory of the H8/3434F can be programmed and erased not only in the onboard programming modes but also in writer mode, using a PROM programmer.
19.6.2
Socket Adapter and Memory Map
Programs can be written and verified by attaching a special 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter to the
PROM programmer. Table 19.12 gives ordering information for the socket adapter. Figure 19.13
shows a memory map in writer mode. Figure 19.14 shows the socket adapter pin interconnections.
Table 19.12
Socket Adapter
Microcontroller
Package
Socket Adapter
HD64F3434F16
100-pin QFP
HS3434ESHF1H
HD64F3434TF16
100-pin TQFP
HS3434ESNF1H
MCU mode
H'0000
H8/3434F
Writer mode
H'0000
On-chip ROM area
H'7FFF
H'7FFF
1 output
H'1FFFF
Figure 19.13 Memory Map in Writer Mode
418
H8/3434F
Pin No.
Pin Name
Socket Adapter
FP-100B, TFP-100B
HN28F101 (32 Pins)
Pin Name
Pin No.
8
STBY/FVPP
VPP
1
7
NMI
FA 9
26
18
P95
FA 16
2
19
P94
FA 15
3
22
P93
WE
31
82
P30
FO 0
13
83
P31
FO 1
14
84
P32
FO 2
15
85
P33
FO 3
17
86
P34
FO 4
18
87
P35
FO 5
19
88
P36
FO 6
20
89
P37
FO 7
21
79
P10
FA 0
12
78
P11
FA 1
11
77
P12
FA 2
10
76
P13
FA 3
9
75
P14
FA 4
8
74
P15
FA 5
7
73
P16
FA 6
6
72
P17
FA 7
5
67
P20
FA 8
27
66
P21
OE
24
65
P22
FA 10
23
64
P23
FA 11
25
63
P24
FA 12
4
62
P25
FA 13
28
61
P26
FA 14
29
60
P27
CE
22
P91, P90, P63,
VCC
32
P64, P97
VSS
16
24, 25, 29,
32, 16
5, 6, 23,35
MD1, MD0, P92, P67
36, 37
AVref, AVCC
4, 9, 59
VCCB, VCC
46
AVSS
15, 70, 71, 92
VSS
1
RES
2, 3
Other pins
Power-on
reset circuit
XTAL, EXTAL
Legend:
VPP:
FO7 to FO0:
FA16 to FA0:
OE:
CE:
WE:
Programming power supply
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Write enable
Oscillator circuit
NC (OPEN)
Figure 19.14 Wiring of Socket Adapter
419
19.6.3
Operation in Writer Mode
The program/erase/verify specifications in writer mode are the same as for the standard
HN28F101 flash memory. However, since the H8/3434F does not support product name
recognition mode, the programmer cannot be automatically set with the device name. Table 19.13
indicates how to select the various operating modes.
Table 19.13
Operating Mode Selection in Writer Mode
Pins
FV PP
VCC
CE
OE
WE
D7 to D0
A16 to A0
Read
VCC
VCC
L
L
H
Data output
Address input
Output
disable
VCC
VCC
L
H
H
High impedance
Standby
VCC
VCC
H
X
X
High impedance
Read
VPP
VCC
L
L
H
Data output
Output
disable
VPP
VCC
L
H
H
High impedance
Standby
VPP
VCC
H
X
X
High impedance
Write
VPP
VCC
L
H
L
Data input
Mode
Read
Command
write
Note: Be sure to set the FV PP pin to VCC in these states. If it is set to 0 V, hardware standby mode
will be entered, even when in writer mode, resulting in incorrect operation.
Legend:
L:
Low level
H:
High level
VPP :
VPP level
VCC:
VCC level
X:
Don’t care
420
Table 19.14
Writer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command
Cycles
Mode
Address
Data
Mode
Address
Data
Memory read
1
Write
X
H'00
Read
RA
Dout
Erase setup/erase
2
Write
X
H'20
Write
X
H'20
Erase-verify
2
Write
EA
H'A0
Read
X
EVD
Auto-erase setup/
auto-erase
2
Write
X
H'30
Write
X
H'30
Program setup/
program
2
Write
X
H'40
Write
PA
PD
Program-verify
2
Write
X
H'C0
Read
X
PVD
Reset
2
Write
X
H'FF
Write
X
H'FF
PA:
EA:
RA:
PD:
PVD:
EVD:
Program address
Erase-verify address
Read address
Program data
Program-verify output data
Erase-verify output data
421
High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming: Unused areas of the H8/3434F flash memory
contain H'FF data (initial value). The H8/3434F flash memory uses a high-speed, high-reliability
programming procedure. This procedure provides enhanced programming speed without
subjecting the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Figure 19.15 shows the basic high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart. Tables 19.15
and 19.16 list the electrical characteristics during programming.
Start
Set VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V
Address = 0
n=0
n+1→n
Program setup command
Program command
Wait (25 µs)
Program-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
No go
Go
No
n = 20?
No
Last address?
Yes
Yes
Set VPP = VCC
End
Fail
Figure 19.15 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming
422
High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing: The H8/3434F flash memory uses a high-speed, highreliability erasing procedure. This procedure provides enhanced erasing speed without subjecting
the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability. Figure 19.16 shows the basic
high-speed, high-reliability erasing flowchart. Tables 19.15 and 19.16 list the electrical
characteristics during erasing.
Start
Program all bits to 0*
Address = 0
n=0
n+1→n
Erase setup/erase command
Wait (10 ms)
Erase-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
No go
Go
No
n = 3000?
No
Last address?
Yes
Yes
End
Fail
Note: * Follow the high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart in programming all bits. If some bits
are already programmed to 0, program only the bits that have not yet been programmed.
Figure 19.16 High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing
423
Table 19.15
DC Characteristics in Writer Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Input high
voltage
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
VIH
2.2
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Input low
voltage
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
VIL
–0.3
—
0.8
V
Output high
voltage
FO7 to FO0
VOH
2.4
—
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
Output low
voltage
FO7 to FO0
VOL
—
—
0.45
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
Input leakage
current
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
| ILI |
—
—
2
µA
Vin = 0 to V CC
VCC current
Read
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Program
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Erase
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Read
I PP
—
—
10
µA
VPP = 5.0 V
—
10
20
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
FV PP current
424
Program
I PP
—
20
40
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
Erase
I PP
—
20
40
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
Table 19.16
AC Characteristics in Writer Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Command write cycle
t CWC
120
—
—
ns
Address setup time
t AS
0
—
—
ns
Address hold time
t AH
60
—
—
ns
Figure 19.17
Figure 19.18*
Figure 19.19
Data setup time
t DS
50
—
—
ns
Data hold time
t DH
10
—
—
ns
CE setup time
t CES
0
—
—
ns
CE hold time
t CEH
0
—
—
ns
VPP setup time
t VPS
100
—
—
ns
VPP hold time
t VPH
100
—
—
ns
WE programming pulse width
t WEP
70
—
—
ns
WE programming pulse high time
t WEH
40
—
—
ns
OE setup time before command write
t OEWS
0
—
—
ns
OE setup time before verify
t OERS
6
—
—
µs
Verify access time
t VA
—
—
500
ns
OE setup time before status polling
t OEPS
120
—
—
ns
Status polling access time
t SPA
—
—
120
ns
Program wait time
t PPW
25
—
—
ns
Erase wait time
t ET
9
—
11
ms
Output disable time
t DF
0
—
40
ns
Total auto-erase time
t AET
0.5
—
30
s
Note: CE, OE, and WE should be high during transitions of VPP from 5 V to 12 V and from 12 V to
5 V.
* Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V
Input rise time and fall time ≤ 10 ns
Timing reference levels: 0.8 V and 2.0 V for input; 0.8 V and 2.0 V for output
425
Auto-erase setup
VCC
VPP
Auto-erase and status polling
5.0 V
12 V
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
CE
tCEH
OE
tCES
tOEWS
tWEP
WE
tDS
I/O7
tOEPS
tCWC
tCES
tCEH
tWEH
tDH
Command
input
tCES
tAET
tWEP
tDH
tDS
tSPA
Command
input
Status polling
I/O0 to I/O6
Command
input
Command
input
Figure 19.17 Auto-Erase Timing
426
tDF
Program setup
VCC
Program
Program-verify
5.0 V
12 V
VPP
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
Valid address
tAH
tAS
CE
tCEH
tCES
OE
tOEWS
tWEP
tCWC
tCEH
tWEH
tDH
WE
tDS
tCES
tCES
tPPW
tWEP
tDH
tDS
tCEH
tWEP
tOERS
tDH
tDS
tVA
tDF
I/O7
Command
input
Data
input
Command
input
Valid data
output
I/O0 to I/O6
Command
input
Data
input
Command
input
Valid data
output
Note: Program-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 before programming has
been completed.
Figure 19.18 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Timing
427
Erase setup
VCC
Erase
Erase-verify
5.0 V
12 V
VPP
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
Valid address
tAS
tAH
CE
OE
tOEWS
tCES
tWEP
WE
tCES
tCEH
tDS
I/O0 to I/O7
Command
input
tDH
tCEH
tCES
tCEH
tCWC
tET
tWEP
tOERS
tWEP
tVA
tWEH
tDS
tDH
Command
input
tDS
tDH
Command
input
tDF
Valid data
output
Note: Erase-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 before erasing has been completed.
Figure 19.19 Erase Timing
19.7
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Read these precautions before using writer mode, on-board programming mode, or flash memory
emulation by RAM.
(1) Program with the specified voltages and timing.
The rated programming voltage (VPP) of the flash memory is 12.0 V.
If the PROM programmer is set to Hitachi HN28F101 specifications, VPP will be 12.0 V. Applying
voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Take particular care to ensure
that the PROM programmer peak overshoot does not exceed the rated limit of 13 V.
(2) Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM
programmer. Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM
programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(3) Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can
cause contact faults and write errors.
428
(4) Set H'FF as the PROM programmer buffer data for addresses H'8000 to H'1FFFF. The
H8/3434F PROM size is 32 kbytes. Addresses H'8000 to H'1FFFF always read H'FF, so if H'FF is
not specified as programmer data, a verify error will occur.
(5) Notes on applying, releasing, and shutting off the programming voltage (VPP)
Note: In this section, the application, release, and shutting-off of VPP are defined as follows.
Application: A rise in voltage from VCC to 12 V ± 0.6 V.
Release:
A drop in voltage from 12 V ± 0.6 V to VCC.
Shut-off:
No applied voltage (floating).
• Apply the programming voltage (V PP ) after the rise of VCC, and release VPP before shutting off
VCC.
To prevent unintended programming or erasing of flash memory, in these power-on and
power-off timings, the application, release, and shutting-off of VPP must take place when the
microcontroller is in a stable operating condition as defined below.
Stable operating condition
The VCC voltage must be stabilized within the rated voltage range (VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V)*
If VPP is applied, released, or shut off while the microcontroller’s V CC voltage is not within
the rated voltage range (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V)*, since microcontroller operation is unstable,
the flash memory may be programmed or erased by mistake. This can occur even if VCC =
0 V. To prevent changes in the VCC power supply when V PP is applied, be sure that the
power supply is adequately decoupled with inserting bypass capacitors.
Note: * In the LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
Clock oscillation must be stabilized (the oscillation settling time must have elapsed), and
oscillation must not be stopped
When turning on VCC power, hold the RES pin low during the oscillation settling time
(tOSC1 = 20 ms), and do not apply VPP until after this time.
The microcontroller must be in the reset state, or in a state in which a reset has ended
normally (reset has been released) and flash memory is not being accessed
Apply or release VPP either in the reset state, or when the CPU is not accessing flash
memory (when a program in on-chip RAM or external memory is executing). Flash
memory cannot be read normally at the instant when VPP is applied or released. Do not read
flash memory while VPP is being applied or released.
For a reset during operation, apply or release VPP only after the RES pin has been held low
for at least ten system clock cycles (10ø).
429
The P and E bits must be cleared in the flash memory control register (FLMCR)
When applying or releasing V PP , make sure that the P or E bit is not set by mistake.
No program runaway
When V PP is applied, program execution must be supervised, e.g. by the watchdog timer.
These power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of
a power failure and in recovery from a power failure. If these requirements are not
satisfied, overprogramming or overerasing may occur due to program runaway etc., which
could cause memory cells to malfunction.
• The VPP flag is set and cleared by a threshold decision on the voltage applied to the FVPP pin.
The threshold level is between approximately VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V.
When this flag is set, it becomes possible to write to the flash memory control register
(FLMCR) and the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2), even though the VPP voltage may
not yet have reached the programming voltage range of 12.0 ± 0.6 V.
Do not actually program or erase the flash memory until VPP has reached the programming
voltage range.
The programming voltage range for programming and erasing flash memory is 12.0 ± 0.6 V
(11.4 V to 12.6 V). Programming and erasing cannot be performed correctly outside this range.
When not programming or erasing the flash memory, ensure that the VPP voltage does not
exceed the VCC voltage. This will prevent unintended programming and erasing.
In this chip, the same pin is used for STBY and FVPP. When this pin is driven low, a transition
is made to hardware standby mode. This happens not only in the normal operating modes
(modes 1, 2, and 3), but also when programming the flash memory with a PROM programmer.
When programming with a PROM programmer, therefore, use a programmer which sets this
pin to the VCC level when not programming (FVPP =12 V).
430
tOSC1
ø
2.7 to 5.5 V*
0 µs min
0 µs min
VCC
12 ± 0.6 V
VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V
VPP
0 µs min
0 to VCCV
VCCV
Boot mode
Timing at which boot
program branches
to RAM area
12 ± 0.6 V
VPP
0 to VCCV
VCCV
User program
mode
RES
Min 10ø
(when RES is low)
Periods during which the VPP flag is being set or
cleared and flash memory must not be accessed
Note: * In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
Figure 19.20 VPP Power-On and Power-Off Timing
(6) Do not apply 12 V to the FVPP pin during normal operation.
To prevent accidental programming or erasing due to microcontroller program runaway etc., apply
12 V to the VPP pin only when the flash memory is programmed or erased, or when flash memory
is emulated by RAM. Overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway can cause
memory cells to malfunction. Avoid system configurations in which 12 V is always applied to the
FVPP pin.
While 12 V is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway
program execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing.
431
(7) Design a current margin into the programming voltage (VPP) power supply. Ensure that
VPP will not depart from 12.0 ±0.6 V (11.4 V to 12.6 V) during programming or erasing.
Programming and erasing may become impossible outside this range.
(8) Ensure that peak overshoot does not exceed the rated value at the FV PP and MD1 pins.
Connect decoupling capacitors as close to the FVPP and MD 1 pins as possible.
Also connect decoupling capacitors to the MD1 pin in the same way when boot mode is used.
FVPP
12 V
1.0 µF
0.01 µF
H8/3434F
MD1
12 V
1.0 µF
0.01 µF
Note: Also connect decoupling capacitors to the MD1 pin in the same way when boot mode is used.
Figure 19.21 VPP Power Supply Circuit Design (Example)
(9) Use the recommended algorithms for programming and erasing flash memory. These
algorithms are designed to program and erase without subjecting the device to voltage stress and
without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Before setting the program (P) or erase (E) bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR), set
the watchdog timer to ensure that the P or E bit does not remain set for more than the specified
time.
(10) For details on interrupt handling while flash memory is being programmed or erased, see the
notes on NMI interrupt handling in section 19.4.9, Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing.
432
(11) Cautions on Accessing Flash Memory Control Registers
1. Flash memory control register access state in each operating mode
The H8/3434F has flash memory control registers located at addresses H'FF80 (FLMCR),
H'FF82 (EBR1), and H'FF83 (EBR2). These registers can only be accessed when 12 V is
applied to the flash memory program power supply pin, FVPP.
Table 19.17 shows the area accessed for the above addresses in each mode, when 12 V is and
is not applied to FVPP.
Table 19.17
Area Accessed in Each Mode with 12V Applied and Not Applied to FVPP
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
12 V applied
to FV PP
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
Flash memory control
register (initial value H'80)
Flash memory control
register (initial value
H'80)
12 V not applied
to FV PP
External address
space
External address space
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
2. When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip
ROM enabled)
When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2, it can be read or written to if 12
V is being applied to FV PP , but if not, external address space will be accessed. It is therefore
essential to confirm that 12 V is being applied to the FVPP pin before accessing these registers.
3. To check for 12 V application/non-application in mode 3 (single-chip mode)
When address H'FF80 is accessed in mode 3, if 12 V is being applied to FVPP , FLMCR is
read/written to, and its initial value after reset is H'80. When 12 V is not being applied to FV PP ,
FLMCR is a reserved area that cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. Since bit 7
(corresponding to the VPP bit) is set to 1 at this time regardless of whether 12 V is applied to
FVPP , application or release of 12 V to FVPP cannot be determined simply from the 0 or 1 status
of this bit. A byte data comparison is necessary to check whether 12V is being applied. The
relevant coding is shown below.
.
.
.
LABEL1:
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
.
.
.
@H'FF80, R1L
#H'FF,
R1L
LABEL1
Sample program for detection of 12 V application to FVPP (mode 3)
433
Table 19.18
DC Characteristics of Flash Memory
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*2,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, V PP = 12.0 ± 0.6 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
High-voltage
(12 V) threshold
level *1
FV PP , MD1
VH
VCC + 2
—
11.4
V
FV PP current
During read
I PP
—
—
10
µA
VPP = 2.7 to 5.5 V
—
10
20
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
During
programming
—
20
40
mA
During
erasure
—
20
40
mA
Notes: *1 The listed voltages describe the threshold level at which high-voltage application is
recognized. In boot mode and while flash memory is being programmed or erased, the
applied voltage should be 12.0 V ± 0.6 V.
*2 In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
434
Table 19.19
AC Characteristics of Flash Memory
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*5,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, V PP = 12.0 ± 0.6 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Programming time
Erase time
*1, *2
*1, *3
Number of writing/erasing count
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tP
—
50
1000
µs
tE
—
1
30
s
NWEC
—
—
100
Times
Verify setup time 1
*1
t VS1
4
—
—
µs
Verify setup time 2
*1
t VS2
2
—
—
µs
t FRS
50
—
—
µs
100
—
—
Flash memory read setup
time*4
Test Conditions
VCC ≥ 4.5 V
VCC < 4.5 V
Notes: *1 Set the times following the programming/erasing algorithm shown in section 19.
*2 The programming time is the time during which a byte is programmed or the P bit in the
flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set. It does not include the program-verify
time.
*3 The erase time is the time during which all 32-kbyte blocks are erased or the E bit in the
flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set . It does not include the prewrite time
before erasure or erase-verify time.
*4 After power-on when using an external colck source, after return from standby mode, or
after switching the programming voltage (VPP ) from 12 V to VCC, make sure that this read
setup time has elapsed before reading flash memory.
When VPP is released, the flash memory read setup time is defined as the period from
when the FV PP pin has reached VCC + 2 V until flash memory can be read.
*5 In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
435
436
Section 20 ROM
(60-kbyte Dual-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version)
20.1
Flash Memory Overview
20.1.1
Flash Memory Operating Principle
Table 20.1 illustrates the principle of operation of the H8/3437F’s on-chip flash memory.
Like EPROM, flash memory is programmed by applying a high gate-to-drain voltage that draws
hot electrons generated in the vicinity of the drain into a floating gate. The threshold voltage of a
programmed memory cell is therefore higher than that of an erased cell. Cells are erased by
grounding the gate and applying a high voltage to the source, causing the electrons stored in the
floating gate to tunnel out. After erasure, the threshold voltage drops. A memory cell is read like
an EPROM cell, by driving the gate to the high level and detecting the drain current, which
depends on the threshold voltage. Erasing must be done carefully, because if a memory cell is
overerased, its threshold voltage may become negative, causing the cell to operate incorrectly.
Section 20.4.6 shows an optimal erase control flowchart and sample program.
Table 20.1 Principle of Memory Cell Operation
Program
Memory
cell
Memory
array
Erase
Vg = VPP
Read
Vs = VPP
Vg
Open
Vd
Vd
Vd
0V
Open
Open
Vd
0V
VPP
0V
VCC
0V
VPP
0V
0V
0V
0V
437
20.1.2
Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space
As its on-chip ROM, the H8/3437F has 60 kbytes of flash memory. The flash memory is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two
states.
The H8/3437F’s flash memory is assigned to addresses H'0000 to H'EF7F in mode 2, and
addresses H'0000 to H'F77F in mode 3. The mode pins enable either on-chip flash memory or
external memory to be selected for this area. Table 20.2 summarizes the mode pin settings and
usage of the memory area.
Table 20.2 Mode Pin Settings and Flash Memory Area
Mode Pin Setting
Mode
MD1
MD0
Memory Area Usage
Mode 0
0
0
Illegal setting
Mode 1
0
1
External memory area
Mode 2
1
0
On-chip flash memory area (H'0000 to H'EF7F)
Mode 3
1
1
On-chip flash memory area (H'0000 to H'F77F)
20.1.3
Features
Features of the flash memory are listed below.
• Five flash memory operating modes
The flash memory has five operating modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase
mode, erase-verify mode, and prewrite-verify mode.
• Block erase designation
Blocks to be erased in the flash memory address space can be selected by bit settings. The
address space includes a large-block area (eight blocks with sizes from 2 kbytes to 12 kbytes)
and a small-block area (eight blocks with sizes from 128 bytes to 1 kbyte).
• Program and erase time
Programming one byte of flash memory typically takes 50 µs. Erasing all blocks (60 kbytes)
typically takes 1 s.
• Erase-program cycles
Flash memory contents can be erased and reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
These modes can be used to program, erase, and verify flash memory contents. There are two
modes: boot mode and user programming mode.
438
• Automatic bit-rate alignment
In boot-mode data transfer, the H8/3437F aligns its bit rate automatically to the host bit rate
(maximum 9600 bps).
• Flash memory emulation by RAM
Part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates
in real time.
• Writer mode
As an alternative to on-board programming, the flash memory can be programmed and erased
in writer mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer. Program, erase, verify, and other
specifications are the same as for HN28F101 standard flash memory.
20.1.4
Block Diagram
Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory.
8
Internal data bus (upper)
8
Internal data bus (lower)
FLMCR
Bus interface and control section
EBR1
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
On-chip flash memory
(60 kbytes)
H'F77C
H'F77D
H'F77E
H'F77F
EBR2
Upper byte
(even address)
Operating
mode
MD1
MD0
Lower byte
(odd address)
Legend:
FLMCR: Flash memory control register
EBR1: Erase block register 1
EBR2: Erase block register 2
Figure 20.1 Flash Memory Block Diagram
439
20.1.5
Input/Output Pins
Flash memory is controlled by the pins listed in table 20.3.
Table 20.3 Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
Input/Output
Function
Programming power
FV PP
Power supply
Apply 12.0 V
Mode 1
MD1
Input
H8/3437F operating mode setting
Mode 0
MD0
Input
H8/3437F operating mode setting
Transmit data
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Receive data
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
The transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode.
20.1.6
Register Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by the registers listed in table 20.4.
Table 20.4 Flash Memory Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Flash memory control register
Erase block register 1
Wait-state control register
*1
Initial Value
R/W
*2
R/W
*2
EBR2
R/W
*2
WSCR
R/W
FLMCR
EBR1
Erase block register 2
R/W
Address
H'00
*2
FF80
H'00
*2
FF82
H'00
*2
FF83
H'08
FFC2
Notes: *1 The wait-state control register controls the insertion of wait states by the wait-state
controller, frequency division of clock signals for the on-chip supporting modules by the
clock pulse generator, and emulation of flash-memory updates by RAM in on-board
programming mode.
*2 In modes 2 and 3 (on-chip flash memory enabled), the initial value is H'00 for FLMCR,
EBR1 and EBR2. In mode 1 (on-chip flash memory disabled), these registers cannot be
modified and always read H'FF.
Registers FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are only valid when writing to or erasing flash memory, and
can only be accessed while 12 V is being applied to the FV PP pin. When 12 V is not applied to the
FVPP pin, in mode 2 addresses H'FF80 to H'FF83 are external address space, and in mode 3 these
addresses cannot be modified and always read H'FF.
440
20.2
Flash Memory Register Descriptions
20.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR)
FLMCR is an 8-bit register that controls the flash memory operating modes. Transitions to
program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode are made by setting bits
in this register. FLMCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is
not applied to FVPP. When 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin, a reset or entry to a standby mode
initializes FLMCR to H'80.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VPP
—
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Initial value*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
—
—
—
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * The initial value is H'00 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In mode 1 (onchip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. For
information on accessing this register, refer to in section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming
and Erasing Precautions (11).
Bit 7—Programming Power (VPP): This status flag indicates that 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin.
Refer to section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions (5), for details on use.
Bit 7: VPP
Description
0
Cleared when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
1
Set when 12 V is applied to FVPP
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0.
Bit 3—Erase-Verify Mode (EV): *1 Selects transition to or exit from erase-verify mode.
Bit 3: EV
Description
0
Exit from erase-verify mode
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Program-Verify Mode (PV):*1 Selects transition to or exit from program-verify mode.
Bit 2: PV
Description
0
Exit from program-verify mode
1
Transition to program-verify mode
(Initial value)
441
Bit 1—Erase Mode (E):*1, *2 Selects transition to or exit from erase mode.
Bit 1: E
Description
0
Exit from erase mode
1
Transition to erase mode
(Initial value)
Bit 0—Program Mode (P):*1, *2 Selects transition to or exit from program mode.
Bit 0: P
Description
0
Exit from program mode
1
Transition to program mode
(Initial value)
Notes: *1 Do not set two or more of these bits simultaneously. Do not release or shut off the VCC
or VPP power supply when these bits are set.
*2 Set the P or E bit according to the instructions given in section 20.4, Programming and
Erasing Flash Memory.
Set the watchdog timer beforehand to make sure that these bits do not remain set for
longer than the specified times.
For notes on use, see section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
Precautions.
20.2.2
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 is an 8-bit register that designates large flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure.
EBR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
pin. When a bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed
and erased. Figure 20.2 and table 20.6 show details of a block map.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
*1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB7
LB6
LB5
LB4
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
*1, *2
*1
R/W
*1
R/W
*1
R/W
*1
R/W
*1
R/W
*1
R/W
R/W*1
Notes: *1 The initial value is H'00 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip ROM enabled). In mode 1 (on-chip
ROM disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF.
*2 This bit cannot be modified mode 2.
For information on accessing this register, refer to in section 20.7, Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing Precautions (11).
442
Bits 7 to 0—Large Block 7 to 0 (LB7 to LB0): These bits select large blocks (LB7 to LB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 7 to 0:
LB7 to LB0
Description
0
Block (LB7 to LB0) is not selected
1
Block (LB7 to LB0) is selected
20.2.3
(Initial value)
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that designates small flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure.
EBR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 V is not applied to FVPP
pin. When a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed
and erased. Figure 20.2 and table 20.6 show a block map.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SB7
SB6
SB5
SB4
SB3
SB2
SB1
SB0
Initial value*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * The initial value is H'00 in modes 2 and 3 (on-chip ROM enabled). In mode 1 (on-chip ROM
disabled), this register cannot be modified and always reads H'FF.
For information on accessing this register, refer to in section 20.7, Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing Precautions (11).
Bits 7 to 0—Small Block 7 to 0 (SB7 to SB0): These bits select small blocks (SB7 to SB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 7 to 0:
SB7 to SB0
Description
0
Block (SB7 to SB0) is not selected
1
Block (SB7 to SB0) is selected
(Initial value)
443
20.2.4
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)
WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables flash-memory updates to be emulated in
RAM. It also controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to the on-chip supporting
modules and insertion of wait states by the wait-state controller.
WSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAMS
RAM0
CKDBL
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 and 6—RAM Select and RAM0 (RAMS and RAM0): These bits are used to reassign an
area to RAM (see table 20.5). These bits are write-enabled and their initial value is 0. They are
initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby
mode.
If only one of bits 7 and 6 is set, part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto the small-block
flash memory area. In that case, access is to RAM, not flash memory, and all flash memory blocks
are write/erase-protected (emulation protect*1). In this state, the mode cannot be changed to
program or erase mode, even if the P bit or E bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) is
set (although verify mode can be selected). Therefore, clear both of bits 7 and 6 before
programming or erasing the flash memory area.
If both of bits 7 and 6 are set, part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto the small-block flash
memory area, but this overlapping begins only when an interrupt signal is input while 12 V is
being applied to the FVPP pin. Up until that point, flash memory is accessed. Use this setting for
interrupt handling while flash memory is being programmed or erased.*2
Table 20.5 RAM Area Reassignment*3
Bit 7: RAMS
Bit 6: RAM0
RAM Area
ROM Area
0
0
None
—
1
H'F880 to H'F8FF
H'0080 to H'00FF
0
H'F880 to H'F97F
H'0080 to H'017F
1
H'F800 to H'F87F
H'0000 to H'007F
1
444
Bit 5—Clock Double (CKDBL): Controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to the onchip supporting modules. For details, see section 6, Clock Pulse Generator.
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit is reserved, but it can be written and read. Its initial value is 0.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1, WMS0)
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1, WC0)
These bits control insertion of wait states by the wait-state controller. For details, see section 5,
Wait-State Controller.
Notes: *1 For details on emulation protect, see section 20.4.8, Protect Modes.
*2 For details on interrupt handling during programming and erasing of flash memory, see
section 20.4.9, Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing.
*3 RAM area that overlaps flash memory.
445
Small block
area
(4 kbytes)
Large block
area
(58 kbytes)
H'0000
H'0000
SB7 to SB0
4 kbytes
H'0FFF
H'1000
SB0 128 bytes
SB1 128 bytes
SB2 128 bytes
H'01FF SB3 128 bytes
H'0200
SB4
512 bytes
LB0
4 kbytes
H'1FFF
H'2000
H'03FF
H'0400
LB1
8 kbytes
H'3FFF
H'4000
SB5
1 kbyte
H'07FF
H'0800
LB2
8 kbytes
H'5FFF
H'6000
SB6
1 kbyte
H'0BFF
H'0C00
SB7
1 kbyte
LB3
8 kbytes
H'0FFF
H'7FFF
H'8000
LB4
8 kbytes
H'9FFF
H'A000
LB5
8 kbytes
H'BFFF
H'C000
LB6
12 kbytes
H'EF7F
H'EF80
H'F77F
LB7
2 kbytes
Figure 20.2 Erase Block Map
446
Table 20.6 Erase Blocks and Corresponding Bits
Register
Bit
Block
Address
Size
EBR1
0
LB0
H'1000 to H'1FFF
4 kbytes
1
LB1
H'2000 to H'3FFF
8 kbytes
2
LB2
H'4000 to H'5FFF
8 kbytes
3
LB3
H'6000 to H'7FFF
8 kbytes
4
LB4
H'8000 to H'9FFF
8 kbytes
5
LB5
H'A000 to H'BFFF
8 kbytes
6
LB6
H'C000 to H'EF7F
12 kbytes
7
LB7
H'EF80 to H'F77F
2 kbytes
0
SB0
H'0000 to H'007F
128 bytes
1
SB1
H'0080 to H'00FF
128 bytes
2
SB2
H'0100 to H'017F
128 bytes
3
SB3
H'0180 to H'01FF
128 bytes
4
SB4
H'0200 to H'03FF
512 bytes
5
SB5
H'0400 to H'07FF
1 kbyte
6
SB6
H'0800 to H'0BFF
1 kbyte
7
SB7
H'0C00 to H'0FFF
1 kbyte
EBR2
20.3
On-Board Programming Modes
When an on-board programming mode is selected, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed,
erased, and verified. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode, and user
programming mode. These modes are selected by inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD 0) and
FVPP pin. Table 20.7 indicates how to select the on-board programming modes. For details on
applying voltage V PP , refer to section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
(5).
447
Table 20.7 On-Board Programming Mode Selection
Mode Selections
Boot mode
FV PP
MD1
MD0
Notes
12 V*
12 V*
0
0: VIL
Mode 3
12 V*
1
1: VIH
Mode 2
1
0
Mode 3
1
1
Mode 2
User programming
mode
Note: * For details on the timing of 12 V application, see notes 6 to 8 in the Notes on Use of Boot
Mode at the end of this section.
In boot mode, the mode control register (MDCR) can be used to monitor the mode (mode 2
or 3) in the same way as in normal mode.
Example: Set the mode pins for mode 2 boot mode (MD 1 = 12 V, MD0 = 0 V).
If the mode select bits of MDCR are now read, they will indicate mode 2 (MDS1 = 1,
MDS0 = 0).
20.3.1
Boot Mode
To use boot mode, a user program for programming and erasing the flash memory must be
provided in advance on the host machine (which may be a personal computer). Serial
communication interface channel 1 is used in asynchronous mode. If the H8/3437F is placed in
boot mode, after it comes out of reset, a built-in boot program is activated. This program starts by
measuring the low period of data transmitted from the host and setting the bit rate register (BRR)
accordingly. The H8/3437F’s built-in serial communication interface (SCI) can then be used to
download the user program from the host machine. The user program is stored in on-chip RAM.
After the program has been stored, execution branches to address H'F7E0 in the on-chip RAM,
and the program stored on RAM is executed to program and erase the flash memory.
H8/3437F
Receive data to be programmed
HOST
Transmit verification data
RxD1
SCI
TxD1
Figure 20.3 Boot-Mode System Configuration
448
Boot-Mode Execution Procedure: Figure 20.4 shows the boot-mode execution procedure.
Start
1. Program the H8/3437F pins for boot mode, and start the
H8/3437F from a reset.
1
Program H8/3437F pins for boot mode,
and reset
2. Set the host’s data format to 8 bits + 1 stop bit, select the
desired bit rate (2400, 4800, or 9600 bps), and transmit
H'00 data continuously.
2
Host transmits H'00 data continuously
at desired bit rate
3
H8/3437F measures low period
of H'00 data transmitted from host
H8/3437F computes bit rate and
sets bit rate register
4
After completing bit-rate alignment, H8/3437F
sends one H'00 data byte to host to indicate
that alignment is completed
5
Host checks that this byte, indicating
completion of bit-rate alignment, is received
normally, then transmits one H'55 byte
6
After receiving H'55, H8/3437F sends part of
the boot program to RAM
H8/3437F branches to the RAM boot
area (H'F800 to H'FF2F), then checks the
data in the user area of flash memory
7
All data = H'FF?*4
Yes
No
Erase all flash
memory blocks*3, *4
After checking that all data in flash memory is H'FF,
H8/3437F transmits one H'AA data byte to host
8
H8/3437F receives two bytes indicating byte
length (N) of program to be downloaded
to on-chip RAM*1
H8/3437F transfers one user program
byte to RAM*2
9
H8/3437F calculates number of bytes left
to be transferred (N = N – 1)
All bytes transferred?
(N = 0?)
No
Yes
After transferring the user program to RAM,
H8/3437F transmits one H'AA data byte to host
10
H8/3437F branches to H'F7E0 in RAM area and
executes user program downloaded into RAM
3. The H8/3437F repeatedly measures the low period of the
RxD1 pin and calculates the host’s asynchronouscommunication bit rate.
4. When SCI bit-rate alignment is completed, the H8/3437F
transmits one H'00 data byte to indicate completion of
alignment.
5. The host should receive the byte transmitted from the
H8/3437F to indicate that bit-rate alignment is completed,
check that this byte is received normally, then transmit one
H'55 byte.
6. After receiving H'55, H8/3437F sends part of the boot
program to H'F780 to H'F7DF and H'F800 to H'FF2F of
RAM.
7. After branching to the boot program area (H'F800 to
H'FF2F) in RAM, the H8/3437F checks whether the flash
memory already contains any programmed data. If so, all
blocks are erased.
8. After the H8/3437F transmits one H'AA data byte, the host
transmits the byte length of the user program to be
transferred to the H8/3437F. The byte length must be sent
as two-byte data, upper byte first and lower byte second.
After that, the host proceeds to transmit the user program.
As verification, the H8/3437F echoes each byte of the
received byte-length data and user program back to the
host.
9. The H8/3437F stores the received user program in on-chip
RAM in a 1934-byte area from H'F7E0 to H'FF6D.
10. After transmitting one H'AA data byte, the H8/3437F
branches to address H'F7E0 in on-chip RAM and executes
the user program stored in the area from H'F7E0 to
H'FF6D.
Notes: *1 The user can use 1934 bytes of RAM. The number
of bytes transferred must not exceed 1934 bytes.
Be sure to transmit the byte length in two bytes,
upper byte first and lower byte second. For
example, if the byte length of the program to be
transferred is 256 bytes (H'0100), transmit H'01 as
the upper byte, followed by H'00 as the lower byte.
*2 The part of the user program that controls the flash
memory should be coded according to the flash
memory write/erase algorithms given later.
*3 If a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be
erased, the H8/3437F transmits one H'FF byte to
report an erase error, halts erasing, and halts
further operations.
*4 H'0000 to H'EF7F in mode 2 and H'0000 to H'F77F
in mode 3.
Figure 20.4 Boot Mode Flowchart
449
Automatic Alignment of SCI Bit Rate
Start
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop
bit
This low period (9 bits) is measured (H'00 data)
High for at
least 1 bit
Figure 20.5 Measurement of Low Period in Data Transmitted from Host
When started in boot mode, the H8/3437F measures the low period in asynchronous SCI data
transmitted from the host (figure 20.5). The data format is eight data bits, one stop bit, and no
parity bit. From the measured low period (9 bits), the H8/3437F computes the host’s bit rate. After
aligning its own bit rate, the H8/3437F sends the host 1 byte of H'00 data to indicate that bit-rate
alignment is completed. The host should check that this alignment-completed indication is
received normally and send one byte of H'55 back to the H8/3437F. If the alignment-completed
indication is not received normally, the H8/3437F should be reset, then restarted in boot mode to
measure the low period again. There may be some alignment error between the host’s and
H8/3437F’s bit rates, depending on the host’s bit rate and the H8/3437F’s system clock frequency.
To have the SCI operate normally, set the host’s bit rate to 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps *1. Table 20.8
lists typical host bit rates and indicates the clock-frequency ranges over which the H8/3437F can
align its bit rate automatically. Boot mode should be used within these frequency ranges*2.
Table 20.8 System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment by
H8/3437F
Host Bit Rate*1
System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment
by H8/3437F
9600 bps
8 MHz to 16 MHz
4800 bps
4 MHz to 16 MHz
2400 bps
2 MHz to 16 MHz
Notes: *1 Use a host bit rate setting of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps only. No other setting should be
used.
*2 Although the H8/3437F may also perform automatic bit-rate alignment with bit rate and
system clock combinations other than those shown in table 20.8, there will be a slight
difference between the bit rates of the host and the H8/3437F, and subsequent transfer
will not be performed normally. Therefore, only a combination of bit rate and system
clock frequency within one of the ranges shown in table 20.8 can be used for boot
mode execution.
450
RAM Area Allocation in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 96 bytes from H'F780 to H'F7DF and
the 18 bytes from H'FF6E to H'FF7F are reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure
20.6. The user program is transferred into the area from H'F7E0 to H'FF6D (1934 bytes). The boot
program area can be used after the transition to execution of the user program transferred into
RAM. If a stack area is needed, set it within the user program.
H'F780
Boot program
area*
(96 bytes)
H'F7E0
User program
transfer area
(1934 bytes)
H'FF6E
H'FF7F
Boot program
area* (18 bytes)
Note: * This area cannot be used until the H8/3437F starts to execute the user program
transferred to RAM (until it has branched to H’F7E0 in RAM). Note that even after the
branch to the user program, the boot program area (H'F780 to H'F7DF, H'FF6E to
H'FF7F) still contains the boot program.
Note also that 16 bytes (H'F780 to H'F78F) of this area cannot be used if an interrupt
handling routine is executed within the boot program. For details see section 20.4.9,
Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing.
Figure 20.6 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
451
Notes on Use of Boot Mode
1. When the H8/3437F comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at
the SCI’s RxD1 pin. The reset should end with RxD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about
100 states for the H8/3437F to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD1 input.
2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data*3 is not
H'FF), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user programming mode
is unavailable, e.g. the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the update program
activated in user programming mode is accidentally erased.
3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
4. The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on-board.
5. Before branching to the user program (at address H'F7E0 in the RAM area), the H8/3437F
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (by clearing the RE and TE bits
of the serial control register to 0 in channel 1), but the auto-aligned bit rate remains set in bit
rate register BRR. The transmit data output pin (TxD1) is in the high output state (in port 8, the
bits P8 4 DDR of the port 8 data direction register and P84 DR of the port 8 data register are set
to 1).
At this time, the values of general registers in the CPU are undetermined. Thus these registers
should be initialized immediately after branching to the user program. Especially in the case of
the stack pointer, which is used implicitly in subroutine calls, the stack area used by the user
program should be specified.
There are no other changes to the initialized values of other registers.
6. Boot mode can be entered by starting from a reset after 12 V is applied to the MD1 and FVPP
pins according to the mode setting conditions listed in table 20.7. Note the following points
when turning the VPP power on.
When reset is released (at the rise from low to high), the H8/3437F checks for 12-V input at
the MD1 and FVPP pins. If it detects that these pins are programmed for boot mode, it saves that
status internally. The threshold point of this voltage-level check is in the range from
approximately VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V, so boot mode will be entered even if the applied voltage is
insufficient for programming or erasure (11.4 V to 12.6 V). When the boot program is
executed, the VPP power supply must therefore be stabilized within the range of 11.4 V to
12.6 V before the branch to the RAM area occurs. See figure 20.20.
Make sure that the programming voltage VPP does not exceed 12.6 V during the transition to
boot mode (at the reset release timing) and does not go outside the range of 12 V ± 0.6 V while
in boot mode. Boot mode will not be executed correctly if these limits are exceeded. In
452
addition, make sure that VPP is not released or shut off while the boot program is executing or
the flash memory is being programmed or erased.*1
Boot mode can be released by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least ten system clock
cycles, then releasing the application of 12 V to the MD1 and FVPP pins and releasing the reset.
The settings of external pins must not change during operation in boot mode.
During boot mode, if input of 12 V to the MD1 pin stops but no reset input occurs at the RES
pin, the boot mode state is maintained within the chip and boot mode continues (but do not
stop applying 12 V to the FV PP pin during boot mode*1).
If a watchdog timer reset occurs during boot mode, this does not release the internal mode
state, but the internal boot program is restarted.
Therefore, to change from boot mode to another mode, the boot-mode state within the chip
must be released by a reset input at the RES pin before the mode transition can take place.
7. If the input level of the MD 1 pin is changed during a reset (e.g., from 0 V to 5 V then to 12 V
while the input to the RES pin is low), the resultant switch in the microcontroller’s operating
mode will affect the bus control output signals (AS, RD, and WR) and the status of ports that
can be used for address output*2.
Threfore, either set these pins so that they do not output signals during the reset, or make sure
that their output signals do not collide with other signals outside the microcontroller.
8. When applying 12 V to the MD1 and FVPP pins, make sure that peak overshoot does not exceed
the rated limit of 13 V.
Also, b sure to connect a decoupling capacitor to the FVPP and MD 1 pins.
Note: *1 For details on applying, releasing, and shutting off VPP , see note (5) in section 20.7,
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
*2 These ports output low-level address signals if the mode pins are set to mode 1 during
the reset. In all other modes, these ports are in the high-impedance state. The bus
control output signals are high if the mode pins are set for mode 1 or 2 during the reset.
In mode 3, they are at high impedance.
*3 H'0000 to H'EF7F in mode 2 and H'0000 to H'F77F in mode 3.
453
20.3.2
User Programming Mode
When set to user programming mode, the H8/3437F can erase and program its flash memory by
executing a user program. On-board updates of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by
providing on-board circuits for supplying VPP and data, and storing an update program in part of
the program area.
To select user programming mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip ROM (mode 2 or 3) and
apply 12 V to the FVPP pin, either during a reset, or after the reset has ended (been released) but
while flash memory is not being accessed. In user programming mode, the on-chip supporting
modules operate as they normally would in mode 2 or 3, except for the flash memory. However,
hardware standby mode cannot be set while 12 V is applied to the FV PP pin.
The flash memory cannot be read while it is being programmed or erased, so the update program
must either be stored in external memory, or transferred temporarily to the RAM area and
executed in RAM.
454
User Programming Mode Execution Procedure (Example)*: Figure 20.7 shows the execution
procedure for user programming mode when the on-board update routine is executed in RAM.
Note: * Do not apply 12 V to the FVPP pin during normal operation. To prevent flash memory
from being accidentally programmed or erased due to program runaway etc., apply 12 V
to FVPP only when programming or erasing flash memory. Overprogramming or
overerasing due to program runaway can cause memory cells to malfunction. While 12 V
is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program
execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing. For
details on applying, releasing, and shutting off VPP, see section 20.7, Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing Precautions (5).
1
Set MD1 and MD0 to 10 or 11
(apply VIH to VCC to MD1)
Start from reset
2
Branch to flash memory
on-board update program
3
Transfer on-board update routine
into RAM
4
Branch to flash memory on-board
update routine in RAM
5
FVPP = 12 V
(user programming mode)
6
Execute flash memory
on-board update routine in RAM
(update flash memory)
7
Release FVPP
(exit user programming mode)
8
Branch to application program
in flash memory*
Procedure
The flash memory on-board update
program is written in flash memory ahead
of time by the user.
1. Set MD1 and MD0 of the H8/3437F to
10 or 11, and start from a reset.
2. Branch to the flash memory on-board
update program in flash memory.
3. Transfer the on-board update routine
into RAM.
4. Branch to the on-board update routine
that was transferred into RAM.
5. Apply 12 V to the FVPP pin, to enter
user programming mode.
6. Execute the flash memory on-board
update routine in RAM, to perform an
on-board update of the flash memory.
7. Change the voltage at the FVPP pin
from 12 V to VCC, to exit user
programming mode.
8. After the on-board update of flash
memory ends, execution branches to
an application program in flash
memory.
Note: * After the update is finished, when input of 12 V to the FVPP pin is released, the flash
memory read setup time (tFRS) must elapse before any program in flash memory is
executed. This is the required setup time from when the FVPP pin reaches the (VCC +
2 V) level after 12 V is released until flash memory can be read.
Figure 20.7 User Programming Mode Operation (Example)
455
20.4
Programming and Erasing Flash Memory
The H8/3437F’s on-chip flash memory is programmed and erased by software, using the CPU.
The flash memory can operate in program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, erase-verify
mode, or prewrite-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the P, E, PV,
and EV bits in the flash memory control register (FLMCR).
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. The program that controls
the programming and erasing of the flash memory must be stored and executed in on-chip RAM or
in external memory. A description of each mode is given below, with recommended flowcharts
and sample programs for programming and erasing.
For details on programming and erasing, refer to section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and
Erasing Precautions.
20.4.1
Program Mode
To write data into the flash memory, follow the programming algorithm shown in figure 20.8. This
programming algorithm can write data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing
the reliability of programmed data.
To program data, first specify the area to be written in flash memory with erase block registers
EBR1 and EBR2, then write the data to the address to be programmed, as in writing to RAM. The
flash memory latches the address and data in an address latch and data latch. Next set the P bit in
FLMCR, selecting program mode. The programming duration is the time during which the P bit is
set. The total programming time does not exceed 1 ms. Programming for too long a time, due to
program runaway for example, can cause device damage. Before selecting program mode, set up
the watchdog timer so as to prevent overprogramming. For details of the programming method,
refer to section 20.4.3, Programming Flowchart and Sample Programs.
456
20.4.2
Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, after data has been programmed in program mode, the data is read to
check that it has been programmed correctly.
After the programming time has elapsed, exit programming mode (clear the P bit to 0) and select
program-verify mode (set the PV bit to 1). In program-verify mode, a program-verify voltage is
applied to the memory cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the
data at the latched address will be read. After selecting program-verify mode, wait 4 µs or more
before reading, then compare the programmed data with the verify data. If they agree, exit
program-verify mode and program the next address. If they do not agree, select program mode
again and repeat the same program and program-verify sequence. Do not repeat the program and
program-verify sequence more than 6 times* for the same bit.
Note: * Keep the total programming time under 1 ms for each bit.
457
20.4.3
Programming Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Programming One Byte
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be programmed to 1)
Write data to flash memory (flash
memory latches write
address and data)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select program mode
(P bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) µs*4
Clear P bit
End of programming
Disable watchdog timer
Select program-verify mode
(PV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tvs1) µs*5
Notes: *1 Write the data to be programmed
with a byte transfer instruction.
*2 Set the timer overflow interval as
follows.
CKS2 = 0, CKS1 = 0, CKS0 = 1
*3 Read the memory data to be
verified with a byte transfer
instruction.
*4 Programming time x, which is
determined by the initial time × 2n–1
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), increases in
proportion to n. Thus, set the initial
time to 15.8 µs or less to make total
programming time 1 ms or less.
*5 tVS1: 4 µs or more
N: 6 (set N so that total
programming time does not
exceed 1 ms)
No go
Verify*3 (read memory)
OK
Clear PV bit
Clear PV bit
End of verification
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of programmed block to 0)
End (1-byte data programmed)
n ≥ N?*5
No
n+1→n
Yes
Programming error
Figure 20.8 Programming Flowchart
458
Double programming time
(x × 2→x)
Sample Program for Programming One Byte: This program uses the following registers.
R0H:
R1H:
R1L:
R3:
Specifies blocks to be erased.
Stores data to be programmed.
Stores data to be read.
Stores address to be programmed. Valid address specifications are H'0000 to H'EF7F in
mode 2, and H'0000 to H'F77F in mode 3.
R4: Sets program and program-verify timing loop counters, and also stores register setting
value.
R5: Sets program timing loop counter.
R6L: Used for program-verify fail count.
Arbitrary data can be programmed at an arbitrary address by setting the address in R3 and the data
in R1H.
The setting of #a and #b values depends on the clock frequency. Set #a and #b values according to
tables 20.9 (1) and (2).
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
PRGM:
.ALIGN
MOV.B
MOV.B
2
#H'**,
R0H,
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.B
INC
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
BCLR
PRGMS:
LOOP1:
LOOP2:
R0H
@EBR*:8
;
; Set EBR *
#H'00,
#H'a,
R1H,
R6L
#H'A579,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOP1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R6L
R5
@R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Program-verify fail counter
Set program loop counter
Dummy write
Program-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
#H'b ,
#2,
R4H
LOOP2
@R3,
R1H,
PVOK
#2,
R4H
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set program-verify loop counter
Set PV bit
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
R1L
R1L
@FLMCR:8
Start watchdog timer
Set program loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
Wait loop
Read programmed address
Compare programmed data with read data
Program-verify decision
Clear PV bit
459
PVOK:
;
;
;
;
Program-verify executed 6 times?
If program-verify executed 6 times, branch to NGEND
Programming time × 2
Program again
CMP.B
BEQ
ADD.W
BRA
#H'06,
NGEND
R5,
PRGMS
R6L
BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
#2,
#H'00,
R6L,
@FLMCR:8 ; Clear PV bit
R6L
;
@EBR*:8 ; Clear EBR*
R5
One byte programmed
NGEND:
20.4.4
Programming error
Erase Mode
To erase the flash memory, follow the erasing algorithm shown in figure 20.9. This erasing
algorithm can erase data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing the reliability
of programmed data.
To erase flash memory, before starting to erase, first place all memory data in all blocks to be
erased in the programmed state (program all memory data to H'00). If all memory data is not in the
programmed state, follow the sequence described later to program the memory data to zero. Select
the flash memory areas to be erased with erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and EBR2). Next set
the E bit in FLMCR, selecting erase mode. The erase time is the time during which the E bit is set.
To prevent overerasing, use a software timer to divide the time for a single erase, and ensure that
the total time does not exceed 30 seconds. For the time for a single erase, refer to section 20.4.6,
Erase Flowchart and Sample Programs. Overerasing, due to program runaway for example, can
give memory cells a negative threshold voltage and cause them to operate incorrectly. Before
selecting erase mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to prevent overerasing.
20.4.5
Erase-Verify Mode
In erase-verify mode, after data has been erased, it is read to check that it has been erased
correctly. After the erase time has elapsed, exit erase mode (clear the E bit to 0) and select eraseverify mode (set the EV bit to 1). Before reading data in erase-verify mode, write H'FF dummy
data to the address to be read. This dummy write applies an erase-verify voltage to the memory
cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the latched address
will be read. After the dummy write, wait 2 µs or more before reading. When performing the
initial dummy write, wait 4 µs or more after selecting erase-verify mode. If the read data has been
successfully erased, perform an erase-verify (dummy write, wait 2 µs or more, then read) for the
next address. If the read data has not been erased, select erase mode again and repeat the same
erase and erase-verify sequence through the last address, until all memory data has been erased to
1. Do not repeat the erase and erase-verify sequence more than 602 times, however.
460
20.4.6
Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Erasing One Block
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be erased to 1)
Write 0 data in all addresses
to be erased (prewrite)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select erase mode
(E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) ms*5
Clear E bit
Erasing
ends
Disable watchdog timer
Set top address in block
as verify address
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tvs1) µs*6
Dummy write to verify address*3
(flash memory latches address)
Wait (tvs2) µs*6
Address + 1 → address
Verify*4 (read data=H'FF?)
OK
No
Notes: *1 Program all addresses to be erased
by following the prewrite flowchart.
*2 Set the watchdog timer overflow
interval to the value indicated in
table 20.10.
*3 For the erase-verify dummy write,
write H'FF with a byte transfer
instruction.
*4 Read the data to be verified with a
byte transfer instruction. When
erasing two or more blocks, clear
the bits of erased blocks in the
erase block registers, so that only
unerased blocks will be erased
again.
*5 The erase time x is successively
incremented by the initial set value
× 2n–1 (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). After fourth
erasing, the erase time is fixed. An
initial value of 6.25 ms or less
should be set, and the time for one
erasure should be 50 ms or less.
*6 tVS1: 4 µs or more
tVS2: 2 µs or more
N:
602 (Set N so that total erase
time does not exceed 30s.)
No go
Clear EV bit
Last address?
Yes
n ≥ N?*6
Clear EV bit
Yes
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of erased block to 0)
End of block erase
Erase-verify ends
No
n+1→n
n > 4?
Erase error
Yes
No
Double erase time
(x × 2→x)
Figure 20.9 Erasing Flowchart
461
Prewrite Flowchart
Start
Set erase block register
(set bit block to be programmed to 1)
Set start address*6
n=1
Write H'00 to flash memory
(flash memory latches write address
and write data)*1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select program mode
(P bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) µs*4
Clear P bit
Disable watchdog timer
Wait (tvs1) µs*5
Prewrite verify*3
(read data = H'00?)
Notes: *1 Use a byte transfer instruction.
*2 Set the timer overflow interval as
follows.
CKS2 = 0, CKS1 = 0, CKS0 = 1
*3 In prewrite-verify mode P, E, PV,
and EV are all cleared to 0 and
12 V is applied to FVPP. Read the
data with a byte transfer instruction.
*4 Programming time x, which is
determined by the inital time × 2n–1
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), increases in
proportion to n. Thus, set the initial
time to 15.8 µs or less to make total
End of
programming time 1 ms or less.
programming
*5 tVS1: 4 µs or more
N:
6 (set N so that total
programming time does not
exceed 1 ms)
*6 Start and last addresses shall be top
and last addresses of the block to be
erased.
No go
n ≥ N?*5
No
n+1→n
OK
Yes
Double programming time
(x × 2→x)
Programming error
Last address?*6
No
Yes
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of programmed block to 0)
End of prewrite
Figure 20.10 Prewrite Flowchart
462
Address + 1→Address
Sample Block-Erase Program: This program uses the following registers.
R0:
R1H:
R2:
R3:
R4:
Specifies block to be erased, and also stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
Stores data to be read, and also used for dummy write.
Stores last address of block to be erased.
Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
Sets timing loop counters for prewrite, prewrite-verify, erase, and erase-verify, and also
stores register setting value.
R5: Sets prewrite and erase timing loop counters.
R6L: Used for prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail count.
The setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the program depends on the clock frequency. Set #a,
#b, #c, #d, and #e values according tables 20.9 (1) and (2), and 20.10. Erase block registers (EBR1
and EBR2) should be set according to sections 20.2.2 and 20.2.3. #BLKSTR and #BLKEND are
the top and last addresses of the block to be erased. Set #BLKSTR and #BLKEND according to
figure 20.2.
463
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
.ALIGN
MOV.B
MOV.B
2
#H'**,
ROH,
ROH
@EBR*:8
;
; Set EBR*
; #BLKSTR is top address of block to be erased.
; #BLKEND is last address of block to be erased.
#BLKSTR,
#BLKEND,
#1,
R0
R2
R2
; Top address of block to be erased
; Last address of block to be erased
; Last address of block to be erased + 1 → R2
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.W
INC
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
R0,
#H'00,
#H'a,
R6L
#H'00
R1H,
#H'A579,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOPR1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R3
R6L
R5
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Top address of block to be erased
Prewrite-verify fail counter
Set prewrite loop counter
Prewrite-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BEQ
ADD.W
BRA
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPR2
@R3,
PWVFOK
#H'06,
ABEND1
R5
PREWRS
R4H
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set prewrite-verify loop counter
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADDS
; Execute prewrite
PREWRT:
PREWRS:
LOOPR1:
LOOPR2:
ABEND1:
Programming error
PWVFOK:
ADDS
CMP.W
BNE
;Execute erase
ERASES: MOV.W
MOV.W
464
R1H
@R3
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
R4
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
R1H
R6L
R5
Write H'00
Start watchdog timer
Set prewrite loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
Wait loop
Read data = H'00?
If read data = H'00 branch to PWVFOK
Prewrite-verify executed 6 times?
If prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch to ABEND1
Programming time × 2
Prewrite again
#1,
R2,
PREWRT
R3
R3
; Address + 1 → R3
; Last address?
; If not last address, prewrite next address
#H'0000,
#H'd,
R6
R5
; Erase-verify fail counter
; Set erase loop count
ERASE:
LOOPE:
Erase-verify fail counter + 1 → R6
#1,
#H'e,
R4,
R5,
#1,
R6
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
#1,
R4,
LOOPE
#1,
#H'A500,
R4,
R4
R4
;
;
; Wait loop
; Clear E bit
;
; Stop watchdog timer
MOV.W
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BNE
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
R0,
#H'b,
#3,
R4H
LOOPEV
#H'FF,
R1H,
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPDW
@R3+,
#H'FF,
RERASE
R2,
EVR2
OKEND
R3
R4H
@FLMCR:8
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
BCLR
SUBS
#3,
#1,
@FLMCR:8
R3
; Clear EV bit
; Erase-verify address – 1 → R3
MOV.W
CMP.W
BPL
ADD.W
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
#H'0004,
R4
BRER
R5,
#H'025A,
R4,
ERASE
ABEND2
R4
R6
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
#3,
#H'00,
R6L,
@FLMCR:8
R6L
@EBR*:8
ADDS
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
@FLMCR:8
R4
@TCSR
Start watchdog timer
Set erase loop counter
Set E bit
; Execute erase-verify
LOOPEV:
EVR2:
LOOPDW:
RERASE:
BRER:
OKEND:
R1H
@R3
R4H
R1H
R1H
R5
R4
R6
Top address of block to be erased
Set erase-verify loop counter
Set EV bit
Wait loop
Dummy write
Set erase-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read
Read data = H'FF?
If read data ≠ H'FF, branch to RERASE
Last address of block?
Erase-verify fail count executed 4 times?
If R6≥4, branch to BRER (branch until R6 is 4 to 602)
If R6<4, Erase time × 2 (execute when R6 is 1, 2, or 3)
Erase-verify executed 602 times?
If erase-verify not executed 602 times, erase again
If erase-verify executed 602 times, branch to ABEND2
; Clear EV bit
;
; Clear EBR*
One block erased
ABEND2:
Erase error
465
Flowchart for Erasing Multiple Blocks
Start
Set erase block registers
(set bits of block to be erased to 1)
Write 0 data to all addresses to be
erased (prewrite)*1
n=1
Enable watchdog timer*2
Select erase mode (E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x)ms*5
Erasing
ends
Clear E bit
Disable watchdog timer
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Notes: *1 Program all addresses to be erased
by following the prewrite flowchart.
*2 Set the watchdog timer overflow
interval to the value indicated in table
20.10.
*3 For the erase-verify dummy write,
write H'FF with a byte transfer
instruction.
*4 Read the data to be verified with a
byte transfer instruction. When
erasing two or more blocks, clear the
bits of erased blocks in the erase
block register, so that only unerased
blocks will be erased again.
*5 The erase time x is successively
incremented by the initial set value ×
2n–1 (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). After fourth
erasing, the erase time is fixed. An
initial value of 6.25 ms or less should
be set, and the time for one erasure
should be 50 ms or less.
*6 tVS1: 4 µs or more
tVS2: 2 µs or more
N:
602 (Set N so that total
erase time does not exceed
30s.)
Wait (tvs1) µs*6
Erase-verify
next block
Set top address of block as
verify address
Dummy write to verify address *3
(flash memory latches address)
Wait (tvs2) µs*6
Verify*4
(read data = H'FF?)
Address + 1 → Address
Erase-verify next block
No go
OK
No
Last address
in block?
Yes
All erased blocks
verified?
No
Yes
Clear EBR bit of erased block
No
All erased blocks
verified?
Yes
n ≥ 4?
Clear EV bit
All blocks erased?
(EBR1 = EBR2 = 0?)
Yes
End of erase
No
Double Erase time
(x × 2→x)
No
n ≥ N?*6
Yes
Erase error
Figure 20.11 Multiple-Block Erase Flowchart
466
Yes
No
n+1→n
Sample Multiple-Block Erase Program: This program uses the following registers.
R0:
Specifies blocks to be erased (set as explained below), and also stores address used in
prewrite and erase-verify.
R1H: Used to test bits 8 to 15 of R0 stores register read data, and also used for dummy write.
R1L: Used to test bits 0 to 15 of R0.
R2: Specifies address where address used in prewrite and erase-verify is stored.
R3: Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify.
R4: Stores last address of block to be erased.
R5: Sets prewrite and erase timing loop counters.
R6L: Used for prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail count.
Arbitrary blocks can be erased by setting bits in R0. Write R0 with a word transfer instruction.
A bit map of R0 and a sample setting for erasing specific blocks are shown next.
Bit
R0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB7 LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
Corresponds to EBR1
Corresponds to EBR2
Example: to erase blocks LB2, SB7, and SB0
Bit
R0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
LB7 LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
Corresponds to EBR1
Setting
5
0
0
0
0
0
1
Corresponds to EBR2
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R0 is set as follows:
MOV.W
MOV.W
#H'0481,R0
R0,
@EBR1
The setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the program depends on the clock frequency. Set #a,
#b, #c, #d, and #e values according to tables 20.9 (1), (2), and 20.10.
467
Notes: 1. In this sample program, the stack pointer (SP) is set at address FF80. As the stack area,
on-chip RAM addresses FF7E and FF7F are used. Therefore, when executing this
sample program, addresses FF7E and FF7F should not be used. In addition, the on-chip
RAM should not be disabled.
2. In this sample program, the program written in a ROM area (including external space)
is transferred into the RAM area and executed in the RAM to which the program is
transferred. #RAMSTR in the program is the starting destination address in RAM to
which the program is transferred. #RAMSTR must be set to an even number.
3. When executing this sample program in the on-chip ROM area or external space,
#RAMSTR should be set to #START.
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
TCSR:
STACK:
.RQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
.EQU
H'FF80
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FFA8
H'FF80
.ALIGN
MOV.W
2
#STACK,
SP
; Set stack pointer
; Set the bits in R0 following the description on the previous page. This program is a sample program to erase
; all blocks.
MOV.W
#H'FFFF, R0
; Select blocks to be erased (R0: EBR1/EBR2)
MOV.W
R0,
@EBR1
; Set EBR1/EBR2
START:
; #RAMSTR is starting destination address to which program is transferred in RAM.
; Set #RAMSTR to even number.
MOV.W
#RAMSTR, R2
; Starting transfer destination address (RAM)
MOV.W
#ERVADR, R3
;
ADD.W
R3,
R2
; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR → R2
MOV.W
#START,
R3
;
SUB.W
R3,
R2
; Address of data area used in RAM
PRETST:
EBR2PW:
PWADD1:
468
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BTST
BNE
BRA
BTST
BNE
INC
MOV.W
BRA
#H'00,
#H'10,
ERASES
#H'08,
EBR2PW
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
PREWRT
PWADD1
R1L,
PREWRT
R1L
@R2+,
PRETST
R1L
R1L
R1L
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
R3
:
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Used to test R1L bit in R0
R1L = H'10?
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to ERASES
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Test R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 1, branch to PREWRT
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 0, branch to PWADD1
Test R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
If R1L bit in EBR2 (R0H) is 1, branch to PREWRT
R1L + 1 → R1L
Dummy-increment R2
; Execute prewrite
PREWRT:
PREW:
PREWRS:
LOOPR1:
LOOPR2:
@R2+,
#H'00,
#H'a,
R6L
#H'00
R1H,
#H'A579,
R4,
R5,
#0,
#1,
R4,
LOOPR1
#0,
#H'A500,
R4,
R3
R6L
R5
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BEQ
ADD.W
BRA
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPR2
@R3,
PWVFOK
#H'06,
ABEND1
R5,
PREWRS
R4H
ABEND1:
Programming error
PWVFOK:
ADDS
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
INC
BRA
PWADD2:
;
;
;
;
R1H
;
@R3
;
R4
;
@TCSR
;
R4
;
@FLMCR:8 ;
R4
;
R4
;
;
@FLMCR:8 ;
R4
;
@TCSR
;
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.W
INC
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
R1H
R6L
R5
Prewrite starting address
Prewrite-verify fail counter
Prewrite-verify loop counter
Prewrite-verify fail counter + 1 → R6L
Write H'00
Start watchdog timer
Set prewrite loop counter
Set P bit
Wait loop
Clear P bit
Stop watchdog timer
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Set prewrite-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read data = H'00?
If read data = H'00 branch to PWVFOK
Prewrite-verify executed 6 times?
If prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch to ABEND1
Programming time × 2
Prewrite again
#1,
@R2,
R4,
PREW
R1L
PRETST
R3
R4
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
Address + 1 → R3
Top address of next block
Last address?
If not last address, prewrite next address
Used to test R1L+1 bit in R0
Branch to PRETST
#H'0000,
#H'd,
#1,
#H'e,
R4,
R5,
#1,
R6
R5
R6
R4
@TCSR
R4
@FLMCR:8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Erase-verify fail counter
Set erase loop count
Erase-verify fail counter + 1 → R6
#1,
R4,
LOOPE
#1,
#H'A500,
R4,
R4
R4
; Execute erase
ERASES:
ERASE:
LOOPE:
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADDS
MOV.W
MOV.W
MOV.W
BSET
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
SUBS
MOV.W
BNE
BCLR
MOV.W
MOV.W
Start watchdog timer
Set erase loop counter
Set E bit
;
;
; Wait loop
@FLMCR:8 ; Clear E bit
R4
;
@TCSR
; Stop watchdog timer
469
; Execute erase-verify
EVR:
; Starting transfer destination address (RAM)
;
; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR → R2
;
; Address of data area used in RAM
MOV.W
MOV.W
ADD.W
MOV.W
SUB.W
#RAMSTR,
#ERVADR,
R3,
#START,
R3,
R2
R3
R2
R3
R2
MOV.B
MOV.B
BSET
DEC
BNE
CMP.B
BEQ
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BTST
BNE
BRA
BTST
BNE
INC
MOV.W
BRA
#H'00,
#H'b,
#3,
R4H
LOOPEV
#H'10,
HANTEI
#H'08,
EBR2EV
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
ERSEVF
ADD01
R1L,
ERSEVF
R1L
@R2+,
EBRTST
R1L
; Used to test R1L bit in R0
R4H
; Set erase-verify loop counter
@FLMCR:8 ; Set EV bit
ERASE1:
BRA
ERASE
ERSEVF:
EVR2:
MOV.W
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
DEC
BNE
MOV.B
CMP.B
BNE
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
@R2+,
#H'FF,
R1H,
#H'c,
R4H
LOOPEP
@R3+,
#H'FF,
BLKAD
@R2,
R4,
EVR2
R3
R1H
@R3
R4H
CMP.B
BMI
MOV.B
SUBX
BCLR
BRA
BCLR
INC
BRA
#H'08,
SBCLR
R1L,
#H'08,
R1H,
BLKAD
R1L,
R1L
EBRTST
R1L
LOOPEV:
EBRTST:
EBR2EV:
ADD01:
LOOPEP:
SBCLR:
BLKAD:
470
R1L
R1L
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Wait loop
R1L = H'10?
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to HANTEI
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Test R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 1, branch to ERSEVF
If R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H) is 0, branch to ADD01
Test R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
If R1L bit in EBR2 (R0H) is 1, branch to ERSEVF
R1L + 1 → R1L
Dummy-increment R2
; Branch to ERASE via Erase 1
R1H
R1H
R4
R3
R1H
R1H
R0H
R0L
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Top address of block to be erase-verified
Dummy write
Set erase-verify loop counter
Wait loop
Read
Read data = H'FF?
If read data ≠ H'FF branch to BLKAD
Top address of next block
Last address of block?
Test EBR1 if R1L ≥ 8, or EBR2 if R1L < 8
R1L – 8 → R1H
Clear R1H bit in EBR1 (R0H)
Clear R1L bit in EBR2 (R0L)
R1L + 1 → R1L
HANTEI:
BRER:
BCLR
MOV.W
BEQ
#3,
R0,
EOWARI
@FLMCR:8 ; Clear EV bit
@EBR1
;
MOV.W
CMP.W
BPL
ADD.W
MOV.W
CMP.W
BNE
BRA
#H'0004,
R4,
BRER
R5,
#H'025A,
R4,
ERASE1
ABEND2
R4
R6
; If EBR1/EBR2 is all 0, erasing ended normally
R5
R4
R6
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Erase-verify fail count executed 4 times?
If R6≥4, branch to BRER (branch until R6 is 4 to 602)
If R6<4, Erase time × 2 (execute when R6 is 1, 2, or 3)
Erase-verify executed 602 times?
If erase-verify not executed 602 times, erase again
If erase-verify executed 602 times, branch to ABEND2
;———< Block address table used in erase-verify> ———
ERVADR:
EOWARI:
ABEND2:
.ALIGN
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
.DATA.W
2
H'0000
H'0080
H'0100
H'0180
H'0200
H'0400
H'0800
H'0C00
H'1000
H'2000
H'4000
H'6000
H'8000
H'A000
H'C000
H'EF80
H'F780
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
SB0
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
SB5
SB6
SB7
LB0
LB1
LB2
LB3
LB4
LB5
LB6
LB7
FLASH END
Erase end
Erase error
Loop Counter Values in Programs and Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings: The
setting of #a, #b, #c, #d, and #e values in the programs depends on the clock frequency. Tables
20.9 (1) and (2) indicate sample loop counter settings for typical clock frequencies. However, #e is
set according to table 20.10.
As a software loop is used, calculated values including percent errors may not be the same as
actual values. Therefore, the values are set so that the total programming time and total erase time
do not exceed 1 ms and 30 s, respectively.
The maximum number of writes in the program, N, is set to 6.
471
Programming and erasing in accordance with the flowcharts is achieved by setting #a, #b, #c, and
#d in the programs as shown in tables 20.9 (1) and (2). #e should be set as shown in table 20.10.
Wait state insertion is inhibited in these programs. If wait states are to be used, the setting should
be made after the program ends. The setting value for the watchdog timer (WDT) overflow time is
calculated based on the number of instructions between starting and stopping of the WDT,
including the write time and erase time. Therefore, no other instructions should be added between
starting and stopping of the WDT in this program example.
Table 20.9 (1) #a, #b, #c, and #d Setting Values for Typical Clock Frequencies with
Program Running in the On-Chip Memory (RAM)
Clock Frequency
f = 16 MHz
Variable
Time
Setting
f = 10 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 2 MHz
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value
a(f)
Programming time 15.8 µs
(initial setting value)
H'001F
H'0013
H'000F
H'0003
b(f)
tvs1
4 µs
H'0B
H'07
H'06
H'02
c (f)
tvs2
2 µs
H'06
H'04
H'03
H'01
d(f)
Erase time
6.25 ms
(initial setting value)
H'1869
H'0F42
H'0C34
H'030D
Table 20.9 (2) #a, #b, #c, and #d Setting Values for Typical Clock Frequencies with
Program Running in the External Device
Clock Frequency
f = 16 MHz
Variable
Time
Setting
f = 10 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 2 MHz
Counter
Counter
Counter
Counter
Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value Setting Value
a(f)
Programming time 15.8 µs
(initial setting value)
H'000A
H'0006
H'0005
H'0001
b(f)
tvs1
4 µs
H'04
H'03
H'02
H'01
c (f)
tvs2
2 µs
H'02
H'02
H'01
H'01
d(f)
Erase time
6.25 ms
(initial setting value)
H'0823
H'0516
H'0411
H'0104
472
Formula: When using a clock frequency not shown in tables 20.9 (1) and (2), follow the formula
below. The calculation is based on a clock frequency of 10 MHz.
After calculating a(f) and d(f) in the decimal system, omit the first decimal figures, and convert
them to the hexadecimal system, so that a(f) and d(f) are set to 15.8 µs or less and 6.25 ms or less,
respectively.
After calculating b(f) and c(f) in the decimal system, raise the first decimal figures, and convert
them to the hexadecimal system, so that b(f) and c(f) are set to 4 µs or more and 2 µs or more,
respectively.
a (f) to d (f) =
Clock frequency f [MHz]
10
× a (f = 10) to d (f = 10)
Examples for a program running in on-chip memory (RAM) at a clock frequency of 12 MHz:
a (f) =
12
10
×
19
= 22.8
≈
22 = H'0016
b (f) =
12
10
×
7
=
8.4
≈
9
= H'09
c (f) =
12
10
×
4
=
4.8
≈
5
= H'05
d (f) =
12
10
× 3906 = 4687.2 ≈ 4687 = H'124F
Table 20.10
Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings (#e Setting Value According to
Clock Frequency)
Variable
Clock Frequency [MHz]
e (f)
10 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 16 MHz
H'A57F
2 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
H'A57E
473
20.4.7
Prewrite Verify Mode
Prewrite-verify mode is a verify mode used when programming all bits to equalize their threshold
voltages before erasing them.
To program all bits, follow the prewrite algorithm shown in figure 20.10. The procedure is to
program all flash memory data to H'00 by using H'00 write data. H'00 should also be written when
using RAM for flash memory emulation (when prewriting a RAM area). (This also applies when
using RAM to emulate flash memory erasing with an emulator or other support tool.) After the
necessary programming time has elapsed, exit program mode (by clearing the P bit to 0) and select
prewrite-verify mode (leave the P, E, PV, and EV bits all cleared to 0). In prewrite-verify mode, a
prewrite-verify voltage is applied to the memory cells at the read address. If the flash memory is
read in this state, the data at the read address will be read. After selecting prewrite-verify mode,
wait 4 µs or more before reading.
Note: For a sample prewriting program, see the prewrite subroutine in the sample erasing
program.
20.4.8
Protect Modes
Flash memory can be protected from programming and erasing by software or hardware methods.
These two protection modes are described below.
Software Protection: Prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode even if the P or E bit
is set in the flash memory control register (FLMCR). Details are as follows.
Function
Protection
Description
Program
Block
protect
Individual blocks can be protected from erasing Disabled
and programming by the erase block registers
(EBR1 and EBR2). If H'00 is set in EBR1 and
EBR2, all blocks are protected from erasing and
programming.
Emulation
protect *2
When the RAMS or RAM0 bit, but not both,
is set in the wait-state control register (WSCR),
all blocks are protected from programming and
erasing
Disabled
Erase
Verify*1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled*3 Enabled
Notes: *1 Three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify.
*2 Except in RAM areas overlapped onto flash memory.
*3 All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
474
Hardware Protection: Suspends or disables the programming and erasing of flash memory, and
resets the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2).
Details of hardware protection are as follows.
Function
Verify*1
Protection
Description
Program
Erase
Programing
voltage (V PP )
protect
When 12 V is not applied to the FVPP pin,
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized,
disabling programming and erasing. To obtain
this protection, VPP should not exceed VCC.*3
Disabled
Disabled*2 Disabled
Reset and
standby
protect
Disabled
When a reset occurs (including a watchdog
timer reset) or standby mode is entered,
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized,
disabling programming and erasing. Note that
RES input does not ensure a reset unless the
RES pin is held low for at least 20 ms at powerup (to enable the oscillator to settle), or at least
ten system clock cycles (10ø) during operation.
Disabled*2 Disabled
Interrupt
protect
To prevent damage to the flash memory, if
interrupt input occurs while flash memory is
being programmed or erased, programming or
erasing is aborted immediately. The settings in
FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are retained. This
type of protection can be cleared only by a
reset.
Disabled
Disabled*2 Enabled
Notes: *1 Three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify.
*2 All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
*3 For details, see section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
20.4.9
Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
If an interrupt occurs*1 while flash memory is being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit of
FLMCR is set), the following operating states can occur.
• If an interrupt is generated during programming or erasing, programming or erasing is aborted
to protect the flash memory. Since memory cell values after a forced interrupt are
indeterminate, the system will not operate correctly after such an interrupt.
• Program runaway may result because the vector table could not be read correctly in interrupt
exception handling during programming or erasure*2.
475
For NMI interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased, these malfunction and
runaway problems can be prevented by using the RAM overlap function with the settings
described below.
1. Do not store the NMI interrupt-handling routine*3 in the flash memory area (neither H'0000 to
H'EF7F in mode 2 nor H'0000 to H'F77F in mode 3). Store it elsewhere (in RAM, for
example).
2. Set the NMI interrupt vector in address H'F806 in RAM (corresponding to H'0006 in flash
memory).
3. After the above settings, set both the RAMS and RAM0 bits to 1 in WSCR.*4
Due to the setting of step 3, if an interrupt signal is input while 12 V is applied to the FVPP pin, the
RAM overlap function is enabled and part of the RAM (H'F800 to H'F87F) is overlapped onto the
small-block area of flash memory (H'0000 to H'007F). As a result, when an interrupt is input, the
vector is read from RAM, not flash memory, so the interrupt is handled normally even if flash
memory is being programmed or erased. This can prevent malfunction and runaway.
Notes: *1 When the interrupt mask bit (I) of the condition control register (CCR) is set to 1, all
interrupts except NMI are masked. For details see (2) in section 2.2.2, Control
Registers.
*2 The vector table might not be read correctly for one of the following reasons:
• If flash memory is read while it is being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit
of FLMCR is set), the correct value cannot be read.
• If no value has been written for the NMI entry in the vector table yet, NMI
exception handling will not be executed correctly.
*3 This routine should be programmed so as to prevent microcontroller runaway.
*4 For details on WSCR settings, see section 20.2.4, Wait-State Control Register.
Notes on Interrupt Handling in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the settings described above
concerning NMI interrupts are carried out, and NMI interrupt handling (but not other interrupt
handling) is enabled while the boot program is executing. Note the following points concerning
the user program.
• If interrupt handling is required
Load the NMI vector (H'F780) into address H'F806 in RAM (the 38th byte of the
transferred user program should be H'F780).
The interrupt handling routine used by the boot program is stored in addresses H'F780 to
H'F78F in RAM. Make sure that the user program does not overwrite this area.
• If interrupt handling is not required
Since the RAMS and RAM0 bits remain set to 1 in WSCR, make sure that the user program
disables the RAM overlap by clearing the RAMS and RAM0 bits both to 0.
476
20.5
Flash Memory Emulation by RAM
Erasing and programming flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters
and other data in real time. If necessary, real-time updates of flash memory can be emulated by
overlapping the small-block flash-memory area with part of the RAM (H'F800 to H'F97F). This
RAM reassignment is performed using bits 7 and 6 of the wait-state control register (WSCR). See
figure 20.11.
After a flash memory area has been overlapped by RAM, the RAM area can be accessed from two
address areas: the overlapped flash memory area, and the original RAM area (H'F800 to H'F97F).
Table 20.11 indicates how to reassign RAM.
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)*2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
*1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAMS
RAM0
CKDBL
—
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: *1 WSCR is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
*2 For details of WSCR settings, see section 20.2.4, Wait-State Control Register (WSCR).
Table 20.11 RAM Area Selection
Bit 7: RAMS
Bit 6: RAM0
RAM Area
ROM Area
0
0
None
—
1
H'F880 to H'F8FF
H'0080 to H'00FF
0
H'F880 to H'F97F
H'0080 to H'017F
1
H'F800 to H'F87F
H'0000 to H'007F
1
477
Example of Emulation of Real-Time Flash-Memory Update
H'0000
Small-block
area (SB1)
Overlapped RAM
H'007F
H'0080
H'00FF
H'0100
Flash memory
address space
H'F77F
H'F780
Overlapped
RAM
H'F880
H'F8FF
On-chip
RAM area
H'FF7F
Procedure
1. Overlap part of RAM (H'F880 to H'F8FF) onto the area requiring real-time update (SB1).
(Set WSCR bits 7 and 6 to 01.)
2. Perform real-time updates in the overlapping RAM.
3. After finalization of the update data, clear the RAM overlap (by clearing the RAMS and RAM0
bits).
4. Read the data written in RAM addresses H'F880 to H'F8FF out externally, then program the
flash memory area, using this data as part of the program data.
Figure 20.12 Example of RAM Overlap
478
Notes on Use of RAM Emulation Function
• Notes on Applying, Releasing, and Shutting Off the Programming Voltage (VPP)
Care is necessary to avoid errors in programming and erasing when applying, releasing, and
shutting off VPP, just as in the on-board programming modes. In particular, even if the
emulation function is being used, make sure that the watchdog timer is set when the P or E bit
of the flash memory control register (FLMCR) has been set, to prevent errors in programming
and erasing due to program runaway while VPP is applied.
For details see section 20.7, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions (5).
479
20.6
Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3437F)
20.6.1
Writer Mode Setting
The on-chip flash memory of the H8/3437F can be programmed and erased not only in the onboard programming modes but also in writer mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer.
20.6.2
Socket Adapter and Memory Map
Programs can be written and verified by attaching a special 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter to the
PROM programmer. Table 20.12 gives ordering information for the socket adapter. Figure 20.13
shows a memory map in writer mode. Figure 20.14 shows the socket adapter pin interconnections.
Table 20.12
Socket Adapter
Microcontroller
Package
Socket Adapter
HD64F3437F16
100-pin QFP
HS3434ESHF1H
HD64F3437TF16
100-pin TQFP
HS3434ESNF1H
MCU mode
H'0000
H8/3437F
Writer mode
H'0000
On-chip ROM area
H'F77F
H'F77F
1 output
H'1FFFF
Figure 20.13 Memory Map in Writer Mode
480
H8/3437F
Pin No.
Pin Name
Socket Adapter
FP-100B, TFP-100B
HN28F101 (32 Pins)
Pin Name
Pin No.
8
STBY/FVPP
VPP
1
7
NMI
FA 9
26
18
P95
FA 16
2
19
P94
FA 15
3
22
P93
WE
31
82
P30
FO 0
13
83
P31
FO 1
14
84
P32
FO 2
15
85
P33
FO 3
17
86
P34
FO 4
18
87
P35
FO 5
19
88
P36
FO 6
20
89
P37
FO 7
21
79
P10
FA 0
12
78
P11
FA 1
11
77
P12
FA 2
10
76
P13
FA 3
9
75
P14
FA 4
8
74
P15
FA 5
7
73
P16
FA 6
6
72
P17
FA 7
5
67
P20
FA 8
27
66
P21
OE
24
65
P22
FA 10
23
64
P23
FA 11
25
63
P24
FA 12
4
62
P25
FA 13
28
61
P26
FA 14
29
60
P27
CE
22
P91, P90, P63,
VCC
32
P64, P97
VSS
16
24, 25, 29,
32, 16
5, 6, 23,35
MD1, MD0, P92, P67
36, 37
AVref, AVCC
4, 9, 59
VCCB, VCC
46
AVSS
15, 70, 71, 92
VSS
1
RES
2, 3
Other pins
XTAL, EXTAL
Power-on
reset circuit
Legend:
VPP:
FO7 to FO0:
FA16 to FA0:
OE:
CE:
WE:
Programming power supply
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Write enable
Oscillator circuit
NC (OPEN)
Figure 20.14 Wiring of Socket Adapter
481
20.6.3
Operation in Writer Mode
The program/erase/verify specifications in writer mode are the same as for the standard
HN28F101 flash memory. However, since the H8/3437F does not support product name
recognition mode, the programmer cannot be automatically set with the device name. Table 20.13
indicates how to select the various operating modes.
Table 20.13
Operating Mode Selection in Writer Mode
Pins
FV PP
VCC
CE
OE
WE
D7 to D0
A16 to A0
Read
VCC
VCC
L
L
H
Data output
Address input
Output
disable
VCC
VCC
L
H
H
High impedance
Standby
VCC
VCC
H
X
X
High impedance
Read
VPP
VCC
L
L
H
Data output
Output
disable
VPP
VCC
L
H
H
High impedance
Standby
VPP
VCC
H
X
X
High impedance
Write
VPP
VCC
L
H
L
Data input
Mode
Read
Command
write
Note: * Be sure to set the FV PP pin to VCC in these states. If it is set to 0 V, hardware standby mode
will be entered, even when in writer mode, resulting in incorrect operation.
Legend:
L:
Low level
H:
High level
VPP :
VPP level
VCC:
VCC level
X:
Don’t care
482
Table 20.14
Writer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command
Cycles
Mode
Address
Data
Mode
Address
Data
Memory read
1
Write
X
H'00
Read
RA
Dout
Erase setup/erase
2
Write
X
H'20
Write
X
H'20
Erase-verify
2
Write
EA
H'A0
Read
X
EVD
Auto-erase setup/
auto-erase
2
Write
X
H'30
Write
X
H'30
Program setup/
program
2
Write
X
H'40
Write
PA
PD
Program-verify
2
Write
X
H'C0
Read
X
PVD
Reset
2
Write
X
H'FF
Write
X
H'FF
PA:
EA:
RA:
PD:
PVD:
EVD:
Program address
Erase-verify address
Read address
Program data
Program-verify output data
Erase-verify output data
483
High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming: Unused areas of the H8/3437F flash memory
contain H'FF data (initial value). The H8/3437F flash memory uses a high-speed, high-reliability
programming procedure. This procedure provides enhanced programming speed without
subjecting the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Figure 20.15 shows the basic high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart. Tables 20.15
and 20.16 list the electrical characteristics during programming.
Start
Set VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V
Address = 0
n=0
n+1→n
Program setup command
Program command
Wait (25 µs)
Program-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
No go
Go
No
n = 20?
No
Last address?
Yes
Yes
Set VPP = VCC
End
Fail
Figure 20.15 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming
484
High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing: The H8/3437F flash memory uses a high-speed, highreliability erasing procedure. This procedure provides enhanced erasing speed without subjecting
the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability. Figure 20.16 shows the basic
high-speed, high-reliability erasing flowchart. Tables 20.15 and 20.16 list the electrical
characteristics during erasing.
Start
Program all bits to 0*
Address = 0
n=0
n+1→n
Erase setup/erase command
Wait (10 ms)
Erase-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
No go
Go
No
n = 3000?
No
Last address?
Yes
Yes
End
Fail
Note: * Follow the high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart in programming all bits. If some bits
are already programmed to 0, program only the bits that have not yet been programmed.
Figure 20.16 High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing
485
Table 20.15
DC Characteristics in Writer Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Input high
voltage
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
VIH
2.2
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Input low
voltage
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
VIL
–0.3
—
0.8
V
Output high
voltage
FO7 to FO0
VOH
2.4
—
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
Output low
voltage
FO7 to FO0
VOL
—
—
0.45
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
Input leakage
current
FO7 to FO0,
FA 16 to FA0,
OE, CE, WE
| ILI |
—
—
2
µA
Vin = 0 to V CC
VCC current
Read
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Program
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Erase
I CC
—
40
80
mA
Read
I PP
—
—
10
µA
VPP = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
—
10
20
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
FV PP current
486
Program
I PP
—
20
40
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
Erase
I PP
—
20
40
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
Table 20.16 AC Characteristics in Writer Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Command write cycle
t CWC
120
—
—
ns
Address setup time
t AS
0
—
—
ns
Address hold time
t AH
60
—
—
ns
Figure 20.17
Figure 20.18*
Figure 20.19
Data setup time
t DS
50
—
—
ns
Data hold time
t DH
10
—
—
ns
CE setup time
t CES
0
—
—
ns
CE hold time
t CEH
0
—
—
ns
VPP setup time
t VPS
100
—
—
ns
VPP hold time
t VPH
100
—
—
ns
WE programming pulse width
t WEP
70
—
—
ns
WE programming pulse high time
t WEH
40
—
—
ns
OE setup time before command write
t OEWS
0
—
—
ns
OE setup time before verify
t OERS
6
—
—
µs
Verify access time
t VA
—
—
500
ns
OE setup time before status polling
t OEPS
120
—
—
ns
Status polling access time
t SPA
—
—
120
ns
Program wait time
t PPW
25
—
—
ns
Erase wait time
t ET
9
—
11
ms
Output disable time
t DF
0
—
40
ns
Total auto-erase time
t AET
0.5
—
30
s
Note: CE, OE, and WE should be high during transitions of VPP from 5 V to 12 V and from 12 V to
5 V.
* Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V
Input rise time and fall time ≤ 10 ns
Timing reference levels: 0.8 V and 2.0 V for input; 0.8 V and 2.0 V for output
487
Auto-erase setup
VCC
VPP
Auto-erase and status polling
5.0 V
12 V
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
CE
tCEH
OE
tCES
tOEWS
tWEP
WE
tDS
I/O7
tOEPS
tCWC
tCES
tCEH
tWEH
tDH
Command
input
tCES
tAET
tWEP
tDH
tDS
tSPA
Command
input
Status polling
I/O0 to I/O6
Command
input
Command
input
Figure 20.17 Auto-Erase Timing
488
tDF
Program setup
VCC
Program
Program-verify
5.0 V
12 V
VPP
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
Valid address
tAH
tAS
CE
tCEH
tCES
OE
tOEWS
tWEP
tCWC
tCEH
tWEH
tDH
WE
tDS
tCES
tCES
tPPW
tWEP
tDH
tDS
tCEH
tWEP
tOERS
tDH
tDS
tVA
tDF
I/O7
Command
input
Data
input
Command
input
Valid data
output
I/O0 to I/O6
Command
input
Data
input
Command
input
Valid data
output
Note: Program-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 before programming has
been completed.
Figure 20.18 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Timing
489
Erase setup
VCC
Erase
Erase-verify
5.0 V
12 V
VPP
5.0 V
tVPS
tVPH
Address
Valid address
tAS
tAH
CE
OE
tOEWS
tCES
tWEP
WE
tCES
tCEH
tDS
I/O0 to I/O7
Command
input
tDH
tCEH
tCES
tCEH
tCWC
tET
tWEP
tOERS
tWEP
tVA
tWEH
tDS
tDH
Command
input
tDS
tDH
Command
input
tDF
Valid data
output
Note: Erase-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 before erasing has been completed.
Figure 20.19 Erase Timing
20.7
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Read these precautions before using writer mode, on-board programming mode, or flash memory
emulation by RAM.
(1) Program with the specified voltages and timing.
The rated programming voltage (VPP) of the flash memory is 12.0 V.
If the PROM programmer is set to Hitachi HN28F101 specifications, VPP will be 12.0 V. Applying
voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Take particular care to ensure
that the PROM programmer peak overshoot does not exceed the rated limit of 13 V.
(2) Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM
programmer. Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM
programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(3) Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can
cause contact faults and write errors.
490
(4) Set H'FF as the PROM programmer buffer data for addresses H'F780 to H'1FFFF. The
H8/3437F PROM size is 60 kbytes. Addresses H'F780 to H'1FFFF always read H'FF, so if H'FF is
not specified as programmer data, a verify error will occur.
(5) Notes on applying, releasing, and shutting off the programming voltage (VPP)
Note: In this section, the application, release, and shutting-off of VPP are defined as follows.
Application: A rise in voltage from VCC to 12 V ± 0.6 V.
Release:
A drop in voltage from 12 V ± 0.6 V to VCC.
Shut-off:
No applied voltage (floating).
• Apply the programming voltage (V PP ) after the rise of VCC, and release VPP before shutting off
VCC.
To prevent unintended programming or erasing of flash memory, in these power-on and
power-off timings, the application, release, and shutting-off of VPP must take place when the
microcontroller is in a stable operating condition as defined below.
Stable operating condition
The VCC voltage must be stabilized within the rated voltage range (VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V)*
If VPP is applied, released, or shut off while the microcontroller’s V CC voltage is not within
the rated voltage range (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V)*, since microcontroller operation is unstable,
the flash memory may be programmed or erased by mistake. This can occur even if VCC =
0 V. To prevent changes in the VCC power supply when V PP is applied, be sure that the
power supply is adequately decoupled with inserting bypass capacitors.
Note: * In the LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
Clock oscillation must be stabilized (the oscillation settling time must have elapsed), and
oscillation must not be stopped
When turning on VCC power, hold the RES pin low during the oscillation settling time
(tOSC1 = 20 ms), and do not apply VPP until after this time.
The microcontroller must be in the reset state, or in a state in which a reset has ended
normally (reset has been released) and flash memory is not being accessed
Apply or release VPP either in the reset state, or when the CPU is not accessing flash
memory (when a program in on-chip RAM or external memory is executing). Flash
memory cannot be read normally at the instant when VPP is applied or released. Do not read
flash memory while VPP is being applied or released.
For a reset during operation, apply or release VPP only after the RES pin has been held low
for at least ten system clock cycles (10ø).
491
The P and E bits must be cleared in the flash memory control register (FLMCR)
When applying or releasing V PP , make sure that the P or E bit is not set by mistake.
No program runaway
When V PP is applied, program execution must be supervised, e.g. by the watchdog timer.
These power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a
power failure and in recovery from a power failure. If these requirements are not satisfied,
overprogramming or overerasing may occur due to program runaway etc., which could cause
memory cells to malfunction.
• The VPP flag is set and cleared by a threshold decision on the voltage applied to the FVPP pin.
The threshold level is between approximately VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V.
When this flag is set, it becomes possible to write to the flash memory control register
(FLMCR) and the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2), even though the VPP voltage may
not yet have reached the programming voltage range of 12.0 ± 0.6 V.
Do not actually program or erase the flash memory until VPP has reached the programming
voltage range.
The programming voltage range for programming and erasing flash memory is 12.0 ± 0.6 V
(11.4 V to 12.6 V). Programming and erasing cannot be performed correctly outside this range.
When not programming or erasing the flash memory, ensure that the VPP voltage does not
exceed the VCC voltage. This will prevent unintended programming and erasing.
In this chip, the same pin is used for STBY and FVPP. When this pin is driven low, a transition
is made to hardware standby mode. This happens not only in the normal operating modes
(modes 1, 2, and 3), but also when programming the flash memory with a PROM programmer.
When programming with a PROM programmer, therefore, use a programmer which sets this
pin to the VCC level when not programming (FVPP =12 V).
Note: Here, V PP application, release, and cutoff are defined as follows:
Application: Raising the voltage from VCC to 12±0.6 V.
Release:
Dropping the voltage from 12±0.6 V to VCC.
Cutoff:
Halting voltage application (setting the floating state).
492
tOSC1
ø
2.7 to 5.5 V*
0 µs min
0 µs min
VCC
12 ± 0.6 V
VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V
VPP
0 µs min
0 to VCCV
VCCV
Boot mode
Timing at which boot
program branches
to RAM area
12 ± 0.6 V
VPP
0 to VCCV
VCCV
User program
mode
RES
Min 10ø
(when RES is low)
Periods during which the VPP flag is being set or
cleared and flash memory must not be accessed
Note: * In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
Figure 20.20 VPP Power-On and Power-Off Timing
(6) Do not apply 12 V to the FVPP pin during normal operation.
To prevent accidental programming or erasing due to microcontroller program runaway etc., apply
12 V to the VPP pin only when the flash memory is programmed or erased, or when flash memory
is emulated by RAM. Overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway can cause
memory cells to malfunction. Avoid system configurations in which 12 V is always applied to the
FVPP pin.
While 12 V is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway
program execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing.
493
(7) Design a current margin into the programming voltage (VPP) power supply. Ensure that
VPP will not depart from 12.0 ±0.6 V (11.4 V to 12.6 V) during programming or erasing.
Programming and erasing may become impossible outside this range.
(8) Ensure that peak overshoot does not exceed the rated value at the FV PP and MD1 pins.
Connect decoupling capacitors as close to the FVPP and MD 1 pins as possible.
Also connect decoupling capacitors to the MD1 pin in the same way when boot mode is used.
FVPP
12 V
1.0 µF
0.01 µF
H8/3437F
MD1
12 V
1.0 µF
0.01 µF
Note: Also connect decoupling capacitors to the MD1 pin in the same way when boot mode is used.
Figure 20.21 VPP Power Supply Circuit Design (Example)
(9) Use the recommended algorithms for programming and erasing flash memory. These
algorithms are designed to program and erase without subjecting the device to voltage stress and
without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Before setting the program (P) or erase (E) bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR), set
the watchdog timer to ensure that the P or E bit does not remain set for more than the specified
time.
(10) For details on interrupt handling while flash memory is being programmed or erased, see the
notes on NMI interrupt handling in section 20.4.9, Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory
Programming and Erasing.
(11) Cautions on Accessing Flash Memory Control Registers
1. Flash memory control register access state in each operating mode
The H8/3437F has flash memory control registers located at addresses H'FF80 (FLMCR),
H'FF82 (EBR1), and H'FF83 (EBR2). These registers can only be accessed when 12 V is
applied to the flash memory program power supply pin, FVPP.
494
Table 20.17 shows the area accessed for the above addresses in each mode, when 12 V is and
is not applied to FVPP.
Table 20.17
Area Accessed in Each Mode with 12V Applied and Not Applied to FVPP
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
12 V applied
to FV PP
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
Flash memory control
register (initial value H'80)
Flash memory control
register (initial value
H'80)
12 V not applied
to FV PP
External address
space
External address space
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
2. When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip
ROM enabled)
When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2, it can be read or written to if 12
V is being applied to FV PP , but if not, external address space will be accessed. It is therefore
essential to confirm that 12 V is being applied to the FVPP pin before accessing these registers.
3. To check for 12 V application/non-application in mode 3 (single-chip mode)
When address H'FF80 is accessed in mode 3, if 12 V is being applied to FVPP , FLMCR is
read/written to, and its initial value after reset is H'80. When 12 V is not being applied to FV PP ,
FLMCR is a reserved area that cannot be modified and always reads H'FF. Since bit 7
(corresponding to the VPP bit) is set to 1 at this time regardless of whether 12 V is applied to
FVPP , application or release of 12 V to FVPP cannot be determined simply from the 0 or 1 status
of this bit. A byte data comparison is necessary to check whether 12V is being applied. The
relevant coding is shown below.
.
.
.
LABEL1:
MOV.B
CMP.B
BEQ
.
.
.
@H'FF80, R1L
#H'FF,
R1L
LABEL1
Sample program for detection of 12 V application to FVPP (mode 3)
495
Table 20.18
DC Characteristics of Flash Memory
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*2,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, V PP = 12.0 ± 0.6 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
High-voltage
(12 V) threshold
level *1
FV PP , MD1
VH
VCC + 2
—
11.4
V
FV PP current
During read
I PP
—
—
10
µA
VPP = 2.7 to 5.5 V
—
10
20
mA
VPP = 12.6 V
During
programming
—
20
40
mA
During
erasure
—
20
40
mA
Notes: *1 The listed voltages describe the threshold level at which high-voltage application is
recognized. In boot mode and while flash memory is being programmed or erased, the
applied voltage should be 12.0 V ± 0.6 V.
*2 In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
496
Table 20.19
AC Characteristics of Flash Memory
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*5,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, V PP = 12.0 ± 0.6 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Programming time
Erase time
*1, *2
*1, *3
Number of writ ing/ eras ing count
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tP
—
50
1000
µs
tE
—
1
30
s
NWEC
—
—
100
Times
Verify setup time 1
*1
t VS1
4
—
—
µs
Verify setup time 2
*1
t VS2
2
—
—
µs
t FRS
50
—
—
µs
100
—
—
Flash memory read setup
time*4
Test Conditions
VCC ≥ 4.5 V
VCC < 4.5 V
Notes: *1 Set the times following the programming/erasing algorithm shown in section 20.
*2 The programming time is the time during which a byte is programmed or the P bit in the
flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set. It does not include the program-verify
time.
*3 The erase time is the time during which all 60-kbyte blocks are erased or the E bit in the
flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set . It does not include the prewrite time
before erasure or erase-verify time.
*4 After power-on when using an external colck source, after return from standby mode, or
after switching the programming voltage (VPP ) from 12 V to VCC, make sure that this read
setup time has elapsed before reading flash memory.
When VPP is released, the flash memory read setup time is defined as the period from
when the FV PP pin has reached VCC + 2 V until flash memory can be read.
*5 In the LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
497
498
Section 21 ROM
(60-kbyte Single-Power-Supply Flash Memory Version)
21.1
Flash Memory Overview
21.1.1
Mode Pin Settings and ROM Space
The H8/3437SF has 60 kbytes of on-chip flash memory. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a
16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two states. Even addresses are
connected to the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses to the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an
even address.
Enabling and disabling of the on-chip ROM is performed by the mode pins (MD1 and MD2) and
the EXPE bit in MDCR.
The H8/3437SF flash memory can be programmed and erased on-board as well as with a PROM
programmer.
Table 21.1 Mode Pin Settings and ROM Space
Operating Mode
Mode Pin Settings
MCU Operating
Mode
Description
MD1
MD0
On-Chip
ROM
Mode 1
Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled
0
1
Disabled
Mode 2
Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled
1
0
Enabled
Mode 3
Single-chip mode
1
Enabled
499
21.1.2
Features
Features of the flash memory are listed below.
• Four flash memory operating modes
The flash memory has four operating modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase
mode, and erase-verify mode.
• Programming and erasing
32 bytes are programmed at a time. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple
blocks, individual blocks must be erased sequentially. In block erasing, 1-kbyte, 28-kbyte, 16kbyte, 12-kbyte, and 2-kbyte blocks can be set arbitrarily.
• Program and erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming,
equivalent to 300 µs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time for one block is 100 ms (typ.).
• Erase-program cycles
Flash memory contents can be erased and reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
These modes can be used to program, erase, and verify flash memory contents. There are two
modes: boot mode and user programming mode.
• Automatic bit rate alignment
In boot-mode data transfer, the H8/3437SF aligns its bit rate automatically to the host bit rate.
• Protect modes
There are three modes that enable flash memory to be protected from program, erase, and
verify operations: hardware protect mode, software protect mode, and error protect mode.
• Writer mode
As an alternative to on-board programming, the flash memory can be programmed and erased
in writer mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer.
500
21.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory.
8
Internal data bus (upper)
8
Internal data bus (lower)
FLMCR1
Bus interface and control section
FLMCR2
EBR2
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
Operating
mode
MD1
MD0
On-chip flash memory
(60 kbytes)
H'F77C
H'F77D
H'F77E
H'F77F
Upper byte
(even address)
Lower byte
(odd address)
Legend:
FLMCR1: Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR2: Flash memory control register 2
EBR2:
Erase block register 2
Figure 21.1 Flash Memory Block Diagram
501
21.1.4
Input/Output Pins
Flash memory is controlled by the pins listed in table 21.2.
Table 21.2 Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
Input/
Output
Function
Reset
RES
Input
Reset
Mode 1
MD1
Input
H8/3437SF operating mode setting
Mode 0
MD0
Input
H8/3437SF operating mode setting
Port 92
P92
Input
H8/3437SF operating mode setting when MD1 =
MD0 = 0
Port 91
P91
Input
H8/3437SF operating mode setting when MD1 =
MD0 = 0
Port 90
P90
Input
H8/3437SF operating mode setting when MD1 =
MD0 = 0
Transmit data
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
Receive data
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
The transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode.
21.1.5
Register Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by the registers listed in table 21.3.
Table 21.3 Flash Memory Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Flash memory control register 1
Flash memory control register 2
Erase block register 2
Wait-state control register
*1
R/W
R/W
*2
R/W
*2
EBR2
R/W
*2
WSCR
R/W
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
Initial Value
Address
H'80
H'FF80
H'00
*3
H'FF81
H'00
*3
H'FF83
H'08
H'FFC2
Notes: *1 The wait-state control register is used to control the insertion of wait states by the waitstate controller and frequency division of clock signals for the on-chip supporting
modules by the clock pulse generator. Selection of the respective registers (or
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR2) is performed by means of the FLSHE bit in the wait
state control register (WSCR).
*2 In modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled, these registers cannot be
modified and return H'00 if read.
*3 Initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit is not set in FLMCR1.
502
21.1.6
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Register Configuration: The operating mode of the H8/3437SF is controlled by the mode pins
and the mode control register (MDCR). Table 21.4 shows the MDCR register configuration.
Table 21.4 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Mode control register
MDCR
R/W
Undefined
(Depends on operating mode)
H'FFC5
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Bit
7
*1
EXPE
Initial value
Read/Write
—
*2
R/W*2
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
MDS1
MDS0
*2
1
1
0
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
—*2
R
Notes: *1 H8/3437SF (S-mask model, single-power-supply on-chip flash memory version) only.
Otherwise, this is a reserved bit that is always read as 1.
*2 Determined by the mode pins (MD1 and MD0).
MDCR is an 8-bit register used to set the operating mode of the H8/3437SF and to monitor the
current operating mode.
Bit 7—Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, this bit is fixed at 1
and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, this bit has a fixed initial value of 0 and cannot be
modified.
This bit can be read and written only in boot mode.
Bit 7: EXPE
Description
0
Single-chip mode is selected
1
Expanded mode is selected (writable in boot mode only)
Bits 6 and 5—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 2—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
503
Bits 1 and 0—Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at mode
pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to pins MD1
and MD0, respectively. MDS1 and MDS0 are read-only bits, and cannot be modified. The mode
pin (MD1 and MD 0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read.
21.1.7
Flash Memory Operating Modes
Mode Transition Diagram: When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset start is
effected, the microcontroller enters one of the operating modes as shown in figure 21.2. In user
mode, the flash memory can be read but cannot be programmed or erased.
Modes in which the flash memory can be programmed and erased are boot mode, user
programming mode, and writer mode.
Reset state
MD1 = 1
User mode
with on-chip ROM
enabled
RES = 0
RES = 0
*2
RES = 0
FLSHE = 1
FLSHE = 0
*1
RES = 0
Writer mode
User
programming
mode
Boot mode
On-board programming mode
Notes: Transitions between user mode and user programming mode should only be made when the CPU is
not accessing the flash memory.
*1 MD0 = MD1 = 0, P92 = P91 = P90 = 1
*2 MD0 = MD1 = 0, P92 = 0, P91 = P90 = 1
Figure 21.2 Flash Memory Related State Transitions
504
On-Board Programming Modes
• Boot Mode
2. SCI communication check
When boot mode is entered, the boot program
in the H8/3437SF (already incorporated in the
chip) is started, an SCI communication check is
carried out, and the boot program required for
flash memory erasing is automatically
transferred to the RAM boot program area.
;
;; ;;
;
1. Initial state
The flash memory is in the erased state when
shipped. The procedure for rewriting an old
version of an application program or data is
described here. The user should prepare an
on-board update routine and the new
application program beforehand in the host.
Host
Host
On-board update routine
On-board update routine
New application
program
New application
program
H8/3437SF
H8/3437SF
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
RAM
Boot program area
Application
program
(old version)
Application
program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
4. Writing new application program
The on-board update routine in the host to
RAM is transferred to RAM by SCI
communication and executed, and the new
application program in the host is written into
the flash memory.
Host
Host
On-board update routine
New application
program
H8/3437SF
H8/3437SF
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
Flash memory
RAM
RAM
On-board update
routine
Boot program area
Flash memory
erase
SCI
Boot program
New application
program
: Program execution state
Figure 21.3 Boot Mode
505
• User programming mode
1. Initial state
(1) The program that will transfer the on-board
update routine to on-chip RAM should be
written into the flash memory by the user
beforehand. (2) The on-board update routine
should be prepared in the host or in the flash
memory.
Host
2. On-board update routine transfer
The transfer program in the flash memory is
executed, and the on-board update routine is
transferred to RAM.
Host
On-board update routine
New application
program
New application
program
H8/3437SF
H8/3437SF
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
RAM
Transfer program
Transfer program
On-board update routine
Application program
(old version)
;
;; ;
Application program
(old version)
3. Flash memory initialization
The update routine in RAM is executed, and
the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF).
Erasing can be performed in block units, but
not in byte units.
4. Writing new application program
Next, the new application program in the host is
written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do
not write to unerased blocks.
Host
Host
New application
program
H8/3437SF
H8/3437SF
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
Transfer program
Flash memory
RAM
Transfer program
On-board update routine
On-board update routine
Flash memory
erase
SCI
Boot program
New application
program
: Program execution state
Figure 21.4 User Programming Mode (Example)
506
Differences between Boot Mode and User Programming Mode
Boot Mode
User Programming Mode
Total erase
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
On-board update routine*
Program/program-verify
Erase/erase-verify
Program/program-verify
Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
Block Configuration: The flash memory is divided into one 2-kbyte block, one 12-kbyte block,
one 16-kbyte block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks.
Address H'00000
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
28 kbytes
60 kbytes
16 kbytes
12 kbytes
Address H'F77F
2 kbytes
Figure 21.5 Flash Memory Blocks
507
21.2
Flash Memory Register Descriptions
21.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FWE
SWE
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: The FLSHE bit in WSCR must be set to 1 in order for this register to be accessed.
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register that controls the flash memory operating modes. Program-verify
mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1. Program mode is entered by setting
SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the P bit. Erase
mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the
E bit. FLMCR1 is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software
standby mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are
invalid.
Writes to bits EV and PV in FLMCR1 are enabled only when SWE = 1; writes to the E bit only
when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1; and writes to the P bit only when SWE = 1 and PSU = 1.
Bit 7—Flash Write Enable (FWE): Controls programming and erasing of on-chip flash memory.
In the H8/3437SF, this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6—Software Write Enable (SWE): Enables or disables the flash memory. This bit should be
set before setting bits ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, P, and EB7 to EB0, and should not be cleared at the
same time as these bits.
Bit 6: SWE
Description
0
Writes disabled
1
Writes enabled
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
508
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Erase-Verify Mode (EV): Selects transition to or exit from erase-verify mode. (Do not set
the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit at the same time.)
Bit 3: EV
Description
0
Exit from erase-verify mode
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Bit 2—Program-Verify Mode (PV): Selects transition to or exit from program-verify mode. (Do
not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P bit at the same time.)
Bit 2: PV
Description
0
Exit from program-verify mode
1
Transition to program-verify mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Bit 1—Erase Mode (E): Selects transition to or exit from erase mode. (Do not set the SWE, ESU,
PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at the same time.)
Bit 1: E
Description
0
Exit from erase mode
1
Transition to erase mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1 and ESU = 1
Bit 0—Program Mode (P): Selects transition to or exit from program mode. (Do not set the
SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or E bit at the same time.)
Bit 0: P
Description
0
Exit from program mode
1
Transition to program mode
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1 and PSU = 1
509
21.2.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLER
—
—
—
—
—
ESU
PSU
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
Note: The FLSHE bit in WSCR must be set to 1 in order for this register to be accessed.
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for monitoring of flash memory program/erase protection (error
protection) and flash memory program/erase mode setup. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset
and in hardware standby mode. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode,
hardware protect mode, and software protect mode.
When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00.
Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on
flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state.
Bit 7: FLER
Description
0
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing conditions]
Reset, hardware standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, watch mode
(Initial value)
1
An error occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition]
See Error Protection in section 21.4.5
Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
510
Bit 1—Erase Setup (ESU): Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting
the E bit in FLMCR1. (Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time.)
Bit 1: ESU
Description
0
Erase setup cleared
1
Erase setup
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Bit 0—Program Setup (PSU): Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1 before
setting the P bit in FLMCR1. (Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time.)
Bit 0: PSU
Description
0
Program setup cleared
1
Program setup
(Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
21.2.3
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: The FLSHE bit in WSCR must be set to 1 in order for this register to be accessed.
* Writes to bit 7 are invalid in mode 2.
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that designates flash-memory erase blocks for erasure. EBR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode and software standby mode, and when the
SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be
erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Only one bit should be set in EBR2; do not set two or
more bits. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 21.5.
511
Table 21.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (Size)
60-Kbyte Version
Addresses
EB0 (1 kbyte)
H'0000–H'03FF
EB1 (1 kbyte)
H'0400–H'07FF
EB2 (1 kbyte)
H'0800–H'0BFF
EB3 (1 kbyte)
H'0C00–H'0FFF
EB4 (28 kbytes)
H'1000–H'7FFF
EB5 (16 kbytes)
H'8000–H'BFFF
EB6 (12 kbytes)
H'C000–H'EF7F
EB7 (2 kbytes)
H'EF80–H'F77F
21.2.4
Wait-State Control Register (WSCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
CKDBL
FLSHE
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls frequency division of the clock signals
supplied to the supporting modules. It also controls wait state controller wait settings, RAM area
setting for dual-power-supply flash memory, and selection/non-selection of single-power-supply
flash memory control registers.
WSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are reserved, but can be written and read. Their initial value
is 0.
Bit 5—Clock Double (CKDBL): Controls frequency division of clock signals supplied to the onchip supporting modules. For details, see section 6, Clock Pulse Generator.
512
Bit 4—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): When the FLSHE bit is set to 1, the
flash memory control registers can be read and written to. When FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash
memory control registers are unselected. In this case, the contents of the flash memory contents
are retained.
Bit 4: FLSHE
Description
0
Flash memory control registers are in unselected state
1
Flash memory control registers are in selected state
(Initial value)
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1, WMS0)
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1, WC0)
These bits control insertion of wait states by the wait-state controller. For details, see section 5,
Wait-State Controller.
21.3
On-Board Programming Modes
When an on-board programming mode is selected, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed,
erased, and verified. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user
programming mode. Table 21.6 indicates how to select the on-board programming modes. User
programming mode operation can be performed by setting control bits with software. A state
transition diagram for flash memory related modes is shown in figure 21.2.
Table 21.6 On-Board Programming Mode Selection
Mode Selection
MD1
MD0
P92
P91
P90
Boot mode
0
0
1
1
1
User programming
mode
1
0
—
—
—
21.3.1
1
Boot Mode
To use boot mode, a user program for programming and erasing the flash memory must be
provided in advance on the host machine (which may be a personal computer). Serial
communication interface (SCI) channel 1 is used in asynchronous mode.
When a reset state is executed after the H8/3437SF pins have been set to boot mode, the built-in
boot program is activated, and the on-board update routine provided in the host is transferred
sequentially to the H8/3437SF using the serial communication interface (SCI). The H8/3437SF
writes the on-board update routine received via the SCI to the on-board update routine area in the
on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, execution branches to the first address of the on-
513
board update routine area, and the on-board update routine execution state is entered (flash
memory programming is performed).
Therefore, a routine conforming to the programming algorithm described later must be provided in
the on-board update routine transferred from the host.
Figure 21.6 shows the system configuration in boot mode, and figure 21.7 shows the boot mode
execution procedure.
H8/3437SF
Flash memory
Host
Reception of programming data
Transmission of verification data
RxD1
SCI1
TxD1
On-chip RAM
Figure 21.6 Boot-Mode System Configuration
Boot-Mode Execution Procedure: Figure 21.7 shows the boot-mode execution procedure.
514
Start
Program H8/3437SF pins for boot mode, and
reset
Host transmits H'00 data continuously at desired
bit rate
H8/3437SF measures low period of H'00 data
transmitted from host
H8/3437SF computes bit rate and sets bit rate
register
After completing bit-rate alignment, H8/3437SF
sends one H'00 data byte to host to indicate that
alignment is completed
Host checks that this byte, indicating completion
of bit-rate alignment, is received normally, then
transmits one H'55 byte.
After receiving H'55, H8/3437SF sends part of
the boot program to RAM
After checking that all data in flash memory has
been erased, H8/3437SF transmits one H'AA
data byte to host
Check flash memory data, and if data has
already been written, erase all blocks
Host transmits byte length (N) of user program in
two bytes, upper byte followed by lower byte
H8/3437SF transmits received byte length to
host as verification data (echo-back)
n=1
Host transmits user program sequentially,
in byte units
H8/3437SF transmits received user program to
host as verification data (echo-back)
n+1→n
Transfer received on-board update routine to
on-chip RAM
n = N?
No
Yes
End of transfer
Transmit one H'AA data byte to host, and
execute on-board update routine transferred
to on-chip RAM
Note: If a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be erased, the H8/3437SF transmits one H'FF byte to report an erase
error, halts erasing, and halts further operations.
Figure 21.7 Boot Mode Flowchart
515
Automatic Alignment of SCI Bit Rate
Start
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop
bit
This low period (9 bits) is measured (H'00 data)
High for at
least 1 bit
Figure 21.8 Measurement of Low Period in Data Transmitted from Host
When started in boot mode, the H8/3437SF measures the low period in asynchronous SCI data
(H'00) transmitted from the host. The data format is eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity bit.
From the measured low period (9 bits), the H8/3437SF computes the host’s bit rate. After aligning
its own bit rate, the H8/3437SF sends the host one byte of H'00 data to indicate that bit-rate
alignment is completed. The host should check that this alignment-completed indication is
received normally and send one H'55 byte back to the H8/3437SF. If the alignment-completed
indication is not received normally, the H8/3437F should be reset, then restarted in boot mode to
measure the low period again. There may be some alignment error between the host’s and
H8/3437SF’s bit rates, depending on the host’s transmission bit rate and the H8/3437SF’s system
clock frequency (fOSC). To have the SCI operate normally, set the host’s transfer bit rate to 2400,
4800, or 9600 bps.
Table 21.7 lists typical host transfer bit rates and indicates the system clock frequency ranges over
which the H8/3437SF can align its bit rate automatically. Boot mode should be used within these
frequency ranges.
Table 21.7 System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment by
H8/3437SF
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequencies (fOSC) Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate
Alignment by H8/3437SF
9600 bps
8 MHz to 16 MHz
4800 bps
4 MHz to 16 MHz
2400 bps
2 MHz to 16 MHz
RAM Area Allocation in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 128 bytes from H'FF00 to H'FF7F are
reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 21.9. The user program is transferred into
the area from H'F780 to H'FDFF (1664 bytes). The boot program area can be used after the
transition to execution of the user program transferred into RAM. If a stack area is needed, set it
within the user program.
516
H'F780
User program
transfer area
(1664 bytes)
H'FDFF
H'FF00
Boot program
area*
(128 bytes)
H'FF7F
Note: * This area cannot be used until the H8/3437SF starts to execute the user program
transferred to RAM. Note that even after the branch to the user program, the boot
program area still contains the boot program.
Figure 21.9 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Notes on Use of Boot Mode
1. When the H8/3437SF comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input
at the SCI’s RxD 1 pin. The reset should end with RxD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about
100 states for the H8/3437SF to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD1 input.
2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not H'FF),
all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user programming mode is
unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program
activated in user programming mode is accidentally erased.
3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
4. The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on-board.
5. Before branching to the user program (at address H'E880 in the RAM area), the H8/3437SF
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (by clearing the RE and TE bits
of serial control register SCR to 0 in channel 1), but the auto-aligned bit rate remains set in bit
rate register BRR. The transmit data output pin (TxD1) is in the high output state (in port 8, bits
P8 4DDR of the port 8 data direction register and P84DR of the port 8 data register are set to 1).
517
At this time, the values of general registers in the CPU are undetermined. Thus these registers
should be initialized immediately after branching to the user program. Especially in the case of
the stack pointer (SP), which is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., the stack area used by
the user program should be specified.
There are no other changes to the initialized values of other registers.
6. Boot mode can be entered by starting from a reset after pin settings are made according to the
mode setting conditions listed in table 21.6.
In the H8/3437SF, P92, P91, and P90 can be used as I/O ports if boot mode selection is detected
when reset is released*1.
Boot mode can be released by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 system clock
cycles, then setting the mode pins and releasing the reset *1.
Boot mode can also be released if a watchdog timer overflow reset occurs.
The mode pin input levels must not be changed during boot mode.
7. If the input level of a mode pin is changed during a reset (e.g., from low to high), the resultant
switch in the microcontroller’s operating mode will affect the bus control output signals (AS,
RD, and WR) and the status of ports that can be used for address output*2.
Therefore, either set these pins so that they do not output signals during the reset, or make sure
that their output signals do not collide with other signals output the microcontroller.
Notes: *1 Mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states) with
respect to the reset release timing.
*2 These ports output low-level address signals if the mode pins are set to mode 1 during
the reset. In all other modes, these ports are in the high-impedance state. The bus
control output signals are high if the mode pins are set for mode 1 or 2 during the reset.
In mode 3, they are at high impedance.
RES
tMDS
MD0, MD1
P92
P91
P90
tMDS: 4tCYC (min.)
Figure 21.10 Programming Mode Timing
518
21.3.2
User Programming Mode
When set to user programming mode, the H8/3437SF can erase and program its flash memory by
executing a user program. On-board updates of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by
providing an on-board circuit for supplying programming data, and storing an update program in
part of the program area.
To select user programming mode, start up in a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory
(mode 2 or 3). In user programming mode, the on-chip supporting modules operate as they
normally would in mode 2 or 3, except for the flash memory.
The flash memory cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 in order to perform programming
or erasing, so the update program must be executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
User Programming Mode Execution Procedure (Example): Figure 21.11 shows the execution
procedure for user programming mode when the on-board update routine is executed in RAM.
The transfer program (and on-board update
program as required) is written in flash
memory ahead of time by the user.
Set MD1 and MD0 to 10 or 11
Start from reset
Transfer on-board update routine
into RAM
Branch to flash memory on-board
update routine in RAM
Execute flash memory on-board
update routine (update flash memory)
Branch to application program
in flash memory
Note: Start the watchdog timer to prevent over-erasing due to program runaway, etc.
Figure 21.11 User Programming Mode Operation (Example)
519
21.4
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by
software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by
setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR2, and the P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR1.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that
controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be
located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, EV, PV, E, and P bits in
FLMCR1, and the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash
memory.
2. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on
previously programmed addresses.
21.4.1
Program Mode
Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 21.12 to write data
or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will
enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage
stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a
time.
For the wait times (x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory
control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of writes (N), see Flash
Memory Characteristics in section 23, Electrical Characteristics.
Following the elapse of (x) µs or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data
area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses.
The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0,
or H'E0. Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and
program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if
writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc.
Set a value greater than (y + z + α + β) µs as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for
program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and after the
elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P bit in
FLMCR1. The time during which the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a
program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) µs.
520
21.4.2
Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the P bit in
FLMCR1 is cleared, then the PSU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later). The watchdog
timer is cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to programverify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy
write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be
executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data
is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy
write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the
verify data, and a bit generation operation is performed for reprogram data (see figure 21.12) and
transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32 bytes of data have been verified, exit programverify mode, wait for at least (η) µs, then clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is
necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before.
However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on
the same bits.
521
Start
Perform programming in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming
on previously programmed addresses.
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (x) µs
*5
Store 32-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
*4
n=1
m=0
Write 32-byte data in RAM reprogram data
area consecutively to flash memory
*1
n←n+1
Enable WDT
Set PSU bit in FLMCR2
Wait (y) µs
Set P bit in FLMCR1
Wait (z) µs
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Wait (α) µs
*5
Start of programming
*5
End of programming
*5
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2
Wait (β) µs
*5
Disable WDT
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (γ) µs
*5
Notes: *1 Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower
8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40,
H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer
must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes;
in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
*2 Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
*3 If a bit for which programming has been completed in the 32-byte
programming loop fails the following verify phase, additional
programming is performed for that bit.
*4 An area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data
(32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the latter
are rewritten as programming progresses.
*5 See section 23, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of
x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, and N.
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait (ε) µs
*5
Read verify data
*2
Program data =
verify data?
NG
Increment address
OK
Reprogram data computation
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram
data area
NG
m=1
Program
Data
0
Verify
Data
0
Reprogram
Data
1
0
1
0
Programming incomplete;
reprogram
1
0
1
—
1
1
1
Still in erased state;
no action
Comments
Reprogramming is not
performed if program data
and verify data match
*3
RAM
*4
Program data storage
area (32 bytes)
End of 32-byte
data verification?
OK
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (η) µs
m = 0?
OK
Reprogram data storage
area (32 bytes)
*5
NG
n ≥ N?
*5
NG
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of programming
Programming failure
Figure 21.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
522
21.4.3
Erase Mode
Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the
erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 21.13.
The wait times (x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control
registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of erases (N), see Flash
Memory Characteristics in section 23, Electrical Characteristics.
To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in
erase block register 2 (EBR2) at least (x) µs after setting the SWE bit to 1 in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of
program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + α + β) ms as the WDT overflow period.
After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the ESU bit in
FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by
setting the E bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash memory erase
time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms.
Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased
to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
21.4.4
Erase-Verify Mode
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the E bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the
ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse
of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EV bit
in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to
the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more.
When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the
latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing this read
operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address,
and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and
repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least (η) µs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks,
clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting in EBR2 for
the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way.
523
Start
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (x) µs
*5
n=1
Set EBR1, EBR2
*3
Enable WDT
Set ESU bit in FLMCR2
Wait (y) µs
*5
Start of erase
Set E bit in FLMCR1
Wait (z) ms
*5
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
n←n+1
Halt erase
Wait (α) µs
*5
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2
Wait (β) µs
*5
Disable WDT
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (γ) µs
*5
Set block start address to verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Increment
address
Wait (ε) µs
*5
Read verify data
*2
Verify data = all 1?
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait (η) µs
NG
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*4
End of
erasing of all erase
blocks?
OK
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
*5
Wait (η) µs
*5
*5
n ≥ N?
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of erasing
Erase failure
NG
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units.
Set only one bit in EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially.
See section 23, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, and N.
Figure 21.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase)
524
21.4.5
Protect Modes
There are three modes for protecting flash memory from programming and erasing: software
protection, hardware protection, and error protection. These protection modes are described below.
Software Protection: Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), and setting erase block register 2 (EBR2). Software
protection prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode even if the P or E bit is set in
FLMCR1.
Details of software protection are shown in table 21.8.
Table 21.8 Software Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
SWE bit protect
Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the
program/erase-protected state for all blocks.
(Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory.)
Yes
Yes
Block protect
Individual blocks can be protected from erasing
and programming by erase block register 2
(EBR2). If H'00 is set in EBR2, all blocks are
protected from erasing and programming.
—
Yes
Hardware Protection: Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming and erasing of
flash memory is forcibly suspended or disabled. At this time, the flash memory control registers 1
and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block register 2 (EBR2) settings are reset.
Details of hardware protection are shown in table 21.9.
Table 21.9 Hardware Protection
Functions
Item
Reset and
standby protect
Description
Program
Erase
When a reset occurs (including a watchdog timer
reset) or standby mode is entered, FLMCR1,
FLMCR2, and EBR2 are initialized, disabling
programming and erasing. Note that RES input
does not ensure a reset unless the RES pin is
held low until the oscillator settles at power-up, or
for a period equivalent to the RES pulse width
specified in the AC characteristics during
operation.
Yes
Yes
525
Error Protection: In error protection, an error is detected when microcontroller runaway occurs
during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the
program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase
operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
If the microcontroller malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set
to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR2
settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error
occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However,
PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode.
FLER bit setting conditions are as follows:
1. When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction
fetch)
2. Immediately after the start of exception handling (excluding a reset) during
programming/erasing
3. When a SLEEP instruction (including software standby) is executed during
programming/erasing
4. When the bus is released during programming/erasing
Error protection is released only by a power-on reset.
Figure 21.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
526
Program mode
Erase mode
RES = 0 or STBY = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Error occurrence
(software standby
mode)
Error occurrence
Reset or
hardware standby
(hardware protection)
Error protect mode
RES = 0 or
STBY = 0
Software standby mode
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
Software standby mode
release
RES = 0 or
STBY = 0
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR2 initialized
Error protect mode
(standby)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit),
EBR2 initialized
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
Memory read possible
Verify-read possible
Programming possible
Erasing possible
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
Memory read not possible
Verify-read not possible
Programming not possible
Erasing not possible
Figure 21.14 Flash Memory State Transitions
21.4.6
Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing
All interrupts, including NMI input, should be disabled when flash memory is being programmed
or erased (while the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1) and while the boot program is executing in boot
mode*1, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this:
1. Interrupt occurrence during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the
programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.
2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would
not be read correctly*2, possibly resulting in microcontroller runaway.
3. If an interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the
normal boot mode sequence.
For these reasons, there are conditions for disabling interrupts in the on-board programming
modes alone, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee
normal erasing and programming or microcontroller operation.
All requests, including NMI, must therefore be disabled inside and outside the microcontroller
when flash memory is programmed or erased. Interrupts are also disabled in the error protection
state while the P or E bit setting in FLMCR1 is held.
527
Notes: *1 Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the microcontroller until
programming by the update program has been completed.
*2 The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:
• If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is
set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be
returned).
• If a value has not yet been written in the interrupt vector table, interrupt exception
handling will not be executed correctly.
21.5
Flash Memory Writer Mode (H8/3437SF)
21.5.1
Writer Mode Setting
Programs and data can be written and erased in writer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In writer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using a PROM
programmer that supports the Hitachi microcomputer device type* with 64-kbyte on-chip flash
memory*. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode
are supported with this device type. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read
mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are
output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
Note: * The H8/3437 should be used with the PROM programmer programming voltage set to
5.0 V.
Table 21.10
Writer Mode Pin Settings
Pin Names
Settings
Mode pins: MD 1, MD0
Low level input to MD1 and MD0
STBY pin
High level input (hardware standby mode not entered)
RES pin
Power-on reset circuit
XTAL and EXTAL pins
Oscillator circuit
Other setting pins: P9 7, P92, P91, P90, P67
Low level input to P92 and P67, high level input to P9 7,
P91, and P9 0
21.5.2
Socket Adapter and Memory Map
In writer mode, a socket adapter for the relevant kind of package is attached to the PROM
programmer. Socket adapters are available for all PROM programmer manufacturers supporting
the Hitachi microcomputer device type with 64-kbyte on-chip flash memory.
528
Figure 21.15 shows the memory map in writer mode, and table 21.10 shows writer mode pin
settings. For pin names in writer mode, see section 1.3.2, Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.
MCU mode
H8/3437SF
H'0000
Writer mode
H'0000
On-chip ROM area
H'F77F
H'F77F
Undetermined values
output
H'1FFFF
Figure 21.15 Memory Map in Writer Mode
21.5.3
Operation in Writer Mode
Table 21.11 shows how to select the various operating modes when using writer mode, and table
21.12 lists the commands used in writer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
• Memory Read Mode
Memory read mode supports byte reads.
• Auto-Program Mode
Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to
confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Auto-Erase Mode
Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used
to confirm the end of auto-erasing.
• Status Read Mode
Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be
confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an
error occurs.
529
Table 21.11
Operating Mode Selection in Writer Mode
Pins
Mode
CE
OE
WE
FO7–FO0
FA17–FA0
Read
L
L
H
Data output
Ain*2
Output disable
L
H
H
High impedance
X
Command write
L
H
L
Data input
Ain*2
Chip disable *1
H
X
X
High impedance
X
Notes: *1 Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
*2 Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
Table 21.12
Writer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command
Cycles
Mode
Address
Data
Mode
Address
Data
Memory read mode
1+n
Write
X
H'00
Read
RA
Dout
Auto-program mode
129
Write
X
H'40
Write
WA
Din
Auto-erase mode
2
Write
X
H'20
Write
X
H'20
Status read mode
2
Write
X
H'71
Write
X
H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode, 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous
128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
530
Memory Read Mode
1. After completion of auto-program/auto-erase/status read operations, a transition is made to the
command wait state. When reading memory contents, a transition to memory read mode must
first be made with a command write, after which the memory contents are read.
2. In memory read mode, command writes can be performed in the same way as in the command
wait state.
3. Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.
4. After powering up, memory read mode is entered.
Table 21.13
AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Programming pulse width
t wep
70
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
Command write
Unit
Notes
Memory read mode
Address
Address stable
tces
tceh
CE
OE
Max
tnxtc
tf
twep
tr
WE
tds
Data
tdh
Data
Data
Note: Data is latched at the rising edge of WE.
Figure 21.16 Timing Waveforms for Memory Read after Command Write
531
Table 21.14
AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Programming pulse width
t wep
70
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
Unit
Notes
Other mode command write
Memory read mode
Address
Max
Address stable
tnxtc
tces
tceh
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
WE
tds
Data
Data
tdh
H'XX
Note: Do not enable WE and OE simultaneously.
Figure 21.17 Timing Waveforms for Transition from Memory Read Mode
to Another Mode
532
Table 21.15
AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Access time
Max
Unit
t acc
20
µs
CE output delay time
t ce
150
ns
OE output delay time
t oe
150
ns
Output disable delay time
t df
100
ns
Data output hold time
t oh
Address
Min
5
Address stable
Notes
ns
Address stable
CE
VIL
OE
VIL
WE
tacc
tacc
toh
toh
Data
Data
VIH
Data
Figure 21.18 Timing Waveforms for CE and OE Enable State Read
Address
Address stable
Address stable
tce
tce
CE
toe
toe
OE
WE
Data
VIH
tacc
tacc
toh
Data
tdf
toh
tdf
Data
Figure 21.19 Timing Waveforms for CE and OE Clocked Read
533
Auto-Program Mode
• AC Characteristics
Table 21.16
AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Programming pulse width
t wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t wsts
1
ms
Status polling access time
t spa
Address setup time
t as
0
ns
Address hold time
t ah
60
ns
Memory write time
t write
1
WE rise time
WE fall time
Address
Max
Unit
150
Notes
ns
3000
ms
tr
30
ns
tf
30
ns
Address stable
tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
tas
tah
twsts
tspa
WE
tds
tdh
Data transfer
1 byte ... 128 bytes
twrite
Programming operation
end identification signal
FO7
Programming normal
end identification signal
FO6
Programming wait
Data
H'40
Data
Data
Figure 21.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
534
FO0 to FO5 = 0
• Notes on Use of Auto-Program Mode
1. In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out
by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
2. A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
3. The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than a valid
address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be
flagged.
4. Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 21.19). Do not perform
transfer after the second cycle.
5. Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
6. Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address.
Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations.
7. Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (in FO7 status polling, the pin is the auto-program operation
end identification pin).
8. Status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
535
Auto-Erase Mode
• AC Characteristics
Table 21.17
AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Programming pulse width
t wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t ests
1
ms
Status polling access time
t spa
Memory erase time
t erase
WE rise time
WE fall time
150
ns
40000
ms
tr
30
ns
tf
30
ns
100
Notes
Address
tces
tnxtc
tceh
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tests
tr
tspa
WE
tds
tdh
terase
(100 to 40000 ms)
FO7
Erase end
identification signal
FO6
Data
CLin
DLin
H'20
H'20
Erase normal end
confirmation signal
FO0 to FO5 = 0
Figure 21.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
536
• Notes on Use of Erase-Program Mode
1. Auto-erase mode supports only total memory erasing.
2. Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.
3. Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also
be used for this purpose (in FO7 status polling, the pin is the auto-erase operation end
identification pin).
4. Status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
Status Read Mode
1. Status read mode is used to identify what kind of abnormal end has occurred. This mode
should be used if an abnormal end occurs in auto-program or auto-erase mode.
2. The return code is retained until a command write for a mode other than status read mode is
executed.
Table 21.18
AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Programming pulse width
t wep
70
ns
OE output delay time
t oe
150
ns
Disable delay time
t df
100
ns
CE output delay time
t ce
150
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
Notes
537
Address
tces
tnxtc
tceh
tces
tnxtc
tceh
tnxtc
CE
tce
OE
tf
twep
tr
tf
twep
tr
toe
WE
tds
tdh
tds
H'71
Data
tdf
tdh
H'71
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
Figure 21.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Table 21.19
Status Read Mode Return Codes
Pin
FO7
FO3
FO2
FO1
Attribute
Normal end Command
identification error
FO6
Programming Erase
error
error
FO5
FO4
—
—
Programming Valid
or erase
address
count
error
exceeded
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Indications
Normal end:
0
Command
error: 1
Programming Erase
error: 1
error: 1
—
—
Count
exceeded: 1
Abnormal
end: 1
Otherwise: Otherwise: 0
0
Valid
address
error: 1
0
Otherwise:
0
Otherwise: 0
FO0
Otherwise:
0
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
Status Polling
1. In FO7 status polling, FO7 is a flag that indicates the operating status in auto-program or autoerase mode.
2. In FO6 status polling, FO6 is a flag that indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or
auto-erase mode.
Table 21.20
Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin
Internal Operation
in Progress
Abnormal End
—
Normal End
FO7
0
1
0
1
FO6
0
0
1
1
FO0–FO5
0
0
0
0
538
Writer Mode Transition Time: Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation settling
period or the writer mode setup period. After the writer mode setup time, a transition is made to
memory read mode.
Table 21.21
Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State
Item
Symbol
Min
Standby release (oscillation settling time)
t osc1
10
ms
Writer mode setup time
t bmv
10
ms
VCC hold time
t dwn
0
ms
VCC
tosc1
Max
Unit
tdwn
tbmv
Memory
read mode
RES
Notes
Auto-program mode
Auto-erase mode
Command
wait state
Command acceptance
Command
wait state
Normal/
abnormal
end
identification
Figure 21.23 Oscillation Settling Time, Boot Program Transfer Time,
and Power-Down Sequence
Cautions on Memory Programming
1. When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming.
2. When performing programming using writer mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased
in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out autoprogramming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Hitachi.
For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
539
21.6
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Read these precautions before using writer mode, on-board programming mode, or flash memory
emulation by RAM.
(1) Program with the specified voltage and timing.
When using a PROM programmer to reprogram the on-chip flash memory in the single-powersupply model (S-mask model), use a PROM programmer that supports the Hitachi microcomputer
device type with 64-kbyte on-chip flash memory (5.0 V programming voltage), do not set the
programmer to the HN28F101 3.3 V programming voltage and only use the specified socket
adapter. Failure to observe these precautions may result in damage to the device.
(2) Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM
programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the device can occur if the index marks on the PROM programmer socket,
socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(3) Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming.
Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors.
(4) Set H'FF as the PROM programmer buffer data for addresses H'F780 to H'1FFFF.
The H8/3437SF PROM size is 60 kbytes. Addresses H'F780 to H'1FFFF always read H'FF, so if
H'FF is not specified as programmer data, a block error will occur.
(5) Use the recommended algorithms for programming and erasing flash memory.
These algorithms are designed to program and erase without subjecting the device to voltage stress
and without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Before setting the program (P) or erase (E) bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), set
the watchdog timer to ensure that the P or E bit does not remain set for more than the specified
time.
(6) For details on interrupt handling while flash memory is being programmed or erased,
see section 21.4.6, Interrupt Handling during Flash Memory Programming and Erasing.
(7) Cautions on Accessing Flash Memory Control Registers
1. Flash memory control register access state in each operating mode
The H8/3437SF has flash memory control registers located at addresses H'FF80 (FLMCR1),
H'FF81 (FLMCR2), and H'FF83 (EBR2). These registers can only be accessed when the
FLSHE bit is set to 1 in the wait-state control register (WSCR).
Table 21.22 shows the area accessed for the above addresses in each mode, when FLSHE = 0
and when FLSHE = 1.
540
Table 21.22 Area Accessed in Each Mode with FLSHE = 0 and FLSHE = 1
FLSHE = 1
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
Flash memory control register initial values
FLLMCR1 = H'80
FLMCR2 = H'00
EBR2 = H'00
FLSHE = 0
External address space
External address space
Reserved area
(always H'FF)
2. When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2 (expanded mode with on-chip
ROM enabled)
When a flash memory control register is accessed in mode 2, it can be read or written to if
FLSHE = 1, but if FLSHE = 0, external address space will be accessed. It is therefore essential
to confirm that FLSHE is set to 1 before accessing these registers.
3. To check whether FLSHE = 0 or 1 in mode 3 (single-chip mode)
When address H'FF80 is accessed in mode 3, if FLSHE = 1, FLMCR1 is read/written to, and
its initial value after a reset is H'80. When FLSHE = 0, however, this address is a reserved area
that cannot be modified and always reads H'FF.
541
542
Section 22 Power-Down State
22.1
Overview
The H8/3437 Series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by stopping
some or all of the chip functions. The power-down state includes three modes:
1. Sleep mode
2. Software standby mode
3. Hardware standby mode
Table 22.1 lists the conditions for entering and leaving the power-down modes. It also indicates
the status of the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, etc. in each power-down mode.
Table 22.1 Power-Down State
Mode
Sleep
mode
Software
standby
mode
Entering
Procedure
Clock
CPU
CPU
Reg’s.
Sup.
Mod.
RAM
I/O
Ports
Exiting
Methods
Execute
SLEEP
instruction
Run
Halt
Held
Run
Held
Held
• Interrupt
Set SSBY bit
in SYSCR to
1, then
execute
SLEEP
instruction
Halt
• RES
• STBY
Halt
Held
Halt and Held
initialized
Held
• NMI
• IRQ0–IRQ2
IRQ6 (incl.
KEYIN0–
KEYIN15 )
• RES
• STBY
Hardware Set STBY
pin to low
standby
level
mode
Halt
Halt
Not
held
Halt and Held
initialized
High
impedance
state
• STBY and
RES
Notes: 1. SYSCR: System control register
2. SSBY: Software standby bit
543
22.1.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
Four of the eight bits in the system control register (SYSCR) control the power-down state. These
are bit 7 (SSBY) and bits 6 to 4 (STS2 to STS0). See table 22.2.
Table 22.2 System Control Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'09
H'FFC4
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): This bit enables or disables the transition to software standby
mode.
On recovery from the software standby mode by an external interrupt, SSBY remains set to 1. To
clear this bit, software must write a 0.
Bit 7: SSBY
Description
0
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to sleep mode.
1
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode.
544
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the clock settling
time when the chip recovers from software standby mode by an external interrupt. During the
selected time, the clock oscillator runs but the CPU and on-chip supporting modules remain in
standby. Set bits STS2 to STS0 according to the clock frequency to obtain a settling time of at
least 8 ms. See table 22.3.
• ZTAT and Mask ROM Versions
Bit 6: STS2
Bit 5: STS1
Bit 4: STS0
Description
0
0
0
Settling time = 8,192 states
1
Settling time = 16,384 states
0
Settling time = 32,768 states
1
Settling time = 65,536 states
0
—
Settling time = 131,072 states
1
—
Unused
1
1
(Initial value)
• F-ZTAT Version
Bit 6: STS2
Bit 5: STS1
Bit 4: STS0
Description
0
0
0
Settling time = 8,192 states
1
Settling time = 16,384 states
0
Settling time = 32,768 states
1
Settling time = 65,536 states
0
Settling time = 131,072 states
1
Settling time = 1,024 states
—
Unused
1
1
0
1
(Initial value)
Note: When 1,024 states (STS2 to STS0 = 101) is selected, the following points should be noted.
If a period exceeding øp/1,024 (e.g. øp/2,048) is specified when selecting the 8-bit timer,
PWM timer, or watchdog timer clock, the counter in the timer will not count up normally
when 1,024 states is specified for the settling time. To avoid this problem, set the STS value
just before the transition to software standby mode (before executing the SLEEP
instruction), and re-set the value of STS2 to STS0 to a value from 000 to 100 directly after
software standby mode is cleared by an interrupt.
545
22.2
Sleep Mode
22.2.1
Transition to Sleep Mode
When the SSBY bit in the system control register is cleared to 0, execution of the SLEEP
instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. After executing the
SLEEP instruction, the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal registers remain unchanged. The
on-chip supporting modules continue to operate normally.
22.2.2
Exit from Sleep Mode
The chip exits sleep mode when it receives an internal or external interrupt request, or a low input
at the RES or STBY pin.
Exit by Interrupt: An interrupt releases sleep mode and starts the CPU’s interrupt-handling
sequence.
If an interrupt from an on-chip supporting module is disabled by the corresponding enable/disable
bit in the module’s control register, the interrupt cannot be requested, so it cannot wake the chip
up. Similarly, the CPU cannot be awakened by an interrupt other than NMI if the I (interrupt
mask) bit is set when the SLEEP instruction is executed.
Exit by RES Pin: When the RES pin goes low, the chip exits from sleep mode to the reset state.
Exit by STBY Pin: When the STBY pin goes low, the chip exits from sleep mode to hardware
standby mode.
546
22.3
Software Standby Mode
22.3.1
Transition to Software Standby Mode
To enter software standby mode, set the standby bit (SSBY) in the system control register
(SYSCR) to 1, then execute the SLEEP instruction.
In software standby mode, the system clock stops and chip functions halt, including both CPU
functions and the functions of the on-chip supporting modules. Power consumption is reduced to
an extremely low level. The on-chip supporting modules and their registers are reset to their initial
states, but as long as a minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained, the contents of the CPU
registers and on-chip RAM remain unchanged.
22.3.2
Exit from Software Standby Mode
The chip can be brought out of software standby mode by an RES input, STBY input, or external
interrupt input at the NMI pin, IRQ0 to IRQ2 pins, or IRQ6 pin (including KEYIN0 to KEYIN15).
Exit by Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2, or IRQ6 interrupt request signal is input, the
clock oscillator begins operating. After the waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0 of SYSCR, a
stable clock is supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode is released, and interrupt
exception-handling begins. IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, and IRQ7 interrupts should be disabled before the
transition to software standby (clear IRQ3E, IRQ4E, IRQ5E, and IRQ7E to 0).
Exit by RES Pin: When the RES input goes low, the clock oscillator begins operating. When
RES is brought to the high level (after allowing time for the clock oscillator to settle), the CPU
starts reset exception handling. Be sure to hold RES low long enough for clock oscillation to
stabilize.
Exit by STBY Pin: When the STBY input goes low, the chip exits from software standby mode
to hardware standby mode.
547
22.3.3
Clock Settling Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode
Set bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR as follows:
• Crystal oscillator
Set STS2 to STS0 for a settling time of at least 8 ms. Table 22.3 lists the settling times selected
by these bits at several clock frequencies.
• External clock
The STS bits can be set to any value. When 1,024 states (STS2 to STS0 = 101) is selected, the
following points should be noted.
If a period exceeding øp/1,024 (e.g. øp/2,048) is specified when selecting the 8-bit timer,
PWM timer, or watchdog timer clock, the counter in the timer will not count up normally when
1,024 states is specified for the settling time. To avoid this problem, set the STS value just
before the transition to software standby mode (before executing the SLEEP instruction), and
re-set the value of STS2 to STS0 to a value from 000 to 100 directly after software standby
mode is cleared by an interrupt.
Table 22.3 Times Set by Standby Timer Select Bits (Unit: ms)
STS2
STS1
STS0
Settling
Time
(States)
0
0
0
8,192
0.51
0.65
0.8
1.0
1.3
2.0
4.1
8.2
16.4
0
0
1
16,384
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.7
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
0
1
0
32,768
2.0
2.7
3.3
4.1
5.5
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
0
1
1
65,536
4.1
5.5
6.6
8.2
10.9
16.4
32.8
65.5
131.1
1
0
0/—*
131,072
8.2
10.9
13.1
16.4
21.8
32.8
65.5
131.1 262.1
System Clock Frequency (MHz)
16
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
0.5
Notes: 1. All times are in milliseconds.
2. Recommended values are printed in boldface.
* F-ZTAT version/ZTAT and mask-ROM versions
548
22.3.4
Sample Application of Software Standby Mode
In this example the chip enters the software standby mode when NMI goes low and exits when
NMI goes high, as shown in figure 22.1.
The NMI edge bit (NMIEG) in the system control register is originally cleared to 0, selecting the
falling edge. When NMI goes low, the NMI interrupt handling routine sets NMIEG to 1, sets
SSBY to 1 (selecting the rising edge), then executes the SLEEP instruction. The chip enters
software standby mode. It recovers from software standby mode on the next rising edge of NMI.
Clock
oscillator
ø
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
NMI interrupt
handler
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
Software standby
mode (powerdown state)
Settling time
NMI interrupt
handler
SLEEP
Figure 22.1 NMI Timing in Software Standby Mode
549
22.3.5
Application Note
1. The I/O ports retain their current states in software standby mode. If a port is in the high output
state, the current dissipation caused by the output current is not reduced.
•
•
•
BSET
SLEEP
#7, @SYSCR:8
•
•
•
; Sets the SSBY bit
; Executes the SLEEP instruction
Replace the underlined part
(SLEEP instruction) with
the code shown below.
•
•
•
BSET
MOV. W
MOV. W
MOV. W
MOV. W
JSR
#7, @SYSCR:8
#H'0180, R0
R0, @H'FF00
#H'5470, R0
R0, @H'FF02
@H'FF00
•
•
•
; Sets the SSBY bit
; Writes the SLEEP code H'0180
; to the RAM
; Writes the RTS code H'5470
; to the RAM
; Subroutine branch
* Registers and RAM addresses are
arbitrary.
Note: The current responsible for this phenomenon also flows when the mode is changed to
SLEEP mode. In order to reduce current dissipation, therefore, please use the preliminary
remedy for the SLEEP instruction when changing the mode to SLEEP mode.
550
22.4
Hardware Standby Mode
22.4.1
Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
Regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin
goes low.
Hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting the CPU, stopping all
the functions of the on-chip supporting modules, and placing I/O ports in the high-impedance
state. The registers of the on-chip supporting modules are reset to their initial values. Only the onchip RAM is held unchanged, provided the minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained.
Notes: 1. The RAME bit in the system control register should be cleared to 0 before the STBY
pin goes low.
2. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins (MD1, MD0) during hardware standby mode.
Be particularly careful not to let both mode pins go low in hardware standby mode,
since that places the chip in writer mode and increases current dissipation.
22.4.2
Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
Recovery from the hardware standby mode requires inputs at both the STBY and RES pins. When
the STBY pin goes high, the clock oscillator begins running. The RES pin should be low at this
time and should be held low long enough for the clock to stabilize. When the RES pin changes
from low to high, the reset sequence is executed and the chip returns to the program execution
state.
551
22.4.3
Timing Relationships
Figure 22.2 shows the timing relationships in hardware standby mode.
In the sequence shown, first RES goes low, then STBY goes low, at which point the chip enters
hardware standby mode. To recover, first STBY goes high, then after the clock settling time, RES
goes high.
Clock pulse
generator
RES
STBY
Clock settling
time
Restart
Figure 22.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
552
Section 23 Electrical Specifications
23.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 23.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 23.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Rating
Unit
Supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
I/O buffer supply voltage
VCCB
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Flash memory programming
voltage (Dual-power-supply
F-ZTAT™ version)
FV PP
–0.3 to +13.0
V
Programming voltage
VPP
–0.3 to +13.5
V
Pins other than
Vin
ports 7, MD1, P86,
P97, PA7 to PA 4
–0.3 to VCC + 0.3
V
P86, P97,
PA7 to PA 4
Vin
–0.3 to VCCB + 0.3
V
Port 7
Vin
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
MD1
Vin
Dual-power-supply F-ZTAT version:
–0.3 to +13.0
Other versions: –0.3 to V CC + 0.3
V
Reference supply voltage
AVref
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Analog supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
Regular specifications: –20 to +75
˚C
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85
˚C
–55 to +125
˚C
Input voltage
Storage temperature
Tstg
Caution: Exceeding the absolute maximum ratings shown in table 23.1 can permanently destroy
the chip.*
Note: * FV PP must not exceed 13 V and V PP must not exceed 13.5 V, including allowances for peak
overshoot. For the dual-power-supply F-ZTAT version, MD1 must not exceed 13 V, including
an allowance for peak overshoot.
553
23.2
Electrical Characteristics
23.2.1
DC Characteristics
Table 23.2 lists the DC characteristics of the 5-V version. Table 23.3 lists the DC characteristics of
4-V version. Table 23.4 lists the DC characteristics of the 3 V version. Table 23.5 gives the
allowable current output values of the 5-V and 4-V versions. Table 23.6 gives the allowable
current output values of the 3-V version. Bus drive characteristics common to 5-V, 4-V and 3-V
versions are listed in table 23.7.
Table 23.2 DC Characteristics (5-V Version)
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ±10%*1, AVref = 4.5 V to
AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40˚C
to +85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
(1) *7 VT–
Schmitt
P67 to P6 0*4,
trigger input KEYIN15 to
VT+
voltage
KEYIN8,
IRQ2 to IRQ 0*5,
VT+ – VT–
IRQ7 to IRQ 3
Input high
voltage
Input low
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0,
EXTAL, NMI
(2)
Typ
Max
Unit
1.0
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
VCCB × 0.7
0.4
—
—
VCC – 0.7
—
VCC + 0.3
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
VCC × 0.7 —
VCCB × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
P77 to P7 0
2.0
—
AVCC + 0.3
All input pins other
than (1) and (2)
above *7
2.0
—
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
–0.3
—
0.5
PA7 to PA 0
SCL, SDA
–0.3
—
1.0
All input pins other
than (1) and (3)
above
–0.3
—
0.8
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0
(3)
Output high All output pins
voltage
(except RESO) *6, *7
554
VIH
Min
VIL
VOH
VCC – 0.5 —
VCCB – 0.5
—
3.5
—
—
Test
Conditions
V
V
V
I OH = –200 µA
I OH = –1.0 mA
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
VOL
—
—
0.4
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
P17 to P1 0,
P27 to P2 0
—
—
1.0
I OL = 10.0 mA
RESO
—
—
0.4
I OL = 2.6 mA
—
—
10.0
NMI, MD1, MD0
—
—
1.0
P77 to P7 0
—
—
1.0
Item
Output low
voltage
All output pins
(except RESO) *6
Input
leakage
current
RES, STBY
Leakage
current in
three-state
(off state)
Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9,
A, B, RESO *7
| ITSI |
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V,
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCCB – 0.5 V
Input pullup MOS
current
Ports 1 to 3
–I P
30
—
250
µA
Vin = 0 V
60
—
500
—
—
120
pF
Vin = 0 V,
f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
RES, STBY
(except dualpower-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
—
—
60
NMI, MD1
—
—
50
PA7 to PA 4,
P97, P86
—
—
20
All input pins other
than (4)
—
—
15
—
27
45
mA
f = 12 MHz
—
36
60
f = 16 MHz
—
18
30
f = 12 MHz
—
24
40
f = 16 MHz
| Iin |
Ports 6, A, B
Input
STBY (dualcapacitance power-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
(4)
Current
Normal operation
dissipation *2
Sleep mode
Cin
I CC
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
555
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Current
Standby modes *3
*2
dissipation
I CC
—
0.01
5.0
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C
—
—
20.0
Analog
supply
current
AI CC
—
1.2
2.0
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.2
2.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
µA
—
0.3
0.6
mA
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.3
3.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
µA
AVref = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
4.5
—
5.5
V
During
operation
2.0
—
5.5
2.0
—
—
Reference
supply
current
During A/D
conversion
During A/D
conversion
Analog supply voltage*1
RAM standby voltage
AI ref
AVCC
VRAM
50°C < Ta
mA
AVCC = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
While idle or
when not in
use
V
Notes: *1 Even when the A/D and D/A converters are not used, connect AVCC to power supply VCC
and keep the applied voltage between 2.0 V and 5.5 V. At this time, make sure AVref ≤
AVCC.
*2 Current dissipation values assume that V IH min = VCC – 0.5 V, VCCB – 0.5 V, VIL max = 0.5 V,
all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off.
*3 For these values it is assumed that V RAM ≤ VCC < 4.5 V and VIH min = VCC × 0.9,
VCCB × 0.9, VIL max = 0.3 V.
*4 P67 to P6 0 include supporting module inputs multiplexed with them.
*5 IRQ2 includes ADTRG multiplexed with it.
*6 Applies when IICS = IICE = 0. The output low level is determined separately when the
bus drive function is selected.
*7 The characteristics of PA7 to PA 4, KEYIN15 to KEYIN12 , P97/WAIT, SDA, and
P86/IRQ5/SCK1, SCL depend on VCCB; the characteristics of all other pins depend on
VCC.
556
Table 23.3 DC Characteristics (4-V Version)
Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V*1,
AVref = 4.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular
specifications), Ta = –40˚C to +85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1.0
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
VCCB × 0.7
0.4
—
—
0.8
—
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
VCCB × 0.7
VT+ – VT–
0.3
—
—
VIH
VCC – 0.7
—
VCC + 0.3
(1) *7 VT–
Schmitt
P67 to P6 0*4,
trigger input KEYIN15 to,
VT+
voltage
KEYIN8,
IRQ2 to IRQ0*5,
VT+ – VT–
IRQ7 to IRQ3
VT–
+
T
Input high
voltage
Input low
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0,
EXTAL, NMI
(2)
Test
Conditions
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V, VCCB =
4.5 V to 5.5 V
VCC = 4.0 V to
4.5 V, VCCB =
4.0 V to 4.5 V
V
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
VCC × 0.7 —
VCCB × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
P77 to P7 0
2.0
—
AVCC + 0.3
All input pins other
than (1) and (2)
above *7
2.0
—
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
–0.3
—
0.5
–0.3
—
1.0
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V, VCCB =
4.5 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.8
VCC = 4.0 V to
4.5 V, VCCB =
4.0 V to 4.5 V
–0.3
—
0.8
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V, VCCB =
4.5 V to 5.5 V
–0.3
—
0.6
VCC = 4.0 V to
4.5 V, VCCB =
4.0 V to 4.5 V
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0
(3)
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
All input pins other
than (1) and (3)
above *7
VIL
V
557
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
VCC – 0.5 —
VCCB – 0.5
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
3.5
—
—
I OH = –1.0 mA,
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V, VCCB =
4.5 V to 5.5 V
2.8
—
—
I OH = –1.0 mA,
VCC = 4.0 V to
4.5 V, VCCB =
4.0 V to 4.5 V
—
—
0.4
P17 to P1 0,
P27 to P2 0
—
—
1.0
I OL = 10.0 mA
RESO
—
—
0.4
I OL = 2.6 mA
—
—
10.0
NMI, MD1, MD0
—
—
1.0
P77 to P7 0
—
—
1.0
Item
Symbol
Min
Output high All output pins
voltage
(except RESO)*6, *7
VOH
Output low
voltage
All output pins
(except RESO)*6
VOL
Typ
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
Input
leakage
current
RES, STBY
Leakage
current in
three-state
(off state)
Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9,
A, B, RESO *7
| ITSI |
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V,
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCCB – 0.5 V
Input pullup MOS
current
Ports 1 to 3
–I P
µA
Vin = 0 V,
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V, VCCB =
4.5 V to 5.5 V
30
—
250
Ports 6, A, B *7
60
—
500
Ports 1 to 3
20
—
200
40
—
400
Ports 6, A, B
558
| Iin |
*7
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Vin = 0 V,
VCC = 4.0 V to
4.5 V, VCCB =
4.0 V to 4.5 V
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Cin
—
—
120
pF
Vin = 0 V,
f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
RES, STBY
(except dualpower-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
—
—
60
NMI, MD1
—
—
50
PA7 to PA 4,
P97, P8 6
—
—
20
All input pins other
than (4) above
—
—
15
—
27
45
mA
f = 12 MHz
—
36
60
f = 16 MHz,
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V
—
18
30
f = 12 MHz
—
24
40
f = 16 MHz
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V
—
0.01
5.0
—
—
20.0
—
1.2
2.0
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.2
2.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
Input
STBY (dualcapacitance power-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
(4)
Current
Normal operation
dissipation *2
I CC
Sleep mode
Standby modes *3
Analog
supply
current
Test
Conditions
Symbol
During A/D
conversion
AI CC
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C
50°C < Ta
mA
µA
AVCC = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
559
Item
Reference
supply
current
Test
Conditions
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
AI ref
—
0.3
0.6
mA
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.3
3.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
µA
AVref = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
4.0
—
5.5
V
During
operation
2.0
—
5.5
2.0
—
—
During A/D
conversion
Analog supply voltage*1
RAM standby voltage
AVCC
VRAM
While idle or
when not in
use
V
Notes: *1 Even when the A/D and D/A converters are not used, connect AVCC to power supply VCC
and keep the applied voltage between 2.0 V and 5.5 V. At this time, make sure AVref ≤
AVCC.
*2 Current dissipation values assume that V IH min = VCC – 0.5 V, VCCB – 0.5 V, VIL max =
0.5 V, all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off.
*3 For these values it is assumed that V RAM ≤ VCC < 4.0 V and VIH min = VCC × 0.9, VCCB × 0.9,
VIL max = 0.3 V.
*4 P67 to P6 0 include supporting module inputs multiplexed with them.
*5 IRQ2 includes ADTRG multiplexed with it.
*6 Applies when IICS = IICE = 0. The output low level is determined separately when the
bus drive function is selected.
*7 The characteristics of PA7 to PA 4, KEYIN15 to KEYIN12 , P97/WAIT, SDA, and
P86/IRQ5/SCK1, SCL depend on VCCB; the characteristics of all other pins depend on
VCC.
560
Table 23.4 DC Characteristics (3-V Version)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*8, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*8, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*1, *8,
AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C
Item
Symbol
Schmitt
P67 to P6 0*4,
(1) *7 VT–
trigger input KEYIN15 to,
voltage
KEYIN8,
VT+
IRQ2 to IRQ0*5,
IRQ7 to IRQ3
VT+ – VT–
Input high
voltage
Input low
voltage*4
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0,
EXTAL, NMI
(2)
Typ
Max
Unit
VCC × 0.15 —
VCCB × 0.15
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
VCCB × 0.7
0.2
—
—
VCC × 0.9
—
VCC + 0.3
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
VCC × 0.7
—
VCC B × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
P77 to P7 0
AVCC × 0.7 —
AVCC + 0.3
All input pins other
than (1) and (2)
above *7
VCC × 0.7
—
VCCB × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.1
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.15
VCCB × 0.15
All input pins other
than (1) and (3)
above *7
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.15
VCCB × 0.15
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0
(3)
Output high All output pins
voltage
(except RESO)*6, *7
Output low
voltage
VIH
Min
VIL
V
V
VCC – 0.5
—
VCCB – 0.5
—
VCC – 1.0
—
VCCB – 1.0
—
—
—
0.4
P17 to P1 0,
P27 to P2 0
—
—
0.4
I OL = 1.6 mA
RESO
—
—
0.4
I OL = 1.6 mA
All output pins
(except RESO)*6
VOH
Test
Conditions
VOL
V
I OH = –200 µA
I OH = –1 mA
V
I OL = 0.8 mA
561
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
| Iin |
—
—
10.0
µA
NMI, MD1, MD0
—
—
1.0
P77 to P7 0
—
—
1.0
Test
Conditions
Input
leakage
current
RES, STBY
Leakage
current in
three-state
(off state)
Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9,
A, B, RESO *7
| ITSI |
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V,
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCCB – 0.5 V
Input pullup MOS
current
Ports 1 to 3
–I P
3
—
120
µA
30
—
250
Vin = 0 V,
VCC = 2.7 V to
3.6 V, VCCB =
2.7 V to 3.6 V
—
—
120
pF
Vin = 0 V,
f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
RES, STBY
(except dualpower-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
—
—
60
NMI, MD1
—
—
50
PA7 to PA 4,
P97, P8 6
—
—
20
All input pins other
than (4) above
—
—
15
Ports 6, A, B
*7
Input
STBY (dualcapacitance power-supply
F-ZTAT
version)
562
(4)
Cin
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Test
Conditions
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Normal operation
Current
dissipation *2
I CC
—
7
—
mA
—
12
22
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 2.7 V to
3.6 V
—
25
—
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
5
—
f = 6 MHz,
VCC = 2.7 V to
3.6 V
—
9
16
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 2.7 V to
3.6 V
—
18
—
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
0.01
5.0
—
—
20.0
—
1.2
2.0
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.2
2.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
µA
—
0.3
0.6
mA
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.3
3.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
Sleep mode
Standby modes *3
Analog
supply
current
Reference
supply
current
During A/D
conversion
During A/D
conversion
AI CC
AI ref
µA
f = 6 MHz,
VCC = 2.7 V to
3.6 V
Ta ≤ 50°C
50°C < Ta
mA
µA
AVCC = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
AVref = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
563
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Analog supply voltage*1
AVCC
2.7
—
5.5
V
2.0
—
5.5
2.0
—
—
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
Test
Conditions
During
operation
While idle or
when not in
use
V
Notes: *1 Even when the A/D and D/A converters are not used, connect AVCC to power supply VCC
and keep the applied voltage between 2.0 V and 5.5 V. At this time, make sure AVref ≤
AVCC.
*2 Current dissipation values assume that V IH min = VCC – 0.5 V, VCCB – 0.5 V, VIL max =
0.5 V, all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off.
*3 For these values it is assumed that V RAM ≤ VCC < 2.7 V and VIH min = VCC × 0.9, VCCB × 0.9,
VIL max = 0.3 V.
*4 P67 to P6 0 include supporting module inputs multiplexed with them.
*5 IRQ2 includes ADTRG multiplexed with it.
*6 Applies when IICS = IICE = 0. The output low level is determined separately when the
bus drive function is selected.
*7 The characteristics of PA7 to PA 4, KEYIN15 to KEYIN12 , P97/WAIT, SDA, and
P86/IRQ5/SCK1, SCL depend on VCCB; the characteristics of all other pins depend on
VCC.
*8 In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to
5.5 V.
564
Table 23.5 Allowable Output Current Values (5-V and 4-V Versions)
Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 4.0 V
to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications),
Ta = –40˚C to +85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Allowable output low
current (per pin)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCL, SDA, PA4 to PA 7 I OL
(bus drive selection)
—
—
20
mA
Ports 1 and 2
—
—
10
RESO
—
—
3
Other output pins
—
—
2
—
—
80
—
—
120
ΣIOL
Allowable output low
current (total)
Ports 1 and 2, total
Allowable output high
current (per pin)
All output pins
–I OH
—
—
2
mA
Allowable output high
current (total)
Total of all output
Σ–IOH
—
—
40
mA
Total of all output
mA
565
Table 23.6 Allowable Output Current Values (3-V Version)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, AVref = 2.7
V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C
Item
Symbol
Allowable output low
current (per pin)
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCL, SDA, PA4 to PA 7 I OL
(bus drive selection)
—
—
10
mA
Ports 1 and 2
—
—
2
RESO
—
—
1
Other output pins
—
—
1
Allowable output low
current (total)
Ports 1 and 2, total
Allowable output high
current (per pin)
All output pins
Allowable output high
current (total)
Total of all output
ΣIOL
—
—
40
—
—
60
–I OH
—
—
2
mA
Σ–IOH
—
—
30
mA
Total of all output
mA
Note: To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current
values in tables 23.5 and 23.6. In particular, when driving a darlington transistor pair or LED
directly, be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 23.1 and
23.2.
* In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to
5.5 V.
H8/3437
2 kΩ
Port
Darlington
transistor
Figure 23.1 Example of Circuit for Driving a Darlington Transistor (5-V Version)
566
H8/3437
VCC
600 Ω
Ports 1 or 2
LED
Figure 23.2 Example of Circuit for Driving an LED (5-V Version)
Table 23.7 Bus Drive Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75°C
Item
Output low
level voltage
SCL, SDA
PA4 to PA 7
(bus drive
selection)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
VOL
—
—
0.5
V
VCCB = 5 V ±10%
I OL = 16 mA
—
—
0.5
VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*
I OL = 8 mA
—
—
0.4
VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*
I OL = 3 mA
Note: * In the F-ZTAT LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
23.2.2
AC Characteristics
The AC characteristics are listed in four tables. Bus timing parameters are given in table 23.8,
control signal timing parameters in table 23.9, timing parameters of the on-chip supporting
modules in table 23.10, I2C bus timing parameters in table 23.11, and external clock output
stabilization delay time in table 23.12.
567
Table 23.8 Bus Timing
Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C
(wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C
(wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*3, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*3, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to
maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C
Condition C
Condition B
Condition A
10 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Clock cycle time
tcyc
100
500
83.3
500
62.5
500
ns
Fig. 23.7
Clock pulse width low
tCL
30
—
30
—
20
—
ns
Clock pulse width high
tCH
30
—
30
—
20
—
ns
Clock rise time
tCr
—
20
—
10
—
10
ns
Clock fall time
tCf
—
20
—
10
—
10
ns
Address delay time
tAD
—
50
—
35
—
30
ns
Address hold time
tAH
20
—
15
—
10
—
ns
Address strobe delay time tASD
—
50
—
35
—
30
ns
Write strobe delay time
tWSD
—
50
—
35
—
30
ns
tSD
—
50
—
35
—
30
ns
Strobe delay time
Write strobe pulse width
*1
tWSW
110
—
90
—
60
—
ns
*1
tAS1
15
—
10
—
10
—
ns
Address setup time 2*1
tAS2
65
—
50
—
40
—
ns
Read data setup time
tRDS
35
—
20
—
20
—
ns
tRDH
0
—
0
—
0
—
ns
tACC
—
170
—
160
—
110
ns
tWDD
—
80/75*2
—
65/60*2
—
60
ns
—
ns
Address setup time 1
Read data hold time
*1
Read data access time
Write data delay time
*1
Write data setup time
tWDS
0/5
Write data hold time
tWDH
Wait setup time
Wait hold time
*2
—
0/5
20
—
tWTS
40
tWTH
10
*2
*2
—
0/5
20
—
20
—
ns
—
35
—
30
—
ns
—
10
—
10
—
ns
Notes: *1 Values at maximum operating frequency
*2 H8/3437 F-ZTAT version/other products
*3 In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
568
Fig. 23.8
Table 23.9 Control Signal Timing
Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40˚C to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40˚C to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to
maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C
Condition C
Condition B
Condition A
10 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
RES setup time
tRESS
300
—
200
—
200
—
ns
Fig. 23.9
RES pulse width
tRESW
10
—
10
—
10
—
tcyc
RESO output delay time
tRESD
—
200
—
120
—
100
ns
RESO output pulse width
tRESOW
132
—
132
—
132
—
tcyc
NMI setup time
(NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7)
tNMIS
300
—
150
—
150
—
ns
NMI hold time
(NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7)
tNMIH
10
—
10
—
10
—
ns
Interrupt pulse width for
recovery from software
standby mode
(NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6)
tNMIW
300
—
200
—
200
—
ns
Crystal oscillator settling
time (reset)
tOSC1
20
—
20
—
20
—
ms
Fig. 23.11
Crystal oscillator settling
time (software standby)
tOSC2
8
—
8
—
8
—
ms
Fig. 23.12
Fig. 23.25
Fig. 23.10
Note: * In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
569
Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristics
5V
RL
LSI
output pin
RH
C = 90 pF: Ports 1–4, 6, 9, A, B
30 pF: Ports 5, 8
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
C
Input/output timing measurement levels
Low: 0.8 V
High: 2.0 V
Figure 23.3 Measurement Conditions for A/C Characteristics
570
Table 23.10
Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40˚C to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40˚C to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to
maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C
Condition C
Condition B
10 MHz
Condition A
12 MHz
16 MHz
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Timer output delay
time
tFTOD
—
150
—
100
—
100
ns
Fig. 23.13
Timer input setup
time
tFTIS
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
Timer clock input
setup time
tFTCS
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
Timer clock pulse
width
tFTCWH
tFTCWL
1.5
—
1.5
—
1.5
—
tcyc
Timer output delay
time
tTMOD
—
150
—
100
—
100
ns
Fig. 23.15
Timer reset input
setup time
tTMRS
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
Fig. 23.17
Timer clock input
setup time
tTMCS
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
Fig. 23.16
Timer clock pulse
width (single edge)
tTMCWH
1.5
—
1.5
—
1.5
—
tcyc
Timer clock pulse
width (both edges)
tTMCWL
2.5
—
2.5
—
2.5
—
tcyc
PWM
Timer output delay
time
tPWOD
—
150
—
100
—
100
ns
Fig. 23.18
SCI
Input clock (Async) tScyc
cycle
(Sync)
4
—
4
—
4
—
tcyc
Fig. 23.19
Item
FRT
TMR
6
—
6
—
6
—
tcyc
Transmit data delay tTXD
time (Sync)
—
200
—
100
—
100
ns
Receive data setup
time (Sync)
tRXS
150
—
100
—
100
—
ns
Receive data hold
time (Sync)
tRXH
150
—
100
—
100
—
ns
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.6
tScyc
Fig. 23.14
Fig. 23.20
571
HIF
read
cycle
HIF
write
cycle
Condition B
Condition A
10 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
Output data delay
time
tPWD
—
150
—
100
—
100
ns
Fig. 23.21
Input data setup
time
tPRS
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
Input data hold time tPRH
80
—
50
—
50
—
ns
CS/HA0 setup time
tHAR
10
—
10
—
10
—
ns
CS/HA0 hold time
tHRA
10
—
10
—
10
—
ns
IOR pulse width
tHRPW
220
—
120
—
120
—
ns
HDB delay time
tHRD
—
200
—
100
—
100
ns
HDB hold time
tHRF
0
40
0
25
0
25
ns
HIRQ delay time
tHIRQ
—
200
—
120
—
120
ns
CS/HA0 setup time
tHAW
10
—
10
—
10
—
ns
CS/HA0 hold time
tHWA
10
—
10
—
10
—
ns
IOW pulse width
tHWPW
100
—
60
—
60
—
ns
HDB
setup
time
tHDW
50
—
30
—
30
—
ns
85
—
55
—
45
—
Item
Ports
Condition C
High-speed
GATE A20
not used
High-speed
GATE A20
used
HDB hold time
tHWD
25
—
15
—
15
—
ns
GA 20 delay time
tHGA
—
180
—
90
—
90
ns
Note: * In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
572
Fig. 23.22
Fig. 23.23
Table 23.11
I2C Bus Timing
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C,
ø ≥ 5 MHz
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCL clock
cycle time
t SCL
12 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL clock
high pulse
width
t SCLH
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL clock
low pulse
width
t SCLL
5 tcyc
—
—
ns
—
—
1000
ns
20 + 0.1Cb
—
300
—
—
300
20 + 0.1Cb
—
300
SDA bus-free t BUF
time
5 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL start
condition
hold time
t STAH
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL resend
t STAS
start condition
setup time
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SDA stop
condition
setup time
t STOS
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SDA data
setup time
t SDAS
0.5 t cyc
—
—
ns
SDA data
hold time
t SDAH
0
—
—
ns
SDA load
capacitance
Cb
—
—
400
pF
SCL and SDA t Sr
rise time
SCL and SDA t Sf
fall time
Test Conditions
Note
Fig. 23.24
Normal mode
100 kbits/s (max)
High-speed mode
400 kbits/s (max)
ns
Normal mode
100 kbits/s (max)
High-speed mode
400 kbits/s (max)
Note: * In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
573
Table 23.12
External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –40°C to
+85°C
Item
External clock output stabilization
delay time
Symbol
t
*1
DEXT
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
500
—
µs
Figure 23.26
Notes: *1 t DEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (t RESW).
*2 In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V.
574
23.2.3
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 23.13 lists the characteristics of the on-chip A/D converter.
Table 23.13
A/D Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ±10%, AVref = 4.5 V to
AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating frequency,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (wide-range
specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 4.0 V
to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating frequency,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (wide-range
specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2,
AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*2, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating
frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C
Item
Condition C
Condition B
Condition A
10 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Bits
—
—
13.4
—
—
11.2
—
—
8.4
µs
Analog input capacitance
—
—
20
—
—
20
—
—
20
pF
Allowable signal source
impedance
—
—
5
—
—
10
—
—
10
kΩ
Nonlinearity error
—
—
±6.0
—
—
±3.0
—
—
±3.0
LSB
Offset error
—
—
±4.0
—
—
±3.5
—
—
±3.5
LSB
Full-scale error
—
—
±4.0
—
—
±3.5
—
—
±3.5
LSB
Quantizing error
—
—
±0.5
—
—
±0.5
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute accuracy
—
—
±8.0
—
—
±4.0
—
—
±4.0
LSB
Resolution
Conversion (single mode)
*1
Notes: *1 Values at maximum operating frequency
*2 In the F-ZTAT LH version, VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to
5.5 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
575
23.2.4
D/A Converter Characteristics
Table 23.14 lists the characteristics of the on-chip D/A converter.
Table 23.14
D/A Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VCCB = 5.0 V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ±10%, AVref = 4.5 V to
AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating frequency,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (wide-range
specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVref = 4.0 V
to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating frequency,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (wide-range
specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VCCB = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*,
AVref = 2.7 V to AVCC*, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating
frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C
Condition C
Condition B
Condition A
10 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
Item
Min
Typ Max
Min
Typ Max
Min
Test
Typ Max Unit Conditions
Resolution
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Conversion time
(settling time)
—
—
10.0
—
—
10.0
—
—
10.0 µs
Absolute accuracy
—
±2.0 ±3.0
—
±1.0 ±1.5
—
±1.0 ±1.5 LSB 2 MΩ load
resistance
—
—
—
—
—
—
±2.0
±1.0
Bits
30 pF load
capacitance
±1.0 LSB 4 MΩ load
resistance
Note: * In the F-ZTAT LH version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V,
AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC.
576
23.2.5
Flash Memory Characteristics (H8/3437SF Only)
Table 23.15 shows the flash memory characteristics.
Table 23.15 Flash Memory Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = 0 to +75°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Programming time*1, *2, *4
tP
—
10
200
ms/
32 bytes
Erase time*1, *3, *5
tE
—
100
1200
ms/
block
Reprogramming count
NWEC
—
—
100
Times
Programming Wait time after
SWE-bit setting*1
x
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PSU-bit setting*1
y
50
—
—
µs
Wait time after
P-bit setting *1, *4
z
150
—
500
µs
Wait time after
P-bit clear*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PSU-bit clear*1
β
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PV-bit setting *1
γ
4
—
—
µs
Wait time after
dummy write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PV-bit clear *1
η
4
—
—
µs
Maximum
programming
count*1, *4, *5
N
—
—
403
Times
Test
Condition
577
Item
Erase
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Wait time after
SWE-bit setting*1
x
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
ESU-bit setting*1
y
200
—
—
µs
Wait time after
E-bit setting *1, *6
z
5
—
10
ms
Wait time after
E-bit clear*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
ESU-bit clear*1
β
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
EV-bit setting *1
γ
20
—
—
µs
Wait time after
dummy write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after
EV-bit clear *1
η
5
—
—
µs
Maximum erase
count*1, *6, *7
N
—
—
120
Times
Test
Condition
tE = 10 ms
Notes: *1 Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms.
*2 Programming time per 32 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in FLMCR1
is set. It does not include the programming verification time.)
*3 Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does
not include the erase verification time.)
*4 Maximum programming time (tP (max) = wait time after P-bit setting (z) × maximum
programming count (N))
Set the wait time after P-bit setting (z) to the minimum value of 150 µs when the write
counter in the 32-byte write algorithm is between 1 and 4.
*5 Number of times when the wait time after P-bit setting (z) = 150 µs or 500 µs.
The number of writes should be set according to the actual set value of (z) to allow
programming within the maximum programming time (tP).
*6 Maximum erase time (tE (max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) × maximum erase
count (N))
*7 Number of times when the wait time after E-bit setting (z) = 10 ms.
The number of erases should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow
erasing within the maximum erase time (tE).
578
23.3
Absolute Maximum Ratings (H8/3437SF Low-Voltage Version)
Table 23.16 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 23.16 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Supply voltage
VCC
- 0.3 to + 7.0
V
Input output Buffer for Supply
voltage
VCCB
- 0.3 to + 7.0
V
Input voltage
(except port 7, P86, P97,
PA7 to PA4)
Vin
- 0.3 to V CC + 0.3
V
Input voltage
(P86, P97, PA7 to PA4)
Vin
- 0.3 to V CCB + 0.3
V
Input voltage (Port 7)
Vin
- 0.3 to AV CC + 0.3
V
Reference supply voltage
AVref
- 0.3 to AV CC + 0.3
V
Analog supply voltage
AVCC
- 0.3 to + 7.0
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
- 0.3 to AV CC + 0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
- 20 to + 75
°C
Storage temperature
Tstg
- 55 to + 125
°C
Caution: Exceeding the absolute maximum ratings shown in table above can permanently destroy
the chip.
579
23.4
Electrical Characteristics (H8/3437SF Low-Voltage Version)
23.4.1
DC Characteristics
Table 23.17 lists the DC characteristics. Table 23.18 gives the allowable current output values.
Bus drive characteristics common listed in table 23.19.
Table 23.17 DC Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V*1,
AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular
specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Schmitt
P67 to P6 0*4,
(1) *7 VT–
KEYIN
trigger input
15 to,
voltage
KEYIN8,
VT+
IRQ2 to IRQ0*5,
IRQ7 to IRQ3
VT+ – VT–
Input high
voltage
Input low
voltage*4
580
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0,
EXTAL, NMI
(2)
VIH
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VCC × 0.15 —
VCCB × 0.15
—
V
—
—
VCC × 0.7
VCCB × 0.7
0.2
—
—
VCC × 0.9
—
VCC + 0.3
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
VCC × 0.7
—
VCC B × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
P77 to P7 0
VCC × 0.7
—
AVCC + 0.3
All input pins other
than (1) and (2)
above *7
VCC × 0.7
—
VCCB × 0.7
VCC + 0.3
VCCB + 0.3
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.1
PA7 to PA 0*7
SCL, SDA
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.15
VCCB × 0.15
All input pins other
than (1) and (3)
above *7
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.15
VCCB × 0.15
RES, STBY,
MD1, MD0
(3)
VIL
V
V
Test
Conditions
Max
Unit
Test
Conditions
VCC – 0.5
—
VCCB – 0.5
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
VCC – 1.0
—
VCCB – 1.0
—
—
—
0.4
P17 to P1 0,
P27 to P2 0
—
—
0.4
I OL = 1.6 mA
RESO
—
—
0.4
I OL = 1.6 mA
—
—
10.0
NMI, MD1, MD0
—
—
1.0
P77 to P7 0
—
—
1.0
Item
Symbol
Min
Output high All output pins
voltage
(except RESO)*6, *7
VOH
Output low
voltage
All output pins
(except RESO)*6
VOL
Typ
I OH = –1 mA
V
I OL = 0.8 mA
Input
leakage
current
RES, STBY
Leakage
current in
three-state
(off state)
Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9,
A, B, RESO *7
| ITSI |
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V,
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCCB – 0.5 V
Input pullup MOS
current
Ports 1 to 3
–I P
3
—
120
µA
30
—
250
Vin = 0 V,
VCC = 3.0 V to
3.6 V, VCCB =
3.0 V to 3.6 V
—
—
60
pF
NMI, MD1
—
—
50
Vin = 0 V,
f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
PA7 to PA 4,
P97, P8 6
—
—
20
All input pins other
than (4) above
—
—
15
Ports 6, A, B
Input
STBY, RES
capacitance
| Iin |
*7
(4)
Cin
µA
Vin = 0.5 V to
VCC – 0.5 V
Vin = 0.5 V to
AVCC – 0.5 V
581
Test
Conditions
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Normal operation
Current
dissipation *2
I CC
—
7
—
mA
—
12
22
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 3.0 V to
3.6 V
—
25
—
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V
—
5
—
f = 6 MHz,
VCC = 3.0 V to
3.6 V
—
9
16
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 3.0 V to
3.6 V
—
18
—
f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 4.5 V to
5.5 V
—
0.01
5.0
—
—
20.0
—
1.2
2.0
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.2
2.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
µA
—
0.3
0.6
mA
During A/D and D/A
conversion
—
1.3
3.0
A/D and D/A
conversion idle
—
0.01
5.0
Sleep mode
Standby modes *3
Analog
supply
current
Reference
supply
current
582
During A/D
conversion
During A/D
conversion
AI CC
AI ref
µA
f = 6 MHz,
VCC = 3.0 V to
3.6 V
Ta ≤ 50°C
50°C < Ta
mA
µA
AVCC = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
AVref = 2.0 V
to 5.5 V
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Analog supply voltage*1
AVCC
3.0
—
5.5
V
2.0
—
5.5
2.0
—
—
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
Test
Conditions
During
operation
While idle or
when not in
use
V
Notes: *1 Even when the A/D and D/A converters are not used, connect AVCC to power supply VCC
and keep the applied voltage between 2.0 V and 5.5 V. At this time, make sure AVref ≤
AVCC.
*2 Current dissipation values assume that V IH min = VCC – 0.5 V, VCCB – 0.5 V, VIL max =
0.5 V, all output pins are in the no-load state, and all input pull-up transistors are off.
*3 For these values it is assumed that V RAM ≤ VCC < 3.0 V and VIH min = VCC × 0.9, VCCB × 0.9,
VIL max = 0.3 V.
*4 P67 to P6 0 include supporting module inputs multiplexed with them.
*5 IRQ2 includes ADTRG multiplexed with it.
*6 Applies when IICS = IICE = 0. The output low level is determined separately when the
bus drive function is selected.
*7 The characteristics of PA7 to PA 4, KEYIN15 to KEYIN12 , P97/WAIT, SDA, and
P86/IRQ5/SCK1, SCL depend on VCCB; the characteristics of all other pins depend on
VCC.
583
Table 23.18 Allowable Output Current Values
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V,
AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular
specifications), Ta = –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item
Symbol
Allowable output low
current (per pin)
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCL, SDA, PA4 to PA 7 I OL
(bus drive selection)
—
—
10
mA
Ports 1 and 2
—
—
2
RESO
—
—
1
Other output pins
—
—
1
—
—
40
—
—
60
ΣIOL
Allowable output low
current (total)
Ports 1 and 2, total
Allowable output high
current (per pin)
All output pins
–I OH
—
—
2
mA
Allowable output high
current (total)
Total of all output
Σ–IOH
—
—
30
mA
Total of all output
mA
Note: To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current
values in table 23.19. In particular, when driving a darlington transistor pair or LED directly,
be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 23.4 and 23.5.
H8/3437
2 kΩ
Port
Darlington
transistor
Figure 23.4 Example of Circuit for Driving a Darlington Transistor (5-V Version)
584
H8/3437
VCC
600 Ω
Ports 1 or 2
LED
Figure 23.5 Example of Circuit for Driving an LED (5-V Version)
Table 23.19 Bus Drive Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20˚C to +75°C
Item
Output low
level voltage
23.4.2
SCL, SDA
PA4 to PA 7
(bus drive
selection)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
VOL
—
—
0.5
V
VCCB = 5 V ±10%
I OL = 16 mA
—
—
0.5
VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
I OL = 8 mA
—
—
0.4
VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
I OL = 3 mA
AC Characteristics
The AC characteristics are listed in four tables. Bus timing parameters are given in table 23.20,
control signal timing parameters in table 23.21, timing parameters of the on-chip supporting
modules in table 23.22, I2C bus timing parameters in table 23.23, and external clock output
stabilization delay time in table 23.24.
585
Table 23.20 Bus Timing
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C
(wide-range specifications)
Condition
10MHz
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Clock cycle time
t cyc
100
500
ns
Fig. 23.7
Clock pulse width low
t CL
30
—
ns
Clock pulse width high
t CH
30
—
ns
Clock rise time
t Cr
—
20
ns
Clock fall time
t Cf
—
20
ns
Address delay time
t AD
—
50
ns
Address hold time
t AH
20
—
ns
Address strobe delay time
t ASD
—
50
ns
Write strobe delay time
t WSD
—
50
ns
Strobe delay time
t SD
—
50
ns
Write strobe pulse width*
t WSW
110
—
ns
Address setup time 1*
t AS1
15
—
ns
Address setup time 2*
t AS2
65
—
ns
Read data setup time
t RDS
35
—
ns
Read data hold time*
t RDH
0
—
ns
Read data access time*
t ACC
—
170
ns
Write data delay time
t WDD
—
75
ns
Write data setup time
t WDS
5
—
ns
Write data hold time
t WDH
20
—
ns
Wait setup time
t WTS
40
—
ns
Wait hold time
t WTH
10
—
ns
Note: * Values at maximum operating frequency
586
Fig. 23.8
Table 23.21 Control Signal Timing
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition
10MHz
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
RES setup time
t RESS
300
—
ns
Fig. 23.9
RES pulse width
t RESW
10
—
t cyc
RESO output delay time
t RESD
—
200
ns
RESO output pulse width
t RESOW
132
—
t cyc
NMI setup time (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7)
t NMIS
300
—
ns
NMI hold time (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7)
t NMIH
10
—
ns
Interrupt pulse width for recovery
from software standby mode
(NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6)
t NMIW
300
—
ns
Crystal oscillator settling time
(reset)
t OSC1
20
—
ms
Fig. 23.11
Crystal oscillator settling time
(software standby)
t OSC2
8
—
ms
Fig. 23.12
Fig. 23.25
Fig. 23.10
Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristics
5V
RL
LSI
output pin
RH
C = 90 pF: Ports 1–4, 6, 9, A, B
30 pF: Ports 5, 8
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
C
Input/output timing measurement levels
Low: 0.8 V
High: 2.0 V
Figure 23.6 Measurement Conditions for A/C Characteristics
587
Table 23.22 Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum
operating frequency, Ta = –20˚C to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to
+85˚C (wide-range specifications)
Condition
10MHz
Item
FRT
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
Timer output delay time
tFTOD
—
150
ns
Fig. 23.13
Timer input setup time
tFTIS
80
—
ns
Timer clock input setup time
tFTCS
80
—
ns
Timer clock pulse width
tFTCWH
1.5
—
tcyc
tTMOD
—
150
ns
Fig. 23.15
Timer reset input setup time
tTMRS
80
—
ns
Fig. 23.17
Timer clock input setup time
tTMCS
80
—
ns
Fig. 23.16
Timer clock pulse width
(single edge)
tTMCWH
1.5
—
tcyc
Timer clock pulse width
(both edges)
tTMCWL
2.5
—
tcyc
Fig. 23.14
tFTCWL
TMR
Timer output delay time
PWM
Timer output delay time
tPWOD
—
150
ns
Fig. 23.18
SCI
Input clock cycle
tScyc
4
—
tcyc
Fig. 23.19
6
—
tcyc
tTXD
—
200
ns
Receive data setup time (Sync)
tRXS
150
—
ns
Receive data hold time (Sync)
tRXH
150
—
ns
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
tScyc
Fig. 23.20
Output data delay time
tPWD
—
150
ns
Fig. 23.21
Input data setup time
tPRS
80
—
ns
Input data hold time
tPRH
80
—
ns
CS/HA0 setup time
tHAR
10
—
ns
CS/HA0 hold time
tHRA
10
—
ns
IOR pulse width
tHRPW
220
—
ns
HDB delay time
tHRD
—
200
ns
HDB hold time
tHRF
0
40
ns
HIRQ delay time
tHIRQ
—
200
ns
(Async)
(Sync)
Transmit data delay time (Sync)
Ports
HIF read
cycle
588
Fig. 23.22
Item
HIF write
cycle
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
CS/HA0 setup time
tHAW
10
—
ns
Fig. 23.23
CS/HA0 hold time
tHWA
10
—
ns
IOW pulse width
tHWPW
100
—
ns
HDB setup
time
tHDW
50
—
ns
85
—
High-speed
GATE A20 not
used
High-speed
GATE A20 used
HDB hold time
tHWD
25
—
ns
GA 20 delay time
tHGA
—
180
ns
589
Table 23.23
I2C Bus Timing
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C
(regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (wide-range specifications),
ø = 5 MHz to maximum operating frequency
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
SCL clock
cycle time
t SCL
12 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL clock
high pulse
width
t SCLH
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL clock
low pulse
width
t SCLL
5 tcyc
—
—
ns
—
—
1000
ns
20 + 0.1Cb
—
300
—
—
300
20 + 0.1Cb
—
300
SDA bus-free t BUF
time
5 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL start
condition
hold time
t STAH
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SCL resend
t STAS
start condition
setup time
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SDA stop
condition
setup time
t STOS
3 tcyc
—
—
ns
SDA data
setup time
t SDAS
0.5 t cyc
—
—
ns
SDA data
hold time
t SDAH
0
—
—
ns
SDA load
capacitance
Cb
—
—
400
pF
SCL and SDA t Sr
rise time
SCL and SDA t Sf
fall time
590
Test Conditions
Fig. 23.24
Normal mode
100 kbits/s (max)
High-speed mode
400 kbits/s (max)
ns
Note
Normal mode
100 kbits/s (max)
High-speed mode
400 kbits/s (max)
Table 23.24
External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –40°C to +85°C
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
External clock output stabilization
delay time
t DEXT*
500
—
µs
Figure 23.26
Note: * tDEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (t RESW).
23.4.3
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 23.25 lists the characteristics of the on-chip A/D converter.
Table 23.25
A/D Converter Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V,
AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating
frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (widerange specifications)
Condition
10 MHz
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
Bits
Conversion (single mode)*
—
—
13.4
µs
Analog input capacitance
—
—
20
pF
Allowable signal source impedance
—
—
5
kΩ
Nonlinearity error
—
—
±6.0
LSB
Offset error
—
—
±4.0
LSB
Full-scale error
—
—
±4.0
LSB
Quantizing error
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute accuracy
—
—
±8.0
LSB
Note: * Values at maximum operating frequency
591
23.4.4
D/A Converter Characteristics
Table 23.26 lists the characteristics of the on-chip D/A converter.
Table 23.26
D/A Converter Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V,
AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 2.0 MHz to maximum operating
frequency, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (regular specifications), Ta = –40 to +85˚C (widerange specifications)
Condition
10 MHz
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
8
8
8
Bits
Conversion time (settling time)
—
—
10.0
µs
30 pF load capacitance
Absolute accuracy
—
±2.0
±3.0
LSB
2 MΩ load resistance
—
—
±2.0
LSB
4 MΩ load resistance
592
Test Conditions
23.4.5
Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 23.27 shows the flash memory characteristics.
Table 23.27 Flash Memory Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, V CCB = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, AVref = 3.0 to AVCC, Ta = 0 to +75°C (programming/erasing
operation temperature), Ta = 0 to +85˚C
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Programming time*1, *2, *4
tP
—
10
200
ms/
32 bytes
Erase time*1, *3, *5
tE
—
100
1200
ms/
block
Reprogramming count
NWEC
—
—
100
Times
Programming Wait time after
SWE-bit setting*1
x
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PSU-bit setting*1
y
50
—
—
µs
Wait time after
P-bit setting *1, *4
z
150
—
500
µs
Wait time after
P-bit clear*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PSU-bit clear*1
β
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PV-bit setting *1
γ
4
—
—
µs
Wait time after
dummy write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after
PV-bit clear *1
η
4
—
—
µs
Maximum
programming
count*1, *4, *5
N
—
—
403
Times
Test
Condition
593
Item
Erase
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Wait time after
SWE-bit setting*1
x
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
ESU-bit setting*1
y
200
—
—
µs
Wait time after
E-bit setting *1, *6
z
5
—
10
ms
Wait time after
E-bit clear*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
ESU-bit clear*1
β
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after
EV-bit setting *1
γ
20
—
—
µs
Wait time after
dummy write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after
EV-bit clear *1
η
5
—
—
µs
Maximum erase
count*1, *6, *7
N
—
—
120
Times
Test
Condition
tE = 10 ms
Notes: *1 Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms.
*2 Programming time per 32 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in FLMCR1
is set. It does not include the programming verification time.)
*3 Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does
not include the erase verification time.)
*4 Maximum programming time (tP (max) = wait time after P-bit setting (z) × maximum
programming count (N))
Set the wait time after P-bit setting (z) to the minimum value of 150 µs when the write
counter in the 32-byte write algorithm is between 1 and 4.
*5 Number of times when the wait time after P-bit setting (z) = 150 µs or 500 µs.
The number of writes should be set according to the actual set value of (z) to allow
programming within the maximum programming time (tP).
*6 Maximum erase time (tE (max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) × maximum erase
count (N))
*7 Number of times when the wait time after E-bit setting (z) = 10 ms.
The number of erases should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow
erasing within the maximum erase time (tE).
594
23.5
MCU Operational Timing
This section provides the following timing charts:
23.5.1 Bus Timing
23.5.2 Control Signal Timing
23.5.3 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
23.5.4 8-Bit Timer Timing
23.5.5 PWM Timer Timing
23.5.6 SCI Timing
23.5.7 I/O Port Timing
23.5.8 Host Interface Timing
23.5.9 I2C Bus Timing
23.5.10 Reset Output Timing
23.5.11 External Clock Output Timing
23.5.1
Figures 23.7 and 23.8
Figures 23.9 to 23.12
Figures 23.13 and 23.14
Figures 23.15 to 23.17
Figure 23.18
Figures 23.19 and 23.20
Figure 23.21
Figures 23.22 and 23.23
Figure 23.24
Figure 23.25
Figure 23.26
Bus Timing
(1) Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
T1
T2
T3
t cyc
t CH
tCL
ø
t Cf
t AD
t Cr
A15 to A0
t ASD
t SD
t AH
t ASI
AS, RD
D7 to D0
(read)
t WSD
t AS2
tRDH
tRDS
t ACC
t SD
tWSW
t AH
WR
tWDD
t WDS
t WDH
D7 to D0
(write)
Figure 23.7 Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
595
(2) Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
T2
T1
TW
T3
ø
A15 to A0
AS, RD
D7 to D0
(read)
WR
D7 to D0
(write)
t WTS
t WTH
t WTS t WTH
WAIT
Figure 23.8 Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
23.5.2
Control Signal Timing
(1) Reset Input Timing
ø
tRESS
tRESS
RES
tRESW
Figure 23.9 Reset Input Timing
596
(2) Interrupt Input Timing
ø
tNMIS
NMI
IRQE (edge)
tNMIH
tNMIS
IRQL (level)
tNMIW
NMI
IRQi
Note: i = 0 to 7; IRQE: IRQi when edge-sensed; IRQL: IRQi when level-sensed
Figure 23.10 Interrupt Input Timing
(3) Clock Settling Timing
ø
VCC
STBY
tOSC1
tOSC1
RES
Figure 23.11 Clock Settling Timing
597
(4) Clock Settling Timing for Recovery from Software Standby Mode
ø
NMI
IRQi
tOSC2
(i = 0, 1, 2, 6)
Figure 23.12 Clock Settling Timing for Recovery from Software Standby Mode
23.5.3
16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
(1) Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
ø
Free-running Compare-match
timer counter
tFTOD
FTOA , FTOB
tFTIS
FTIA, FTIB,
FTIC, FTID
Figure 23.13 Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
598
(2) External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timer
ø
tFTCS
FTCI
tFTCWL
tFTCWH
Figure 23.14 External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timer
23.5.4
8-Bit Timer Timing
(1) 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
ø
Timer
counter
Compare-match
tTMOD
TMO0,
TMO1
Figure 23.15 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
(2) 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
ø
tTMCS
tTMCS
TMCI0,
TMCI1
tTMCWL
tTMCWH
Figure 23.16 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
599
(3) 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
ø
tTMRS
TMRI0,
TMRI1
Timer
counter
H'00
N
Figure 23.17 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
23.5.5
Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing
ø
Timer
counter
Compare-match
tPWOD
PW0, PW1
Figure 23.18 PWM Timer Output Timing
600
23.5.6
Serial Communication Interface Timing
(1) SCI Input/Output Timing
tScyc
Serial clock
(SCK0,
SCK1)
tTXD
Transmit
data
(TxD0,
TxD1)
tRXS
tRXH
Receive
data
(RxD0,
RxD1)
Figure 23.19 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode)
(2) SCI Input Clock Timing
tSCKW
SCK0, SCK1
tScyc
Figure 23.20 SCI Input Clock Timing
601
23.5.7
I/O Port Timing
Port read/write cycle
T1
T2
T3
ø
tPRS
tPRH
Port 1 to
port 9 (input)
Port A, B
tPWD
Port 1* to
port 9 (output)
Port A, B
Note: * Except P96 and P77 to P70
Figure 23.21 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
23.5.8
Host Interface Timing
(1) Host Interface Read Timing
CS/HA0
HA0
tHAR
tHRPW
tHRA
IOR
tHRF
tHRD
HDB7 to HDB0
Valid data
tHIRQ
HIRQi*
(i = 1, 11, 12)
Note: * Rising edge timing is the same as in port 4 output timing. Refer to figure 23.21.
Figure 23.22 Host Interface Read Timing
602
(2) Host Interface Write Timing
CS/HA0
HA0
tHAW
tHWPW
tHWA
IOW
tHWD
tHDW
HDB7 to HDB0
tHGA
GA20
Figure 23.23 Host Interface Write Timing
23.5.9
I2C Bus Timing (Option)
VIH
SDA
VIL
tBUF
tSTAH
tSCLH
tSTAS
tSP tSTOS
SCL
P*
S*
tSf
Sr*
tSCLL
tSDAS
tSr
tSCL
P*
tSDAH
Note: * Conditions S, P, and Sr are defined as follows:
S: Start condition
P: Stop condition
Sr: Resend “start” condition
Figure 23.24 I2C Bus Interface I/O Timing
603
23.5.10 Reset Output Timing
ø
tRESD
tRESD
RESO
tRESOW
Figure 23.25 Reset Output Timing
23.5.11 External Clock Output Timing
VCC
STBY
VIH
EXTAL
ø (internal or
external)
RES
tDEXT*
Note: * tDEXT includes a 10 tcyc RES pulse width (tRESW).
Figure 23.26 External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time
604
Appendix A CPU Instruction Set
A.1
Instruction Set List
Operation Notation
Rd8/16
General register (destination) (8 or 16 bits)
Rs8/16
General register (source) (8 or 16 bits)
Rn8/16
General register (8 or 16 bits)
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#xx:3/8/16
Immediate data (3, 8, or 16 bits)
d:8/16
Displacement (8 or 16 bits)
@aa:8/16
Absolute address (8 or 16 bits)
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Exclusive logical OR
→
—
Move
NOT (logical complement)
Condition Code Notation
Modified according to the instruction result
*
Undetermined (unpredictable)
0
Always cleared to 0
—
Not affected by the instruction result
605
Instruction Set
MOV.B @Rs+, Rd
B @Rs16 → Rd8
Rs16+1 → Rs16
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
B @aa:8 → Rd8
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
B @aa:16 → Rd8
MOV.B Rs, @Rd
B Rs8 → @Rd16
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, Rd)
B Rs8 → @(d:16, Rd16)
MOV.B Rs, @–Rd
B Rd16–1 → Rd16
Rs8 → @Rd16
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
B Rs8 → @aa:8
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B @(d:16, Rs16) → Rd8
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B @Rs16 → Rd8
MOV.B @(d:16, Rs), Rd
0 — 2
0 — 4
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MOV.B @Rs, Rd
H N Z V C
0 — 4
0 — 6
MOV.W Rs, @–Rd
W Rd16–2 → Rd16
Rs16 → @Rd16
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B Rs8 → Rd8
I
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
W Rs16 → @aa:16
0 — 6
POP Rd
W @SP → Rd16
SP+2 → SP
2
— —
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
B #xx:8 → Rd8
MOV.B Rs, Rd
Condition Code
PUSH Rs
W SP–2 → SP
Rs16 → @SP
2
— —
↔
↔
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
No. of States
Table A.1
0 — 6
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
B Rs8 → @aa:16
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
W #xx:16 → Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
W Rs16 → Rd16
MOV.W @Rs, Rd
W @Rs16 → Rd16
2
— —
— —
2
W @Rs16 → Rd16
Rs16+2 → Rs16
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
W @aa:16 → Rd16
MOV.W Rs, @Rd
W Rs16 → @Rd16
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, Rd) W Rs16 → @(d:16, Rd16)
606
— —
4
— —
2
2
— —
4
— —
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
2
— —
4
— —
— —
4
— —
2
— —
2
MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), Rd W @(d:16, Rs16) → Rd16
MOV.W @Rs+, Rd
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
4
— —
— —
2
— —
4
— —
2
4
— —
0 — 2
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 2
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 4
0 — 6
0 — 6
0 — 6
B Not supported
EEPMOV
— if R4L≠0 then
Repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
R6+1 → R6
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L=0
else next
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8+#xx:8 → Rd8
No. of States
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
I
H N Z V C
4 — — — — — — (4)
2
—
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B Not supported
MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16
Condition Code
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
2
B Rd8+Rs8 → Rd8
2
—
ADD.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16+Rs16 → Rd16
2
— (1)
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8+#xx:8 +C → Rd8
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8+Rs8 +C → Rd8
2
—
ADDS.W #1, Rd
W Rd16+1 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
ADDS.W #2, Rd
W Rd16+2 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
INC.B Rd
B Rd8+1 → Rd8
2
— —
DAA.B Rd
B Rd8 decimal adjust → Rd8
2
— *
SUB.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8–Rs8 → Rd8
2
—
SUB.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16–Rs16 → Rd16
2
— (1)
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8–#xx:8 –C → Rd8
2
—
(2)
(2)
(2)
2
2
2
2
— 2
* (3) 2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
↔ ↔
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
↔
ADD.B Rs, Rd
2
2
2
B Rd8–Rs8 –C → Rd8
2
—
SUBS.W #1, Rd
W Rd16–1 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
SUBS.W #2, Rd
W Rd16–2 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 2
DEC.B Rd
B Rd8–1 → Rd8
2
— —
DAS.B Rd
B Rd8 decimal adjust → Rd8
2
— *
NEG.B Rd
B 0–Rd8 → Rd8
2
—
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8–#xx:8
CMP.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8–Rs8
2
—
CMP.W Rs, Rd
W Rd16–Rs16
2
— (1)
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
2
— — — — — — 14
2
— 2
* — 2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
(2)
↔
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
2
2
2
2
607
H N Z V C
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
B Rd16÷Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8∧#xx:8 → Rd8
AND.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8∧Rs8 → Rd8
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8∨#xx:8 → Rd8
OR.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8∨Rs8 → Rd8
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
B Rd8⊕#xx:8 → Rd8
XOR.B Rs, Rd
B Rd8⊕Rs8 → Rd8
2
— —
NOT.B Rd
B Rd8 → Rd8
2
— —
SHAL.B Rd
B
2
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
I
2
— —
2
— —
2
— — 0
2
— —
2
— —
2
— —
2
— —
↔
↔
↔
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
↔
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
b0
C
b0
C
b0
C
b7
608
2
↔
C
b0
B
C
b7
0
b0
0
b7
ROTR.B Rd
2
↔
B
0 — 2
↔
ROTL.B Rd
0 — 2
↔
↔
0
b7
B
0 — 2
b0
C
b7
ROTXR.B Rd
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
— —
↔
ROTXL.B Rd
— —
0 — 2
↔
↔
B
2
0 — 2
b0
b7
SHLR.B Rd
— —
2
C
b7
— —
↔
↔
B
2
0 — 2
↔
↔
SHLL.B Rd
— —
2
0
— — (6) (7) — — 14
↔
↔
B
2
C
b7
SHAR.B Rd
2
No. of States
Condition Code
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
b0
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 1
BSET #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ← 1
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 1
BSET Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ← 1
BSET Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ← 1
BSET Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 1
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ← 0
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 0
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ←
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
BNOT #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) ←
(#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BNOT Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) ←
(Rn8 of Rd8)
BNOT Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) ←
(Rn8 of @Rd16)
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ←
(Rn8 of @aa:8)
BTST #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → Z
BTST #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → Z
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → Z
BTST Rn, Rd
B (Rn8 of Rd8) → Z
BTST Rn, @Rd
B (Rn8 of @Rd16) → Z
BTST Rn, @aa:8
B (Rn8 of @aa:8) → Z
I
H N Z V C
No. of States
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
2
Condition Code
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
4
— — — — — — 8
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — —
4
— — —
4
2
— — —
— — —
4
— — —
4
— — —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BSET #xx:3, Rd
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
— — 2
— — 6
— — 6
— — 2
— — 6
— — 6
609
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BILD #xx:3, Rd
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BILD #xx:3, @Rd
B (#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BST #xx:3, Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BST #xx:3, @Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
B C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BIST #xx:3, Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BIST #xx:3, @Rd
B C → (#xx:3 of @Rd16)
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
B C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BAND #xx:3, Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BAND #xx:3, @Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BIAND #xx:3, @Rd
B C∧(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BOR #xx:3, Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BIOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C∨(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BXOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
610
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
No. of States
H N Z V C
— — — — —
4
2
6
6
2
6
6
— — — — — — 2
2
— — — — — — 8
4
4
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 2
2
— — — — — — 8
4
4
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
— — — — —
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
4
2
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
2
I
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BLD #xx:3, @Rd
Condition Code
— — — — —
— — — — —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BLD #xx:3, Rd
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
H N Z V C
No. of States
I
↔ ↔
Condition Code
Implied
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
Branching
Condition
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
6
BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @Rd16) → C
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
— PC ← PC+d:8
2
— — — — — — 4
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
— PC ← PC+2
2
— — — — — — 4
BHI d:8
C∨Z=0
2
— — — — — — 4
C∨Z=1
2
— — — — — — 4
C=0
2
— — — — — — 4
C=1
2
— — — — — — 4
Z=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BEQ d:8
— If
— condition
is true
— then
— PC ←
PC+d:8
— else next;
—
Z=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BVC d:8
—
V=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BVS d:8
—
V=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BPL d:8
—
N=0
2
— — — — — — 4
BMI d:8
—
N=1
2
— — — — — — 4
BGE d:8
—
N⊕V = 0
2
— — — — — — 4
BLT d:8
—
N⊕V = 1
2
— — — — — — 4
BGT d:8
—
Z ∨ (N⊕V) = 0
2
— — — — — — 4
BLE d:8
—
Z ∨ (N⊕V) = 1
2
— — — — — — 4
JMP @Rn
— PC ← Rn16
JMP @aa:16
— PC ← aa:16
JMP @@aa:8
— PC ← @aa:8
BSR d:8
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← PC+d:8
JSR @Rn
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← Rn16
JSR @aa:16
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← aa:16
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
4
— — — — —
4
— — — — —
2
6
— — — — — — 4
4
— — — — — — 6
2
2
2
— — — — — — 8
— — — — — — 6
— — — — — — 6
4
— — — — — — 8
611
I
H N Z V C
No. of States
Implied
Condition Code
JSR @@aa:8
— SP–2 → SP
PC → @SP
PC ← @aa:8
RTS
— PC ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
2 — — — — — — 8
RTE
— CCR ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
PC ← @SP
SP+2 → SP
2
SLEEP
— Transit to sleep mode.
2 — — — — — — 2
LDC #xx:8, CCR
B #xx:8 → CCR
LDC Rs, CCR
B Rs8 → CCR
2
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
@aa: 8/16
@(d:8, PC)
@@aa
@Rn
@(d:16, Rn)
@–Rn/@Rn+
Operation
#xx: 8/16
Rn
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode/
Instruction Length
STC CCR, Rd
B CCR → Rd8
2
— — — — — — 2
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR∧#xx:8 → CCR
2
ORC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR∨#xx:8 → CCR
2
XORC #xx:8, CCR
B CCR⊕#xx:8 → CCR
2
NOP
— PC ← PC+2
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
2
— — — — — — 8
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 — — — — — — 2
Notes: The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction
and its operands are located in on-chip memory.
(1) Set to 1 when there is a carry or borrow from bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) If the result is zero, the previous value of the flag is retained; otherwise the flag is
cleared to 0.
(3) Set to 1 if decimal adjustment produces a carry; otherwise cleared to 0.
(4) The number of states required for execution is 4n+8 (n = value of R4L).
(5) These instructions are not supported by the H8/3437 Series.
(6) Set to 1 if the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(7) Set to 1 if the divisor is 0; otherwise cleared to 0.
612
10
A.2
Operation Code Map
Table A.2 is a map of the operation codes contained in the first byte of the instruction code (bits
15 to 8 of the first instruction word).
Some pairs of instructions have identical first bytes. These instructions are differentiated by the
first bit of the second byte (bit 7 of the first instruction word).
Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 0.
Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 1.
613
614
8
BVC
SUB
ADD
BVS
9
DEC
INC
A
SUBS
ADDS
B
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
C
D
E
F
MOV
JMP
BPL
EEPMOV
CMP
MOV
BLT
D
JSR
BGT
SUBX
ADDX
E
Bit manipulation instructions
BGE
MOV*1
BMI
C
Notes: *1 The MOVFPE and MOVTPE instructions are identical to MOV instructions in the first byte and first bit of the second byte (bits 15 to 7 of the instruction word).
The PUSH and POP instructions are identical in machine language to MOV instructions.
*2 The BT, BF, BHS, and BLO instructions are identical in machine language to BRA, BRN, BCC, and BCS, respectively.
SUBX
BILD
BIST
BLD
BST
BEQ
B
BIAND
BAND
RTE
BNE
MOV
NEG
CMP
BIXOR
BXOR
NOT
LDC
7
A
BIOR
BOR
BSR
BCS*2
AND
ANDC
XORC
XOR
6
5
ADDX
BTS
RTS
BCC*2
OR
ORC
4
9
BCLR
BLS
ROTR
ROTXR
LDC
3
ADD
BNOT
BHI
ROTL
ROTXL
STC
2
8
7
BSET
DIVXU
MULXU
5
6
BRN*2
SHAR
SHLR
SLEEP
1
BRA*2
SHAL
SHLL
NOP
0
4
3
2
1
0
Low
;
High
BLE
DAS
DAA
F
Table A.2
Operation Code Map
A.3
Number of States Required for Execution
The tables below can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution.
Table A.3 indicates the number of states required for each cycle (instruction fetch, branch address
read, stack operation, byte data access, word data access, internal operation). Table A.4 indicates
the number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction. The total number of states
required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows:
Execution states = I × SI + J × SJ + K × SK + L × SL+ M × SM + N × SN
Examples: Mode 1 (on-chip ROM disabled), stack located in external memory, 1 wait state
inserted in external memory access.
1. BSET #0, @FFC7
From table A.4: I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0
From table A.3: SI = 8, SL = 3
Number of states required for execution: 2 × 8 + 2 × 3 =22
2. JSR @@30
From table A.4: I = 2, J = K = 1, L = M = N = 0
From table A.3: SI = SJ = SK = 8
Number of states required for execution: 2 × 8 + 1 × 8 + 1 × 8 = 32
Table A.3
Number of States Taken by Each Cycle in Instruction Execution
Access Location
Execution Status
(Instruction Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
On-Chip Reg. Field
External Memory
2
6
6 + 2m
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack operation
SK
Byte data access
SL
3
3+m
Word data access
SM
6
6 + 2m
Internal operation
SN
1
1
1
Notes: m: Number of wait states inserted in access to external device.
615
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
ADD
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
1
ADD.B Rs, Rd
1
ADD.W Rs, Rd
1
ADDS
ADDS.W #1/2, Rd
1
ADDX
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
1
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
1
AND
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
1
AND.B Rs, Rd
1
ANDC
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
1
BAND
BAND #xx:3, Rd
1
Bcc
BCLR
616
BAND #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
2
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
2
BHI d:8
2
BLS d:8
2
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
2
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
2
BNE d:8
2
BEQ d:8
2
BVC d:8
2
BVS d:8
2
BPL d:8
2
BMI d:8
2
BGE d:8
2
BLT d:8
2
BGT d:8
2
BLE d:8
2
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
1
BCLR #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BCLR Rn, Rd
1
BCLR Rn, @Rd
2
2
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
2
2
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
BIAND
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
1
BIAND #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
BILD
BIOR
BIST
BIXOR
BLD
BNOT
BOR
BSET
BILD #xx:3, Rd
1
BILD #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BIST #xx:3, Rd
1
BIST #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
BLD #xx:3, Rd
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
1
BLD #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
1
BNOT #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BNOT Rn, Rd
1
BNOT Rn, @Rd
2
2
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
2
2
BOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BSET #xx:3, Rd
1
BSET #xx:3, @Rd
2
2
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BSET Rn, Rd
1
BSET Rn, @Rd
2
2
BSET Rn, @aa:8
2
2
617
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
BSR
BSR d:8
2
BST
BST #xx:3, Rd
1
BTST
BXOR
CMP
DAA
2
2
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BTST #xx:3, Rd
1
BTST #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BTST Rn, Rd
1
BTST Rn, @Rd
2
1
BTST Rn, @aa:8
2
1
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BXOR #xx:3, @Rd
2
1
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2
1
1
CMP.B Rs, Rd
1
CMP.W Rs, Rd
1
DAA.B Rd
1
DAS
DAS.B Rd
1
DEC
DEC.B Rd
1
DIVXU
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
1
EEPMOV
EEPMOV
2
INC
INC.B Rd
1
JMP
JMP @Rn
2
JMP @aa:16
2
JMP @@aa:8
2
JSR @Rn
2
JSR @aa:16
2
JSR @@aa:8
2
LDC #xx:8, CCR
1
LDC Rs, CCR
1
JSR
LDC
618
1
BST #xx:3, @Rd
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
12
2n+2*
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
Instruction Mnemonic
MOV
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
1
MOV.B Rs, Rd
1
MOV.B @Rs, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @(d:16,Rs),
Rd
2
1
MOV.B @Rs+, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @Rd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16,
Rd)
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @–Rd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
2
1
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
2
MOV.W Rs, Rd
1
MOV.W @Rs, Rd
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
2
2
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), 2
Rd
1
MOV.W @Rs+, Rd
1
1
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd 2
1
MOV.W Rs, @Rd
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, 2
Rd)
1
MOV.W Rs, @–Rd
1
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 2
MOVFPE
MOVFPE @aa:16,
Rd
Not supported
MOVTPE
MOVTPE.Rs,
@aa:16
Not supported
MULXU
MULXU.Rs, Rd
1
NEG
NEG.B Rd
1
NOP
NOP
1
NOT
NOT.B Rd
1
2
2
12
619
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Fetch
Addr. Read Operation Access
I
J
K
L
OR
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
OR.B Rs, Rd
1
ORC #xx:8, CCR
1
ORC
Word Data Internal
Access
Operation
M
N
POP
POP Rd
1
1
2
PUSH
PUSH Rd
1
1
2
ROTL
ROTL.B Rd
1
ROTR
ROTR.B Rd
1
ROTXL
ROTXL.B Rd
1
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
1
RTE
RTE
2
2
2
1
2
RTS
RTS
2
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
1
SHAR
SHAR.B Rd
1
SHLL
SHLL.B Rd
1
SHLR
SHLR.B Rd
1
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
STC
STC CCR, Rd
1
SUB
SUB.B Rs, Rd
1
SUB.W Rs, Rd
1
SUBS
SUBS.W #1/2, Rd
1
SUBX
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
1
XOR
XORC
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
1
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
XOR.B Rs, Rd
1
XORC #xx:8, CCR
1
Notes: All values left blank are zero.
* n: Initial value in R4L. Source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each.
620
Appendix B Internal I/O Register
B.1
Addresses
Addr.
(Last Register
Byte) Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'80
—
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Flash memory
or external
FLMCR1* 3 FWE
SWE
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
FLMCR2* 3 FLER
addresses (in
expanded
modes)
FLMCR
VPP
Bit Names
*1, *2
H'81
H'82*4 EBR1*1
EBR1*2
H'83
—
—
—
—
—
ESU
PSU
—
—
—
—
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
LB7
LB6
LB5
LB4
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
EBR2
*1, *2
SB7
SB6
SB5
SB4
SB3
SB2
SB1
SB0
EBR2
*3
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
H'84
H'85
H'86
H'87
H'88
SMR
H'89
BRR
H'8A
SCR
H'8B
TDR
H'8C
SSR
H'8D
RDR
SCI1
H'8E
H'8F
H'90
TIER
ICIAE
ICIBE
ICICE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
—
H'91
TCSR
ICFA
ICFB
ICFC
ICFD
OCFA
OCFB
OVF
CCLRA
H'92
FRCH
H'93
FRCL
H'94
OCRAH
FRT
OCRBH
H'95
OCRAL
H'96
TCR
IEDGA
IEDGB
IEDGC
IEDGD
BUFEA
BUFEB
CKS1
CKS0
H'97
TOCR
—
—
—
OCRS
OEA
OEB
OLVLA
OLVLB
OCRBL
621
Addr.
(Last Register
Byte) Name
Bit 7
H'98
ICRAH
H'99
ICRAL
H'9A
ICRBH
H'9B
ICRBL
H'9C
ICRCH
H'9D
ICRCL
H'9E
ICRDH
H'9F
ICRDL
H'A0
TCR
H'A1
DTR
H'A2
TCNT
H'A3
Bit Names
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
FRT
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'A4
TCR
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'A5
DTR
H'A6
TCNT
H'A7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'A8
TCSR/
TCNT
OVF
WT/
IT
TME
—
RST/
NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
WDT
H'A9
TCNT
H'AA
PAODR
PA 7
PA 6
PA 5
PA 4
PA 3
PA 2
PA 1
PA 0
Port A
H'AB
PAPIN/
PADDR
PA 7/
PA 6/
PA 5/
PA 4/
PA 3/
PA 2/
PA 1/
PA 0/
PA 7DDR PA 6DDR PA 5DDR PA 4DDR PA 3DDR PA 2DDR PA 1DDR PA 0DDR
H'AC
P1PCR
P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR Port 1
H'AD
P2PCR
P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Port 2
H'AE
P3PCR
P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR Port 3
H'AF
—
—
H'B0
P1DDR
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Port 1
H'B1
P2DDR
P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Port 2
H'B2
P1DR
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Port 1
H'B3
P2DR
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Port 2
H'B4
P3DDR
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Port 3
H'B5
P4DDR
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Port 4
H'B6
P3DR
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Port 3
H'B7
P4DR
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Port 4
622
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PWM0
PWM1
—
Addr.
(Last Register
Byte) Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
H'B8
P5DDR
—
—
—
—
—
P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR Port 5
H'B9
P6DDR
P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Port 6
H'BA
P5DR
—
—
—
—
—
P52
P51
P50
Port 5
H'BB
P6DR
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Port 6
H'BC
PBODR
PB 7
PB 6
PB 5
PB 4
PB 3
PB 2
PB 1
PB 0
Port B
H'BD
P8DDR/
PBPIN
—/
PB 7
P86DDR/ P85DDR/ P84DDR/ P83DDR/ P82DDR/ P81DDR/ P80DDR/ Port 8/
PB 6
PB 5
PB 4
PB 3
PB 2
PB 1
PB 0
Port B
H'BE
P7PIN/
PBDDR
P77/
P76/
P75/
P74/
P73/
P72/
P71/
P70/
Port 7/
PB 7DDR PB 6DDR PB 5DDR PB 4DDR PB 3DDR PB 2DDR PB 1DDR PB 0DDR Port B
H'BF
P8DR
—
H'C0
P9DDR
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR Port 9
H'C1
P9DR
P97
P92
P91
P90
H'C2
WSCR
RAMS*2 RAM0*2 CKDBL
FLSHE*3 WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
H'C3
STCR
IICS
H'C4
SYSCR
SSBY
Bit Names
P86
P96
*3
P85
P95
P84
P94
P83
P93
P82
Bit 1
P81
Bit 0
P80
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
—
—
—
—
—
MDS1
MDS0
H'C5
MDCR
EXPE
H'C6
ISCR
IRQ7SC IRQ6SC IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC
H'C7
IER
IRQ7E
IRQ6E
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
H'C8
TCR
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'C9
TCSR
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
H'CA
TCORA
H'CB
TCORB
H'CC
TCNT
H'CD
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'CE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'CF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D0
TCR
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'D1
TCSR
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
H'D2
TCORA
H'D3
TCORB
H'D4
TCNT
H'D5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Module
Port 8
TMR0
TMR1
623
Addr.
(Last Register
Byte) Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'D8
SMR
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
SCI0 and I2C
ICCR
ICE
IEIC
MST
TRS
ACK
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'D9
BRR
ICSR
BBSY
IRIC
SCP
—
AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB
SCR
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
H'DA
Bit Names
H'DB
TDR
H'DC
SSR
H'DD
RDR
H'DE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ICDR
ICDR7
ICDR6
ICDR5
ICDR4
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
ICDR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ICMR/
SAR
MLS/
SVA6
WAIT/
SVA5
—/
SVA4
—/
SVA3
—/
SVA2
BC2/
SVA1
BC1/
SVA0
BC0/
FS
H'DF
H'E0
ADDRAH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'E1
ADDRAL AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'E2
ADDRBH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'E3
ADDRBL AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'E4
ADDRCH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'E5
ADDRCL AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'E6
ADDRDH AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'E7
ADDRDL AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'E8
ADCSR
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
H'E9
ADCR
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'EA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'EB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'EC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'ED
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'EE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A/D
—
H'EF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'F0
HICR
—
—
—
—
—
IBFIE2
IBFIE1
FGA20E HIF
H'F1
KMIMR
KMIMR7 KMIMR6 KMIMR5 KMIMR4 KMIMR3 KMIMR2 KMIMR1 KMIMR0
H'F2
KMPCR
KM7PCR KM6PCR KM5PCR KM4PCR KM3PCR KM2PCR KM1PCR KM0PCR
H'F3
KMIMRA
KMIMR
15
624
KMIMR
14
KMIMR
13
KMIMR
12
KMIMR
11
KMIMR
10
KMIMR9 KMIMR8
Addr.
(Last Register
Byte) Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'F4
IDR1
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
HIF1
H'F5
ODR1
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
H'F6
STR1
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
H'F7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'F8
DADR0
H'F9
DADR1
H'FA
DACR
DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE
—
—
—
—
—
H'FB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FC
IDR2
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
H'FD
ODR2
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
H'FE
STR2
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
H'FF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
Bit Names
D/A
HIF2
Applies to H8/3434F only (32k on-chip dual-power-supply flash memory version).
Applies to H8/3437F only (60k on-chip dual-power-supply flash memory version).
Applies to H8/3437SF only (60k on-chip single-power-supply flash memory version).
Do not use this address with single-power-supply flash memory.
FRT:
SCI1:
PWM0:
PWM1:
WDT:
TMR0:
Free-running timer
Serial communication interface 1
Pulse-width modulation timer channel 0
Pulse-width modulation timer channel 1
Watchdog timer
8-bit timer channel 0
TMR1:
8-bit timer channel 1
A/D:
Analog-to-digital converter
SCI0:
Serial communication interface 0
I2C:
I2C bus interface
HIF:
Host interface
625
B.2
Function
Address onto which
register is mapped
Register name
Abbreviation
of register
name
TIER—Timer Interrupt Enable Register
Bit No.
Bit
Initial value
Initial value
Read/Write
7
ICIAE
0
R/W
6
ICIBE
0
R/W
5
ICICE
0
R/W
H'FF90
4
ICIDE
0
R/W
3
2
OCIAE OCIBE
0
0
R/W
R/W
FRT
1
OVIE
0
R/W
0
—
1
—
Name of
on-chip
supporting
module
Bit names
(abbreviations).
Bits marked “—”
are reserved.
Type of access permitted
R Read only
W Write only
R/W Read or write
Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt B Enable
0 Output compare interrupt request B is disabled.
1 Output compare interrupt request B is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt A Enable
0 Output compare interrupt request A is disabled.
1 Output compare interrupt request A is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt D Enable
0 Input capture interrupt request D is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt request D is enabled.
626
Full name
of bit
Description
of bit function
(Dual-power-supply flash memory only)
FLMCR—Flash Memory Control Register
H'80
Flash memory
• H8/3434F, H8/3437F
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VPP
—
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Program Mode
0 Exit from program mode
1 Transition to program mode
Erase Mode
0 Exit from erase mode
1 Transition to erase mode
Program-Verify Mode
0 Exit from program-verify mode
1 Transition to program-verify mode
Erase-Verify Mode
0 Exit from erase-verify mode
1 Transition to erase-verify mode
Programming Power
0 12 V is not applied to FVPP
1 12 V is applied to FVPP
627
(Single-power-supply flash memory only)
FLMCR1—Flash Memory Control Register 1
H'80
Flash memory
• H8/3437SF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FWE
SWE
—
—
EV
PV
E
P
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Program Mode
0 Exit from program mode (initial value)
1 Transition to program mode
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Erase Mode
0 Exit from erase mode (initial value)
1 Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Program-Verify Mode
0 Exit from program-verify mode (initial value)
1 Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Erase-Verify Mode
0 Exit from erase-verify mode (initial value)
1 Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Software Write Enable
0 Writes to flash memory disabled (initial value)
1 Writes to flash memory enabled
Flash Write Enable
(Controls programming and erasing of flash memory. In the H8/3437SF,
this bit is always read as 1.)
Note: The FLSHE bit in WSCR must be set to 1 in order for this register to be accessed.
628
(Single-power-supply flash memory only)
FLMCR2—Flash Memory Control Register 2
H'81
Flash memory
• H8/3437SF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLER
—
—
—
—
—
ESU
PSU
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
Program Setup
0 Program setup cleared (initial value)
1 Program setup
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Erase Setup
0 Erase setup cleared (initial value)
1 Erase setup
[Setting condition]
When SWE = 1
Flash Memory Error
0 Flash memory is operating normally (initial value)
1 An error occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Note: The FLSHE bit in WSCR must be set to 1 in order for this register to be accessed.
629
(Dual-power-supply flash memory only)
EBR1—Erase Block Register 1
H'82
Flash memory
• H8/3434F
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Large Block 3 to 0
0 Corresponding block (LB3 to LB0) is not selected
1 Corresponding block (LB3 to LB0) is selected
• H8/3437F
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB7
LB6
LB5
LB4
LB3
LB2
LB1
LB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Large Block 7 to 0
0 Corresponding block (LB7 to LB0) is not selected
(Initial value)
1 Corresponding block (LB7 to LB0) is selected
630
EBR2—Erase Block Register 2
H'83
Flash memory
• H8/3434F, H8/3437F
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SB7
SB6
SB5
SB4
SB3
SB2
SB1
SB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Small Block 7 to 0
0 Corresponding block (SB7 to SB0) is not selected
1 Corresponding block (SB7 to SB0) is selected
• H8/3437SF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Erase Block 7 to 0
0 Corresponding block (EB7 to EB0) is not selected (initial value)
1 Corresponding block (EB7 to EB0) is selected
631
SMR—Serial Mode Register
Bit
H'88
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 ø clock
0 1 øP/4 clock
1 0 øP/16 clock
1 1 øP/64 clock
Multiprocessor Mode
0 Multiprocessor function disabled
1 Multiprocessor format selected
Stop Bit Length
0 One stop bit
1 Two stop bits
Parity Mode
0 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Parity Enable
0 Transmit: No parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit not checked.
1 Transmit: Parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit checked.
Character Length
0 8-bit data length
1 7-bit data length
Communication Mode
0 Asynchronous
1 Synchronous
632
BRR—Bit Rate Register
H'89
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Constant that determines the bit rate
633
SCR—Serial Control Register
Bit
H'8A
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Enable 0
0 Asynchronous serial clock not output
1 Asynchronous serial clock output at SCK pin
Clock Enable 1
0 Internal clock
1 External clock
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
0 TSR-empty interrupt request is disabled.
1 TSR-empty interrupt request is enabled.
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable
0 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is disabled.
1 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is enabled.
Receive Enable
0 Receive disabled
1 Receive enabled
Transmit Enable
0 Transmit disabled
1 Transmit enabled
Receive Interrupt Enable
0 Receive interrupt and receive error interrupt requests are disabled.
1 Receive interrupt and receive error interrupt requests are enabled.
Transmit Interrupt Enable
0 TDR-empty interrupt request is disabled.
1 TDR-empty interrupt request is enabled.
634
TDR—Transmit Data Register
H'8B
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transmit data
635
SSR—Serial Status Register
Bit
H'8C
SCI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W) *
R
R
R/W
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
0 Multiprocessor bit = 0 in transmit data.
1 Multiprocessor bit = 1 in transmit data.
Multiprocessor Bit
0 Multiprocessor bit = 0 in receive data.
1 Multiprocessor bit = 1 in receive data.
Transmit End
0 Cleared by reading TDRE = 1, then writing 0 in TDRE.
1 Set to 1 when TE = 0, or when TDRE = 1 at the end of
character transmission.
Parity Error
0 Cleared by reading PER = 1, then writing 0 in PER.
1 Set when a parity error occurs (parity of receive data
does not match parity selected by O/E bit in SMR).
Framing Error
0 Cleared by reading FER = 1, then writing 0 in FER.
1 Set when a framing error occurs (stop bit is 0).
Overrun Error
0 Cleared by reading ORER = 1, then writing 0 in ORER.
1 Set when an overrun error occurs (next data is completely
received while RDRF bit is set to 1).
Receive Data Register Full
0 Cleared by reading RDRF = 1, then writing 0 in RDRF.
1 Set when one character is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR.
Transmit Data Register Empty
0 Cleared by reading TDRE = 1, then writing 0 in TDRE.
1 Set when:
1. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
2. TE is cleared while TDRE = 0.
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 3 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
636
RDR—Receive Data Register
H'8D
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive data
637
TIER—Timer Interrupt Enable Register
Bit
H'90
FRT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICIAE
ICIBE
ICICE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt B Enable
0 Output compare interrupt request B is disabled.
1 Output compare interrupt request B is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt A Enable
0 Output compare interrupt request A is disabled.
1 Output compare interrupt request A is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt D Enable
0 Input capture interrupt request D is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt request D is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt C Enable
0 Input capture interrupt request C is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt request C is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt B Enable
0 Input capture interrupt request B is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt request B is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt A Enable
0 Input capture interrupt request A is disabled.
1 Input capture interrupt request A is enabled.
638
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
H'91
FRT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICFA
ICFB
ICFC
ICFD
OCFA
OCFB
OVF
CCLRA
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/W
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
Counter Clear A
0 FRC count is not cleared.
1 FRC count is cleared by compare-match A.
Timer Overflow Flag
0 Cleared by reading OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF.
1 Set when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
Output Compare Flag B
0 Cleared by reading OCFB = 1, then writing 0 in OCFB.
1 Set when FRC = OCRB.
Output Compare Flag A
0 Cleared by reading OCFA = 1, then writing 0 in OCFA.
1 Set when FRC = OCRA.
Input Capture Flag D
0 Cleared by reading ICFD = 1, then writing 0 in ICFD.
1 Set when FTID input signal is received.
Input Capture Flag C
0 Cleared by reading ICFC = 1, then writing 0 in ICFC.
1 Set when FTIC input signal is received.
Input Capture Flag B
0 Cleared by reading ICFB = 1, then writing 0 in ICFB.
1 Set when FTIB input causes FRC to be copied to ICRB.
Input Capture Flag A
0 Cleared by reading ICFA = 1, then writing 0 in ICFA.
1 Set when FTIA input causes FRC to be copied to ICRA.
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
639
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'92, H'93
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Count value
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'94, H'95
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Continually compared with FRC → OCFA is set when OCRA = FRC.
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'94, H'95
FRT
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Continually compared with FRC → OCFB is set when OCRB = FRC.
640
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'96
FRT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IEDGA
IEDGB
IEDGC
IEDGD
BUFEA
BUFEB
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 Internal clock source: øP/2
0 1 Internal clock source: øP/8
1 0 Internal clock source: øP/32
1 1 External clock source: counted on rising edge
Buffer Enable B
0 ICRD is used for input capture D.
1 ICRD is buffer register for input capture B.
Buffer Enable A
0 ICRC is used for input capture C.
1 ICRC is buffer register for input capture A.
Input Edge Select D
0 Falling edge of FTID is valid.
1 Rising edge of FTID is valid.
Input Edge Select C
0 Falling edge of FTIC is valid.
1 Rising edge of FTIC is valid.
Input Edge Select B
0 Falling edge of FTIB is valid.
1 Rising edge of FTIB is valid.
Input Edge Select A
0 Falling edge of FTIA is valid.
1 Rising edge of FTIA is valid.
641
TOCR—Timer Output Compare Control Register
Bit
H'97
FRT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
OCRS
OEA
OEB
OLVLA
OLVLB
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output Level B
0 Compare-match B causes 0 output.
1 Compare-match B causes 1 output.
Output Level A
0 Compare-match A causes 0 output.
1 Compare-match A causes 1 output.
Output Enable B
0 Output compare B output is disabled.
1 Output compare B output is enabled.
Output Enable A
0 Output compare A output is disabled.
1 Output compare A output is enabled.
Output Compare Register Select
0 The CPU can access OCRA.
1 The CPU can access OCRB.
ICRA (H and L)—Input Capture Register A
H'98, H'99
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured on FTIA input.
642
ICRB (H and L)—Input Capture Register B
H'9A, H'9B
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured on FTIB input.
ICRC (H and L)—Input Capture Register C
H'9C, H'9D
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured on FTIC input, or old ICRA value in buffer mode.
ICRD (H and L)—Input Capture Register D
H'9E, H'9F
FRT
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured on FTID input, or old ICRB value in buffer mode.
643
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'A0
PWM0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select (Values when øP = 10 MHz)
Internal
clock freq. Resolution
PWM
period
PWM
frequency
0 0 0
øP/2
200 ns
50 µs
20 kHz
1
øP/8
800 ns
200 µs
5 kHz
øP/32
3.2 µs
800 µs
1.25 kHz
1
øP/128
12.8 µs
3.2 ms
312.5 Hz
1 0 0
øP/256
25.6 µs
6.4 ms
156.3 Hz
1 0
1
øP/1024
102.4 µs
25.6 ms
39.1 Hz
1 0
øP/2048
204.8 µs
51.2 ms
19.5 Hz
1
øP/4096
409.6 µs
102.4 ms
9.8 Hz
Output Select
0 Positive logic
1 Negative logic
Output Enable
0 PWM output disabled; TCNT cleared to H'00 and stops.
1 PWM output enabled; TCNT runs.
DTR—Duty Register
Bit
7
H'A1
6
5
4
3
PWM0
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Pulse duty cycle
644
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'A2
PWM0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value (runs from H'00 to H'F9, then repeats from H'00)
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'A4
PWM1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM0.
DTR—Duty Register
H'A5
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM0.
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'A6
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM0.
645
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
H'A8
WDT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
RST/NMI
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
0 0 0 øP/2
1 øP/32
1 0 øP/64
1 øP/128
1 0 0 øP/256
1 øP/512
1 0 øP/2048
1 øP/4096
Reset or NMI
0 Functions as NMI (initial value)
1 Functions as reset
Timer Enable
0 Timer disabled: TCNT is initialized to H’00 and
stopped
(initial value)
1 Timer enabled: TCNT runs; CPU interrupts can be
requested
Timer Mode Select
0 Interval timer mode (OVF interrupt request) (initial value)
1 Watchdog timer mode (generates reset or NMI signal)
Overflow Flag
0 Cleared by reading OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF (initial value)
1 Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
646
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'A9 (read),
H'A8 (write)
WDT
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
P1PCR—Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'AC
4
Port 1
2
3
1
0
P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port 1 Input Pull-Up Control
0 Input pull-up transistor is off.
1 Input pull-up transistor is on.
P2PCR—Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'AD
4
3
Port 2
2
1
0
P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control
0 Input pull-up transistor is off.
1 Input pull-up transistor is on.
647
P3PCR—Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control Register
Bit
6
7
5
H'AE
4
Port 3
2
3
1
0
P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port 3 Input Pull-Up Control
0 Input pull-up transistor is off.
1 Input pull-up transistor is on.
P1DDR—Port 1 Data Direction Register
Bit
6
7
H'B0
5
4
Port 1
2
3
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Mode 1
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Modes 2 and 3
Port 1 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
P1DR—Port 1 Data Register
Bit
H'B2
Port 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
648
P2DDR—Port 2 Data Direction Register
Bit
6
7
H'B1
5
4
Port 2
2
3
1
0
P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
Mode 1
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Modes 2 and 3
Port 2 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
P2DR—Port 2 Data Register
Bit
H'B3
Port 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DDR—Port 3 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'B4
4
3
Port 3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 3 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
649
P3DR—Port 3 Data Register
Bit
H'B6
Port 3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P4DDR—Port 4 Data Direction Register
Bit
6
7
H'B5
5
4
Port 4
2
3
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 4 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
P4DR—Port 4 Data Register
Bit
H'B7
Port 4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DDR—Port 5 Data Direction Register
Bit
H'B8
7
6
5
4
3
—
—
—
—
—
Port 5
2
1
0
P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
Port 5 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
650
P5DR—Port 5 Data Register
Bit
H'BA
Port 5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
P52
P51
P50
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
P6DDR—Port 6 Data Direction Register
Bit
6
7
5
H'B9
4
Port 6
2
3
1
0
P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 6 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
P6DR—Port 6 Data Register
Bit
H'BB
Port 6
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P7PIN—Port 7 Input Data Register
Bit
H'BE
Port 7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Initial value
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins P77 to P70.
651
P8DDR—Port 8 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
—
6
5
H'BD
4
Port 8
2
3
1
0
P86DDR P85DDR P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 8 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
P8DR—Port 8 Data Register
Bit
H'BF
Port 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P9DDR—Port 9 Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
5
H'C0
4
Port 9
2
3
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Modes 1 and 2
Initial value
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
—
W
W
W
W
W
W
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Mode 3
Port 9 Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
652
P9DR—Port 9 Data Register
Bit
H'C1
Port 9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97
P96
P95
P94
P93
P92
P91
P90
Initial value
0
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Depends on the level of pin P96.
PADDR—Port A Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
H'AB
5
4
Port A
2
3
1
0
PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port A Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
PAPIN—Port A Input Data Register
Bit
H'AB
Port A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
Initial value
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins PA7 to PA0.
PAODR—Port A Output Data Register
Bit
H'AA
Port A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port A Output Data/Input Pull-Up Control
During output
During input
0
0 output
Input pull-up transistor off
1
1 output
Input pull-up transistor on
653
PBDDR—Port B Data Direction Register
Bit
7
6
H'BE
5
4
Port B
2
3
1
0
PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port B Input/Output Control
0 Input port
1 Output port
PBPIN—Port B Input Data Register
Bit
H'BD
Port B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
Initial value
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
—*
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Depends on the levels of pins PB7 to PB0.
PBODR—Port B Output Data Register
Bit
H'BC
Port B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port B Output Data/Input Pull-Up Control
654
During output
During input
0
0 output
Input pull-up transistor off
1
1 output
Input pull-up transistor on
WSCR—Wait-State Control Register
Bit
H'C2
System control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAMS
RAM0
CKDBL
FLSHE
WMS1
WMS0
WC1
WC0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Wait Count
0 0 No wait states inserted by wait-state
controller (initial value)
0 1 1 state inserted
1 0 2 states inserted
1 1 3 states inserted
Wait Mode Select
0 0 Programmable wait mode
0 1 No wait states inserted by wait-state controller
1 0 Pin wait mode
(initial value)
1 1 Pin auto-wait mode
Flash Memory Control Register Enable
H8/3437SF (Single-power-supply flash memory only)
0 Flash memory control registers are in unselected state (Initial value)
1 Flash memory control registers are in selected state
Clock Double
0 Supporting module clock frequency is not divided (øP = ø) (initial value)
1 Supporting module clock frequency is divided by two (øP = ø/2)
RAM Select and RAM Area Select
H8/3434F (Dual-power-supply flash memory only)
RAMS, RAM0
RAM Area
ROM Area
00
None
—
01
H'FC80 to H'FCFF
H'0080 to H'00FF
10
H'FC80 to H'FD7F
H'0080 to H'017F
11
H'FC00 to H'FC7F
H'0000 to H'007F
H8/3437F
RAMS, RAM0
RAM Area
ROM Area
00
None
—
01
H'F880 to H'F8FF
H'0080 to H'00FF
10
H'F880 to H'F97F
H'0080 to H'017F
11
H'F800 to H'F87F
H'0000 to H'007F
655
STCR—Serial/Timer Control Register
Bit
H'C3
System Control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICS
IICD
IICX
IICE
STAC
MPE
ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Internal Clock Source Select
See TCR under TMR0 and TMR1.
Multiprocessor Enable
0 Multiprocessor communication function is disabled.
1 Multiprocessor communication function is enabled.
Slave Mode Control Input Switch
0 CS2 and IOW are enabled
1 ECS2 and EIOW are enabled
I2C Master Enable
0
1
I2C bus interface data registers and control registers are disabled (initial value)
I2C bus interface data registers and control registers are enabled
I2C Transfer Rate Select
IICX CKS2*2 CKS1*2 CKS0*2 Clock
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
øP/28
øP/40
øP/48
øP/64
øP/80
øP/100
øP/112
øP/128
øP/56
øP/80
øP/96
øP/128
øP/160
øP/200
øP/224
øP/256
øP = 4 MHz
143 kHz
100 kHz
83.3 kHz
62.5 kHz
50.0 kHz
40.0 kHz
35.7 kHz
31.3 kHz
71.4 kHz
50.0 kHz
41.7 kHz
31.3 kHz
25.0 kHz
20.0 kHz
17.9 kHz
15.6 kHz
Transfer Rate*1
øP = 5 MHz øP = 8 MHz øP = 10 MHz
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
78.1 kHz 125 kHz
156 kHz
62.5 kHz 100 kHz
125 kHz
50.0 kHz 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
44.6 kHz 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
89.3 kHz 143 kHz
179 kHz
62.5 kHz 100 kHz
125 kHz
52.1 kHz 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
31.3 kHz 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz
25.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
22.3 kHz 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
19.5 kHz 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
øP = 16 MHz
571 kHz
400 kHz
333 kHz
250 kHz
200 kHz
160 kHz
143 kHz
125 kHz
286 kHz
200 kHz
167 kHz
125 kHz
100 kHz
80.0 kHz
71.4 kHz
62.5 kHz
Notes: *1 øP = ø.
*2 CKS2 to CKS0 are bits 2 to 0 of the I2C bus control register in the I2C bus interface.
I2C Extra Buffer Reserve
I2C
Extra Buffer Select
0 PA7 to PA4 are normal input/output pins
1 PA7 to PA4 are selected for bus drive
656
SYSCR—System Control Register
Bit
H'C4
System Control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
XRST
NMIEG
HIE
RAME
Initial value
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
RAM Enable
0 On-chip RAM is disabled.
1 On-chip RAM is enabled. (initial value)
Host Interface Enable
0 Host interface is prohibited (initial value)
1 Host interface is allowed (slave mode)
NMI Edge
0 Falling edge of NMI is detected.
1 Rising edge of NMI is detected.
External Reset
0
1
Reset was caused by watchdog timer overflow
Reset was caused by external reset signal (initial value)
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (ZTAT and Mask ROM Versions)
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
—
—
Clock settling time = 8,192 states (initial value)
Clock settling time = 16,384 states
Clock settling time = 32,768 states
Clock settling time = 65,536 states
Clock settling time = 131,072 states
Unused
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (F-ZTAT Version)
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
—
Settling time = 8,192 states (initial value)
Settling time = 16,384 states
Settling time = 32,768 states
Settling time = 65,536 states
Settling time = 131,072 states
Settling time = 1,024 states
Unused
Software Standby
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode. (initial value)
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode.
657
MDCR—Mode Control Register
H'C5
System Control
• Except H8/3437SF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
MDS1
MDS0
Initial value
1
1
1
0
0
1
*
*
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
Mode Select Bits
Value at mode pins.
Note: * Determined by inputs at pins MD1 and MD0.
• H8/3437SF
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EXPE
—
—
—
—
—
MDS1
MDS0
Initial value
*
1
1
0
0
1
*
*
Read/Write
R/W*
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
Mode Select Bits
Value at mode pins.
Expanded Mode Enable
0 Single-chip mode is selected.
1 Expanded mode is selected (writable in boot mode only).
Note: * Determined by inputs at pins MD1 and MD0.
658
ISCR—IRQ Sense Control Register
Bit
7
6
H'C6
5
4
System Control
2
3
1
0
IRQ7SC IRQ6SC IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0 to IRQ7 Sense Control
0 IRQ0 to IRQ7 are level-sensed (active low).
1 IRQ0 to IRQ7 are edge-sensed (falling edge).
IER—IRQ Enable Register
Bit
H'C7
System Control
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ7E
IRQ6E
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0 to IRQ7 Enable
0 IRQ0 to IRQ7 are disabled.
1 IRQ0 to IRQ7 are enabled.
659
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'C8
TMR0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
TCR
STCR
Description
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0
0
0
0
—
—
Timer stopped
0
0
1
—
0
øP/8 internal clock, falling edge
0
0
1
—
1
øP/2 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
0
—
0
øP/64 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
0
—
1
øP/32 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
1
—
0
øP/1024 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
1
—
1
øP/256 internal clock, falling edge
1
0
0
—
—
Timer stopped
1
0
1
—
—
External clock, rising edge
1
1
0
—
—
External clock, falling edge
1
1
1
—
—
External clock, rising and falling edges
Counter Clear
0 0 Counter is not cleared.
0 1 Cleared by compare-match A.
1 0 Cleared by compare-match B.
1 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A
0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B
0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
660
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'C9
TMR0
7
6
5
4
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W) *1
R/(W)*1
R/(W)*1
3
OS3 *2
2
OS2 *2
1
OS1*2
0
OS0*2
Output Select
0 0 No change on compare-match A.
0 1 Output 0 on compare-match A.
1 0 Output 1 on compare-match A.
1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match A.
Output Select
0 0 No change on compare-match B.
0 1 Output 0 on compare-match B.
1 0 Output 1 on compare-match B.
1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match B.
Timer Overflow Flag
0 Cleared by reading OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF.
1 Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
Compare-Match Flag A
0 Cleared by reading CMFA = 1, then writing 0 in CMFA.
1 Set when TCNT = TCORA.
Compare-Match Flag B
0 Cleared by reading CMFB = 1, then writing 0 in CMFB.
1 Set when TCNT = TCORB.
Notes: *1 Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
*2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to 0, output is disabled.
661
TCORA—Time Constant Register A
H'CA
TMR0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFA bit is set to 1 when TCORA = TCNT.
TCORB—Time Constant Register B
H'CB
TMR0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFB bit is set to 1 when TCORB = TCNT.
TCNT—Timer Counter
Bit
7
H'CC
6
5
4
3
TMR0
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
662
TCR—Timer Control Register
Bit
H'D0
TMR1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
TCR
STCR
Description
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0
0
0
0
—
—
Timer stopped
0
0
1
0
—
øP/8 internal clock, falling edge
0
0
1
1
—
øP/2 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
0
0
—
øP/64 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
0
1
—
øP/128 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
1
0
—
øP/1024 internal clock, falling edge
0
1
1
1
—
øP/2048 internal clock, falling edge
1
0
0
—
—
Timer stopped
1
0
1
—
—
External clock, rising edge
1
1
0
—
—
External clock, falling edge
1
1
1
—
—
External clock, rising and falling edges
Counter Clear
0 0 Counter is not cleared.
0 1 Cleared by compare-match A.
1 0 Cleared by compare-match B.
1 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
1 Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A
0 Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B
0 Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
1 Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
663
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
H'D1
7
6
5
4
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
—
0
0
0
R/(W) *1
R/(W) *1 R/(W) *1
3
TMR1
2
OS3*2
0
1
OS2 *2
OS1*2
OS0*2
1
0
0
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Notes: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0.
*1 Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
*2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to 0, output is disabled.
TCORA—Time Constant Register A
H'D2
TMR1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0.
TCORB—Time Constant Register B
H'D3
TMR1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0.
TCNT—Timer Counter
Bit
7
H'D4
6
5
4
3
TMR1
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for TMR0.
664
ICCR—I2C Bus Control Register
Bit
I2C
H'D8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICE
IEIC
MST
TRS
ACK
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transfer Clock Select
IICX* CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clock
øP/28
øP/40
øP/48
øP/64
øP/80
øP/100
øP/112
øP/128
øP/56
øP/80
øP/96
øP/128
øP/160
øP/200
øP/224
øP/256
øP = 4 MHz
143 kHz
100 kHz
83.3 kHz
62.5 kHz
50.0 kHz
40.0 kHz
35.7 kHz
31.3 kHz
71.4 kHz
50.0 kHz
41.7 kHz
31.3 kHz
25.0 kHz
20.0 kHz
17.9 kHz
15.6 kHz
Transfer Rate
øP = 5 MHz øP = 8 MHz øP = 10 MHz
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
78.1 kHz 125 kHz
156 kHz
62.5 kHz 100 kHz
125 kHz
50.0 kHz 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
44.6 kHz 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
89.3 kHz 143 kHz
179 kHz
62.5 kHz 100 kHz
125 kHz
52.1 kHz 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
31.3 kHz 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz
25.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
22.3 kHz 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
19.5 kHz 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
øP = 16 MHz
571 kHz
400 kHz
333 kHz
250 kHz
200 kHz
160 kHz
143 kHz
125 kHz
286 kHz
200 kHz
167 kHz
125 kHz
100 kHz
80.0 kHz
71.4 kHz
62.5 kHz
Note: When øP = ø.
The shaded setting exceeds the maximum transfer rate in the standard I2C bus
specifications.
* IICX is bit 5 of the serial timer control register (STCR).
Acknowledgement Mode Select
0 Acknowledgement mode
1 Serial mode
Master/Slave Select and Transmit/Receive Select
0 0 Slave receive mode
1 Slave transmit mode
1 0 Master receive mode
1 Master transmit mode
I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupts disabled
1 Interrupts enabled
I2C
Bus Interface Enable
0 Interface module disabled, with pins SCL and SDA operating as ports
1 Interface module enabled for transfer operations, with pins SCL and SDA capable of bus drive
665
ICSR—I2C Bus Status Register
Bit
I2C
H'D9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BBSY
IRIC
SCP
—
AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB
Initial value
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/(W)*
W
—
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
Acknowledge Bit
0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data
1
Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data
General Call Address Recognition Flag
0 General call address not recognized
Cleared when ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
Cleared by reading ADZ = 1, then writing 0
1
General call address recognized
Set when the general call address is detected in slave receive mode
Slave Address Recognition Flag
0 Slave address or general call address not recognized (Initial value)
Cleared when ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
Cleared by reading AAS = 1, then writing 0
1
Slave address or general call address recognized
Set when the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode
Arbitration Lost Flag
0 Bus arbitration won
Cleared when ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
Cleared by reading AL = 1, then writing 0
1
Arbitration lost
Set if the internal SDA and bus line disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode
Set if the internal SCL is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit
0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with BBSY
1
Reading always results in 1
Writing is ignored
I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag
Bus Busy
0 Bus is free
Cleared by detection
of a stop condition
1 Bus is busy
Set by detection
of a start condition
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
Cleared by reading IRIC = 1, then writing 0
1
Interrupt requested
Set to 1 at the following times:
Master mode
• End of data transfer
• Bus arbitration lost
Slave mode (when FS = 0)
• When the slave address is matched, and whenever a data transfer ends at timing of
a retransmit start condition after address matching or a stop condition is detected
• When a general call address is detected, and whenever a data transfer ends at timing
of a retransmit start condition after address detection or a stop condition is detected
Slave mode (when FS = 1)
• End of data transfer
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
666
SMR—Serial Mode Register
Bit
H'D8
SCI0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 ø clock
0 1 øP/4 clock
1 0 øP/16 clock
1 1 øP/64 clock
Multiprocessor Mode
0 Multiprocessor function disabled
1 Multiprocessor format selected
Stop Bit Length
0 One stop bit
1 Two stop bits
Parity Mode
0 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Parity Enable
0 Transmit: No parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit not checked.
1 Transmit: Parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit checked.
Character Length
0 8-bit data length
1 7-bit data length
Communication Mode
0 Asynchronous
1 Synchronous
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
667
BRR—Bit Rate Register
H'D9
SCI0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Constant that determines the bit rate
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
668
SCR—Serial Control Register
Bit
H'DA
SCI0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Enable 0
0 Asynchronous serial clock not output
1 Asynchronous serial clock output at SCK pin
Clock Enable 1
0 Internal clock
1 External clock
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
0 TSR-empty interrupt request is disabled.
1 TSR-empty interrupt request is enabled.
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable
0 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is disabled.
1 Multiprocessor receive interrupt function is enabled.
Receive Enable
0 Receive disabled
1 Receive enabled
Transmit Enable
0 Transmit disabled
1 Transmit enabled
Receive Interrupt Enable
0 Receive-end interrupt and receive-error interrupt requests are disabled.
1 Receive-end interrupt and receive-error interrupt requests are enabled.
Transmit Interrupt Enable
0 TDR-empty interrupt request is disabled.
1 TDR-empty interrupt request is enabled.
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
669
TDR—Transmit Data Register
H'DB
SCI0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transmit data
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
670
SSR—Serial Status Register
Bit
H'DC
SCI0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W) *
R
R
R/W
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
R/(W) *
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
0 Multiprocessor bit = 0 in transmit data.
1 Multiprocessor bit = 1 in transmit data.
Multiprocessor Bit
0 Multiprocessor bit = 0 in receive data.
1 Multiprocessor bit = 1 in receive data.
Transmit End
0 Cleared by reading TDRE = 1, then writing 0 in TDRE.
1 Set to 1 when TE = 0, or when TDRE = 1 at the end of
character transmission.
Parity Error
0 Cleared by reading PER = 1, then writing 0 in PER.
1 Set when a parity error occurs (parity of receive data
does not match parity selected by O/E bit in SMR).
Framing Error
0 Cleared by reading FER = 1, then writing 0 in FER.
1 Set when a framing error occurs (stop bit is 0).
Overrun Error
0 Cleared by reading ORER = 1, then writing 0 in ORER.
1 Set when an overrun error occurs (next data is completely
received while RDRF bit is set to 1).
Receive Data Register Full
0 Cleared by reading RDRF = 1, then writing 0 in RDRF.
1 Set when one character is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR.
Transmit Data Register Empty
0 Cleared by reading TDRE = 1, then writing 0 in TDRE.
1 Set when:
1. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
2. TE is cleared while TDRE = 0.
Note: * Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 3 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
671
RDR—Receive Data Register
H'DD
SCI0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive data
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
ICDR—I2C Bus Data Register
Bit
I2C
H'DE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICDR7
ICDR6
ICDR5
ICDR4
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
ICDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transmit/receive data
SAR—Slave Address Register
Bit
I2C
H'DF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Slave address
Format Select
0 Addressing format, slave address recognized
1 Non-addressing format
672
ICMR—I 2C Bus Mode Register
Bit
I2C
H'DF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MLS
WAIT
—
—
—
BC2
BC1
BC0
Initial value
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Counter
BC2 BC1 BC0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Bits/Frame
Serial Mode
Acknowledgement Mode
0
8
9
1
1
2
0
2
3
1
3
4
0
4
5
1
5
6
0
6
7
1
7
8
Wait Insertion Bit
0 Data and acknowledge transferred consecutively
1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge
MSB-First/LSB-First
0 MSB-first
1 LSB-first
673
ADDRA (H and L)—A/D Data Register A
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
H'E0, H'E1
9
8
7
6
A/D
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ADDRAH
ADDRAL
A/D Conversion Data
10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result
ADDRB (H and L)—A/D Data Register B
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved Bits
H'E2, H'E3
9
8
7
6
A/D
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ADDRBH
ADDRBL
A/D Conversion Data
10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result
ADDRC (H and L)—A/D Data Register C
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved Bits
H'E4, H'E5
9
8
7
6
A/D
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ADDRCH
A/D Conversion Data
10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result
674
ADDRCL
Reserved Bits
ADDRD (H and L)—A/D Data Register D
Bit
15
14
4
3
2
1
0
AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 —
11
10
9
8
7
6
A/D
5
13
12
H'E6, H'E7
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ADDRDH
A/D Conversion Data
10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result
ADDRDL
Reserved Bits
675
ADCSR—A/D Control/Status Register
Bit
H'E8
A/D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel Select
CH2
CH1
0
0
1
1
0
1
CH0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Single Mode
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
Scan Mode
AN0
AN0, AN1
AN0 to AN2
AN0 to AN3
AN4
AN4, AN5
AN4 to AN6
AN4 to AN7
Clock Select
0 Conversion time = 266 states (max)
1 Conversion time = 134 states (max)
Note: When øP = ø
Scan Mode
0 Single mode
1 Scan mode
A/D Start
0 A/D conversion is halted.
1 1. Single mode:
One A/D conversion is performed, then this bit is automatically cleared to 0.
2. Scan mode:
A/C conversion starts and continues cyclically on all selected channels until 0 is
written in this bit.
A/D Interrupt Enable
0 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled.
1 The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled.
A/D End Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads ADF = 1, then writes 0 in ADF.
1 Set to 1 at the following times:
1. Single mode: at the completion of A/D conversion
2. Scan mode: when all selected channels have been converted.
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
676
ADCR—A/D Control Register
Bit
H'E9
A/D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Trigger Enable
0 ADTRG is disabled.
1 ADTRG is enabled. A/D conversion can be started by external trigger,
or by software.
HICR—Host Interface Control Register
Bit
H'F0
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
—
—
—
—
—
IBFIE2
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
0
Host Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slave Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
IBFIE1 FGA20E
0
0
Fast Gate A20 Enable
0 Fast A20 gate function disabled
1 Fast A20 gate function enabled
Input Buffer Full Interrupt Enable 1
0 IDR1 input buffer full interrupt disabled
1 IDR1 input buffer full interrupt enabled
Input Buffer Full Interrupt Enable 2
0 IDR2 input buffer full interrupt disabled
1 IDR2 input buffer full interrupt enabled
677
KMIMR—Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
H'F1
HIF
3
2
0
1
KMIMR7 KMIMR6 KMIMR5 KMIMR4 KMIMR3 KMIMR2 KMIMR1 KMIMR0
Initial value
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask
0 Key-sense input interrupt request enabled
1 Key-sense input interrupt request disabled (initial value)*
Note: * Initial value of KMIMR6 is 0.
KMPCR—Port 6 Input Pull-Up Control Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
H'F2
HIF (port 6)
2
3
1
0
KM7PCR KM6PCR KM5PCR KM4PCR KM3PCR KM2PCR KM1PCR KM0PCR
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port 6 Input Pull-Up Control
0 Input pull-up transistor is off. (initial value)
1 Input pull-up transistor is on.
KMIMRA—Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Register A H'F3
Bit
7
6
5
4
HIF
2
3
1
0
KMIMR15 KMIMR14 KMIMR13 KMIMR12 KMIMR11 KMIMR10 KMIMR9 KMIMR8
Initial value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask
0 Key-sense input interrupt request enabled
1 Key-sense input interrupt request disabled (initial value)
678
IDR1—Input Data Register 1
Bit
H'F4
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Host Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Slave Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Input data (command or data input from host processor)
ODR1—Output Data Register 1
Bit
Initial value
H'F5
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output data (data output to host processor)
679
STR1—Status Register 1
Bit
H'F6
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Output Buffer Full
0 Host has read ODR1
1 Slave has written to ODR1
Input Buffer Full
0 Slave has read IDR1
1 Host has written to IDR1
Defined By User
Command/Data
0 IDR1 contains data
1 IDR1 contains a command
Defined By User
DADR0—D/A Data Register 0
Bit
7
6
H'F8
5
4
3
D/A
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Data to be converted
680
DADR1—D/A Data Register 1
H'F9
D/A
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Data to be converted
DACR—D/A Control Register
Bit
H'FA
7
6
5
D/A
4
3
2
1
0
DAOE1
DAOE0
DAE
Initial value
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
D/A Enable
Bit 7
Bit 6
DAOE1 DAOE0
0
1
Bit 5
Description
DAE
0
—
Channels 0 and 1 disabled
1
0
Channel 0 enabled, channel 1 disabled
1
Channels 0 and 1 enabled
0
Channel 0 disabled, channel 1 enabled
1
Channels 0 and 1 enabled
—
Channels 0 and 1 enabled
0
1
D/A Output Enable 0
0 Analog output at DA0 disabled
1 Analog conversion in channel 0 and output at DA0 enabled
D/A Output Enable 1
0 Analog output at DA1 disabled
1 Analog conversion in channel 1 and output at DA1 enabled
681
IDR2—Input Data Register 2
Bit
H'FC
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IDR7
IDR6
IDR5
IDR4
IDR3
IDR2
IDR1
IDR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Host Read/Write
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Slave Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Input data (command or data input from host processor)
ODR2—Output Data Register 2
Bit
H'FD
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ODR7
ODR6
ODR5
ODR4
ODR3
ODR2
ODR1
ODR0
Initial value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output data (data output to host processor)
682
STR2—Status Register 2
Bit
H'FE
HIF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DBU
DBU
DBU
DBU
C/D
DBU
IBF
OBF
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Host Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Slave Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Output Buffer Full
0 Host has read ODR2
1 Slave has written to ODR2
Input Buffer Full
0 Slave has read IDR2
1 Host has written to IDR2
Defined By User
Command/Data
0 IDR2 contains data
1 IDR2 contains a command
Defined By User
683
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams
Note: “Reset” here means “reset + hardware standby.”
C.1
Port 1 Block Diagram
RP1P
Hardware standby
WP1P
Mode 1
Reset
S R
Q
D
P1nDDR
C
*
WP1D
Mode 3
Reset
R
Q
D
P1nDR
C
P1n
Modes 1 or 2
WP1
RP1
WP1P: Write to P1PCR
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1:
Write to port 1
RP1P: Read P1PCR
RP1:
Read port 1
n = 0 to 7
Note: * Set priority
Figure C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram
684
Internal address bus (lower)
R
Q
D
P1nPCR
C
Internal data bus
Reset
C.2
Port 2 Block Diagram
RP2P
Hardware standby
WP2P
Mode 1
Reset
S R
Q
D
P2nDDR
C
*
WP2D
Mode 3
P2n
Modes 1 or 2
Internal data bus
R
Q
D
P2nPCR
C
Internal address bus (upper)
Reset
Reset
R
Q
D
P2nDR
C
WP2
RP2
WP2P: Write to P2PCR
WP2D: Write to P2DDR
WP2:
Write to port 2
RP2P: Read P2PCR
RP2:
Read port 2
n = 0 to 7
Note: * Set priority
Figure C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram
685
C.3
Port 3 Block Diagram
HIE Mode 3
Reset
Reset
R
Q
D
P3nPCR
C
RP3P
WP3P
CS
IOR
R
Q
D
P3nDDR
External address
write
Reset
P3n
R
Q
D
P3nDR
C
Modes 1 or 2
WP3
CS
IOW
RP3
External address
read
WP3P: Write to P3PCR
WP3D: Write to P3DDR
WP3:
Write to port 3
RP3P: Read P3PCR
RP3:
Read port 3
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram
686
Internal data bus
WP3D
Host interface data bus
C
C.4
Port 4 Block Diagrams
R
Q
D
P4nDDR
C
WP4D
Reset
Internal data bus
Reset
R
Q
D
P4nDR
C
P4n
WP4
RP4
8-bit timer
Counter clock input
Counter reset input
WP4D: Write to P4DDR
WP4: Write to port 4
RP4:
Read port 4
n = 0, 2
Figure C.4 (a) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P4 0, P42)
687
R
Q
D
P4nDDR
C
WP4D
Reset
R
Q
D
P4nDR
C
P4n
Internal data bus
Reset
8-bit timer
WP4
Output enable
8-bit timer output
PWM timer output
RP4
WP4D: Write to P4DDR
WP4:
Write to port 4
RP4:
Read port 4
n = 1, 6, 7
Figure C.4 (b) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P41, P46, P47)
688
Reset
R
Q
D
P4nDDR
C
HIF
WP4D
R
Q
D
P4nDR
C
P4n
WP4
Internal data bus
Reset
Reset
RESOBF2,
RESOBF1
(reset HIRQ11
and HIRQ12,
respectively)
RP4
8-bit timer
WP4D: Write to P4DDR
WP4: Write to port 4*
RP4:
Read port 4
n = 3, 5
Counter clock input
Counter reset input
Note: * Refer to table 14.9.
Figure C.4 (c) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P43, P45)
689
Reset
R
Q
D
P44DDR
C
Reset
WP4D
R
Q
D
P44DR
C
P44
WP4
Internal data bus
HIF
RESOBF1
(reset HIRQ1)
8-bit timer
PWM timer
Output enable
8-bit timer output
RP4
WP4D: Write to P4DDR
WP4:
Write to port 4*
RP4:
Read port 4
Note: * Refer to table 14.9.
Figure C.4 (d) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P44)
690
C.5
Port 5 Block Diagrams
R
Q
D
P50DDR
C
WP5D
Internal data bus
Reset
Reset
R
Q
D
P50DR
C
P50
SCI
WP5
Output enable
Serial transmit
data
RP5
WP5D: Write to P5DDR
WP5:
Write to port 5
RP5:
Read port 5
Figure C.5 (a) Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P50)
691
R
Q
D
P51DDR
C
WP5D
Internal data bus
Reset
SCI
Input enable
Reset
R
Q
D
P51DR
C
P51
WP5
RP5
WP5D: Write to P5DDR
WP5:
Write to port 5
RP5:
Read port 5
Figure C.5 (b) Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P51)
692
Serial receive
data
R
Q
D
P52DDR
C
WP5D
Reset
Internal data bus
Reset
SCI
Clock input
enable
R
Q
D
P52DR
C
P52
WP5
Clock output
enable
Clock output
RP5
Clock input
WP5D: Write to P5DDR
WP5:
Write to port 5
RP5:
Read port 5
Figure C.5 (c) Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P52)
693
C.6
Port 6 Block Diagrams
Reset
R
Q
D
KMnPCR
C
WP6P
Hardware standby
Reset
R
Q
D
P6nDDR
C
WP6D
Reset
Internal data bus
RP6P
R
Q
D
P6nDR
C
P6n
WP6
RP6
Free-running timer
Input capture input
Counter clock input
WP6D: Write to P6DDR
WP6: Write to port 6
RP6:
Read port 6
RP6P: Read KMPCR
WP6P: Write to KMPCR
n = 0, 2, 3, 4, 5
Key-sense interrupt
input
KMIMRn
Figure C.6 (a) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P6 0, P62, P63, P64, P65)
694
Reset
R
Q
D
KM1PCR
C
WP6P
Reset
Hardware standby
R
Q
D
P61DDR
C
WP6D
Internal data bus
RP6P
Reset
R
Q
D
P61DR
C
P61
Free-running timer
WP6
Output enable
Output compare
output
RP6
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
RP6P:
WP6P:
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
Read KMPCR
Write to KMPCR
Key-sense interrupt
input
KMIMR1
Figure C.6 (b) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P61)
695
Reset
R
Q
D
KM6PCR
C
WP6P
Reset
Hardware standby
R
Q
D
P66DDR
C
WP6D
Internal data bus
RP6P
Reset
R
Q
D
P66DR
C
P66
Free-running timer
WP6
Output enable
Output compare
output
RP6
KMIMR6
IRQ6 input
Other key-sense
interrupt inputs
IRQ enable register
IRQ6 enable
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
RP6P:
WP6P:
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
Read KMPCR
Write to KMPCR
Figure C.6 (c) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P66)
696
Reset
R
Q
D
KM7PCR
C
WP6P
Hardware standby
Reset
R
Q
D
P67DDR
C
WP6D
Internal data bus
RP6P
Reset
R
Q
D
P67DR
C
P67
WP6
RP6
KMIMR7
Key-sense interrupt
input
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
RP6P:
WP6P:
IRQ7 input
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
Read KMPCR
Write to KMPCR
IRQ enable register
IRQ7 enable
Figure C.6 (d) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P67)
697
Port 7 Block Diagrams
Internal data bus
C.7
RP7
P7n
A/D converter
Analog input
RP7: Read port 7
n = 0 to 5
RP7
P7n
Internal data bus
Figure C.7 (a) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P7 0 to P75)
A/D converter
Analog input
D/A converter
Output enable
Analog output
RP7: Read port 7
n = 6, 7
Figure C.7 (b) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P76 and P77)
698
Port 8 Block Diagrams
Reset
HIE
R
Q
D
P80DDR
C
WP8D
Reset
R
Q
D
P80DR
C
P80
Internal data bus
C.8
WP8
RP8
HIF
HA0
WP8D: Write to P8DDR
WP8: Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
Figure C.8 (a) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80)
699
R
Q
D
P81DDR
C
WP8D
Internal data bus
Reset
Reset
R
Q
D
P81DR
C
P81
WP8
HIF
FGA20E
FGA20
RP8
WP8D: Write to P8DDR
WP8:
Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
Figure C.8 (b) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P81)
700
Reset
HIE
R
Q
D
P8nDDR
C
Internal data bus
WP8D
Reset
R
Q
D
P8nDR
C
P8n
WP8
RP8
HIF
Input (CS1, IOR)
WP8D: Write to P8DDR
WP8:
Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
n = 2, 3
Figure C.8 (c) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pins P82, P83)
701
HIE STAC
Reset
WP8D
Reset
R
Q
D
P84DR
C
P84
WP8
Internal data bus
R
Q
D
P84DDR
C
SCI
Output enable
Serial transmit data
HIF
IOW
RP8
IRQ3 input
IRQ enable register
WP8D: Write to P8DDR
WP8:
Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
Figure C.8 (d) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P84)
702
IRQ3 enable
Reset
HIE
STAC
R
Q
D
P85DDR
C
SCI
WP8D
R
Q
D
P85DR
C
P85
Internal data bus
Reset
Input enable
WP8
RP8
Serial receive
data
HIF
CS2 input
IRQ4 input
IRQ enable register
IRQ4 enable
WP8D: Write to P9DDR
WP8: Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
Figure C.8 (e) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P85)
703
Reset
R
Q
D
P86DDR
C
SCI
WP8D
Reset
R
Q
D
P86DR
C
P86
Internal data bus
Clock input enable
WP8
Clock output enable
Clock output
RP8
Clock input
IRQ5 input
IRQ enable register
IRQ5 enable
WP8D: Write to P8DDR
WP8: Write to port 8
RP8:
Read port 8
Note: For a block diagram when the SCL pin function is selected, see section 13,
I2C Bus Interface.
Figure C.8 (f) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P86)
704
C.9
Port 9 Block Diagrams
HIE
STAC
R
Q
D
P90DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
Internal data bus
Reset
R
Q
D
P90DR
C
P90
WP9
RP9
HIF
ECS2 input
IRQ2 input
IRQ enable register
IRQ2 enable
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to port 9
RP9:
Read port 9
A/D converter
External trigger
input
Figure C.9 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P90)
705
HIE
STAC
R
Q
D
P91DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P91DR
C
P91
Internal data bus
Reset
WP9
RP9
HIF
EIOW input
IRQ1 input
IRQ enable register
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to port 9
RP9:
Read port 9
Figure C.9 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P91)
706
IRQ1 enable
R
Q
D
P92DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P92DR
C
P92
Internal data bus
Reset
WP9
RP9
IRQ0 input
IRQ enable register
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to port 9
RP9:
Read port 9
IRQ0 enable
Figure C.9 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P92)
707
Modes 1 or 2
Reset
R
Q
D
P9nDDR
C
WP9D
Mode 3
P9n
Modes 1 or 2
Internal data bus
Hardware standby
Reset
R
Q
D
P9nDR
C
WP9
RP9
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to port 9
RP9:
Read port 9
n = 3, 4, 5
Figure C.9 (d) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P93, P94, P95)
708
RD output
WR output
AS output
Modes 1 or 2
Reset
S R
Q
D
P96DDR
C
WP9D
P96
*
Internal data bus
Hardware standby
ø
RP9
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
Read port 9
RP9:
Note: * Set priority
Figure C.9 (e) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P96)
709
Wait input enable
Modes 1 or 2
R
Q
D
P97DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
Internal data bus
Reset
R
Q
D
P97DR
C
P97
WP9
RP9
WAIT input
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to port 9
RP9:
Read port 9
Note: For a block diagram when the SDA pin function is selected, see section 13, I2C Bus Interface.
Figure C.9 (f) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P97)
710
C.10
Port A Block Diagram
IICS
R
Q
D
PAnDDR
C
WPAD
Reset
Internal data bus
Reset
R
Q
D
PAnODR
C
PAn
WPA
RPA
Key-sense interrupt
input
KMIMRn+8
WPAD: Write to PADDR
WPA:
Write to port A
RPA:
Read port A
n = 0 to 7
Note: For a block diagram when pins PA7 to PA4 are used as bus buffer input/output pins, see section 13,
I2C Bus Interface.
Figure C.10 Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA0 to PA 7)
711
C.11
Port B Block Diagram
HIE Modes 1 or 2
CS
IOR
Reset
R
Q
D
PBnDDR
Reset
PBn
R
Q
D
PBnODR
C
WPB
CS
IOW
RPB
WPBD: Write to PBDDR
WPB:
Write to port B
RPB:
Read port B
n = 0 to 7
Figure C.11 Port B Block Diagram
712
Internal data bus
WPBD
Host interface data bus
C
Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State
Table D.1
Port States
Port Name
(Multiplexed
Pin Names) Mode
P17 to P1 0
A7 to A 0
1
2
Reset
Hardware
Standby
Mode
Software
Standby Mode Sleep Mode
L
T
L
T
keep
P27 to P2 0
1
L
A15 to A 8
2
T
T
3
1
D7 to D0
2
T
T
3
P47 to P4 0
1
A7 to A 0
Address/
input port
(DDR = 1)
L
(DDR = 0)
keep
3
P37 to P3 0
keep *1
Program
Execution
State (Normal
Operation)
I/O port
L
keep
*1
A15 to A 8
(DDR = 1)
L
(DDR = 0)
keep
Address/
input port
keep
I/O port
T
keep
T
D7 to D0
keep
I/O port
*2
keep
I/O port
T
T
keep
T
T
keep *2
keep
I/O port
T
T
keep *2
keep
I/O port
T
T
T
T
Input port
2
3
P52 to P5 0
1
2
3
P67 to P6 0
1
2
3
P77 to P7 0
1
2
3
713
Port Name
(Multiplexed
Pin Names) Mode
P86 to P8 0
1
Reset
Hardware
Standby
Mode
Software
Standby Mode Sleep Mode
Program
Execution
State (Normal
Operation)
T
T
keep *2
keep
I/O port
T
T
T/keep *2
T/keep
WAIT/
I/O port
keep *2
keep
I/O port
H
Clock
output
Clock
output
(DDR = 1)
H
(DDR = 0)
T
(DDR = 1)
Clock output
(DDR = 0)
T
(DDR = 1)
Clock output
(DDR = 0)
Input port
H
H
AS, WR, RD
keep
keep
I/O port
2
3
P97/WAIT
1
2
3
P96/ø
P95 to P9 3,
1
2
Clock
output
3
T
1
H
T
T
AS, WR, RD 2
P92 to P9 0
3
T
1
T
T
keep
keep
I/O port
T
T
keep *2
keep
I/O port
T
T
keep *2
keep
I/O port
2
3
PA7 to PA 0
1
2
3
PB7 to PB 0
1
2
3
Legend:
H:
High level
L:
Low level
T:
High impedance
keep: Input port becomes high-impedance (when DDR = 0 and PCR = 1, MOS input pull-ups
remain on), output port retains state
Notes: *1 With address outputs, the last address accessed is retained.
*2 As on-chip supporting modules are initialized, becomes an I/O port determined by DDR
and DR.
714
Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from
Hardware Standby Mode
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
(1) To retain RAM contents when the RAME bit in SYSCR is set to 1, drive the RES signal low
10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown below. RES must remain
low until STBY goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns).
STBY
t1 ≥ 10 tcyc
t2 ≥ 0 ns
RES
(2) When the RAME bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0 or when it is not necessary to retain RAM
contents, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1).
Timing of Recovery From Hardware Standby Mode: Drive the RES signal low approximately
100 ns before STBY goes high.
STBY
t ≥ 100 ns
tOSC
RES
715
Appendix F Option Lists
HD6433437, HD6433436, HD6433434 Option List
Please check off the appropriate applications and
enter the necessary information.
Date of order
Customer
Department
Name
ROM code name
LSI number
(Hitachi entry)
1 ROM Size
HD6433434: 32-kbyte
HD6433436: 48-kbyte
HD6433437: 60-kbyte
2 System Oscillator
Crystal oscillator
f=
MHz
External clock
f=
MHz
3 Power Supply Voltage/Maximum Operating Frequency
VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V (16 MHz max.)
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V (12 MHz max.)
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V (10 MHz max.)
Notes: 1. Please select the power supply voltage/operating frequency version according to the
power supply voltage used.
Example: For use at VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V/f = 10 MHz,
select VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V (16 MHz max.).
2. The power supply voltage and maximum operating frequency of the selected version
should also be entered on the Single-Chip Microcomputer Ordering Specifications
Sheet.
Continued on the following page.
716
ROM code name
Continued from the preceding page.
LSI number
(Hitachi entry)
4 I2C Bus Option
I2C bus used
I2C bus not used
Notes: 1. The “I2C bus used” option includes all cases where data transfer is performed via the
SCL and SDA pins using the on-chip I2C bus interface function (hardware module). If
the I 2C bus interface function (hardware module) is used, various bus interfaces with
different bus specifications and names are also included in “I2C bus used”. The case in
which only the bus drive function of pins PA7 to PA4 in port A is used is not included.
2. When “I 2C bus not used” is selected, values cannot be set in registers relating to the I 2C
bus interface (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR, ICMR). These register always read H'FF. With
emulators, and ZTAT and F-ZTAT versions, the “I2C bus used” option is selected. If the
“I2C bus not used” option is selected, it is essential to ensure that I 2C bus interface
related registers are not accessed.
For the Microcomputer Family item in 1. Basic Specifications in the Single-Chip
Microcomputer Ordering Specifications Sheet*, please specify the appropriate item from
the table below according to the combination of items 1 and 4 above. If the “I 2C bus used”
option is selected, please also specify this in Special Specifications (Product Specifications,
Mark Specifications, etc.) in 1. Basic Specifications.
* Please contact the relevant sales department for information on the Single-Chip
Microcomputer Ordering Specifications Sheet.
I 2C
I 2C bus used
I 2C bus not used
32-kbyte
HD6433434W
HD6433434
48-kbyte
HD6433436W
HD6433436
60-kbyte
HD6433437W
HD6433437
ROM Size
717
Appendix G Product Code Lineup
Table G.1
H8/3437 Series Product Code Lineup
Product Type
H8/3437
Flash
memory
version
Product Code
Dual-powerHD64F3437F16
supply F-ZTAT HD64F3437FLH16
version
HD64F3437TF16
Mark Code
Package
(Hitachi Package Code)
HD64F3437F16
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD64F3437F16
HD64F3437TF16
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
HD64F3437TFLH16 HD64F3437TF16
PROM
version
Mask ROM
version
H8/3436
H8/3434
Mask ROM
version
Flash
memory
version
Single-power- HD64F3437SF16
supply F-ZTAT HD64F3437STF16
version
HD64F3437F16
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD64F3437TF16
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
ZTAT version
HD6473437F16
HD6473437F16
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6473437TF16
HD6473437TF16
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
With I C
interface
HD6433437WF
HD6433437W(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433437WTF
HD6433437W(***)TF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
Without I 2C
interface
HD6433437F
HD6433437(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433437TF
HD6433437(***)TF
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
With I C
interface
HD6433436WF
HD6433436W(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433436WTF
HD6433436W(***)TF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
Without I 2C
interface
HD6433436F
HD6433436(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433436TF
HD6433436(***)TF
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
F-ZTAT
version
HD64F3434F16
HD64F3434F16
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD64F3434FLH16
HD64F3434F16
HD64F3434TF16
HD64F3434TF16
2
2
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
HD64F3434TFLH16 HD64F3434TF16
PROM
version
ZTAT
version
Mask ROM
version
With I2C
interface
2
Without I C
interface
HD6473434F16
HD6473434F16
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6473434TF16
HD6473434TF16
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
HD6433434WF
HD6433434W(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433434WTF
HD6433434W(***)TF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
HD6433434F
HD6433434(***)F
100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433434TF
HD6433434(***)TF
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B)
Note: (***) in mask ROM versions is the ROM code.
718
The I2C interface is an option. Please note the following points when using this optional function.
1. Notify your Hitachi sales representative that you will be using an optional function.
2. With mask ROM versions, optional functions can be used if the product code includes the
letter W (e.g. HD6433437WF, HD6433434WTF).
3. The product code is the same for ZTAT versions, but please be sure to notify Hitachi if you are
going to use this optional function.
719
Appendix H Package Dimensions
Figure H.1 shows the dimensions of the FP-100B package. Figure H.2 shows the dimensions of
the TFP-100B package.
Unit: mm
16.0 ± 0.3
14
75
51
50
100
26
0.10
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
*0.17 ± 0.05
0.15 ± 0.04
2.70
25
0.08 M
1.0
0.12 +0.13
−0.12
1
*0.22 ± 0.05
0.20 ± 0.04
3.05 Max
0.5
16.0 ± 0.3
76
1.0
0° − 8°
0.5 ± 0.2
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
JEITA
Mass (reference value)
Figure H.1 Package Dimensions (FP-100B)
720
FP-100B
—
Conforms
1.2 g
Unit: mm
16.0 ± 0.2
14
75
51
50
0.5
16.0 ± 0.2
76
100
0.10
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
0.10 ± 0.10
1.0
1.00
0.08 M
*0.17 ± 0.05
0.15 ± 0.04
25
1.20 Max
26
1
*0.22 ± 0.05
0.20 ± 0.04
1.0
0° − 8°
0.5 ± 0.1
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
JEITA
Mass (reference value)
TFP-100B
—
Conforms
0.5 g
Figure H.2 Package Dimensions (TFP-100B)
721
722
H8/3437 Series Hardware Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, September 1994
7th Edition, March 2002
Published by:
Business Planning Division
Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by:
Technical Documentation Group
Hitachi Kodaira Semiconductor
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 1994. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.